Screaming Enigma's Profile

Joined: Feb 26, 2023 About Me: Letterboxd: https://letterboxd.com/screamingenigma/ Serializd: https://www.serializd.com/user/ScreamingEnigma/profile Musicboard: https://musicboard.app/screamingenigma

Filter By:
8.1
Overall Rating

I usually try to be as positive as I can with the books I read, and that may still be present a bit with what I'll say later in this review, but I just was not a huge fan of this. It pains me to say it, because I actually like Tini Howard and I know she's capable of good stories, but this was a miss for me. I don't even blame her either. I think her, along with a lot of DC writers right now, have been placed in a really weird position with the Knight Terrors event, in that they've been forced to pause their series for two months and either write a 2-issue tie-in or take a break and have someone else do it. While I do appreciate this different approach to the event then the other tie-ins I've read, I agree with what another user stated in their review, in that this took too long to get to the point (that being Harley feeling like she's not enough for the Justice League). The story was kind of all over the place and I wasn't really sure what the point was until it was outright stated in the end. It also doesn't help that Sherman's art was not the strongest. I would have given this a 5.0/10, but the backup really sealed the deal on this for me. I wasn't really sure what was happening throughout the story and I'm still not really sure what the whole point of it was. Along with the odd story, we had the art. While I can see Templesmith's art appealing to certain people, it just didn't sit right with me here and it was the most off-putting part of this entire book. All in all, there are certain ideas I like about this book, but the negative outweighs the positive, unfortunately. All I can do is hope that the next issue is able to bring this all together. The only reason I'm putting this on my Pull List here is because I read the current Harley Quinn series and this is the only content I'll have for that until September.

I just wasn't really into this one, unfortunately. While I didn't give this the same score as them, I still agree with a lot of what DerbyComics said in their review, so I would recommend you read that. As for what I can say about this, I just felt like Bronfman's dialogue was a bit too generic for my liking. It didn't really feel like any of the characters were truly authentic. The art was nice, but it too began to lose me a little as time went on. Also, I have to mention that this barely has anything to do with Gang War, despite it being listed on the checklist. I think I'll still check out the upcoming Jackpot & Black Cat series from Bronfman, but I'm not too hopeful about it after reading this, unfortunately.

This wasn't the worst Knight Terrors title, but I wasn't really into this all that much. The story felt very average to me. It wasn't BAD, but it wasn't really GOOD either. It just landed right in the middle for me. The art was solid here, but it wasn't enough to really change my opinion on this much. With that said, I think it's safe to rate this right in the middle at 5/10. The only reason I'm putting this on my Pull List here is because I read the current Titans series and I won't be getting any content from that until this is over.

Look, I've done my best to be positive with this crossover, as I've genuinely liked it thus far, despite some bumps in the road. However, this just really lost me. It's not even a bad book, in my opinion. I just found myself getting more bored as time went on. I think the start of this issue was solid and I actually enjoyed the relationship between Jason and Rose, aside from that weird "sex in the bushes" line from the latter. However, it just continued to get less and less interesting for me. I've been enjoying Rosenberg's Man Who Stopped Laughing series with Joker, but this was just not it.

Definitely one of the books of all time. Seriously, though, I just could not get invested in this one. Andrews & Lins's story was probably the best, but it felt a bit disjointed at times. As for Nocenti & Baldeón's, it felt even more disjointed than the previous one. Baldeón's art was solid, but Nocenti's story just felt super odd and strange. Even Schultz & Chang's story wasn't great. It certainly wasn't as interesting as their story in the last issue. I don't know, maybe it's because I'm reading this while a little tired, but I really struggled to get into this issue.

Maybe I'm being a little harsh here, but I didn't care too much for this. It was nice to see Silver Surfer in the first story, but I also felt like said story didn't really go anywhere. The second story with Satana is one of the main reasons my score wasn't just a 5.0/10, as I did find it enjoyable, especially the art. The final part of the third continuing story, however, was very "fine." Them deciding to be a team felt super rushed and it's something that especially annoys me in stories, whether comics or not.

This sort of...happened I guess? I don't know, I was never really all that into this book, but it's a little annoying that this, as Psycamorean stated in his review, was built up over the course of four issues...just for it to end in another series. It's not like it's ending in a one-shot, either. It's ending in a different X-book that's already been going on simultaneously. I'm not incredibly mad about it, since I'm reading both books, but it's still a little annoying. Aside from that, this was just not my favorite. I especially wasn't into the two-page spread where each team member gave their own monologues about Krakoa. It just felt a little forced and unnatural.

This was a fairly average final issue for this miniseries. While the Zagaria's art was solid, a lot of Sacks's scripts felt very basic and generic. I think he tried to give the characters their own unique personalities, but something just wasn't fully clicking there for me. Sometimes, it felt as though some of the characters I was reading were trying to talk like the characters they actually are, if that makes sense. There wasn't anything particularly BAD about this issue, but there wasn't anything really great or spectacular either. This was just very mediocre.

I feel like this was kind of a waste of an issue. Nothing really notable happened here, other than seeing Casey act weird throughout the issue. The first issue set up an interesting story that isn't really capitalized on or even really advanced here. Plus, I just wasn't feeling the art style like I was before. I'm really hoping things can get better with Issue 3, as this has the potential to be so much better than what this was.

I just was not feeling this one. Nicuolo's art is the highlight of this, though even that was a little weird at times and the last few pages were from different artists (who weren't bad by any means, but I'm not sure why they were there in the first place). As for the story from Williams, I just wasn't really invested this time around. We're halfway through this miniseries and I'm still not entirely sure what the point of it is currently.

The rest of this series has been slightly above average due to the fair amount of interest I had in the overall plot and because the art is solid. However, I would have to consider this the worst issue of the series, which especially sucks considering it's the final one. For whatever reason, this was kind of boring at times, especially in the final few pages. A lot of this felt thrown together as well, and it just didn't work all that well for me. It's not terrible, which is why I'm rating it what I am. However, this was definitely a weak ending for a "fine" miniseries.

I thought I would rate this about the same s the other five issues in the series, but this just ended things on a bit of a whimper for me, unfortunately. This was pretty average, as you can tell by my rating. I just felt like this was a wrap-up that felt a little rushed and weird.

Honestly, I don't fully know how to feel about this. This issue itself is "fine," but I wasn't super into the ending. Spoiler warning, but I'm not super into basically making Cypher Apocalypse, but yellow and also smaller. I don't know, hopefully it gives way to something good.

Not a bad story, but it left a bit to be desired for me. It's very much filler, but that's what I expected with the guest team of Joe Kelly & Terry Dodson. Although the story was a bit lacking, I did particularly enjoy some of Kelly's dialogue and comedic stuff. As for Dodson, that man can virtually do no wrong, in my opinion. As usual, his art was great.

This was fine, I guess. I'm having a bit of trouble getting interested in this. Ferreira's art is solid, but nothing incredible. As for Ireland, the story is purely "fine." I wouldn't call this a bad comic, because it's not. It's just that the stories of Morbius working with vampires to find a cure for his vampirism and Peter working with Misty Knight and Lizard aren't currently doing enough for me. "Morbin' time" being said in a canon Marvel book is the best thing about this, for me.

I, personally, don't think this was as bad as others believe it to be, but I can also see why a lot of people aren't fans of this. Either way, there was a fair amount of stuff I liked here, but this feels like it deviated away from the initial point of the crossover a bit. At the very least, the ending leaves me interested to see where both Batman and Catwoman will go next in their respective series.

I wouldn't call this a bad series, but I just couldn't really get into it, unfortunately. I felt like there was a little too much focus on the different gods for my liking. Furthermore, I just didn't care that much about whatever T'Challa was doing.

I'm just not the biggest fan of this storyline, unfortunately. I think it has an interesting concept, but the execution of it leaves a bit to be desired, unfortunately. It doesn't help that the logic of Selina suddenly working with Flamingo wasn't really clear to me. Maybe I missed something there, but I just wish this was coming together better.

I feel like the idea of this series is more interesting than the actual series itself. I think it's cool that this team gets to be the main one of a miniseries, but they also feel a little lifeless at the same time. Even the art isn't all that great here. The art in the first pew pages is pretty solid, but it goes downhill once the team travels to Moira's seventh life, in my opinion.

This one was just really weird, in my opinion. I wouldn't call this issue bad, but I also felt as though it was a bit too complicated for my liking. Don't get me wrong, I like and appreciate when a comic is complex, but this is a different level to the point where it's just confusing at times. I will say that I did enjoy Deodato Jr.'s art a good amount. I just wish Spurrier's story made a little more sense.

I wasn't incredibly looking forward to this after I felt very "meh" about Bronfman's one-shot for Jackpot. It wasn't bad, but it wasn't good either. While I would say this is an improvement on that book, this still isn't particularly great. I think this has a solid premise with the Obscura app and everything, but I just wish the writing and/or the execution of it all was more interesting; or just better? Even the art was a little hit-or-miss for me at times. As with any issue I rate in the "yellows", I hope this can improve with the next issue.

This is definitely and improvement upon the first issue, but I still didn't really care all that much about what was happening. I think the idea of Titans Tower having a spirit or life force of sorts is an interesting idea, but it's not something I would associate with the Titans. Moving back to the story itself, it was fine, but nothing special. I'm just glad that Knight Terrors is over and that we can get back to the regular line of books.

This miniseries continues to drop in quality for me, unfortunately. Bachs's art is good, but a lot of the dialogue from Barnes feels a bit generic. Plus, it doesn't help that I'm really losing interest in the overall story. Hopefully the next, and final, issue can make this all worth the read.

This wasn't a bad read or anything, but I was hoping for more from Luke Cage's first series in quite some time. Especially considering that his City of Fire miniseries a few years ago got cancelled before it even began. Either way, this was fine. I just wish it was written a bit better.

I wasn't feeling this as much as the previous two issues, though I will say that the new costumes for everyone at the end all look super cool and they're probably the best thing about this miniseries so far. I also just wanted to ask why would Kolvarr (the guy from The Children of Mhuruuk) hit the "s" in "dimension" like he would the "s" in "belongs?" He would be doing a "sh" sound during in the word, "dimension," so that doesn't really make sense to me unless there's a different way to pronounce "dimension" that I don't know about.

Another fine issue here. I did appreciate Sacks bringing us to the moment that really sent the story into motion, though. Other than that, I don't have much to say about this issue. One thought I had while reading this was that I need to hear Valtorr say "sisters," the exact way Sacks wrote it. So much "s." Also, why is there an extended "s" at the beginning of "shamans?" This is exactly like the "dimension" thing I brought up in my review of the previous issue.

DDJamesB summed this issue up pretty well in their review. Moon Knight is a very unique character in the Marvel Universe, but this story just feels very generic. There's some fun and interesting stuff in this issue, which raises my score a bit higher. However, this can feel very run-of-the-mill at times. I'm not sure why they had Hill step in for Marcelo Ferreira in the middle of the miniseries, but his art isn't bad by any means. It's not the greatest, but I wouldn't call it bad. Overall, while I wouldn't call this a bad issue, especially since I think it did have some cool moments, I still think this was closer to average than it was to great.

Carey's art was probably the best part of this issue aside from Cruz's great cover. When it comes to the story, I just wasn't all that interested in it. It's not bad or anything, but I'm having a little bit of difficulty finding a reason to care about these characters currently. I was intrigued by the sea monsters and everything, but I just feel like this book has the potential to be something more.

This wasn't as interesting to me as the first issue, unfortunately. I just wasn't all that into most of this, even though it wasn't even really bad. However, the best parts of this book came when Batman was on the page. Another brighter spot of this was the art, as I enjoyed it throughout. My main issue is that there isn't enough for me to latch on and care about here. Hopefully the team is able too change my mind as this goes on. Otherwise, I will purely be reading this because it has to do with Howard's Catwoman.

This is my first exposure to most of the characters of Strange Academy. What I got here wasn't my favorite, but it wasn't really bad, either. This felt more like something targeted more towards younger readers, but that doesn't make it particularly bad or anything. That sort of thing just isn't always my favorite. However, one thing I didn't like was the insertion of Spanish words for Germán. I'm a Hispanic, and I very much would like for more Hispanic characters to get more prominent roles in every form of media, including comics. That said, media like movies and television often have a strange (no pun intended) habit of forcing in Spanish words into a Hispanic character's dialogue to hammer home that said character is Hispanic. Now, I'm going to guess Older is Hispanic himself because of the little I've seen and heard about him. So, I'm not trying to say it's a "race thing" or whatever. It's just something that always annoys me, because it almost never sounds natural. I know I went on a rather long tangent about that, but I also want to point out that it didn't really alter my opinion of the book that much. I'm still gonna read this miniseries and hope it gets better from here.

I couldn't decide whether or not to give this a 5.5/10 or a 6.0/10, so I decided on the latter since I thought the art here was pretty good. The writing just isn't all that engaging to me, especially with Doom randomly showing up at the end. I appreciated the story of Germán dealing with finding out that Pia is a vampire, though I felt like it could have been handled a bit better as well.

I was never super into this series, and this issue didn't change my mind, unfortunately. This just felt a little too rushed for me and it doesn't help that I don't really think this was incredibly necessary the grand scheme of things. I understand that the kids played into Doctor Doom's plan in the main Blood Hunt miniseries, but the story here didn't really warrant the existence of this, in my opinion.

I hate to say this, but this series continues to drop in quality for me. I saw someone say this about this issue somewhere else and I completely agree, in that there is so much banter between the team members. Look, I couldn't care less if there's banter between characters and I think that when it's done well it's done well. However, what we get here feels generic and somewhat lifeless. What makes me rate this a 6/10 instead of something lower is because the art is solid and the story throughout this issue is able to maintain a fair level of interest. However, that interest is fading.

I basically feel the same way as I did with the previous issue, so you can read my review of that if you're interested. I will say there isn't as much banter here, though. However, one thing that really stuck out and annoyed me was when Dick says there are situations happening all over the country and then precedes to list three places, two of which are in the same state. He lists Los Angeles, San Francisco, and Gotham. I'm not sure where Gotham is supposed to be located, but the first two are literally both well-known cities in California. I feel like there are various different places he could have said instead. For example, Dallas, Chicago, or Miami are all good examples of this. Nonetheless, I rate this a bit above average due to the fact that I find the overall story kind of interesting. The dialogue just needs some work.

While not, technically, a bad series, this has dropped right back down in quality for me. The banter I’ve mentioned in my reviews for previous issues has become more prominent here, which can be distracting at times. When it’s done well, it’s done well. However, Scott does it so much and it doesn’t help that it just feels basic at times. Luis’s art is solid here, but it doesn’t fully save the weaker script. One of the saving graces of this miniseries has been the intrigue created by the overall plot, but even that’s began to fade. I can only hope that this team can bring everything together going into the final issue.

I decided to give this a try after reading the previous Titans United series, even though I wasn't the biggest fan of it. As far as Bloodpact goes, this very much reminds me of the first series, in that overall story is the best part of it, if that makes sense. What I mean is that the writing is not the best and the art is solid, but the main selling point for me is the fact that the story, seemingly an alternate universe/timeline in this case, intrigues me. All I can hope is that this ends up being better than its predecessor.

This doesn't do much more for me than the previous issue, unfortunately. This alternate universe/timeline as a whole interests me, but the story isn't written well enough to make it all that good, in my opinion. I did like Dick as Batman and Starfire showing up at the end, though. Plus, the art is still solid.

There was some fun action here, but I was really struggling to find something to latch onto here. I don't know. It doesn't help that I knew next to nothing about Union Jack before reading this, and I didn't have much interest in him. Hopefully the next issue can close things out strongly.

I liked this more than some people, but it's not great. I was hoping for more from this debut, especially with the rise of Yelena's popularity a bit from being in Black Widow and Hawkeye in the MCU. However, the humor this felt a little forced at times, with one example being Mr. Best's daughter pointing out how nicely Yelena tied the knots. I also felt a bit indifferent towards the art. It was good in some places and not so good in others. What's keeping me around for Issue 2 is the story itself, as I think it's fairly solid. Hopefully the next issue is able to fix, what I believed to be, the mistakes that were present here.

I love Joshua Cassara's cover for this issue. I wish I could say the same about Brown's interiors. Man, it was even worse in this issue. His art was "fine" in the last issue, but it just works even less here. What annoyed me, particularly, was the amount of lines he used to create shadows on the faces of the characters. It just did not look good. Even Percy's story wasn't all that great. I initially liked the amount of focus we were getting on Kid Omega, but it just hasn't been working out how I had hoped. Hopefully this series can get back on track sooner rather than later, as I was enjoying this series a lot more before these last few issues.

Still not INCREDIBLY into this book, unfortunately. I kind of felt like this was a weird way to take this story when you only have four issues to do the tournament. Well, kind of only three issues considering that you have to set the whole thing up in the first issue. Anyways, yeah, this was fine. It's not bad or anything, but it's also not something I see myself re-reading unless things really pick up in the second half.

This isn't a BAD book, but I'm really excited to read the last issue so I can be done with it. I mainly picked this up because I thought it might have some sort of influence over the From the Ashes relaunch with the X-Men titles, whether it's on one title or multiple. So far, this has been a very "fine" book. Nothing really extraordinary has happened, but nothing incredibly dumb has happened either. I'm just struggling to care as much as I'd like to.

While I did, personally, enjoy this a bit more than the first part, it still was kinda average. One thing I wasn't a huge fan of was the dialogue during the fights. Maybe it's just an issue I, alone, experienced, but I felt as though it was a bit difficult to figure out what was going on during the action sequences, while also reading what was being said. As I stated in my review of the previous issue (#19/#914), this is issue also very much filler, which was to be expected with the guest creative team. On the other hand, this issue did get me more excited for one thing in particular. That being the relationship between Peter and Felicia. I've always preferred the two of them together as opposed to MJ or Gwen. I'm hoping that it's something that goes much farther than these two issues. However, I also wouldn't be surprised if it ends so they can go back to Peter & Mary Jane. Fingers crossed Peter and Felecia are long-term!

A very science-heavy issue here. This advanced the story a bit from the previous issue just enough to keep my interest. I’m not quite sure how I feel about the villain and the overall plot so far. After waiting nearly a year for this, it doesn’t feel quite as “epic” as I had expected. Hopefully it will pick up with the next few issues, but this has yet to live up to the long wait thus far. This isn’t to say that this issue wasn’t good, because it was still a fairly solid issue. The whole “god/deity” storyline isn’t what I was expecting, but it’s still enjoyable and I did enjoy seeing Mary Jane’s husband show up in this new world and seeing the spider device Peter’s holding in the first pages of Issue 1 finally show up. All in all, this was a solid issue, but I really hope the story starts to pick up very soon.

Gang War was a bit of a disappointment, but I didn't hate this. I will say that I did like the way this ended, referring to Tombstone's closing words here. I hope this means there's still more story for him, as his storyline with Peter back in this run's first arc was the best this series has consistently been.

Not a bad read, but also a weird way to continue from ASM #49. As Psycamorean and Afre pointed out in their, respective, reviews, Peter's attitude towards the vampires is odd. In the aforementioned ASM #49, we saw an interesting development of Peter realizing that the vampires he's facing used to be normal humans, thus causing him to become more careful when fighting them. However, that seems to be largely ignored here. I don't know if that was a miscommunication between anyone, but it was just weird here. Aside from that, this was a solid story, but nothing all that special. It didn't help that I'm not the biggest fan of Ferreira's art. Hopefully things pick up a bit with the next issue.

A fine finale. Everything went back to normal, as predicted. I'm not really sure how I feel about Ireland writing the main Amazing Spider-Man book with Joe Kelly after Zeb Wells wraps up, but I'm hoping she does nothing but improve.

I was really hoping for a lot more here. I decided to pick this up since I wanted to read something Iceman/Bobby Drake. While I think I'll end up seeing the miniseries through since it's only five issues, there isn't a lot here to get me interested. I like Romeo bringing Bobby back and the tension they now have, but I thought it was super weird that Bobby kissed some random guy he saved from Orchis. If Bobby and Romeo have an open relationship, then it makes sense. However, that isn't outright stated here or even hinted at to my knowledge. The overall plot of this isn't enough to fully sell me on this either. I don't know, it just felt like it was missing that something to kick it into the next gear. I will say that I thought Carratù's art was pretty good and it might have been the best part of this book.

Not terrible by any means, but a bit disappointing considering this has been an almost 70-issue run. This is a mixed bag of good moments and bad moments. A lot of this felt a bit rushed, even Robbie's "death." The last few pages felt like everyone's stories being "wrapped up" (until we get MacKay's new run), but it just didn't feel as satisfying as it had the potential to be. However, I'm very glad Robbie isn't truly dead and I really hope we can get more of him in a book very soon, as he's been one of my favorite characters in Aaron's Avengers.

This series has been very hit-or-miss for me so far. This latest crossover storyline with the main Avengers title has been kind of "whatever." I enjoyed the letter from one of the Steve's this issue, but there hasn't been enough build for that character to really make me care. Yes, I feel for him and his situation, but, to my knowledge, this is the first issue we've really met him. The same goes for the other Steve and his moment with the Mjolnir. On the other hand, the action in this book was solid and I enjoyed seeing the characters trying to take down the literal Planet Doom. Aaron's Avengers run is something I've really enjoyed since the start, so I hope he can bring everything together into a good conclusion.

Man, I don't know. For the most part, I've really enjoyed Zdarsky's work on this title. However, for whatever reason, this just didn't work for me all that well. I don't think it's a bad book, but it's not my favorite either. Aside from the odd placement of this storyline, I also found it, personally, a little hard to follow at times. Camuncoli had some pretty solid art, though. I liked looking at the pages Sorrentino did, but I also don't particularly understand their purpose. All things considered, this was definitely the weakest issue of Zdarsky's run thus far and I really hope this is just a minor bump in the road.

I was a fan of this event, but this didn't hit as well as everything that came before it. While the follow-up on certain aspects of Fear State is appreciated, this did feel kind of unnecessary. Tynion writes a solid conversation between Bruce and Jonathan, but I just feel like we didn't need this. I feel like a few pages could have been added to Batman 117 to include the stuff with Miracle Molly, Amanda Waller, Peacekeeper-01, Poison Ivy, and Clownhunter. It also doesn't help that there were five different artists here. I actually did some math and figured out that it averaged out to 6 pages per artist. However, the artist who got the bulk of the 30 pages was Federici, who did 16. Duce & Hairsine did 4, while Benjamin and March did 3. I think they either should have had one artist do the stuff with Bruce and Jonathan, while another does the other scenes, or they should have just had one artist throughout. Nonetheless, this set up some fairly interesting ideas for the future, but didn't add to the Fear State event as a whole all that much.

I wish I was more into this, like everyone else seems to be. For whatever reason, it was a bit difficult for me to get invested in what was happening here. Maybe it was because I was a bit tired while reading this, I don't know. If anything, Karami's art was the best part of this, as I thought it was pretty good throughout.

An improvement over the last issue, but I'm still not incredibly into this. The first story of the bunch was solid, though I do feel like more could have been done there. I understand that there isn't a lot of room in one book for three different stories, but I also think I was left unfulfilled, if that makes sense. As for the second story, I don't really know what to think about it, honestly. I mean, I thought it was kind of a weird story, in a good and cool way. Simultaneously, though, it felt like it didn't neatly fit in with Blood Hunt. Lastly, the third part of the continuing story from Schultz just didn't really do much for me. Hopefully that side of things can close out strongly with the next issue.

Out of the two ongoing stories here, the one I'm mainly interested in is Selina's. I like Eiko and Dario, but what they're doing in this issue wasn't that interesting to me. However, Selina teaching the women in prison was the main thing I enjoyed here. There wasn't much special here, but there was enough to keep me interested and keep me reading. Hopefully Eiko & Dario's story picks up within the next few issues, and I'm intrigued to see what comes next for Selina and the women she's training.

While this was a bit of a rushed ending to this prison storyline, I'm not really mad about it since I wasn't really feeling it all that much in the first place. It was enjoyable, but not up to the standards set by Howard's first arc on this title. It feels like a prison break should have been a bigger deal, but we don't really see it here until we get like a couple pages towards the end of the issue. Also, I'm not really sure why Selina trusts anyone there enough to reveal she's Catwoman, but whatever. The stuff with Eiko and Dario was minimal this time, but I think that's for the best. I just hope that, with the prison storyline out of the way, we can get back to the quality this series was at when Howard initially took over.

While this still isn't my favorite issue of the run or anything, I also don't hate it like others seem to. I think the premise is very interesting, but it just needs better execution. I know Howard is a fully capable writer, but this just isn't hitting like the series has in the past. Hopefully things pick up in the next issue.

I liked this more than the second issue, but I'm still not all that invested in this. I did find the art better this time around and I also thought the story was a bit more coherent. However, it's still just not coming together in an incredibly effective way, in my opinion.

A fairly solid debut issue here, but this also, unfortunately, didn't do a whole lot to get me excited for the remaining two issues. I don't think there's really much for me to about this sone. This wasn't bad or anything and I'll be checking out the rest of the miniseries since it's part of Gang War, but I just hope things get more interesting with Issue #2.

This wasn't really a bad miniseries or anything, but I just had trouble getting interested in what was going on. That could be attributed to the fact that I haven't really kept up with Shang-Chi at all recently, but I just didn't find this was compelling as I think it could have been.

This wasn’t bad by any means, but just wasn’t quite as good as the previous two issues, in my opinion. There wasn’t anything particularly bad here at all, it just felt a little bit like a step below the past two issues. Nonetheless, I’m still interested to see what comes next. Barry trying to turn back time to stop the invasion and bring Wally back is an interesting turn, as I thought Wally wasn’t actually dead. Thunderheart is a pretty cool name for Irey, but the cover had me thinking she was getting a new suit this issue (Maybe in the next few issues?). As for the ending, I don’t, personally, care that much for Jay Garrick, so it didn’t resonate with me much. All in all, Flash comes out with a solid issue once again and I’m intrigued to see how the current storyline continues.

This was a solid collection of supplemental stories. The first and third stories were good, the second was kind of average for me, and the fourth was solid. I appreciated the first story giving a bit of context for the villain of the main story, and it increased my interested a bit. The second story just didn't have anything notable for me, personally. The third was fun, particularly with the commentary from the aliens/robots as they looked through the building, along with Godspeed taking them out. As the for the final story, most of it was very average, but the final few pages brought it up a little bit for me. I don't know much about the two characters, but the chemistry wasn't bad and I wouldn't mind reading a little more on them. Overall, this was certainly a skippable issue, but not one I would recommend against reading if someone wanted the full picture of this story.

I knew Spurrier's direction for Wally was going to be different than what we were getting before with Jeremy Adams, but I have to say I'm a bit disappointed with this one. I like a good amount of the concepts and ideas brought to the table here, but it felt like we were jumping around a lot in this issue, which could possibly be from Spurrier trying to establish a bunch of things for this run at once. Flash is, of course, a speedster, but I think things needed to be slowed down here a bit for this to work better. The content we got in this issue could have been spread out across at least two issues. As for the art, I thought it was pretty solid. It works better in some places than others, but it was good overall. All things considered, while I wasn't the biggest fan of this issue, I do think it has potential to become better and I was, if anything, fairly interesting. I'll keep reading for now and hope it does nothing but improve.

I don't really know what happened after the last issue was my favorite so far. This was just weird and, kind of, confusing. The stuff with Linda is interesting, but the execution of it all leaves a bit to be desired, in my opinion.

This one started off pretty weird with Barry and Lina. I see how Linda's disconnections could be interesting, but I feel that Spurrier still isn't executing it in the best way. This issue only really picked up for me when the Speed Force situation was being explained to Max and Bart. It also doesn't help that I wasn't super into Pérez's art, especially with how contrasting it is to Mike Deodato Jr.'s.

Another issue where things picked up a bit for me towards the end. I think the idea of speedsters being harmful purely by using their abilities can be a super interesting idea, but Spurrier's execution of this series just hasn't been that great, in my opinion. It feels like the story meanders around with odd interactions before getting to the point and actually having progression towards the end.

More interesting things with odd execution here, in my opinion. I'm also not the biggest fan of Pérez's art here either, unfortunately. I'm really missing Mike Deodato Jr.'s art, as I did feel like it fit with the series much better.

This was a lot like the rest of the series, in that there was a good chunk of interesting ideas with potential that end up having execution that leaves something to be desired. I'm also almost never super into the art changing in the middle of an issue, but I do think this did a solid job with it.

Yeah, I just wasn't super into this one, unfortunately. This felt like it was created just for the sake of doing a Ghost Rider one-shot that was kind of Halloween-themed. It's advertised to lay the foundation for the future of Ghost Rider, and the ending suggests that The Hood is going to play a fairly large role in said future. I appreciate Hood getting some use, but I also didn't find him all that interesting here. Hopefully that changes in his future appearances.

I absolutely love the cover for this issue, but what we got inside was a big of a disappointment. This series was continuously picking up steam for me, but it really came crashing down here. This isn't even a bad issue, but it's not great, especially compared to the rest of the series thus far. It doesn't help that I'm not a big fan of art randomly changing in the middle of an issue. Segovia's art is noticeably better than Duce's here, in my opinion, although neither give us bad art. The writing is my main gripe with this issue. On paper, this should be a good issue. However, as Psycamorean stated in his review, there isn't much reason for me to care about what's happening here. With everything here in mind, I really hope this is just a bump in the road for this series and not a sign of things to come.

I feel very similarly about this issue to how I felt with the previous. We get a killer cover from Gerardo Zaffino and a "fine" read inside. I thought this was a little more interesting than Issue 3, but it's not enough for me to bump my rating to a 7/10. I just hope that, with Fear State wrapping up, this title can get a little more focused and get back on track to the potential it was showing and capitalizing on with Issues #0-2.

The main story this time around was far better than the first issue. Now that we had gotten to the point, Howard was able to tell a much more interesting story about Harley's place in the world and her being reminded to just be herself. The art still wasn't the best, but it was fine and it didn't really bother me all that much. As for the backup, it was a little bit of an improvement over the last one, but not my much. My biggest gripe with it in Issue 1 was Ben Templesmith's art. While I feel as though Holden's art is either trying to be similar to that style or it just is similar to it, it's not as bad (I've never seen Holden's art at the time of this writing, so I'm not sure of which option is falls under). I still wasn't entirely certain of what was going on in this story, but it wasn't as confusing as the first one. Overall, this issue as a whole was a significant improvement over Issue 1, but I think it could have been a lot better.

This was...interesting. I initially got into this book because David Nakayama was doing the covers and I thought the team looked super cool. However, I was a bit disappointed by what we got inside. The story itself is certainly intriguing and I thought Zagaria had some solid art, but the writing of the dialogue from Sacks wasn't my favorite. This is only five issues, so it's not a big commitment, or anything, but it's a little disheartening at the same time with the potential I think this lineup has.

I was originally going to give this a 6/10, but I'll give it an extra 0.5 point just because Sacks did a solid job of writing Doom. It wasn't the absolute best, but it was far from bad. Aside from that, this was just fine. I am still interested in the story itself, but I'm starting to dislike the way Sacks writes the dialogue for the characters. Maybe not dislike necessarily, but it's not great.

Not bad whatsoever, but not as good as the debut issue, in my opinion. I don't know, this one just didn't grip me like the previous one. Hopefully the next issue gets things back on track. Also, in reference to my review of the previous issue, it seems as though this is going to be an episodic series, maybe with a slight overarching plot.

I think, despite my low amount of interest in the team itself, that this series has a lot of potential. However, it's just not realized fully here, at least not yet. I didn't hate this whatsoever, but I didn't really love it either. I like what I've read so far from Kelly & Lanzing, so I'll stay on board for a bit and hope that things pick up sooner rather than later.

I'll start this review by saying the primary reason I'm reading this series is because it'll end up tying-in with Howard's Catwoman series, which we saw hints of here towards the end. As for the issue itself, I thought it was solid. This could be partially attributed to the fact that I'm not that into Punchline as a character to start with, but I wasn't as into this as I would have hoped, considering that I've enjoyed the aforementioned Catwoman run. I think the story here has potential and, while it does intrigue me, I think this just needs more compelling characters. Either way, I'll still read all six issues since it has to do with Howard's Catwoman.

I enjoyed this more than Issue 2, but it's still not great, in my opinion. I think Punchline was actually a character I could start to get behind here, but I need a little more to be fully sold on her. As for the rest of the book, it was fine. It wasn't anything special, but it wasn't a bad book either.

This just wasn't as interesting or entertaining as the first issue, unfortunately. Niculo's art continues to be the strongest part of this book for me, but the writing was just a little lacking this time around. The story itself is fairly interesting, but I'm not a fan of the current slang used in the book. Don't get me wrong, I'm a relatively young person and I know there are many people who say these things, but it's felt a bit forced in the last issue and in this one as well.

This book has gotten a little more confusing for me, personally. The whole time-jump thing with Thor's sister isn't my favorite, and Doom's story with Hela didn't give me much to get excited about. Speaking of Doom, I really wished Marvel hadn't advertised this the way they did with the cover and the description, because Doom and Thor don't even come face-to-face in this book. I really hope things pick up with the next issue.

Man, this just didn't do it for me. It wasn't bad, don't get me wrong, but it's just really unfortunate how this series ended. Grønbekk's run on this title started nicely and then declined, but started to go back up in quality for me until this issue. This felt a little disconnected from the previous few issues. It comes across like it's supposed to be the conclusion of this big story, but nothing here made it actually feel that way. I don't put too much blame on Grønbekk, however. She was given a tough task of having to suddenly write and finish this series after Donny Cates's personal issues (which I don't fault him for whatsoever), and she did what she could. Hopefully Immortal Thor brings the character back to having a great quality series. Despite me not caring too much for the return of a more classic costume, I'm still giving it a shot. I've liked what I've read from Al Ewing so far and I've heard nothing but great things about his Immortal Hulk.

I gave the first issue the benefit of the doubt when it came to its dialogue, but it was just not working for me all that much here. It's not even that bad, but it can feel very generic at times, if that makes sense. The art continues to be solid, but it's also not quite as good as it was in Issue 1. Hopefully things can pick up in Issue 3.

This was a step-up from the previous two issues, but it's still not a great book. I enjoyed Raven and Connor going through different memories and I liked that there wasn't as much banter between the team members here. However, the story does feel kind of average and the art is just solid, but nothing spectacular. I just hope this team can continue to turn things around as we head into the final two issues of this miniseries.

I liked this a bit better than the first two issues, but it's still not great, unfortunately. Aside from me just, personally, liking this more than Issues 1 & 2, I still feel generally the same about this, so you can read my reviews on those issues to see how I feel. For whatever reason, this just worked a little better for me this time around.

I continue to feel the same way as I do with the first half of this miniseries. The dialogue is fine, the art is solid, and the alternate universe/timeline is interesting. There are some intriguing ideas here, but I don't think they're fully capitalized on in order to make a great story.

I wish I had something new to say about this miniseries with the penultimate issue, but I really don't. You can read my reviews of the previous four issues to know how I feel about this series. I hope that this can somewhat realize the potential it's had all along to be a better story, but I'm pretty sure I'll be rating the next and final issue around the same as this and the ones that came before it.

Wow, that was certainly something. I tried to like it more than I did, honestly. However, the Amazo robot constantly quoting Charles Dickens for no apparent reason was just super weird, and it was especially so considering that none of the other characters really responded to what they were saying half the time. Daniel was a fine fill-in artist, but Sampere might have made this a little better for me. Aside from that, the backup story was fun, as per usual. I've really liked Ortega's art each time.

I think I may have liked this more had Noto not done the art. I know that sounds crazy without context, but Kalaoui really nailed it in their review. Noto's art works fantastically for stories that more less action-heavy and more character-driven. While we did get some nice character moments for Synch and Talon, there was a good chunk of this that was heroes fighting Nimrod. One example of Noto's art not fitting is when Nimrod is hit by the truck. It just looks a little off in his style. Either way, the story from Duggan was solid, but nothing spectacular.

I agree with what two other users stated in their, respective, reviews, in that this is probably an issue you can skip. Listen, this was a fairly enjoyable book and everything, but nothing really felt that important here. Yes, we see more Apocalypse for the first time since he left to Amenth at the end of X of Swords back in 2020, but it doesn't really feel like his appearance here mattered that much. One other thing about this issue was the fact that I almost forgot three different artists worked on this. It wasn't until one of the pages towards the end that I noticed two drawings of Apocalypse looked different. I'm not really a fan of artists changing in the middle of an issue, and this was no different. I can understand it when it changes depending on the location or time period, but this was straight-up out of nowhere in this issue. It doesn't help that this book alternates between time periods already, so the opportunity as there.

This was fine. It wasn't particularly bad by any means, but this just didn't really have a whole lot for me to latch onto. I appreciated the fact that this leaned into Jubilee's past as a vampire and that this dealt with her empathy for the vampires she's forced to fight, but, at the same time, something just felt off. Maybe it felt surface level? I don't know if I'm using that term correctly, but that's how I can describe how I felt about it currently.

This was fine for what it was. The art was solid, and I actually think Hervas could be a better fill-in artist for Phillip Kennedy Johnson's current Incredible Hulk run than Danny Earls. As for Allen, this is the first time I've read something from her and I think she has potential. Hopefully she does nothing but improve going forward.

Not really my favorite, unfortunately. It's a shame that a good chunk of the FoHoX comics have been a relatively weak, in my opinion, considering this whole era started so strong. Either way, for me, this is another case of a lot being crammed into one issue. I don't really have much more to say on that. I just hope the ending of all this ends up being good.

I might have scored this a little bit higher if the art was better. Diaz's art definitely feels very 90's here, which is in line with the logo. However, I was surprised to find that this was so tied in with Krakoa. I'm not upset about that, I'm just a little caught off-guard. Anyways, yeah, Diaz's art was just a bit rough in certain spots. Other than that, Foxe's story was solid. This issue was just so introductory, which I understand it's supposed to be. There just wasn't as much for me to latch onto and get excited about as I would have liked. That said, I am fairly interested to see how this plays out and what the endgame of this all is, especially with it starting after the Krakoa Era ends, but wrapping up by the time From the Ashes has started.

Fine for what it was, but I thought it was super weird that this just cut to Steve Trevor before the fight with the Amazon robot was done. I understand that it's implied that Billy, Mary, and Black Adam were all captured, but I just felt that it could have been executed better. I don't know.

A solid first issue to the arc that many have been waiting for, myself included. I've seen the upcoming villain in covers that have been released, but I thought he was a new character. As another user said in their review, I had to look Rabin up to find out who he was. However, I'm not going to let that change my score. This issue had just enough for me to want to find out more, and it helps that I've been wondering what "Peter did" since that whole aspect was first brought up in a promo for the first issue of the series. While this was still a good issue, I'm hoping things pick up a little bit in #22.

I'll start this off by saying that this isn't nearly as bad as some people will have you believe. While I would say this story has been a bit disappointing after initially introducing the question of what Peter did about a year ago at this point. That's not to say this is bad, though, because it's not, in my opinion. Yes, this isn't the best book by any means. However, the stuff in the beginning with Peter and the Fantastic Four was done well. One of this story's strengths has been capturing Peter's desperation to get back to Mary Jane. The ending also gives a solid explanation of how Mary Jane's children came about, also. All in all, solid stuff.

The ongoing story here is good and entertaining, but I can't help but agree with the criticisms about this issue surrounding Kamala's death in Issue 26. In Issue 27, we really felt the fallout of her death and how it was impacting Peter. In the last issue and in this one, her death is completely ignored and Peter is back to normal. We don't see that more aggressive and frustrated side of him we saw two issues ago. I was reading through Afre's review and, while I do rate this higher than them, they bring up a lot of points that I agree with. Read their review for said points, as I won't bring them up directly here. Aside from all of that, I do actually enjoy the story here with Norman and Otto. I'm looking forward to seeing how this progresses, especially with new Superior Spider-Man content announced for sometime in the near future.

I'll start this review by saying that, much like a few other people I've seen reviews from, the placement of this feels kind of odd. This is supposed to follow up on events from Dark Web, which we haven't really gotten much on since the initial storyline ended with Issue #18 (AKA late-January of this year). With that in mind, I don't necessarily have a big problem with it. I just think it's a bit weird. Moving on, while not the best issue this series has seen, it's still a fun, solid read. I don't love the character, but I think I enjoy Rek-Rap more than most. I also am interested by the Repossesor's role in this story, especially after realizing who he actually is (The debt collector, Gus, first seen in the opening arc of this series). Plus, while I'll always miss Patrick Gleason doing interiors, I enjoy McGuinness' art here and I completely agree with what Derby stated in their review, in that his art is a great fit for this story.

I thought this was a pretty solid issue with some not great art. The story from Wells remains fairly interesting, though I also feel it's not at the heights it was when this storyline first started. As for Romita Jr.'s art, I just really wasn't feeling it this time around. I haven't been the biggest fan of this art in this run in general, but this was especially not good in certain spots for me, with one particular example being when Spider-Man and She-Hulk go off the top of the building. I think I may have rated this a 7.5/10 had it not been for the art we got here.

Gang War is still not as good as I was hoping for, but this isn't a bad issue or anything. Romita's art is very hit-or-miss again here. I do think I'm one of the few who doesn't think Beetle's current costume isn't ugly, but I also wish it was better. As for Wells's writing, though, I do think it's good overall. I just wish I was a little more invested in what's going on.

Man, I was just talking about how much I was enjoying this book again with the last issue. Don't get me wrong here, this wasn't a bad issue by any means, but it's also definitely a step down from #45, in my opinion. I liked the stuff with Sandman and I'm interested to see where that goes, but I also get the feeling that it's a storyline that won't get revisited for like ten more issues or something. We already have the Chasm & Hallows' Eve two-issue arc after this, followed by a Blood Hunt tie-in issue (for some reason), and then the Green Goblin story starting with #50. Hopefully all of that stuff is good, but I just wish this title would stop introducing things that won't get any follow-up or even be mentioned for a while.

A solid issue for the midway point of this miniseries. Yes, it's a bit of a step down from the previous issue, but I still enjoyed it more than Issue 1. Some of the dialogue felt a little generic, something I mentioned in my review of Issue 2, but the story itself was entertaining enough and it was far from bad or anything. Hopefully Spider-Man showing up in the next issue helps to bring up the quality of this run.

Solid stuff from Aaron and Garrón here. As a reader of this series from the beginning, I can only hope for a grand conclusion. While I haven't been the biggest fan of this storyline, I do appreciate the setup in the final pages. As a fan of the majority of this series, I hope the final bits of this current arc can deliver.

I wanted to like this more than I did. However, the art is the main thing holding this back for me. In my eyes, the art is pretty inconsistent. We do not need multiple artists on one issue and this is a prime example of that. The stuff with Nightwing looks fan-made to me and not in a good way. It’s not the worst art I’ve ever seen or anything, but it’s not something I want to look at when reading a professional DC comic. The best art comes from my favorite section of the book, in which Dick talks about Bruce’s history with Ghost-Maker. Everything else felt solid-to-poor. I think the main takeaway from this is that you only need one artist on an issue at a time.

I think this was a step-up from the previous issue, but there's still a lot to be desired here, unfortunately. I still don't really get why we're getting this story at this point in the series instead of it just being a separate limited series or something. However, the story itself also is still a bit confusing and I'm not sure how I feel about Sorrentino's art suddenly becoming hyperrealistic in certain places and not others. It's great art, don't get me wrong, but it's just a bit strange to me.

I'm probably giving this a higher score than I should, given that this whole storyline was just odd any way you slice it, but there were certain moments here I enjoyed. Firstly, I liked that Jim had a lot of time to shine here. Secondly, I actually liked the ending of this. Yes, it doesn't really give us any explanation as to what the point of all this was and it doesn't even really feel like the ending to a story in general, but I still, personally, thought it was a cool moment. Hopefully this series can get back on track with the next arc's return to the present.

A bit of a harsh decline in quality following how good I thought the last issue was. This was fun for what it was, but it also wasn't anything spectacular. I wasn't super into the backup story, either. I wouldn't call it bad, but I was definitely hoping to be done with it as soon as I could so I could continue reading through the event.

I don't think this is as bad as some people have been making it out to be. Gotham War hasn't been the greatest event thus far, but it's not absolute garbage. Sure, this may not have necessarily been a must-read or anything, but this is a solid read for Red Hood fans and even for those reading the current Joker series that Rosenberg's been writing (which is another series that falls even more under "not as bad as some people make it out to be). Either way, while not the strongest issue of the Gotham War crossover, I still thought this was an enjoyable issue.

I don't know what happened here. I was really enjoying the main story with Ghost-Maker, Clownhunter, and Phantom-One, but this just didn't hit for me like the previous four issues. Not to say I didn't enjoy it, because I did, but it was just a bit of a step down for me. It doesn't help that I have a smaller amount of investment for a lot of the side characters in this book, which I'm not quite sure is the fault of Ed Brisson or the fault of DC for trying to pack all of these characters into one book and make them all focused on at once.

While I do believe this is slightly more focused than the previous arc, I'm not as interested in this storyline with Professor Pyg than I was with the Phantom-One and his team. However, there were some bright spots, including the pages with Ghost-Maker and El Gaucho. Hopefully this picks up as things progress, because I still feel that his book as great potential.

I felt as that, for the conclusion of an 8-issue arc, this could have been a lot better. Especially considering how good the first few issues of it were. However, this was probably the worst issue of the series, unfortunately. Unlike certain other readers, I didn't think this was a bad book. Though, I felt like Ridley just dropped the ball a bit here. I think he set up a super intriguing story dealing with power, trust, and politics, only for it to lead to a generic battle with a bit of an underwhelming ending, in my opinion.

Yeah, I liked how Captain America was written here even less than the last two issues. I think I can see what Ridley is trying to do, but I just don't think it works with Steve's character, personally. It's a shame, as I started out really enjoying this series. This is a solid book and story overall, but Ridley just leaves a bit to be desired.

This story has not been the most interesting to me, unfortunately. However, this issue wasn't bad. T'Challa was the main reason this book had my interest, as the other characters didn't really do much for me (aside from Namor, but his most enjoyable moment for me was him laughing his ass off when T'Challa was being told he's no longer a citizen). Overall, I hope Ridley puts out something just a bit better for the next issue, as it will be the last one until the new run.

A solid ending for this series. A lot of the ideas established here are certainly interesting when it comes to seeing how they'll play out in Eve L. Ewing's upcoming run, but there was just more to be desired here and from this run as a whole. A lot of this run had intriguing ideas without the best execution. Nonetheless, this issue gives Ridley's 15-issue run a solid finale.

I've never read anything by Eaton before, so I was interested to see how this ended up. After reading, I can say that Eaton really has potential, but I don't think she's really defined her writing style, in terms of comics, quite yet. This doesn't feel particularly unique when it comes to the dialogue, which can feel a little overwritten at points, actually. Despite that, this is still a solid read. I liked a good amount of what we got here, especially the art. The first time I remember seeing Karami's work was in Issue 5 of Saladin Ahmed's current Daredevil run, and I absolutely loved it. I'm glad to see his art was really good here, as well, and it's great to hear he'll be doing the other two issues of this. Overall, this was a solid book that definitely has the potential to become better as it continues.

A really quick issue and I don't think it worked as well here as I would have liked. It felt like certain moments should have gone on for longer, such as the scene with Draven and Rotha. I felt like I didn't have enough time to really digest that. I just wish this had a little more substance to it, especially with it being the final issue before Hill does the Midnight Sons tie-in series for Blood Hunt. I wonder if that's the new Blade series referenced in the back of the book, or if Marvel is doing another Blade series once said Midnight Sons book is wrapped up.

I'm not super into anthologies, but I thought I'd give this a chance since I'm going to be reading everything else for Blood Hunt. Russell & Quinn's story with Hawkeye was fun, but nothing all that special. Quinn's art was super clean throughout, but I felt like Russell's story was lacking something. It was good overall, though. Cage & Garrón's story was my favorite of the three. It wasn't incredible or anything, but it had good action while also developing the relationship between Man-Wolf and Jonah as much as it could in the amount of pages it had. Finally, we have Schultz & Chang. Unfortunately, this was the one I liked the least of the bunch. I, personally, just found it a little more difficult to get invested in it. Dagger's inner-monologue on the first couple of pages also wasn't my favorite. It looks like this team will be returning in the next issue, so I hope things pick up a little bit there. Overall, this was a solid read that had some bright spots and some more "eh" spots, but nothing bad or anything.

I thought this was a fairly solid debut issue for this series all in all, but I do have certain gripes with it. Firstly, this was sort of an issue I had with the Graduation Day miniseries before this, but some of the dialogue here wasn't the best. I think part of it can be attributed to Trujillo wanting to introduce or re-introduce the characters that will be featured in the series going forward. However, there was some stuff I really liked, such as Jaime having to deal with the growing conflicts between humans and The Horizon or how the issue ended with Ted. All things considered, while I did feel like this was kind of a mixed bag for an issue that's primarily set-up, I do feel mostly positive on this one and I think the potential is there for this series to be good.

A bit of a step down in quality from the previous issue, but this still maintains my interest. A lot of the dialogue is somewhat generic, to me, especially from Jaime. Dynastes has some intrigue to her, but I think a little bit more could have been done to build that mystery here. Nonetheless, this was still an enjoyable read.

I wasn't sure what to expect from Grønbekk on Carnage. I don't particularly care for Carnage as a character, though the issues I've read (at the time of this writing) of his previous series were good. As for Grønbekk, she writes solid books, though I haven't been incredibly into her issues on the current Venom series with Al Ewing. What we get here is pretty much in line with everything else I've read form her, in that it's a solid story with potential to be more. Hopefully we see that potential realized as the story progresses.

A solid issue, but nothing spectacular. I don't really have all that much to say about this one. Everything inside was good and I thought the fight between Carnage and Anti-Venom was neat, but I wish I was a little more invested in this.

I think I would have liked this a lot more if it was on its own and not a part of the Symbiosis Necrosis crossover. I feel as though this started out continuing that storyline, but it ended up going in a different direction. I didn't dislike it on its own, but I was left a little confused as to how this was the end of a four-part story. The art was pretty good all throughout this, also.

I don't know, I just wasn't feeling this one as much as the past issues. I've been really enjoying Howard's Catwoman thus far, and this isn't to say this was really all that bad by any means, but this was the weakest issue so far. A lot of the prison stuff Selina goes through, while still fairly enjoyable, feels generic. While I did enjoy this for what it was, I hope we can get back to what made this book more entertaining sooner rather than later.

A bit of a step up from the previous issue. I’m still interested in Selina’s prison storyline the most out of the two ongoing stories, but Eiko & Dario’s was just a bit more interesting this go around (especially with Onyx getting involved). The interaction between all three over the phone was done well, and I’m hoping Eiko & Dario’s story continues to get better as times goes on. As for Selina, I enjoy seeing the relationship between her and the other prisoners develop and I’m interested to see what comes next with Regina now joining them.

I'm not a huge fan of everything here, but I am interested to see where the series goes from here in terms of the story with Federico and Roman. When Howard initially took over this title, I was really enjoying the story she was telling with Selina and the different crime families. I'm really hoping that this is the start of this series getting back to the quality of that initial storyline.

Here we are again with a bunch of people over-hating on Tini Howard for whatever reason. That's all I'll say about that. As for the issue itself, I must say that I felt as though it was the weakest issue of the Gotham War crossover so far. I might have given this a 6.5 initially, but I really enjoyed how Howard wrote Nightwing and I also liked the twist at the end of the issue. Hopefully this is just a minor bump in the road for Gotham War, as I've enjoyed it as a whole thus far.

We're back down a bit in terms of overall quality, unfortunately. I still don't hate this others like others seem to, but it's not my favorite book out there. I did like the idea of Catwoman joining a Suicide Squad mission and I think it was fun enough here, but I also think this issue left a bit to be desired.

A more fun issue for the current storyline here. I'm not against standalone stories whatsoever, but I'm glad we're finally getting something to connect these last few issues aside from Selena recently getting more lives for herself. I just hope it ends up being good. Nine Lives struggled to maintain my interest in the beginning, but these last three issues have been better. I know I've said it multiple times, but I really wish this series was back up to the quality seen in its initial storyline.

I wasn't as into this as the first issue, but it wasn't bad or anything. I don't really have much to say about this one. I'm starting to lose some interest in Gang War, which is a shame. I really liked the idea of it going in and even the First Strike one-shot was pretty good.

I liked this, but I also didn't really understand why we needed it. I understand that Elektra and Bellona didn't have their one-on-one fight, but I just wasn't as interested in this as I think I could have been had this been executed a bit better. Either way, I thought this was solid for what it was.

After the, somewhat, mixed bag that was the rest of Dark Web, things end leaving more to be desired for me. This was a fairly entertaining issue, but I just feel like more could have been done with this storyline.

This was a little all over the place, but still enjoyable. I'm not sure why we needed this book, especially as a Dark Web tie-in, though. Ben Reilly sending Kamala to Limbo was, seemingly, the main reason we were getting this mini, and she barely spent any time there here and didn't spend any in the previous issue (aside from the final page). What's more is that her interaction with the demons in Limbo was probably my favorite part of this book. All things considered, this was a fairly entertaining two-issue story that I, personally, don't think was needed and/or could have been executed better to fit more in with Dark Web.

This picked up a bit in the second half, but I wasn't into the first half all that much. I feel similar to Derby after reading their review, in that I'm not entirely sure what exactly brought this team together in the first place. Either way, this was still solid overall. As I stated already, I liked this more in the second half of the book. So, hopefully the next issue is the beginning of an upwards trajectory for the quality of this miniseries.

From what I've read thus far, it feels like a good chunk of the miniseries from Fall of X have a lot of potential that's not fully capitalized on. This was solid and not bad by any means, but I just wish I was getting more from a book featuring Madelyne Pryor, Havok, Gambit, and Archangel. I even like the relatively new character, Feint. I just wish everything here came together nicer.

Not my favorite debut in the current "FoHoX" phase of X-books, though it wasn't bad. I don't think we needed three different artists here, especially with no big scene changes to warrant it. Either way, Foxe wrote a fairly interesting story, though I just wish the execution was a bit better. Re-reading the solicitation for this and realizing that this comes out of Rise of the Powers of X does make it make a bit more sense for me, though.

I thought this was a set-up from the previous issue. For whatever reason, I just found this a little more interesting this time around. Majado's art is solid, but it could use some improvement. However, it's my understanding that he's fairly new to comics, so I'm not going to be super critical. I sense potential for him to get better, as his art is far from bad here. As for Pak's story, it was fairly intriguing and I am interested to see how it concludes with the next issue.

This was definitely my least favorite issue of the series, unfortunately. It's not even bad or anything, I just found the pacing a bit odd at times. There are certain moments I liked, though, such as Jubilee raining down blasts after Shogo was shot. Hopefully this is a minor bump in the road, as I've been enjoying this series so far.

I didn't dislike this or anything, but good lord did it feel rushed. I felt like the story was constantly moving forward without room to digest what's actually going on here. Even Werneck's art wasn't as good as usual, unfortunately. I'm really hoping this is just a minor bump in the road and not the beginning of a downwards direction in quality.

This is still a bit disappointing, in my opinion, but I also don't think it's a bad comic either. It doesn't really help that Werneck only does some of the art here as opposed to doing all of it like in the last two issues. Hopefully this series, and the Krakoan era as a whole, can have a strong landing.

A pretty solid one-off here. I can't lie when I say that I wasn't the biggest fan of Zucker's art at times. I just felt as though some of the faces looked a bit off. Otherwise, Booher's story was super solid and not where I expected things to go. If it wasn't for the art, I would have rated this higher, honestly.

While Bustos's art wasn't my favorite, especially when we have Terry Dodson doing the cover, I thought Starer presented a nice and more grounded story for these two. I will admit that this is my first time reading a book led by Fire and Ice, so I didn't really have any prior standards and/or expectations going into this. However, I enjoyed this for what it was and I'm interested enough to read more. I think this has the potential to be a fun miniseries that I hope gets a bit better as time goes on.

This story continues to stay solid. There was nothing extraordinary here, but enough to keep me interested. I will say, however, I am very glad to have Wally West back. Also, referring to my review 794, I totally don’t remember Irey getting her new suit at all, so maybe I just missed it somewhere. Speaking of Irey, I really only have this one as a half-point higher due to Wally’s return and the interaction regarding Barry being unsure if they’d be able to get him back. With the finale to this story coming up in the next issue, I really hope everything can come together and deliver on a good ending that I know Adams is capable of.

Glad to say that I liked this one more. While this does still feel a little all over the place at times, I felt as though it gelled better this time around. I particularly enjoyed the concept of Wally "stepping out of time" as the world continues moving, and I'm looking forward to seeing how that develops going forward. I hope the upward trajectory of this series continues.

Another issue that was certainly interesting. Deodato is putting out some really solid art in this series. As for Spurrier, I appreciate the complex and scientific story he's telling here, though I just wish it was a little more compelling. However, I do feel as though he's made improvements since the first issue.

I liked this issue better than most recently, though it definitely still has its strangeness. Georgiev's art is really nice, though, and I'd really like him to fully take over the art duties going forward. However, for the time being, it seems as though it'll still be Pérez, with Georgiev occasionally helping out.

Still a lot of weirdness going on, but I do feel that this was a little more clearer as to what's going on. The art here still wasn't my favorite, though I thought it was better in the more abstract panels focusing on Wally. I just really hope this title gets better soon, as I love Wally and I do think Spurrier is a good writer.

Really starting to lose interest in this one, unfortunately. Also, I don't really understand why Marvel decided to relaunch this as a new series to tell this story. I feel like this and the previous issue could have just been Issues 22 & 23 of Percy's previous Ghost Rider run. Either way, I hope this story picks up sooner rather than later.

Not a bad read or anything, but I'm still not as into this as I'd like to be. Kim's art is really helping this book's score out, in my opinion. I did like that we got more of Johnny here, though. Again, I'm hoping things pick up a bit soon.

This felt a lot like the last issue, in that it was a lot of Parker trying to take over Chicago, with a few pages of Johnny and Zeb sprinkled in, just for the issue to end with a tease of Johnny coming after him. Maybe I'm misremembering something on that front, but that's what I observed. Either way, this is a solid book. I just wish I was a little more interested in Parker's character.

I little underwhelming, in my opinion, but still a solid book overall. Kim's art was a little rough in certain spots, but I didn't think it was downright terrible or anything. As for the story, there were some bright spots, but it just didn't hit that much for me, I don't know. I'm hoping the new Spirits of Vengeance miniseries from Sabir Pirzada is good.

A solid issue that advances the story. The prison break, of sorts, at the beginning was cool, but my favorite part of this issue has to be Adira's confrontation with the reapers (Plus when she kills one of them). Other than that, Jessica's section of the story wasn't bad, but it wasn't amazing either for me, personally. I've been enjoying the direction of the last two issues, so I hope things pick up a bit with Issue 9.

This was a fairly entertaining issue that advances the main storyline a bit, but the backup was, for whatever reason, just an absolute chore for me to read. The backup's art was the best thing it had going for it, but the story, perhaps, was just a little too crazy for me. Moving back to the main story, Zatanna was fun to have for a little bit. After the previous issue felt a little rushed by trying to introduce and/or establish a bunch of different things at once, this did feel a little more focused. While I would have given this a 7.5, the backup story just drags this down a bit for me.

This wasn't my favorite issue of the series, but I still enjoy it a fair amount. I'm sure the decreased amount of focus on Galaxy will please some of the haters of this series. For me, this just didn't feel quite as focused as the first two issues were, although I thought Kendra's blow-up towards the end of the book was nicely done and it was my favorite part of this issue. I also think Axelrod writes Batman nicely. The art from Nahuelpan was really good, as per usual. I feel as though this was a minor bump in the road for a series I've enjoyed thus far, so hopefully things get back on track with Issue 4.

I felt like there wasn't much that happened in this issue aside from the flashback. After how much I enjoyed the previous issue, this was a little bit of a let-down as we go into the final issue of the series. Hopefully Ottley can bring everything together and give us the finale this run deserves, and hopefully Cates can have a little more involvement with it.

It's truly a shame that this run ended the way it did. This wasn't necessarily bad by any means, but this run had so much potential to be great. I'm not going to blame anyone here, as neither Cates nor Ottley deserve any ill will for this. In the case of Cates, personal life comes first and I would rather him deal with that than continue to write at his own expense. As for Ottley, he was put in a tough spot here and he did the best he could. For someone not really known for writing, he did a solid job with the end of this run, and things could have definitely been a lot worse. Here's to hoping the new Incredible Hulk run from Phillip Kennedy Johnson & Nic Klein is good, as the promotional stuff so far has been very interesting.

This wasn't bad for what it is. The found footage approach to this title is certainly an interesting idea, but it doesn't translate that well to this medium. There are certain parts of this issue that would just be better if it was actually found footage and not in a book. As for the story, it was a fine gap between the last Hulk run and the new one coming out next month. Speaking of which, the epilogue was intriguing and definitely peaks my interest going into this new horror-based series.

While I did enjoy this, I think I need a little more to become invested in Jace's character. I believe this is acting as a prelude issue of sorts for this series, so there's a bit of leeway from me there. Plus, while I did think the art was pretty bare at times, it wasn't necessarily bad. Plus, it was actually good in some instances, with one example being when Jace is at the protest. As for the writing, while it wasn't my absolute favorite, I did like a good amount of the ideas brought to the table here. All things considered, I think this issue shows potential for the rest of the series and all I can hope is that the team capitalizes on that.

I didn't really find this as interesting as the previous issue, unfortunately. I liked what was set up in Issue 1, and I thought that stuff was interesting. However, there was more to the book than that. The stuff with Insomnia wasn't all that engaging, which could be attributed to the fact that I haven't been reading the main series for this event. I got more interested when we got back to Bruce seeing and talking with his younger self. The final few pages felt a little weird after how that aforementioned section of the book played out, though. It also doesn't help that I wasn't all that interested in the backup story. It was fine, but I wasn't the biggest fan of it. I'm really looking forward to Zdarsky's Batman and Williamson's Green Arrow coming back when this is all over, though.

This was the weakest of Wilson's Poison Ivy issues so far. Luckily, it's not technically part of the main run. That's not to say it's BAD or anything, because I've read worse books. One thing that brings this down for me is the art. As another user stated in their review, the art is a bit inconsistent throughout. At times, it's solid and actually good. However, at other times, it just makes some of the characters look off when I don't think they're supposed to. As for the story, I do think it's solid, but not up to the standards set by the main series. One thing that was a little weird was the fact that, despite actually realizing something is up here, Ivy decides to just go with the flow rather than try to figure out what's really going on. This wasn't bad, but the main reasons I'll read the next issue are the fact that it's just two issues total and I'm not getting any regular Poison Ivy content from Wilson until September.

This issue takes a bit of a dip in quality following the starting one, unfortunately. It's not bad, but it feels like it's trying to be wittier and/or funnier than Issue 1 and it just doesn't work as well, in my opinion. However, everything is still solid here. I just wish it was more compelling.

This was a solid start, but not my favorite. Hill continues to have a bit of a minimalist writing style when it comes to the dialogue, which was seen in his recently-wrapped Blade series. Speaking of the dialogue, though, it was a little annoying at certain points. Sometimes, it felt like that cringey way "badass" characters talk in TV shows. I don't know if that makes sense, but that's the best way I can explain it right now. Peralta's art was really good, though. That was definitely the strongest part of this book.

Not a bad ending here. I knew Blade would lose and be separated from Varnae in Blood Hunt #5, but I did save that issue for last in my, personal, reading order. So, the ending of this issue came a little bit out of left field. That said, I completely understand Hill wanting to, somewhat, set the stage for his new Blade series, which I am interested in reading.

A solid issue on its own, but my least favorite of the series so far, unfortunately. The art here was alright, but I'm sorely missing Federico Vicentini. That said, I am interested to see how Miles being a vampire goes moving forward and I do think it's kinda cool that Blood Hunt appears to be having a lasting impact in that regard, whether it lasts for a long time or not.

This was a bit of a drop in quality, in my opinion. A good chunk of the dialogue feels very generic, and while the more classic feel of this book was solid in the first issue, it's not as good here. It doesn't help that the artwork is pretty hit-or-miss for me here. There's one section where Moon Knight looks really cool and another where Layla looks cross-eyed. Nonetheless, this was still a solid read with some cool moments, but I feel like this could have been something more.

Maybe it's just me, but I felt like this was a step back from the previous miniseries Vellani and Pirzada wrote. While I would say that I liked it overall, I also thought it felt a bit dense when it comes to the story and dialogue. Hopefully this miniseries improves in future issues, as I liked what we got in The New Mutant.

This was a fun read, though I agree with AmericanHealthcare's review, in that I feel like this would be better as more of an all-ages book. Don't get me wrong, though, I enjoyed this for what it was and I liked the way Kamala was written here. I'm just hoping we can get back to the quality of the previous miniseries from Vellani & Pirzada.

I’m a bit torn on this issue. While the stage is set for a promising story for the rest of the series, there’s just a couple things that drag things down for me. My main issue is that some of the dialogue felt somewhat forced, specifically when Casey shows her resentment of Oliver during her confrontation with him. Plus, some of the political viewpoints felt a tiny bit wedged in there, but not enough to where it’s overwhelming in any way. One last thing that I was mixed on was when Casey begins to cry when she said she would “tell on” the person outside. It just felt a little bit out of nowhere. Nonetheless, this was still an intriguing start to the miniseries and I hope things get a bit better with next month’s issue.

First thing's first, not everything worked here. I felt that some of the humor worked and it made me audibly laugh, but I also felt that some of the humor didn't work as well and felt a little forced at times. Plus, the flashback with Christopher's dad felt a little generic to me. Nonetheless, this is still an entertaining first issue for this miniseries. I think it just needed to find its stride, and I think it did by the time we got to the final few pages. I'm hoping this series gets better as it continues, because I can really sense some potential here. As of now, I'm interested enough to stick around for the ride.

I really liked how Williams wrote Power Girl in the Special Issue from May of this year, so I thought I would give this one a shot. While I don't know that I enjoyed this as much as that story, it's still pretty solid and enjoyable. I thought the art was nice and I think it fits nicely with the story presented. I just wish this issue had something more, in that there wasn't a whole lot for me to latch onto here, if that makes sense. I feel similarly to how I felt about this week's other Dawn of DC first issue (The Flash #1), in that the potential for this to be better is definitely there, but it's not quite fully capitalized on, in my opinion. However, I will stick around for me to see how things progress. I had high hopes for this series after reading May's Special, so hopefully this run ends up meeting those expectations.

I actually thought that this was the best issue of the miniseries yet. It wasn't fantastic or great or anything, but it was a pretty solid issue. I thought Howard wrote Nightwing well, and I think she typically does great with writing Black Mask as a total douche. Punchline herself still doesn't intrigue me that much, but this was an enjoyable issue overall.

This was another solid issue for this series. Although I didn't quite enjoy it as much as the previous, I still thought it was good. As Derby pointed out in their review, the time jump we get almost makes me feel as though we were missing something when reading this issue. However, I continued to enjoy Typhoid Mary here, as well as the stuff with Curse and Saturnyne. While the overall story of this isn't the most intriguing, the best part of this is the characters, as I think they're fairly well-written.

A solid finale that brings this miniseries to a fairly satisfying conclusion. I continue to enjoy Curse's character and I think she was the best part of this issue for me. For whatever reason, I never really got fully invested into anyone else across these past four issues. Though, I thought this miniseries, as a whole, was just pretty solid. It wasn't amazing, but it was far from bad.

A solid issue once again, but the man thing I wasn't a huge fan of was the art. I wasn't big on Jan Bazaldua's art in the previous seven issues, but it wasn't bad by any means and it was fairly solid. However, Campana's art was very hit-or-miss for me here. I initially thought I really was not going to like it when I saw the first page, but I didn't end up hating it. It wasn't terrible at all, but it wasn't really all that great either. While the story was still fairly interesting, I think that what I believe to be a decrease in the art's quality if what solidifies me giving this a 7/10 rather than a 7.5/10. Although, the story itself would have me on the fence.

This is starting to lose me. I don't think it's bad, but it's definitely a complicated book. Even Silva's art wasn't as good as it usually is. I don't know, I just think that there's a lot going on here and it's not being executed the best way. It feels like a lot is packed into this. I don't know where I saw this, but I heard that this and Gerry Duggan's Fall of the House of X miniseries were both supposed to be 12-issues at first. I think that would have been a lot better, but here we are. Hopefully this all can end well.

Although I did read the previous run, I think a "catch-up" or "previously on..." page would have been beneficial here. You're kind of thrown into the story here without any prior knowledge of what's going on. Despite that, this was still an intriguing issue that establishes the mystery for the rest of the miniseries. I think that Guara's art really fit in with the setting presented and I'm interested to see how it works with the more Western theme to come in Issue 2. Hopefully the run picks up some steam with the next issue as well, and I'm hopeful it will with the return of Cindy's "therapist" from the previous series.

I don't hate this like a lot of others seemed to. It's far from my favorite comic I've ever read, but I enjoyed the art a good amount and I thought the story was fairly solid. Maybe it's because I already like manga/anime art, but I think Nicole's art was my favorite part of this. I will say that I hope the amount of slang is toned down a bit in the future.

Not quite as good as the first issue, but still fairly enjoyable. This started out pretty interesting with Diamondback, but it did lose me a bit with Spider-Woman infiltrating the building later on. Hopefully this is just a minor bump in the road.

This was a bit of a step-up from the previous issue. Sure, I liked most of the stuff here, but the multiple stories going on feel somewhat scattered and a little disconnected from each other. Hopefully that changes soon, as we only have two more issues left of this run.

A solid issue here, but it also felt like a filler story that didn't have a whole lot to do with the current ongoing storyline aside from a couple of pages. Nicuolo's art was good here, though a little rough in certain spots. Hopefully the next issue gets things back on track.

I wasn't super into this, but it is enough to get me to read the next issue. The writing from Scott is solid, but nothing special whatsoever. The main selling point of this for me is the overall mystery surrounding everyone's powers. The art from Luis is fine as well, but it's solid as well. There's nothing bad here, but the art alone wouldn't get me to read this book. All I can hope is that things pick up as the series progresses.

While I would call this a step down from Issue 1, I still enjoyed it for what it was. I think the problem with this issue is that it felt a little clunkier than the previous one, if that makes sense. Something I did particularly enjoy was the situation with the majority of the rest of the team trying to "demote" Captain America from being the leader. The story itself was fine, but it was Deadpool's take on everything that made this really good. I liked his reaction to it and his commentary about the mutants as a whole. That was probably the strongest part of this issue for me, was everything else was just solid.

Maybe I would like this more if it was part of an ongoing series, but this issue felt like a side quest. It started off strong with Captain America's speech, but I began to lose interest when the focus shifted to Penance and Quicksilver. My interest came back up with the final few pages, though. It wasn't a bad issue by any means, but I was hoping for something more after reading Issue 1.

A pretty solid start here. I wasn't expecting much since I've barely read anything about Union Jack and I wasn't the biggest fan of Scott's Titans United books over at DC. However, this was fun. There's some good action all across the book. It's not anything particularly amazing, though Walker's art is pretty cool throughout.

A solid ending for what it was. Walker's art was what especially shined here. I don't really have all that much to say about this one. I never really cared for the characters that much throughout the entirety of this, unfortunately.

A solid read, but the weakest of the series thus far, in my opinion. This moved kind of slow without enough interesting content/ideas to warrant it. Hitch's art was solid, though. I don't really have that much to say about this one. I just hope that V. is able to make Dylan's story a little more interesting.

Another solid issue from Ram V., but I have to say that my interest is beginning to deteriorate. I agree with what Psycamorean said in their review, in that I'm sure that the next issue will be great with Ewing returning to bring the focus back to Eddie's storyline. I just wish V.'s story with Dylan was better.

I wasn't sure what to think with Grønbekk coming on this title and, seemingly, taking over for Ram V. as co-writer of this series with Al Ewing. I've stated before that I'd really like this series to just have Ewing on it, but I'm not completely opposed to having two co-writers if it's done well. While I did fairly enjoy this issue as a comic book, I can't help but feel as though it's a bit disconnected from the story that's been told in the previous twenty-two issues. I'm all for starting a new story arc, but it doesn't really feel as though we've reached a conclusion of the one seen in the previous issue. Hopefully this ends up connecting to what we've been getting from Ewing thus far.

A fairly solid and entertaining book, but I'm so ready to get back to Al Ewing & CAFU on this book. Otha's art here isn't bad by any means and it's actually one of the stronger points of this. As for Grønbekk, this and the previous two issues weren't my favorite. It's not a bad book at all, but it's disappointing to have this story instead of the amazing stuff we've been getting whenever Ewing is writing this. I can't wait to see what he's cooking up with the next issue.

A solid little one-shot. Nothing extraordinary here, but I thought everything was good for what it was. I was fairly interested in Jake's character, though it's a little ironic considering Loo's new Werewolf by Night series that follows this is supposed to be about Jack Russell instead.

A fairly fun issue as a whole, but still my least favorite of the series so far. I feel like Solem should be a lot cooler than he is, especially after the way he was introduced in X of Swords. Hopefully, if he returns at some point, he gets a more interesting storyline. I really feel as though that he has the potential to be a great villain is used correctly.

Uh oh, we're only midway through this storyline and I'm losing interest fast. I understand that Marvel wanted to make this a big deal with it being the final storyline of the series and Sabretooth being the villain, but I think this probably should have been a shorter story. Maybe I'm wrong about that, but I also think this was the worst issue of Sabretooth War so far. It's not bad or anything, but I feel like it's beginning to drag on just for the sake of getting to Issue #50.

A solid first issue, but it didn't really pick up all that much for me until the end. A lot of the dialogue and inner monologue wasn't my favorite, as it just felt a bit too generic, but the twist with Maverick at the end was intriguing. Also, Ryp's art was good throughout and I felt that it fit the story. Hopefully things pick up a little bit with the next issue.

Not the strongest conclusion for this book, though it was enjoyable for what it was. Ryp's art continues to be one of the best parts of this series and I do think Waltz did a pretty solid job for his first Marvel book. I definitely wouldn't be opposed to him working on more projects if he continues to improve moving forward.

I would have to, unfortunately, call this the worst issue of the run thus far. However, it's not really a bad book or anything. What really hurts this for me is Brown's art. It's not the worst art I've ever seen, but it's also far from great. A good chunk of the characters in this book just look odd because of it. As for Percy's story, though, it wasn't the strongest. I think there was some promise within it, perhaps in certain elements, but it just didn't come together as well as I think it could have.

A solid issue, but nothing spectacular. There were definitely some bright spots here, particularly the opening half that Cassara drew. I wasn't as big on the art when Gill took over, and I'm wondering what led to that decision in the first place. I didn't fully realize the book had changed artists at first, but then Wolverine looked odd towards the end so I double-checked to see who did the interiors. Back to the story, though, I do like the premise here, but I feel like it wasn't executed as interestingly as it could have been. Hopefully things pick up with the next issue.

There are a lot of good ideas here, but not everything was executed as well as it could have been, in my opinion. I liked the way this handled Dr. Bloodroot, but I did feel a bit underwhelmed by Man-Slaughter at times. It seems that the next issue will bring a new story, so hopefully this series can get back on track with it.

Not as into this as past storylines, but it definitely has potential. This just felt a little too wacky for me in certain spots, with one example being that Wolverine head that only says "snikt." Hopefully this becomes a little more interesting with the next issue.

Still not loving this current story. I felt like this was a little too all over the place at times. That said, I still really like what Percy's doing with Beast, whether it's in this series or in his Wolverine run.

This storyline was fine for what it was, but I am glad to see that it's ending. Hopefully the return of the plot with Colossus and Mikhail makes this title a little more interesting as things move forward.

I don't know what's going on, but this was the weakest issue of the entire series for me thus far. It's not even that bad of a read or anything, hence my score. My problem is that, two issues ago, we got some really interesting stuff set up with Orchis infecting Krakoan medicine and Wolverine's skeletons being left for enemies to find after multiple deaths. Now, two issues later, we still keep getting glimpses of Orchis doing things, but it's not a large focus. Plus, I don't even remember if they've mentioned the skeletons thing past that previously mentioned issue. Aside from that, the story going on here is entertaining, but it's nothing really spectacular, in my opinion. There were some good moments, especially with Cassara's art, but this just wasn't up to par with the rest of the issues in the run so far, unfortunately.

I felt as though there was a lot packed into this issue, similar to the previous issue. However, I think it worked significantly better in Issue 25 than it does here. Don't get me wrong, this isn't bad. However, it felt a little all over the place at times and there isn't a lot that I'm interested by. I really wish this title had more Shadowkat. She was the highlight of the last issue and I feel the same way here. I do have hope for this series, however, as the next issue not only has the return of Cyclops, but it's also supposed to have the awesome Phil Noto on the art duties.

While I did see this as an improvement over last month's issue, I'm still not entirely invested in this. I feel as though this series is just coming out to give readers something until the new relaunch as opposed to just ending until the summer. Don't get me wrong, this is a solid read on both the writing and art fronts. However, I just feel as though this could be something more.

There's a good amount here that I like, but the biggest problem with the end of the Krakoa Era, for me, is that everything just feels so crammed together. We start off with a few mutants hunting down and taking out M.O.D.O.K., which had some "fine" dialogue. Then, we suddenly start getting more deep/emotional/etc. with Synch and Laura. I liked the moment itself, but it just felt a little out of nowhere. The strongest point of this, for me, was the ending with Kate and Logan. I just wish the rest of the book was as good as that.

A solid story here in what I would call the best of the X-Men one-shots for Blood Hunt so far. That said, I wasn't huge on some of the dialogue, though Yoshii's art was nice throughout.

I feel like this was really oddly placed in terms of its release date. I agree with what Derby stated in their review, in that this would have likely been more effective had it come before Gillen's Rise of the Powers of X miniseries and even Steve Foxe's Dead X-Men miniseries. There were a couple of stronger moments, such as Charles finding out the missing mutants were still alive and when Destiny realizes Mystique is reading the book. However, I did also think this felt a bit crammed at times and I also wasn't incredibly invested in what was going on. Hopefully things pick up with the next issue, as I know Gillen can be a great writer and I really enjoyed the majority of his previous Immortal X-Men series.

I feel very similarly to how I feel about Gillen's Rise of the Powers of X #4 from this week, in that this feels a little complicated and dense. I wish I liked both books more than I do. There were certain bright spots, though I felt that they were overshadowed but the odd execution of the overall story.

Solid story and art here, though nothing particularly spectacular. I don't think I've read anything by Layman prior to this, but I do believe he has potential. That said, I'm interested to see how Titans goes when he takes over from Tom Taylor and isn't tied to an event.

A pretty solid story. I especially really liked the narration for Failsafe here. I hadn't read anything by Pichetshote before, but I'm interested to see what he does within DC's Absolute Universe. I remember seeing his name attached to it somewhere, at some point.

Not as strong as the rest of the issues in this story, but this was still good, especially Sandoval’s art. Hopefully the backup story with Brainiac Five ends up being important, because I wasn’t super into it here.

Still a super solid read here, but just not up to the level as the first few issues of this story. The backup story, also, was just fine as a whole, though I did like the ending shot. Hopefully Superman #15 gives us a strong ending.

While I did like this issue, I think it was a little bit of an underwhelming ending to a miniseries I was really enjoying. Don't get me wrong, I still liked this, but I feel like there should have been more here. What I mean by that is that I think Jon and Kal-El should have fought for a bit as they argue their points, which is what we usually see in comics. Then, you have them talk more the way they did here. That's just my idea, but my point is that I feel like this could have been executed better. Nonetheless, I still enjoyed this issue and I'm interested to see what was going on on the final page and how he'll fit into the Beast World storyline starting in November.

I'm going to start this review off by saying that I had no interest in reading any of the New Golden Age titles going into them. Not because of any ill-will; I just wasn't interested in the characters. However, after hearing people complain about Alan Scott, I decided to check it out. His title was the one I'd be the most interested in reading, especially considering I, personally, am a member of the LGBTQ+ Community and I heard this story would deal with his life as a closeted gay man. After reading, I wouldn't call this one of the best books I've read by any means, I still enjoyed it and I'm interested enough to read more. The strongest part of this, in my opinion, was what I decided to read this book for: the depiction of Alan's struggles being gay in the 30's and 40's. While I do hope that continues to be covered throughout the series, my main hope is that the story itself gets a little more interesting.

This was a really solid first issue that does a nice jo of establishing the story for the rest of the miniseries. I think the twist regarding who the team is working with was executed well, especially. Another stronger point of this book was Godlewski's art, in my opinion.

While this is a fairly fun issue, it feels a little unnecessary. The story is fine, but not the best. Although, Spider-Man and Wolverine teaming up is still fun here. The main highlight here, in my opinion, is Gleason's always fantastic art. I really wish we could have Gleason back on ASM full-time, as he's probably one of my favorite current Spider-Man artists, if not my absolute favorite.

A dip in quality for Dark Web here, but still entertaining. I will say that, despite the amount of fun I had reading the previous issue, I do wish this issue had a more serious tone. After the way Ben was built up in Issue 14, this just feels like a weird direction. Nonetheless, this is still enjoyable.

Don’t get me wrong here, I’m still enjoying the current story, but it’s just not as good as the stuff we were getting prior. The humor here is fun, but it is getting a little too much for me with the build we saw in ASM #14. Maybe if this was the tone set in said issue, this wouldn't be as much of a problem. Even then, I just, in general, wish this was a more serious story after the way Ben has been acting since the end of the Beyond storyline.

A solid step-up in quality from the previous issues of this arc. We now get an understanding of why Peter was pretty much "on the outs" with a lot of people at the beginning of this series, as he gets aggressive with Norman in front of May, runs from Johnny & Ben, and absolutely BONKS Steve in the face with his shield (I wasn't expecting that whatsoever, but it was one of my favorite parts of this issue). The ending was a solid setup for the next issue, as well.

I had the death of this issue spoiled for me before it came out, so it kind of lessened any effect it had on me. However, I'm not going to let that change my rating of this book in any way. Briefly talking about the rest of this issue, I will say that it was an entertaining read and that, despite my lack of interest in the villain, I just liked it overall. Now, let's talk about that death. When the Fallen Friend one-shot was announced, I noticed that the reveal of more details was the same day that this came out, so that got the initial gears turning in my head of who that could be about. For me, it seemed that Norman would be the one to go. He's been a big part of this run and he's been one of my favorite characters throughout. After all of the changes he's gone through, I thought he would have the biggest impact. However, I still wasn't 100%. I thought that it could, maybe, be Mary Jane. A lot of this run has had to do with the mystery of what happened with Mary Jane, specifically what happened between her and Peter, who Paul is, and why they have children together. Those were the main two people I thought would have the most emotional impact based on the story being told in the last twenty-five issues. However, as we all know, I ended up being wrong, as Kamala took the hit. My complaint about this isn't that she died, because I'm sure she'll be back in no time. My main complaint with this is that Kamala, while in multiple issues of this series, hasn't been a main character here. Yes, she's been here, but only for a few pages at a time. Kamala has never been a big part of a story in this run, which makes it all the more confusing as to why this had the build it did. If Kamala had been in this run more prominently, I would have been completely fine with it. However, it just feels like they decided to kill Ms. Marvel to get her some buzz before The Marvels comes out in November. While the rest of this issue was good, I really hope this death leads to something good down the line (Hopefully a new Ms. Marvel series).

Not a bad issue here, but not this run's best. After Peter was shown to be dealing with Kamala Khan's death in the last issue, it feels largely ignored here. After Issue 27, it felt as though that her death was going to be weighing on him for quite some time. Either way, this was a fun and enjoyable story that manages to maintain my interesting going into the next issue. While I don't think this is the best issue of the series whatsoever, the enormous amount of hate this run is currently getting is still undeserved, in my opinion.

This was a solid issue. The tonal shift between this storyline and the previous continues to be felt, but Wells is able to make it make some sense on the final two pages. Yes, the previous three issues, as well as this one, have been a lot more fun and lighthearted compared to Issues 21-26, but it allowed Peter and Norman to be distracted from Kamala's death for a little bit. I do still think it's a little weird, especially considering the first issue of this current arc started out with Peter being clouded by her death, but at least we got some sort of explanation. As for the story itself, it wasn't bad at all and it just felt like a solid comic book story. Nothing more and nothing less. With the return of Superior Spider-Man coming up, I'm pretty sure Otto will be showing up in Dan Slott's current Spider-Man run if he hasn't already (At the time of this writing, I have yet to read it). I'm just hoping this series can rise back up to the quality it was during its first 18 issues. I think Wells is a very talented writer and this run gets a over-hated a bunch.

I'm not quite sure that I needed the amount of pages this had, but it was still enjoyable. The main story was good and I'm glad we've finally gotten back to Tombstone. I'm thinking this will act as a prelude of sorts for the upcoming Gang War crossover, which is something I'm really excited for. The first five issues of this series dealt with gangs and such, and they were great. One problem I had with the issue, however, was the handling of Peter and Felicia's breakup. Their relationship didn't really get a large focus in the first place, but it felt like their breakup was super hasty and rushed. I didn't want them to breakup in the first place, but I think, if it was gonna happen, it could have been executed a lot better. As for the rest of the issue, I thought it was a fine collection of stories that mainly acted as a preview for other Spider-related books. In this one issue alone, we get previews/preludes to Superior Spider-Man, Spider-Woman, AND Spider-Boy. Plus, we get two random Spider-Man stories from Albert Monteys and Cale Atkinson. They were funny and cute stories, but I don't really think they needed to be here. All things considered, I think this issue had more than it really needed, but, overall, it was an enjoyable over-sized issue.

A little bit of a step down in quality for Gang War, in my opinion, but I did enjoy this. Romita Jr.'s art is solid and the story from Wells is still fairly interesting. I do like Beetle trying to step up to Tombstone's position. I did feel as though there as a lot packed in here at times, but I still liked this. Hopefully things pick up a bit more with the next issue.

I liked a majority of what we got here, though I do feel like this jumped around a lot. While the latest issue of Miles Morales: Spider-Man felt like things were being rushed through, this just felt like jumping around to different characters involved in Gang War. Like I said, I liked a good chunk of it, but I also felt like there wasn't a lot of room to breathe.

A bit of a step-up from the previous issue, in my opinion. I was really liking Carmen Carnero's art in the last two issues, but Nauck does a pretty nice job here as well. I'd definitely prefer him on the book than John Romita Jr. right now. Aside from the art, the story was engaging as well. There wasn't anything particularly unique or groundbreaking about it, but it was entertaining for what it was. Hopefully the ending the sticks the landing in the next issue.

Another pretty solid issue for the series here that follows up on the previous one fairly well. Nauck continues to be a good guest artist and I'd definitely welcome him to do more issues for the series. I just wish this had someone better than John Romita Jr. for the main artist. It looks like we're getting Ed McGuinness for the next few issues, though (with one possibly featuring Nauck instead), which is great. As for the story itself, it was good. I'm glad that the stuff with Sandman seems to be continuing in some capacity with the Sinister Six's involvement in the next story arc.

This was an improvement over the first issue, in my opinion. Though, I do feel as though the writing as a little hit-or-miss. There were some strong moments, with one example the interaction between Bobby and his mom towards the end. However, I felt as though some of the other dialogue throughout was somewhat basic. With that in mind, I enjoyed this issue as a whole and I'm hoping the book continues to improve with Issue 3.

Possibly the best issue so far with this one. Spider-Man being a guest star, of sorts, in this definitely helped. Carratù's art was really solid as well, and it has been throughout these past four issues. Back to the story, though, this was a fun team-up that kept me engaged throughout. While nothing spectacular, it was fairly enjoyable and it's always nice to see Peter and Bobby together.

A really solid ending to a miniseries I wasn't feeling all that much in the beginning. Aside from Carratù's nice art, Orlando put together an entertaining and fairly well-written finale that handled its main character, Bobby, nicely. As a matter of fact, I think Orlando's writing of Bobby, as a character, has been a stronger aspect of this miniseries. I wouldn't be opposed to Orlando writing more of him in the future. My only hope would be that the story is a little more interesting the next time around.

Some outstanding art from Kuder is the best part of this issue. Aaron's scripts aren't bad whatsoever, but this story just doesn't have enough behind it to make me as invested as I know I could be with such a large-scale story. With one issue left in this storyline (Omega), I just really hope the conclusion is worth it.

This was my first issue of Tynion IV's Batman, and I liked it. It doesn't quite hook/sell me on this series as a whole yet, but the main reason I initially decided to come back and read from here was because I was able to get the single issues and because the Fear State event interested me. As for this issue, it was solid and I think it lays a little bit of groundwork in terms of what's to come from this series after Joker War.

This was a step-up following the previous issue. If you read my review for Issue 104, you’d know that my biggest issue with it was the art. This time around, the art feels cleaner and more consistent. However, I still maintain the stance that we don’t need multiple artists on one issue. I do think that this works when two stories are being told in two different times, but it should not be the common occurrence it is here. Speaking more about the story, I like the dynamic between Batman and Ghost-Maker. I think having Ghost-Maker in Gotham presents the opportunity for some interesting stories. Overall, a solid issue as DC heads into Future State.

Fear State continues to take shape in this slower, but still enjoyable, issue. I don't know that we need Harley Quinn here, considering the fact that she has her own book, but I can't complain all that much since I enjoyed her stuff here as well. As far as the main story goes, I thought that Tynion builds the uneasiness well and I'm still intrigued by this storyline. Speaking about the backup story, I thought it was a fun story, but nothing special. Lopez's art doesn't really get good until Ghost-Maker puts on his suit. I don't know what it was, but the way he drew him without the suit just looked wonky.

While the main story does continue to be kind of slow, it's still enjoyable and nicely written. Miracle Molly is an intriguing character and I think she has potential, like Ghost-Maker and Clownhunter, to be a good character. I will say that I am a bit mixed on her design. It almost feels like half of it is cool and half of it is just meh. As for the Ghost-Maker backup story, this wasn't quite as good as the first one. It started off nicely, but dwindled a bit during the "backstory" section of it. Hopefully it picks up with the next issue, as I've been liking Ghost-Maker more and more.

While the ending to this large-scale storyline felt a bit rushed, which is weird considering it had 6 issues of build and then 6 issues of the main story, I still enjoyed this. Of course, you have the fantastic Jimenez on the art duties. Plus, Tynion writes the story and its characters well enough to keep me engaged until the end. Moving to the backup, it was another fun read that solidifies my interesting in checking out the Batgirls run it preludes. I don't have a whole lot to say about this issue, other than that I enjoyed it despite some of the overall story's pacing being off.

While this crossover has not been my absolute favorite by any means, I think the amount of hate it's getting is a bit unwarranted. It's pretty much a given that Jimenez's art is fantastic. When it comes to the story, of course it can be better. However, it's not absolutely terrible like some will have you believe. The interactions between Bruce and Dick are really good. While I thought the parts with Vandal were interesting, it felt a bit disconnected from the rest of the story at times. All things considered, while I did enjoy this issue, this hasn't been my favorite story and I'm getting ready to move on from Gotham War.

Certainly an interesting start here. It already feels as though this book has a lot of different characters to balance. I mainly decided to pick this book up for Ghost-Maker, who I've enjoyed since he showed up during James Tynion IV's Batman run. The same goes for Clownhunter, but he didn't get much focus here. The other standouts in this issue, for me, are Jiro and El Gaucho. Jiro having a journey in order to discover his true identity as a hero has a lot of potential and I hope it goes well. As for Gaucho, he could definitely be somewhat of a rival for Ghost-Maker as this series moves forward. I hope this book is able to manage all of those previously mentioned characters well, along with the group of others involved also.

Good follow-up to the opening issue. I'm not quite sure how this book is going to balance all of their characters after introducing a few more here. Ghost-Maker's storyline is the best thing going here, which is good for me since he's the main reason I decided to read this title. Phantom-One certain provides some interest, especially given the tease of him a few pages earlier when Clownhunter got in the middle of Ghost-Maker's conversation with Skyspider. As for everyone else in the book, it felt like we cut to them from Ghost-Maker only for each team to get a couple of pages before eventually cutting back to Ghost-Maker. While I am primarily reading for Ghost-Maker, the other ongoing stories hold this book back for me, as they don't create nearly as much interest, despite being solid.

The majority of this book was pretty good, but the rest of the team's stories just hold this back a bit for me. I really wish this could be a Ghost-Maker book and not Batman Incorporated. Everything was done well, but then we get a cut to the other teams for a page each. Phantom One is already an interesting character by almost bringing a new perspective on the dynamic between Batman and Robin. All in all, the main story continues to be pretty good, while everything else is a little lacking for me.

This book has so much potential to be truly great, but, as another user pointed out, the large cast and all of the other ongoing plots aside from the main one just really drag this down. I just don't think there's enough room in a comic for all of these characters, especially considering that there isn't much interest built in them. Whenever I start reading about the other characters, I find myself anticipating when we'll get back to the plot with Ghost-Maker, Clownhunter, and Phantom-One. It was cool to see the other antagonists of the side stories coming together and tying everything back to the main plot, but I really hope this book can just get a bit more focused.

While I still wasn't that interested in Professor Pyg here, everything else was a step-up in quality from the previous issue. Ghost-Maker continues to be the book's most interesting character. The inner conflict he faces involving his worldview versus Batman and the Batman Family is entertaining to read. I'm not sure how I feel about Joker Inc. being teased at the end of the book, but I knew something was happening to Raven Red's dad as soon as he said, "I'm not going anywhere." Hopefully Joker Inc. defies my expectations proves to be a good idea.

I was a bit skeptical of Joker Incorporated when I first saw it in solicitations, I wasn't sure how I felt about it. Even here, I'm not 100% sure how I feel about it, but I do think Joker's reasoning for creating it makes complete sense. The final page of this issue gives me more hope that Joker Incorporated will be a good storyline, so hopefully things pick up in Issue 9. Speaking about this book as a whole, Psycamorean points out a great point in his review that I agree with, in that this title just has so many characters in it. As much as I like Gray Wolf, there's a part of me that hopes he leaves the team like he talked about in this issue so that things can be spread out a little more. An example of this is that, after his father's death in the last issue, Jiro is in this issue for like a page or two and then forgotten about for the rest of the book. While it's still been an enjoyable read, I really hope this run can become a little more focused in the future. Quality over quantity reigns true here, in my opinion.

I don't know how many times I can say this, but there are just too many characters to focus on in this series. While I do enjoy a good chunk of the stories happening here, there's not a lot of room for the reader to get as invested into these characters and stories as they could be. Nonetheless, Timms's art continues to be good and the various storylines Brisson brings here are good-to-solid. We're nearing a year of this book and it still has the problem I mentioned here and nearly every, if not absolutely every, review I've written for this series.

This was another good issue on Ridley's part, as I'm still intrigued by the story he's telling. Not everything worked as well here as it has in the past, but it's still a nice read. As for Landini, I wasn't the biggest fan of his art here. Most of it was solid, but there were certain pages/moments where faces just looked strange. Hopefully his art improves, as it looks like he's, at least, working on the next two issues as well.

Another lower point for this series, unfortunately. Though, it's not a bad book whatsoever. I still find Ridley's story fairly enjoyable, though I don't feel as though it's up to the quality it was once at. I can't really pinpoint it specifically, but it's not quite as engaging. As for Landini, I found his art a bit better overall, though I do think I would look for a different rotating artist for this series with Juann Cabal. I did like the work Ibrahim Moustafa did in in Issues 3 & 4.

I'm losing interest in this storyline fast. I don't think this is a bad book whatsoever, but I just found certain things weird here. For example, Ridley continues to write a bit of an odd Captain America here. I agree with Psycamorean, in that I'm not really a fan of it. This is really starting to feel like the end of this run's first arc, in that there's some intriguing ideas with execution that isn't the best.

I don't know what happened, but we went from my favorite issue of the series so far to my least favorite so far. This one just felt a bit rushed, in my opinion, especially the ending. I feel as though this could have used a few more pages to flesh things out a little better. I did like how Hill wrote Doctor Strange, though.

I'm glad to see Casagrande fully back on the art duties, but Hill's writing hasn't been my favorite here or in the previous issue. A good chunk of these feels rushed without much time to really digest the scenes. Hopefully this series can get back on track with Dracula being brought in.

A bit of a step-up from the previous issue, in my opinion. Following the large amount of setup that was seen in the first issue, Trujillo is now able to really get into the story here. Speaking of which, I thought it was engaging and fairly well-written. There are certain moments that are a bit rushed, in my opinion, and there are certain moments where I wasn't the biggest fan of the dialogue. All of that said, though, there was a good amount of stuff that I did like here. For example, I liked the dialogue between Oo'Li and her father, which I think could lead to some interesting plot developments. Overall, I think this is a step in the right direction for this series and I hope that trend continues.

I feel very similarly with this issue to how I felt with the previous one. There's a mix of things I didn't care for that much along with things I did like. My opinion on this as a whole, which can be seen by my rating, is mainly positive. I'm intrigued by the direction of Jaime not being able to pull the trigger on the Blood Scarab, especially. It's not anything that hasn't been done before, but it can be a good story when executed well.

A solid opening for this miniseries. Jaime's struggles with transformation, his role in life, and his future are established well. Some of the dialogue wasn't my favorite, but I do like the overall story as a whole and this issue builds some interest to see where things go. Seeing Superman eat elote was not something I expected to see in a comic, but it's very much welcome.

Another solid issue from this series that could be better. I think the mentor-relationship between Starfire and Jamie has great potential, but it's not fully realized here (at least not yet). However, the conversation the two have with each other was probably my favorite part of this book. I wasn't expecting the introduction of another beetle (which is now becoming sort of a Power Rangers situation with multiple different colors), but hopefully it's interesting. Speaking of which, I'm not sure how many more villains they can fit now that Fadeaway has returned following the first issue. I just hope that this miniseries doesn't lose focus as we head into the second half.

A good issue where Jaime hits a low point after messing up Victoria's lab and letting Fadeaway flee the scene. Everything that comes before was solid setup, featuring enjoyable dialogue and solid character work with Jaime. The setup at the end with Batman and the other heroes peaks a bit of interest as well, as it seems like Jaime will be coming face-to-face(s) with some prominent DC heroes in the very near future.

A fairly entertaining issue that, despite its flaws, manages to tell an interesting story. Jaime can be a bit of an annoying character here, but it's understandable considering the stress he's under with his current situation and how he's been recently been feeling, emotionally. Nonetheless, this was an enjoyable read that sets up The Horizon coming to Earth and facing Jaime, as well as the other two beetles, in the next, and final, issue of the miniseries.

While I do believe that this finale started strong by testing Jaime as a hero and as a leader, it dragged down a bit for me during the conversation with The Horizon. It wasn't bad by any means, but I do think it was a tad bit weird for Jaime to, almost impulsively, give this alien race permission to live in a city he just recently moved to himself. However, I appreciate the setup for the ongoing series announced at the same time of this issue's release, which is something I currently plan on checking out when it releases in September.

A pretty solid issue here, but I do feel like this has the potential to be better. This started out really strong with Cletus's first kill of the issue, but I began to lose a bit of interest as time went on. That said, though, I did think this was an improvement over the first issue as a whole, so I'm glad to see that. Hopefully it continues to get better as time goes on.

This wasn't quite as good as the previous issue, but it was still entertaining for what it was. Bengal's art goes on a little bit of a decline after the last issue, but it's not necessarily BAD by any means. I'm glad this seems to only be a two-issue storyline and I'm interested to see where things go with the Bat Family being teased on the last page.

I'm not as interested in what's going on here as I've been in the past, but this is still entertaining. Dario's situation is the most interesting thing here, and that's only present for a handful of pages. I don't dislike Valmont, but I haven't been given much of a reason to care when it comes to him. Hopefully things pick up a bit with the next issue.

The final issue of this storyline shows a lot of promise when it comes to the issues post-Knight Terrors. This and the issue before it make me excited for the future of this title. I've really been enjoying Chip Zdarsky's run on Batman, so I'm very interested to see how the Gotham War crossover will turn out. I just wish we didn't have to wait two extra months to get there because of Knight Terrors. Either way, I believe that things are looking up for this run with this issue and, I know I've said this multiple times in other reviews, but I really hope it can return to the quality it was at with its first arc.

I'd say this was an improvement over the previous issue. It's still not as good as the initial two issues of the crossover, but I think it's given the Vandal stuff introduced in Batman #137 a little more direction. I also think Howard handled Bruce and Selina's interactions well. I will say that I do wish Gotham War was more consistently good, as I think it has the potential to be something a lot better, but it's not pure garbage like some people may try to make you think.

For whatever reason, this just clicked with me in a way the past two issues didn't. Not everything here was great, with one example being the opening dialogue between Dario, Eiko, and Selina. However, I found Selina's story to be compelling as things progressed and, despite Superman randomly showing up out of nowhere, I thought the book ended on a nice note. Hopefully this is a sign of things to come, as I know Howard is capable of writing good books.

I didn't enjoy this as much as the first issue, but I thought it was still fairly intriguing. I think that the last issue set up some interesting ideas, and now this issue's purpose is to build off of those a bit in order to bring us closer to the big conclusion. Now that this miniseries is going into the second half, I hope the quality goes back up instead of continuing to go down.

An enjoyable issue here that's the most interesting when focusing on Serafina. This was a solid issue overall, but those pages were where I felt the most engaged. Either way, I hope that the next, and final, issue wraps up this miniseries nicely.

A pretty solid final issue for the series, but also nothing spectacular. I don't really have all that much to say about this one. Everything was just solid when it came to Maresca's art and Camp's story. This miniseries, as a whole, was good and enjoyable, but also one that probably won't end up being all that memorable for me, unfortunately.

A pretty solid issue as we head into the final few issues of Gang War. As a matter of fact, solid is probably the best way to describe nearly everything about this issue. I wonder if this series will end up having any impact on Saladin Ahmed's current Daredevil run.

This was a fairly fun read that shows is how Kamala got to her run-in with Ben in Amazing Spider-Man #15. I had assumed we were going straight into where Ben transported her to in this issue, but I'm hoping Pirzada is able to wrap everything up with Issue 2. As for this issue, it was just a fun Ms. Marvel story and nothing more.

I'll start this by saying that I think this series has potential. While the cast isn't my personal favorite, I do think it's an interesting one. However, we don't really get to see all that much of them here. As KittyNone stated in their review, the backup was the best part of this story and it's probably what I'll remember the most from this issue. That's not to say everything else wasn't good, because, as you can tell by my rating, I enjoyed the issue as a whole. I just hope that, with Issue 2, we get more on the rest of the characters involved in this book.

I looked at the lower scores on this issue and was worried this was gonna be very average, but I ended up liking it. Maybe it's just me, but I thought this was a really solid finale to this miniseries. The focus on Madelyne in this issue only worked to its benefit, as I think Foxe wrote her well. While I do feel as though this was a little rushed, it was entertaining for what it was.

I thought this was a pretty solid first issue for the series. It doesn't really reach the heights of the previous series from Alyssa Wong for me, but it has potential. Ziglar seems to have a fairly good grasp on the character, though I did feel like the way he wrote Wade's dissatisfaction with his current situation to be a bit much at times. I just feel as though there was a better way to convey it. Either way, this was good and I hope the run only gets better from here.

This was my first time reading a story about Bloodline and it was pretty solid. As of now, I'm missing one of the five issues of Bloodline: Daughter of Blade, so I plan on reading it at some point. Either way, this was good. The namesake of this book, Dracula, was probably the best part of this. I think Lore wrote him nicely here. The reluctant team-up angle isn't something new, but I think it has potential with this book. Hopefully it ends up realizing said potential. If anything, the art will be good.

A pretty solid conclusion to one of the better Blood Hunt tie-in miniseries. Something I did like about this is that it felt like a nice ending to the book while also setting up the appearance of Brielle and Dracula in the last issue of the main Blood Hunt miniseries.

Following what I believed to be the strongest issue so far, I have to say this was the weakest one, unfortunately. Things started off nicely, but took a bit of a downturn for me during Gambit and Rictor's mission. It wasn't bad by any means, just not my favorite. However, things went back up towards the end with Betsy's stuff. I believe this is a minor bump in the road and that things will pick up soon.

Another issue that's not my absolute favorite of the series, but I did like it a bit more than the previous one. This one felt more focused with the story it was trying to tell, in my opinion. To's art here was pretty good, as well. I really enjoyed the pages towards the end with Betsy and Jamie, respectively, attacking one another.

A really solid issue that I think could have been executed a bit better. I like Apocalypse, Rictor, and Gambit in this issue, but I felt as though the story itself was a bit lacking. I wasn't really all that into the beginning of this book, as much as I enjoy the first two characters I listed. However, this did definitely pick up when things transitioned to Rogue and Gambit.

I felt as though this got a bit confusing at times, but I still enjoyed it overall. That could be because it's been a while since I've read the first twelve issues of this series and/or because my reading of X of Swords has been a bit more sporadic. That said, though, I think the strongest aspects of this came from the dynamic between Betsy and Brian throughout. Silva's art here was nice as well.

I thought this was an improvement upon the previous two issues, though this still isn't quite as good as I feel it should be. That said, there is a lot to like here. Apocalypse's section is definitely the highlight, in my opinion. Especially when we got more focus on Wrongslide. I really enjoyed the content we got with him in Al Ewing's X-Men: Red series. Aside from that, the stuff with Cyclops, Nimrod, Charles, etc. was solid, but not particularly my favorite. A lot of this last run of X-books has been a little disappointing, unfortunately. However, I hope the upwards trajectory of this book's quality continues and manages to be felt with all of the other mutant books currently, as well.

This started off fairly strong, in my opinion, as I really liked the stuff with Cyclops and Storm. Furthermore, Caselli's art was absolutely fantastic here. That said, though, everything else wasn't as strong, for me. There wasn't anything particularly bad here, but the ending to this whole era still feels a little crammed and complicated in certain spots.

While I, personally, think this issue jumped around a lot, it was still enjoyable. All three stories were wrapped up nicely enough, but I will say that they did feel a tad bit rushed. Overall, this was nothing more than a solid issue.

A solid issue that brings the Flash Family together as The One-Minute War continues to be set up. While I do think Cruz's art worked better here than in the previous issue, it can be distracting at times, for me. Nonetheless, and enjoyable issue that adds some emotional stakes to the story with the apparent death of Iris.

A very solid issue for One-Minute War. The main story here is the development of the friendship between Ace and Bart, which was done well. This very much felt like a science-fiction/adventure movie in a good way. There was just enough development to keep this story going at a steady pace. My main criticism of this issue is the art. Cruz's art isn't BAD by any means, but it feels as though that this just isn't the book for his talents. However, it doesn't take much away from the issue as a whole. All in all, a pretty good issue for Flash that advanced the story and had quite an interesting final page.

Another rock solid issue for Flash’s One-Minute War storyline. This does everything it needs to fairly well. The story is advanced, bonds are strengthened, there’s moments of emotion, and the ending leaves the reader wanting more. With the final pages, you have Jay’s situation, Wally’s predicament, and Irey now in danger. While Cruz’s art could be a bit better, Adams’ scripts pull this together into an overall good book.

While this storyline hasn't been my absolute favorite, it was still pretty solid. This fact remains for the finale that is this issue. It gets an extra 0.5 from for the ending, which I particlarly enjoyed.

This was a fun issue showcasing Wally's two kids and Animal Girl, along with the return of the Super Sons. Nothing super high stakes, but still entertaining nonetheless, and I'm not usually a huge fan of stories more focused on child characters. One thing I'm also not usually a fan of his the art switching in the middle of the book. Nothing against either of the artists, but it just kind of messes with my reading experience. Not sure what to think of the final page with Granny Goodness, but I'm trusting Adams to make this something interesting.

This was the best issue of this run so far. It's far from a perfect book for me, but this clicked in a way the first four issues didn't. This went a little less on the complex science and focused more on Jhai to bring us a more character-driven story. I really appreciated that and I think approaching things in this way will only benefit this run going forward. Speaking of Jhai, I do have a relatively minor gripe with this issue. I understand and recognize that nearly everything in this book is not realistic, but I just don't believe that Jhai would say some of the words he does for being a kid. He could be an advanced kid or maybe I'm not that smart, but it just didn't completely work for me. I will say that Deodato continues to have some nice art, however. All things considered, I really hope this is the start of this series improving. I think it's had some interesting ideas thus far without the best execution.

I didn't really see the point of this one. It was a good read, but I felt as though it didn't connect to the larger, ongoing narrative as much as I would have liked it to.

A little disappointed by this one, not gonna lie. I liked it, as can be seen by my score, but I do feel as though this wasn't as strong as it could have been, considering how much I enjoyed a majority of everything before this. This definitely felt like a conclusion, but I did find it to be a little rushed. I feel like Johnny confronting Blackheart could have been a little bit bigger of a deal. That said, I did think him basically obliterating Blackheart was kinda cool.

Not a bad issue, but a little bit of a step-down from the previous one. Seeing Smith back on the interiors was great, but I do feel like this could have ended a little stronger. That said, I am interested in this story with Danny, despite him not really appearing much in this issue.

I enjoyed this as a whole, especially the killer art from Smith, but I did feel as though that this was another case of this run having the ending of an arc feel a bit rushed. In this case, it was a bit underwhelming also. I don't know. I feel like the next issue could have been used to stretch this out a little, considering it's currently being advertised as a standalone story before we get into the Weapons of Vengeance crossover with Wolverine.

A good read, but I do still feel like this issue could have been used to make the conclusion that was the previous issue felt less rushed. Either way, I enjoyed this for what it was and I was glad to see Robbie.

Not a bad issue here, but far from this run's strongest. I do appreciate Percy diving more into Talia's backstory, but I just didn't find it incredibly interesting, unfortunately. It had some strong points, but I just wish there was more for me to latch onto. It didn't help that I wasn't always into Nieto's art either. I'm really glad to see that Cory Smith is supposed to return in the next issue.

This was cool for what it was, but I don't think I really needed it. It was cool to see different riders, but I felt like this could have used a little more substance or, perhaps, a bit of a stronger reason for me to care. That said, this was far from a bad comic or anything.

I was hoping for a stronger conclusion, but this was still good for what it was. I do wish there was either a little more substance to this, or perhaps that it was just more fun. Perhaps even both simultaneously. Either way, I do feel like a crossover between these two should have been a bit better, especially considering that Percy is more than capable of writing really good stuff. Like I said, this was far from bad. However, I was hoping for more from this.

I liked this issue more than most, but I do wish it got to the point quicker. We only see Johnny for a few pages before Zarathos just travels across the universe until finding The Hood on the last page or two. Like I said, I liked this as a whole, hence my rating, but I don't think I'm going to continue to like it as much unless we get a clearer direction for this series sooner rather than later.

The best issue since the first one, I my opinion. Parker was a bit more interesting for me this time around, especially with his "I'd kill for you" line. Johnny and Zeb's stuff was solid, but there also wasn't a whole lot of it. With the next issue being the end of the series, I hope things get wrapped up nicely.

Yeah, this wasn't really needed. Don't get me wrong, it's another solid issue of Hulk from PKJ. That said, there isn't much reason for this to exist as far as I'm concerned, unless this ends up influencing the main series in a larger way at some point down the line. One thing I do hope the main series takes from this is that Broccardo should totally be the fill-in artist for the book whenever Nic Klein isn't drawing it.

Not really sure how I feel about Ollie suddenly working for Amanda (assuming it’s true). Nahuelpan’s art was also a bit shaky for me overall, but I didn’t think anything here was bad.

A solid issue, though I was really hoping this would give more insight as to why Ollie is working with Amanda, as that still has yet to be explained whatsoever. I could have missed something in that regard, but I don't think I did currently. Hopefully we get something on that soon.

This was a solid debut issue for the new Green Lantern run. I was expecting a bit more here with how much I've enjoyed Adams' run with Flash so far, but this wasn't bad by any means. Hal's is a little bit annoying here during the jet drone scene, but everything else was good. I particularly enjoyed his moment on top of the RV. I'm just hoping things pick up a little bit in the next issue with the guy in the Manhunter suit and the Sinestro tease earlier in the issue. As for the backup, I was left a little confused. I don't mind John not being in most of it since it's setting up who his current villain will be. However, I'm not really sure what was going on with Guy Gardner and Shepherd. I'm not sure if it's because I didn't read the previous run, or if this is just new stuff in an alternate universe or something. Either way, I was just a bit confused. All in all, I really hope this run picks up some steam as time goes on, and I do have hope knowing the quality of writing Jeremy Adams is capable of.

Probably my least favorite issue of the series thus far, but it was far from bad. I liked the Hal story that started things off and even the Jessica story that followed, but it felt like things took a left turn afterwards. I don't mean to say that the short stories about Sinestro, Alan & the JSA, etc. were bad, but they just felt thrown in as filler before getting back to Hal at the end. Either way, I liked it for what it was. The backup wasn't bad, either. Thaaros's origin was certainly interesting, to say the least.

Another solid issue for this series, but also another one that's a little weak in comparison to the rest of the run so far. I just haven't found these Absolute Power tie-ins to be as interesting, unfortunately. It also doesn't help that I'm really missing Xérmanico on the art duties. Oh yeah, and I don't think really think Guggenheim's backup was incredibly necessary.

A step up from last month's issue for sure. Marcel's story was heartbreaking, but I would have liked a little more time spent building their relationship before showing that he had killed him. Aside from that, the pages before we see Marcel's backstory were done well, with Eddie continuing to be funny. I'm intrigued to see where things go with Marcel's dive at the end and I'm interested to see how Phillips wraps up this arc in next month's Issue 10.

I think this was a pretty solid start for this series. I understand the disliking of Rossmo's art, as I'm not even the BIGGEST fan of it, but I don't think it's bad. It will definitely take some time to get used to it. As for the writing, Phillips makes Harley a compelling character here. I know Harley can get a bit annoying for people, but I think this was a good balance of obnoxious and likable.

Some of the dialogue here wasn't my favorite, especially during the more action-heavy scenes, but I still liked this overall. I continue to like Phillips's voice for Harley and I think Hugo has been a fairly good villain thus far. I did like the overarching commentary about smiles from Harley's narration, though I also felt as though the art wasn't up to the level of the last two two issues.

Fun ending to a run that I really enjoyed for the most part, but kind of fell off a bit towards the end. While this issue wasn't quite what I expected, it still was an entertaining finale to Phillips' nearly-30-issue stint. I probably would have given this a 7 overall, but the last few pages bumped this up half a point for me. I'm extremely excited for Harley and Ivy to be reunited when Tini Howard takes over, and in G. Willow Wilson's current Poison Ivy run as well. Overall, an entertaining ending to a very fun run of Harley Quinn.

A certainly interesting new direction for Harley under Tini Howard. Boo’s art is pretty good and, for whatever reason, I’m surprised she’s doing interiors instead of just covers. Howard’s scripts are solid and the story is fun, but what holds this book back for me is the pacing. I feel like the pages used for the backup story (which was straight-up absurd, but also fun) could have been used to expand on the main story a bit. To keep the backup story, I feel like this story could have been stretched across one or two more issues. Overall, this was a fun start to Howard & Boo’s run on Harley and I just hope the pacing and writing improve as time goes on.

This was probably the best issue of Howard's run on Harley Quinn yet. The story continues to be more focused, which is a definite improvement over Issue 28. The story itself is pretty fun as well. I like Harley as a teacher and I'm interested to see how that side of the story develops as time goes on. I can't believe I'm saying this due to how weird it is, but I genuinely enjoyed Harley's psychic conversations with her hyenas throughout this. One other improvement seen in this issue is the backup story. In the last issue, the backup story was just a pain for me to read. While the one here didn't do much for me, it also wasn't the worst read for me either, which I see as an improvement. I hope the quality for this run only goes up from here and I think this has potential to get pretty good. I kind of wish the in-continuity dream backup stories would get cut, though, as I don't think they've added much to this series so far.

This book somewhat returns to how I was feeling with Issue 28, in that there's a lot going on, but it does it a bit better than said issue. This issue almost read like a roller coaster of sorts. It starts off nicely with Ivy trying to figure out how Harley got the cosmic treadmill. Then, it takes a slight dip with the Captain Carrot stuff. However, the quality comes back up when Harley and Ivy come back together and when Harley takes her students on a field trip. Then, we get the ending of this whole thing that kind of fell a little flat for me. Nonetheless, I still enjoyed just about everything here. Plus, we have the backup story. If you've read my reviews for this series prior to this issue, you know that I'm not the biggest fan of the in-continuity dreams we get for the backup stories. This time, I actually enjoyed the dream. It wasn't anything super special, but it really felt like how a dream. It's a somewhat outlandish plot without many intricate details, but still enough to advance the story. I don't know how to explain it other than that it just felt like how dreams feel like to me sometimes. With Knight Terrors set to make this, and almost every other DC title, take a pause, I hope this run's tie-in is able to maintain or improve the quality we've seen thus far.

I initially got worried when I saw the ratings here, but then I actually read them and knew it was going to be a bunch of bull. After reading this, I can say it's good. Is it great? No, but it's a solid and entertaining debut issue. Kendra is actually an interesting character that feels like she has a unique voice in this story. I know absolutely nothing about Galaxy, on the other hand, but I think she's a character that shows promise and I'm intrigued to see what comes of her involvement in this series. I also don't care if Axelrod put her in here just because she created her. I feel like other people would do the same thing if they could, because it's cool to have a character you created being involved in the book of an established DC character such as Hawkgirl. It also helps that the character isn't even necessarily bad, and it seems everyone's mad about it because she's new and LGBTQ+ (Which also doesn't even make sense because she's a literal alien). Plus, Nahuelpan's art is really nice to look at here. Now, I should probably end it there, but some of the discourse and comments surrounding this book are just so frustrating. The people who are acting like politics have suddenly appeared in comics recently and/or people who think politics have no place in comics are just so blinded. Are we going to act like the X-Men weren't created in the 1960s as a metaphor for the Civil Rights Movement? Are we going to act like Captain America isn't a political character whatsoever? Not to mention that DC literally changed Superman's motto to include "the American way" during World War II? Comics have been political for decades, and people who are mad about it now are, from my experience, people who don't agree with the political beliefs/ideas/etc. being shown. Do I think Superman's motto should include "the American way?" No, not really. He may have crashed into the United States, but he's a hero that fights for more than just citizens of the United States. However, I'm not going to completely trash a Superman book where he says it just because I don't necessarily agree with it. That's just dumb. If it's using politics to be hateful, that's another thing. However, this is not a case of that whatsoever. Like I said, this is not a GREAT book. There are various books that you could say are better than this. However, from what I've seen, people are just mad over something not worth the time to get upset about.

If the first issue didn't get enough undeserved hate, I knew this was gonna get bombed the second Galaxy said "trans." Does this issue feature a lot of Galaxy? Yes, but that doesn't make this issue bad. I said this in my review of Issue 1 and it still reigns true here. This is not the best book out there right now, but it's still an entertaining read. I liked Kendra and Galaxy's interactions throughout, which might be because I don't lose my mind at her inclusion in this series. She has a prominent role here, but it highlights her character while also helping Kendra develop as well. Either way, I understand that this series may not be for everyone, but I think this is another case of people overreacting to something that's not worth the time to be outraged about. This is a solid and interesting book.

Not quite as good as the first issue, but still good nonetheless. I appreciated the backstory on how Daken came to be Hellverine, even if it didn't explain the claw thing I mentioned in my review of the previous issue. Ohta's art continues to be a strong point as well.

Far from a bad book, but I have to say that this conclusion felt rushed. It reminds me of one of those movie endings that quickly wraps everything up and sets the stage for a potential sequel without leaving room to breathe. That said, I did think this had some good moments and I liked it overall. Otha's art was a particular strong point throughout. Oh yeah, and I'm really glad they gave, at least, some explanation as to why Daken's claws didn't look right in prior issues.

As a fan of this run so far, I wasn't sure what to expect when I found out that Ottley (one of my personal favorite artists) was going to be taking up the writing duties here. After reading, I wouldn't say the scripts are bad whatsoever. However, they're just a little "generic," if that makes sense. The art is great, as usual, and the story itself is good, but I just wish the actual dialogue was written a little better. Hopefully it can improve as this run approaches its conclusion.

A solid story for a one-shot tie-in. Listen, I understand why some people at Marvel may have thought that Earls would be a good fill-in artist for Nic Klein on Johnson's main Hulk series, but I do really think he needs to be replaced after how some of his pages have turned out, whether it's here or in the aforementioned main series.

I thought this was a pretty solid start to the series (if you don't count #0 as the start) and an improvement over Issue #0. Coipel's art is a huge step-up from Travel Foreman's art previously, which was one of my main issues with the #0. As for the writing, it's able to keep me interested in the story just enough to keep reading, even if this felt a little slow at times. All things considered, I still think this series has potential and I hope it's able to fully realize it sooner rather than later.

This was a big step up from the past two issues. I wouldn't go as far as to call it the best issue of the series, but it does give me hope once again for this run. I wholeheartedly agree with what Psycamorean said in their review, in that this feels like a conclusion of an arc that will give way to a fresh start. Hopefully that proves to be true with Issue 6.

Not the strongest issue of the series, but definitely one that's still interesting. I don't really know how I feel about this taking more of a soap opera route when it comes to the twist on the final page. However, I'll keep an open mind to it and I just hope it gives way for a good story

While I did like this issue, I also think it's definitely the weakest issue yet. I hope this isn't a sign of things to come for this title in Fall of X, but this feels a little unfocused, in my opinion. The stuff with Sebastian and Selene was interesting, but then we moved to the stuff with Hope, Exodus, Destiny, and Mother Righteous, which was solid, but nothing more. Plus, although Medina is a good artist, I'm really missing Lucas Werneck's art here. Luckily he's supposed to come back in the next issue. Moving back to the story, it does provide some intriguing ideas and concepts, and I'm interested to see what comes of Apocalypse's upcoming return, I agree with what KittyNone said in their review, in that this feels like less than the sum of its parts. Overall, while this was a solid issue by itself that is able to maintain my interest, it's also, unfortunately, a bit of a disappointment when thinking about how fantastic the rest of the series has been up to this point.

This was a fairly solid issue, but I do feel very similar to how I felt with the previous one, in that I found myself interested in the pages with Xavier and Sinister, but not so much with Mother Righteous, Exodus, Destiny, etc. There are certainly some intriguing ideas present here, I just wish everything came together nicer, especially for the final issue of a series I was really loving before Fall of X. That said, I'm still looking forward to X-Men: Forever and Rise of the Powers of X, both from Gillen.

I really hope this isn't a sign of things to come for this series. Don't get me wrong, this was a solid issue. However, it felt like it dragged a little bit in certain places, in my opinion. I do still think Earls's art is good, but I also understand how some people may be disappointed by the change from Nic Klein. Either way, I hope this arc finishes out strong with the next issue and I'm really looking forward to Klein returning with the following one.

I liked it for what it was, but I think it would have really benefitted from having a different artist. I don't think Earls is necessarily a bad artist or anything. I just think that, perhaps, his talents would be better suited on another book. That said, I did like the story and the writing a good amount.

I liked this issue as a whole, but I would have to classify it as the weakest issue of the series so far for me. I think it could be attributed to the way this book was formatted. I didn't dislike it or anything, but the fact that nearly every page (aside from one splash page) was a full page of art with no panels was a bit jarring. I'm not sure if I'm using that word correctly, but it kind of threw me off, if that makes more sense. This was the fastest I've read a book in a while, which isn't a bad thing. I just wish this had a little more substance to it.

I really just don't get the amount of hate for this book. It's not the greatest book ever published, but it's still entertaining. I will say that I'd like it to get back on track with the premise we were given in the first few issues, but I can't really call this bad when I enjoyed it. The backup story wasn't the best from this book either, but it was fun.

This was a fun start to this miniseries that I think could have been a bit better. This isn't due to the writing, as that was the strongest part of this and the main reason I'm sticking around. What taints this for me a bit is the art. Mostly, it's good, solid art. However, there are a couple of pages where certain things look kind of wonky. The first time I really noticed it was when Alex jumps up from behind the table starts shooting in the restaurant. She looked like she didn't have a neck and her face looked kind of weird in general. Nonetheless, I thought this provided an entertaining story with some well-written dialogue, even if the art wasn't the best.

The newest volume of Killer Queens maintains the fun tone set by the previous miniseries. The new story is certainly interesting with the introduction of Alex's sibling, and I'm looking forward to learning more about their past together. One thing I liked here more than the previous run was the art. It's not the greatest art in the world, but it was a definite improvement over what we ere getting before. Overall, this was a nice start to the new Killer Queens series and I'm intrigued to see how this story develops.

I pretty much feel the same about this issue as I did about the previous one. I thought the story was fun, but the art was a little lackluster. One example of this is, for some reason, seen on the back of the back, in which Max looks off to the side and he looked crosseyed. This also happens earlier when the pink alien looks back at Max after he told his story. The story is what makes this, though, as this is just a fun story that is engaging throughout.

A really solid issue here in what might be my favorite one yet. What the story is representing is pretty clear, to me, but it’s handled nicely. I feel a little indifferent towards the art. While I do like it better than what we were getting in the previous series, there’s still scenes that look better than others. However, if you’ve read my other reviews for this series, you’ll know that I’m mainly here for Booher’s writing anyways.

This miniseries continues to maintain a fun pace with its writing as we head into the final issue. This was the fastest read for me, but I still found this entertaining. We get some interesting character moments here as well, especially for Max. Plus, the art isn't as distracting as it's been in the two previous issues. There are still some instances I noticed that looked a little wonky, but it's not present as much as it has been.

With this issue, the miniseries ends on a fun note, which is perfectly fitting. This wasn't the most complex or grand book by any means, but it's still a fun read that's worth your time. The art still isn't the best, but the writing here is what really makes this enjoyable. Things are kind of wrapped up quickly, but the series was already only four issues. Nonetheless, this was a fun miniseries and that's all it needed to be.

I think this worked better than the previous issue. I enjoyed the art more this time around and I thought the style fit in with he story being told. I believe that what makes this an improvement over Issue 1 is that the story here made more sense and the art was more consistent. This wasn't the greatest book or anything, but it was an enjoyable read. However, I'm still very much looking forward to Wilson's regular Poison Ivy series continuing next month.

I'm thinking it might have just been me, but this issue got a little confusing for me at times with the dream logic, if that makes sense. However, this was still an enjoyable read for me. Despite my confusion, I still thought Waid handled the story well enough to get through this for the line-wide crossover. My main gripe with this is the art, unfortunately. Cruz's best moment here is the splash page of Mary's face in the burning house, but everything else ranges from good to meh. I wasn't a big fan of his art whenever he was on Jeremy Adams's Flash run, and he hasn't changed my mind with this issue. I'm just glad the story is entertaining.

The Shazam! tie-in for Knight Terrors ends on a good note. I'm not a big fan of Cruz's art, but I thought Waid's story was good enough. It wasn't anything extraordinary, but it was still entertaining. I thought it was a nice story about Mary helping her family members when they needed it and then them doing the same for her. It was nice, but I'm really looking forward to getting back to the regular Shazam! run from Waid and Dan Mora, as it's been super interesting thus far.

A little upset about Knight Terrors screwing with DC's lineup, but this wasn't bad. Reilly's art might be the main highlight of this issue. Reilly is an especially great artist when the setting of the book is in the past, as seen with his work on Al Ewing's Ant-Man miniseries, which is why I really liked his stuff in the beginning of the story. The story itself here was cool, but not quite up with the quality of Williamson's main Superman series right now.

The second-half of this miniseries is solid, just like the first issue. Reilly's art is, once again, one of this book's strongest points, if not THE strongest. Williamson's story is fun, but I'm ready to get back to the regular series of this, just like all of the other titles DC paused for Knight Terrors.

I think there a lot of great ideas here and I know Spurrier is capable of something more, as seen with the Way of X series I've mentioned in my reviews of the previous two issues, but this isn't quite reaching those same heights with me. I really liked the stuff with Juggernaut and Legion here, but I was left a bit underwhelmed by the stuff with Nightcrawler, Blindfold, and Zsen. I really hope that the team is able to pull things together here and make this a little more focused. With how the issue ended, I think we may be on our way to getting there.

As much as I enjoy a lot of the ideas being presented here, I still believe that everything needs to be pulled together in a better way. I enjoyed the stuff with Legion talking to Charles and I also really liked the conversation between Nightcrawler and Zsen. However, the way this issue, as a whole, was executed doesn't feel as cohesive as I'd like it to be. I know I keep talking about Way of X in my reviews of this series, but I'm just really hoping things can get back to those heights soon.

This was easily the worst issue of the series thus far for me, but it wasn't bad by any means. I think Duggan continues to show that he has a great voice for Kate and I liked a good amount of the heartfelt moments throughout this issue. Plus, Lolli provided some pretty nice art. My gripes with this come from the fact that I thought this was a relatively quick read compared to the previous eleven issues and I also just wasn't into the overall story here as much as said previous issues. That said, though, it's realy nice to have Kate back and I'm looking forward to seeing more of her as this series continues.

Pretty solid. Peralta's art continues to be this book's strongest aspect, in my opinion, though I also found the story to be written better and just more interesting here. I believe Hill has stated that he's a big horror fan, so I'm not surprised to see that gnarly page with the vampire ripping his skin off and chasing the nurse. It was, in fact, pretty crazy. Aside from that, I hope the upwards trajectory of this book continues as it wraps up with the next issue.

Miles teaming up with Blade and Bloodline was fun, but I'd have to also call this the worst issue of the series, unfortunately. I liked this, but I also felt as though the writing wasn't Ziglar's best. As for the art, I think Mancin did good in her first job at Marvel, though I do think there's still a fair amount of room for improvement. I'm very excited for Federico Vicentini to return with the next issue.

Another of the weaker issues, unfortunately, though, I do think that this was a solid ending to this current storyline before the title ties-in with Gang War. I wasn’t all that into the crossover with Blade to start, but it was entertaining enough to keep reading, and that reigns true here, in my opinion. Speaking of Gang War, I’m really excited to see how it turns out. I just hope that it doesn’t weigh this book down.

A pretty solid issue here, but I will say that it did move a bit fast for me. Maybe it was just me, but I felt as though Ziglar really breezed through a lot of story here. Though, Vicentini's art was nice here, as always. I just hope things slow down just a bit in the next issue.

This was another fast-paced issue for the series and while that's not necessarily a bad thing, I think it did take away from my enjoyment of the book this time around. Maybe it's because Gang War hasn't lived up to the expectations I initially had for it, but I just wasn't feeling this storyline like I was with the first two.

Not my favorite issue, but I appreciated it for what it was. Ziglar can't really start a new story arc with Blood Hunt coming up in the next few issues, though you could also argue that this could have been used to set something up in those tie-ins. We got the pages with Hightail at the end, but there could have been more in that regard. Either way, this was a solid story, but nothing incredibly memorable. The writing felt a little off at times, but maybe that's just me.

Far from a bad issue on its own, but still not the strongest compared to the rest of the series. That said, this is good. I appreciated that this picked up right after Miles and Dracula went chasing after Brielle at the end of Blood Hunt #3, and I thought the writing was solid. The art wasn't my absolute favorite, especially when keeping Federico Vicentini's in mind, but it was still fairly solid.

This was a fun start to this miniseries. It's pretty straightforward with its story and dialogue, but that doesn't make it bad. The art here is solid, and the story throughout just feels like a classic comic book adventure. While this was good, I was really hoping it would be as good as Jed MacKay's current Moon Knight run, with this coming out of Issue 25. While it doesn't reach those heights, it's still solid and entertaining.

The best issue of the series thus far. The story is fairly compelling and entertaining, but what stands out the most here for me is Godlewski's art, which looks better than ever. I really liked his work in Ed Brisson's relatively recent Alpha Flight miniseries, so I was glad to see him working here. All things considered, I hope the next issue ends this miniseries strongly, while also giving us an idea of where Ms. Marvel goes from here.

A pretty solid conclusion to a miniseries that really felt more like a short ongoing. It would be cool if Vellani and Pirzada were writing the new NYX book, but I'm also interested to see where Collin Kelly & Jackson Lanzing go with it. As for this, it was good and enjoyable for what it was. Seeing the Inhumans was nice, and I really hope Marvel uses them more going forward, though I'm doubtful.

I've been vocal in past reviews about how I'm not particularly thrilled about Kamala Khan being a mutant, but it's also not something I'm going to use as an excuse to trash on a book. In the case of this issue, I thought it was pretty solid. Some of the writing feels a little basic to me, but I'm giving the Vellani the benefit of the doubt since this is her first time writing a comic. As for Pirzada, the only thing I've currently read from him was Dark Web: Ms. Marvel (which was solid as well, in my opinion). The story itself here isn't anything new, as a lot of it deals with Kamala trying to balance the different aspects of her life and dealing with her recently finding out she's a mutant, but it's written well enough for me to keep reading. I wasn't the biggest fan of the art in the dream sequences, but I did enjoy the present-day art. Speaking of dream sequences, I thought the story being told there was interesting, as she feels like she's forced to choose between the Champions, the Avengers, the Inhumans, and the X-Men. All in all, while the story presented to us isn't anything truly unique, it's still a pretty solid read and I plan on sticking around for the rest.

I don't think that I really have that much to say about this one other than that I thought it was really solid and that I think all of the characters are written well. I'm not sure how I feel about the Doctor Surfer character, but I'm still interested enough to see where this goes.

This was a lot better than the previous issue. The first issue set up an interesting story and the second issue was just weird and felt out of place. However, the story feels back on track here. Things feel more focused, and we actually get some intriguing character work here. I can only hope that the next issue keeps the momentum going.

I would call this the weakest issue of the series thus far, but it was still really solid. I'm still interested in this current story Brisson's telling, especially with this new Carnelian mutant and the conflicts between Krakoa and Carnelia. I also enjoyed Flaviano's art a good amount. What makes me go lower than the usual 8/10 is that I just didn't find this particular issue's story quite up to the same standard as the last two issues.

This debut issue was a solid read, but it's also probably my least favorite of Spurrier's Nightcrawler work thus far. I think there are a lot of good and interesting ideas here, but they don't really come together in a way that fully realizes its potential. It was still good, though, and I just hope it improves with the other two issues.

A pretty solid start here. This is my first time fully reading a Kirby book, per my dad's recommendation, but I had a bit of an idea as to what to expect, especially in terms of dialogue considering that this is from the 1970's. Anyways, this was weird in a good way and I think the sci-fi world we're introduced to here is interesting from the start. I'm wondering if this is going to have an overarching story, or if it's just purely going to be one-off stories each issue. Either way, I'm intrigued to see where this one goes.

Not quite as good as the previous two issues, but I still enjoyed this. I was not ready to read about a villain who gets his powers from cocaine, but here we are. I can't pinpoint any particular reason(s) why this wasn't as good, in my opinion, as Issues 2 & 3. All I can say is that it just didn't work as well for me this time around. Hopefully this isn't a sign of things to come and that his miniseries is able to get back on track.

This was a book that I was really unsure about going into it. I really enjoyed the previous Punisher series with Jason Aaron, so I was interested when a new series was announced. Seeing David Pepose as the writer didn't give me a ton of hope. Don't get me wrong, he's not a terrible writer or anything, but it's documented that I'm not the biggest fan of his current City of the Dead miniseries with Moon Knight. Plus, I didn't really know how to feel about the new lead character either. His name (Joe Garrison) didn't really stick out to me like "Frank Castle" does, but I was willing to give this a chance. With all of that out of the way, I can say I actually enjoyed this a fair amount. It's far from my favorite book, but it reminds me of his first City of the Dead issue, in that it feels more like a classic comic book at times, particularly with some of the dialogue. I just hope this run doesn't follow the same trend of City of the Dead, in that I've like each issue that follows less and less. Either way, this was a solid debut issue that gained my interest and will have me, at least, reading the next one. Also, Wachter's art is pretty good throughout the whole thing.

While the art wasn't my favorite at times, I still thought this was a pretty solid start for this miniseries. While the story was good here, I was most intrigued by Curse. I know she was created relatively recently, but I don't remember reading anything with her in it up to this point. I do plan on reading Gerry Duggan's Marauders run at some point, which I've come to find out is where she firs appeared. Either way, I found her abilities very interesting and I'm looking forward to seeing where her side of the story goes. As for everyone else, I thought they were written well and I especially enjoyed Typhoid Mary. Come to think of it, this series is filled with characters I don't know that much about, but I still thought this was entertaining and I'm looking forward to what comes next.

There's a lot of very interesting ideas here, but the execution is a little lackluster, unfortunately. I liked this as a whole, though. Curse has been a super intriguing character to me since Issue 1 and I enjoyed the pages with her, Magik, and Saturynne here. I liked the brief interaction between Dust and Marrow as well, plus the moment with Northstar trying to contact Sif. Thinking more about it, this started off fine, but it picked up more for me in the later half of the issue. Hopefully the next issue provides a satisfying conclusion.

A pretty solid start here. This was far from perfect, but I liked what we got. Bazaldua's art isn't the best here, but I think she really shines when drawing Red Goblin. As for Paknadel's story, it's definitely interesting. I really like the concept of Normie's symbiotic being like a baby/puppy, and I'm looking forward to seeing how that develops.

I pretty much feel the same way with this issue as I did with Issue #1. Good, entertaining stuff, but the writing and the art could be a bit better. Once again, Bazaldua shines when drawing Red Goblin. Paknadel's writing is the strongest part of this book and, while I'm interested to see how this current story develops, I think this series has the potential to be a lot better than it currently is.

Once again with this series, this book is a solid read. Of course, I do think that there's a lot here that could be better, but it's still good. It's difficult for me to come up with something unique to say with each issue, as I've found myself feeling generally the same about all four issues so far.

A solid issue here, even with the Carnage Reigns crossover kind of derailing this title a little bit. The focus is more-so on Miles and Cletus, which would be fine if this wasn't Normie's book. Don't get me wrong, I'm not opposed to issues taking the focus off of the main character to highlight someone else, but I'm not really sure why this series is tying-in with the Carnage Reigns crossover to begin with. I'm just hoping Normie's encounters with Cletus and Miles lead to something worth while in the upcoming issues.

While the cover to this issue is awesome, what we got inside is just solid, much like the rest of the series. The story continues to be fairly entertaining, although one of my main gripes with this book comes from the way Normie talks in his inner monologue. Of course, the premise of this entire book isn't realistic, but I just don't buy a child like Normie would use the words he uses in his inner monologue. Maybe he's just smarter than other kids, but it just doesn't feel like a child speaking whenever I read this. Either way, I still enjoyed what we got here.

My feelings on this series haven't seemed to change very much, and that remains true here. A solid story with some solid art that could be a bit better. I did like Miles in this issue and I'm looking forward to more of him in this series, presumably with the next issue, at least.

A step-up from the previous issue right back to the usual quality from this series. The art still isn't my favorite, but it worked better for me here than it did in Issue 8. Plus, the story is definitely interesting. Rascal digging up Harry was kind of weird, but I understood the point. Either way, I'm looking forward to seeing how this wraps up in the next issue.

A solid finale for what it was, but also the weakest issue of the series for me. It's a shame, because I was enjoying this series more than the previous one, but both have an ending that's a little underwhelming, at least in my opinion. I know I sound down on this, but I didn't think it was bad or anything, hence my rating. I don't know, I just felt as though everything was wrapped up a little too quickly.

Kinda lame that this wasn't really an ending, at least it wasn't in my opinion. I, personally, think this should have just added more issues if its main story was going to continue. That said, this was solid. Though, it also the weakest issue of the series for me, which is especially unfortunate considering how strong it started. Hopefully what comes next steps things up a bit.

I wasn't super crazy about this debut, but I still liked it. I'm not sure why Marvel decided to relaunch this with the "Sensational" title, especially when there wasn't really much else that changed here. This felt more like She-Hulk #16 instead of Sensational She-Hulk #1. Either way, I'm interested by how Jen and Jack's relationship is progressing, as well as the possible doubts Jen seems to be feeling. I do think the ending was a little random and sudden, but I'm intrigued to see why Bruce is being brought into this. As for the backup, it was nice, but I don't really think it was needed.

Here's the thing about this issue. The main story on its own would make this issue get a solid 8/10 from me. However, I just did not care at all about the backup. I don't really know what the point of it was, and it just hinders my feelings towards this issue as a whole. Hopefully this series either drops having a backup story or the backups get better if Marvel decides to keep them on.

While the story here felt a little jam-packed, I did also think this was a nice debut for Campbell on the series. At the time of this writing, this is the first and only book I've read from her and I believe she did a solid job. I think she showcase a good understanding of the characters, and I also appreciated that she took Mark Waid's run and built upon it rather than just ignoring it since she's taking over the writing duties. Overall, I thought this was a good start for Campbell's run and I think it has the potential to be pretty fun.

Pretty good issue following the previous one's ending. The now-strained relationship between Jen and Jack was done well, as was Jen's heartbreak about Jack's situation. The more romantic direction of this book was done good in this issue, and I'm looking forward to seeing how Jen and Jack's relationship progresses and what comes of April and Mark in the upcoming issues.

The first half of this issue was well done. The brief Fight Club interaction was a fun opening. Jen and Jack trying to work through the new complications of their relationship was enjoyable. I did like Jen using Reed's call as an opportunity to create some distance, but the second half of this issue drags it down for me just a bit. Nothing was bad whatsoever, but it felt like an odd turn to randomly introduce this new character. However, I trust Rowell to make everything tie back together in some shape of form, and the last few pages made me intrigued to see what happens next. Plus, the art was a huge step up from the last couple issues.

The main story here was good, but it did feel like a very sudden end to make room for the second story (Which I might have actually liked more than the main story). For me, the second story resonated more and I found the art nicer than the previous story (although the art there wasn't bad by any means). Hopefully things pick up with Issue 13, as this has been one of my favorite runs currently.

For whatever reason, this worked a bit better for me than Issue 1. It was odd that Silk kind of took a backseat for this issue, but I did enjoy whenever she was on the page. As for the rest of the issue, I thought it was good and I'm still interested to see where everything's going. We got a little more information here, but I'm hoping we get more in the next issue. While the writing is solid, I particularly like the art here and I'd really like to see more from Guara.

A pretty solid debut issue. I wasn't a huge fan of Balám's art, but the story from Flores was interesting. It's far from revolutionary or anything, but it's a fairly simple premise that I think was written well enough to maintain my attention. Either way, the Nakayama cover is awesome.

A solid debut here. I feel a bit indifferent towards Borelli’s art. Foxe’s writing is what makes this more enjoyable for me. The story here isn’t anything groundbreaking, but it’s interesting enough for me to stick around. I’m mainly looking forward to more about Jessica’s son, but everything else was good as well.

A pretty solid issue here that just misses the 8/10 mark for me. That said, I thought that this was possibly the best issue Foxe has written for this series. I believe this is the best Foxe has written Jessica up to this point, which is a big part of why I would call this the best issue of the run so far. Plus, while my memory is a little foggy, Borelli's may have been the best it's been in this series thus far as well. I think what may be stopping me from giving this that 8/10 is the reveal at the end. I kind of knew that twist was coming, but I still don't really know how I feel about it. I think it may have been better if it was a clone of Jessica's son, but that's just me. Either way, I'm still interested enough to keep reading and I hope the series continues to improve.

I think this had the potential to be better, but I thought it was still fairly good for what it was. I am interested in the story between Jessica and Gerry, and I thought the way this ended between them, for now, was good and leaves the door open for my exploration later on.

I hate to say it, especially with Daniel Warren Johnson included here, but I would say this was the weakest issue of the miniseries so far. After Aaron & Kirk's story really picked up in the previous issue, the quality goes back down a lot here. It felt like nothing really happened aside from Vader arriving at the end. I don't know that I blame Aaron for that, though, as it feels like his story was only a few pages. As for Johnson, his art alone is worth the read. It's crazy and somewhat all over the place, but it was entertaining. As for the final story from Bernardin & Raffaele, I thought it was just solid. It felt a little out of place with the rest of the stories in the series so far, which doesn't make it a bad story, but there was just something a bit off about it. Nonetheless, I'm hoping the next and final issue brings the quality of this back up.

A fun middle issue for this miniseries. This space adventure did a solid job of conveying the effects of the past 90 years on the characters, and I enjoyed seeing their plan being put into place. I always love seeing Storm being badass, and it's why she's one of my absolute favorite Marvel mutants, if not my top favorite. This also leads to me not wanting her death to come at the end of the issue, but as long as it works for the story. Plus, not many stay dead in comics for long (Especially since we're going back to the normal timeline/timeframe after the next issue).

I didn't have incredibly high expectations for this book when it was announced, but I have to say that I thought this was a pretty solid start. My relatively lower expectations aren't meant as an insult. I just don't think I've read much, if anything at all, from either Maines or Barrows. This is far from a perfect book, but I think Maines did a fairly nice job here. I especially enjoyed the interaction between Dreamer and Amanda before the mission began.

A solid issue where I really liked the latter half where Dreamer confronted Amanda. Aside from that, the art from Barrows was a bit hit-or-miss for me. That one panel with Dreamer screaming at Amanda was a little terrifying.

A solid issue as a whole, but I especially liked the ending. I don't have much to say about the issue, but what I will talk about in this review has spoilers for the Twilight franchise (yes, the one with vampires and werewolves), so steer clear if you still plan on watching that (even though it's 2024) and you don't want spoilers. I'm not a huge fan of the movies, but, my favorite part about them is the twist in the final movie, in which the big fight between the two groups of vampires turns out to have merely been a vision that faked out the viewers. All of this to say that the ending of this book reminded me of that, which is specifically why I liked it.

Pretty solid overall. I will say that the action between Sam and Superman felt a little weird at times, with one example being when Superman is randomly above Sam and punching him in the face on one page, even though Sam was pummeling him on the page prior. Maybe I missed something there, though. This did also feel a bit rushed at times, but I did enjoy this issue as. whole.

This was fun for what it was, but I don’t know that I needed it. Redondo’s art continues to be one of the strongest aspects of this book, which makes it kind of suck that he’s leaving after this issue. Though, David Baldeón is a good artist, so I’m hoping for good things in that regard for upcoming issues. As for the ending of this issue, I’m not really sure how i feel about the Lex Luthor Revenge Squad, but I’m willing to give it a chance.

Another solid issue. I wasn’t all that into the family drama with Lex, but it was still good for what it was. As for the art, Baldeón’s work is stronger in certain spots than others, but there wasn’t anything bad at all.

A solid conclusion. I wish I could say that I loved Baldeón’s art, but it was just solid. Hopefully Rafa Sandoval’s works better for me as we get into House of Brainiac.

Still not the strongest issue of this storyline, but still pretty solid and enjoyable nonetheless. Brainiac Queen is interesting to me, but I don’t know that I see her lasting long.

A solid start to this Absolute Power tie-in storyline. I'm glad to see Zatanna being used and I'm interested to see her side of the book with Clark going forward. I wasn't incredibly into the part with Jimmy, Siobhan, and the Luthors, but I do think it has some potential. In any case, it's great to have Campbell back on the art duties.

This continues to be solid, but nothing spectacular. Campbell's art is probably the best part of this for me, and it's a shame he won't be on the book following this storyline. Though, I can't really complain about Dan Mora being the main series artist, either. Aside from that, I hope this wraps up well.

This was a fun issue as a whole, but I do think the execution could have been a lot better. The banter between Peter and Miles is entertaining, but I also think it can become a little much at times. Though, I do like it overall. The biggest factor that drags down my score a bit is the constant shift between "then" and "now." The stories in both times were good, but I felt like the story kept unnecessarily jumping around. Hopefully Weisman can improve upon that within the next few issues. As for Ramos, I think he did a really solid job here. All things considered, I believe there's a lot of potential for this series to get better and I hope it does.

Killer art from Nic Klein, as per usual. This issue was solid for the most part, but kicked up towards the end during the confrontation between Thor and Glaive. Intrigued to see what's up with the "lightning wolves" at the end. As for the final page, I'm very excited to see how this Doom & Thor story unfolds!

Not quite an 8, but still a pretty good issue. The writing is solid, and Nic Klein's art is once again outstanding. Klein seems to always kill it with his larger illustrations (My personal favorite from this issue being when Mjölnir bursts right through the Nidhogg's eye). I wasn't expecting Hela to team with Doom, but it adds another layer to the story that makes me a bit more intrigued to see where this is all heading.

While I do think that an issue with Thor, Doom, and Thanos should be a lot better and/or crazier, this was still good. This is one of my favorite issues of Grønbekk's Thor so far, and it's a shame that it's ending with the next issue just as things were getting more interesting to me. She was given a tough task with this "mini-run" of sorts.

Out of the two "post-Cates" annuals, this is the one I enjoyed more. The art here from Roberson was great and I think it really fit with the story. Speaking of which, Kelly & Lanzing's story was enjoyable. It wasn't my absolute favorite from them, but I was still entertained by Thor fighting M.Y.T.H.O.S. and I also enjoyed his interaction with Peter. I'm still not sure how I feel about Immortal Thor after reading the preview/prologue at the end of the book, but I'm interested enough to check it out. If anything, I really like Coccolo's art.

This is nothing spectacular by any means, but it's still a charming, solid book. The characters all have potential to be compelling and, aside from the main story with the gem, this sets up an interesting story for Taegukgi of him exploring his origins and his roots. Something I especially like about this book is that it shows that superheroes don't just exist in North America. Yes, there are characters from different continents, but most of the comics coming out today are based in the United States or North America. I think it's really cool that a series such as this allows readers to explore characters whose stories take place in different countries and continents. All things considered, this did enough for me to get me on board for the ride and I'm intrigued to see how this story develops.

This was another enjoyable issue that deviates from the psylot gem plot introduced in the previous issue in order to explore Taegukgi's past. Seeing him basically being adopted and then turning down into a darker path of crime was interesting to read. Hyung showing up at the end generates some intrigue from me as well.

A little bit of a slower issue, but still good nonetheless. Nothing here was particularly new or groundbreaking, but it was all solid. Segovia was also a pretty good fill-in artist, in my opinion.

Another solid issue. I think this storyline has potential and I'm looking forward to seeing it play out. I don't really have that much to say, honestly. I am glad to see Meyer as the ongoing series artist, as I think he's proved to be a pretty good pick already.

A pretty solid issue that kind of acts as a setup for the finale of this storyline in the next issue. It was nice to see Swamp Thing again and I still think it would be cool for him to join the team going forward, especially since he doesn't have his own book at the moment. Either way, with next issue also being the last issue for Taylor on the writing duties, I hope everything gets wrapped up nicely.

I wasn’t as into this as the rest of the story, unfortunately. This just wasn’t as interesting to me, which is why my score is 0.5 lower than the first three issues and even the latest issue of Taylor’s Titans run (#6). Though, I will say that I really liked Meyer’s art and I thought the ending was super interesting.

I'm glad we finally got more of Captain Krakoa here, though I was a bit disappointed to not have much follow-up to the Kingpin reveal from the last issue. Either way, this was a solid book, just like the rest of the series has been. Hopefully the next issue brings everything together nicely.

I think this came together nicely enough. I think this series had the potential to be something much better, but this was far from bad. The pages with Deadpool were fun and I think Duggan writes Captain America solidly. It was also cool for Rogue to have a relatively big moment in the series by sacrificing herself, even if Deadpool was there to keep her alive in the end.

Perhaps I spoke too soon when I said "we are so back" in my review of the first issue. I really enjoyed that one, but we haven't gotten anything meeting that standard since, unfortunately. Don't get me wrong, I enjoyed the previous issue and this one, but it's continued to drop in quality for me. I'm not super into the romantic story with Silver Sable, but I did enjoy the stuff with Vulture and Nimrod. I am interested by the Vulture/Warlock hybrid of sorts seen at the end of this issue, so hopefully this is just a minor bump in the road.

While I don't agree with their score, I do agree with what Derby stated in their review about Peter Parker, in that he was the best part of this issue for me. Everything else here was solid, but I'm not all that into the romance storyline with Nightcrawler and Silver Sable. I also think it was a little weird to have a whole page just saying "and they do" so Nightcrawler's conversation with Mystique can be in the X-Men: Blue one-shot. I feel like that could have been an editor's note with the page being filled with something else.

I love thinking of this as the title of the Bleeding Cool article about it: "When your mom hits on your girlfriend." That was definitely the weirdest part about this. Aside from that, this was a solid conclusion to this miniseries. While it wasn't as good as I had hoped it would be after the great first issue, I still liked this as a whole and I thought the last few pages were written nicely, especially.

An improvement over the previous two issues under V. (#3 & #4), but still not quite the best this series has seen. I was more interested in Dylan's story this time around and I really hope his side of this run continues to experience an upwards trajectory. I will say that I wish we had more Al Ewing writing Eddie at this point. Aside from the first issue that was written by both Ewing and V., four out of five issues thus far have been written by V. and only one out of five have been written by Ewing. I think switching back and forth every issue might be a better way to go with this concept, as Eddie's current story has felt a bit ignored at times. It also doesn't help the the next issue is also a Dylan-focused one written by V.

I don't know how I feel about the sleeper agent part of this, but I did like the stuff with Dylan inside the "symbiote mindscape" or whatever it's called. I thought this was more interesting than other issues V. has written in this series, although I still believe his content isn't really up there with Ewing's work on this title.

A solid issue here. I hate to say it, but I'm starting to dread whenever V. is writing an issue. It's not because he's not good at writing, as I typically enjoy his work and I do think his story with Dylan in this series is pretty solid. It's just that Al Ewing absolutely kills it just about every time he writes this book. I like V. as a writer, but I really do wish this series just had Ewing writing it. As much as I like V., Ewing's writing is just much more interesting when it comes to this series.

I still miss whenever Al Ewing is writing this series, but this issue wasn't bad by any means. I do believe that this was an improvement over her previous issue and I do think that Natasha with a symbiote is interesting, but I wish this tied in more with the story we've been getting previously. I think that maybe Ram V. leaving the title to sign exclusively with DC may have had a hand in derailing previous plans for this series, but I just wish this was better. Hopefully everything ends up coming together nicely.

While still not the best this series has been, this was an enjoyable issue. Otha's art works really well here and I hope he sticks around for whenever Grønbekk is writing. I do think this story has promise, but I also think it could have some better execution, as much as I did enjoy it. Hopefully things pick up a bit with the next issue.

A pretty solid issue here. Eaton's art isn't my favorite, but it's also not at the level of Garry Brown's art in the last issue of Percy's X-Force (#18). I felt like he drew Louise mostly well, but Logan was a little more questionable. Speaking of Percy, though, I think the story started off strong and went down a little as time went on. I will say that I did like the ending, even if it being the end of the issue felt a bit sudden.

Another solid issue for the Vampire storyline. Eaton's art still isn't really my favorite, but it's not bad whatsoever. I especially liked the frame where Louise was looking up at Father Cole in the beginning. I did also like the "assassin" line from Omega Red. It probably wasn't really that funny, but it made me laugh.

A pretty solid issue, though it was a little slow at times. I do think Percy continues to write Logan well and I liked the interactions he had with Sevyr, despite it feeling a little rushed initially, despite my comment that this book was slow in certain instances. All that said, this story definitely has potential and I hope it picks up in the next issue.

A solid issue once again. Kubert's art continues to be really nice, and Percy's story is still fairly interesting. Some of the dialogue wasn't my absolute favorite, but there wasn't anything particularly bad or anything. Hopefully we get to see more of Solem soon, as I really enjoyed him in X of Swords.

A little bit of a mixed bag here, for me. I liked everything in this issue, but this just felt so much more interesting when it was focused on Jeff as opposed to the titular character. Percy just did a really good job with the writing on that front. As for Logan's side of things, everything was fairly enjoyable. I just didn't really find it as engaging as the other side. Hopefully that changes soon.

I liked Solem in X of Swords, but there was a lot more of him here than I expected. This was still good and interesting, but I wasn't as invested here as I was with the previous arc with Deadpool or even the last few issues of X-Force. Hopefully that changes soon, though. This series was just at a high point with the aforementioned Deadpool storyline.

Far from a bad read, but this continues the downward trajectory I mentioned in my review of Ghost Rider #17, unfortunately. I'm just not finding myself as interested as I was in the beginning. With only one part of this crossover left, I hope it can at least finish strong. Also, on a quick side note, I can't believe I missed Danny Ketch's helmet from the last Ghost Rider arc being the same as the Weapon X helmet. I do not know how I didn't realize that until reading this issue.

This was kind of a weird issue. I liked it as a whole, but I was fully expecting the hunt for Logan's clones to go across all of the issues of this arc. So, I'm interested to see where the rest of this current storyline goes. As for this issue itself, it did feel a little packed at times, especially with Logan and Bruce going from Canada to Japan to Madripoor. The art was pretty cool, though.

Not quite as good as the previous issue, but still good for what it was. Seeing Wolverine and Black Panther together was cool, and I thought they were written fairly well together. Of course, Storm had to come up at some point. I'm really looking forward to Spider-Man in the next issue, as I hope it can close out the arc strongly before we get into Sabretooth War.

The weakest issue of the series so far, which is unfortunate. It's not a bad issue on it's own, but it's such a hard left turn from what the last two issues were doing. I understand focusing on the Exiles and bringing them into the fold, but I was just hoping for a little more here with how explosive this arc started.

A step up from the previous issue, which is a good sign. Hopefully the upwards trajectory continues. That said, this issue could still be better. I appreciated seeing the perspectives of both Logan and Victor here, but I just wish the issue as a whole was a little more interesting. I don't know.

I feel very similarly to how I felt with the previous one. This wasn't a bad book whatsoever, but I also feel as though this could and should be stronger. I don't know. I really enjoyed the first two issues of this story, but everything else afterwards hasn't met those standards, at least in my opinion. With the arc and the run as a whole ending soon, I hope things can finish strong.

A nice improvement over the last issue, in my opinion. I'm really liking Ryp's art, for the most part, which isn't surprising considering I liked his work in Benjamin Percy's Wolverine series. In the writing department, I think Waltz does a super solid job with Logan, and I also liked the moments Louise got. We're only halfway through this miniseries, so I hope I continue to enjoy it more and more.

This continues to be one of the better tie-in miniseries for Blood Hunt, despite not really being connected to the bigger picture that much. Ryp's art, once again, fits Wolverine really well and Waltz's story is fairly entertaining.

Certainly not a bad issue, but I did find it to be the weakest of the run thus far. There were some nice character moments here, but I just wasn't as into this as everything else thus far. Sampere's art definitely continues to be a highlight, though.

I wasn't as into this as X Lives of Wolverine #1, but it's still good. Vicentini's interiors are solid and there are moments where his art really shines, though I don't know how well it fits as a whole with a book that seems to be a stealth one focused on Moira. Either way, it's far from bad. As for the story, I liked it. Yes, it's much more of a Moira book than a Wolverine book, but I still found it entertaining. I'm interested to see the larger connection between this miniseries and X Lives of Wolverine.

This has good stuff in it, but it's just not executed as well as it could be, in my opinion. The stuff with Moira was probably my favorite here in terms of the story, but the Wolverine stuff bringing in Laura, Scout, and Daken was far from bad. Some of the dialogue, particularly when Daken begins fighting with Logan, wasn't my absolute favorite. Vicentini's art fits a lot better with that half of the book, though, as there's more action.

Not as good as the first issue, in my opinion, but still cool for what it is. It feels a little all over the place for me with the amount of times it jumps through different time periods, but I didn't dislike anything here. Cassara's art is super solid, which should be a given. Hopefully the story comes together a little smoother going forward.

I’ve really been liking this series so far, but I just found this one a bit off, unfortunately. I still liked it, but I’d also label it as the weakest issue thus far. I can’t exactly pinpoint any specific gripes I have with it. It just didn’t hit like the previous nine issues. Hopefully this is just a minor bump in the road for what’s been a super enjoyable series up to this point.

I’m still not feeling this current story as much as I’d like, unfortunately. There are definitely some bright spots here, but I don’t feel it’s up to the standards previously set by this series. I’m also not the biggest fan of Bazaldua returning after having Joshua Cassara back for the last two issues. Though, I do prefer the art we got from them here as opposed to their previous art in this run.

I thought this was a good issue that could have been so much more. Don't get me wrong, I enjoyed what we got here, but I felt as though the character developments for Kid Omega could have been handled better. Things started out relatively strong, but I wasn't the hugest fan of the direction it ended up going. I don't know. I just wish we got something deeper here.

This issue was definitely at its best when it was focused on Beast. Don't get me wrong, I didn't dislike the stuff with Mikhail or anything, but it just wasn't my favorite. I found it a little difficult to get as interested as I feel I should have. As for Beast, I've enjoyed his slow descent into his darker side. I'd like more of that as the series progresses.

A pretty solid read here in which I thought Percy did a good job of writing Kraven, once again. As multiple other users have stated in their own, respective, reviews, this didn't really feel all that satisfying after how the past few issues played out. Kraven randomly escaping at the end of the book was a little weird. This was nice, but it could have been a lot better, in my opinion.

A little surprised to find out that this storyline is ending so soon after the reveal of the Man with the Peacock Tattoo’s identity (literally one issue ago). That said, this was a little underwhelming, but I still liked it. I continue to like the focus on Domino and I hope that doesn’t go away moving forward.

This has some bright spots, but I do wish I liked this a bit more. I did enjoy this more than the last few issues, though. I don't know, I just wish this was written a bit better, because I do think a lot of the ideas here are good. Hopefully things come together a bit better as this storyline continues.

Certainly not a bad issue, but not the strongest from this series, either. Percy's story had its strong points, but I just couldn't really get into Picciotto's art here. It wasn't the worst or anything, but it just looked a bit too rough for me in certain spots. I'm glad to see that Robert Gill is returning in the next issue, and I hope that Beast's return means the level of quality for this series is rising back up, even if there isn't much longer to go.

A pretty solid issue here that I do think could have been a bit better. Regardless, I did think there was good stuff throughout this, particularly with Beast's clone. I'm sure, at least part of why, he's here to have Beast back as a hero for the post-Krakoa X-Men relaunch, but I do think he was handled well here and not just shoehorned in. I'm looking forward to seeing how this series wraps up.

Another solid issue as we near the conclusion of the series. This run coming to an end with the next issue feels a little weird, in my opinion, as it feels like there should be more to come than just one issue. Furthermore, I don't think Issue 50 has more pages than normal, unless I'm mistaken? I don't know, I just hope everything wraps up nicely in the next issue.

This was far from a bad read, don't get me wrong. However, I really wish this was a lot better than it was. I found the strongest part of this issue to be the interactions between the two different Beasts. Other than that, the action here was good throughout. I just wish this was a stronger conclusion, considering that this went for fifty issues. Hopefully the conclusion of Percy's Wolverine run is stronger than this was, as it's going to end up going for the same amount of issues as this.

This was kind of a weird one. I didn't dislike it, but this reads more like an issue of X-Men from the 90's than an issue of Hickman, Krakoan X-Men. That 90's feel is primarily attributed to Booth's art, but Hickman writes it that way as well. Like I said, I don't not like that about this, but I much prefer everything Hickman has done on this title previously as opposed to this. This did have some cool moments, though.

This was a fine issue, but not my favorite whatsoever. Wolverine’s stuff was cool, but my favorite part of this was the last few pages with Rogue. He interactions with Destiny and Rocket were well-written, and I can only hope we delve more into the ongoing plot very soon, as we’re 10 issues into this run.

This was a fun issue, but nothing special whatsoever. For me, some of this reads like generic dialogue, which is a shame considering that this is the first issue with the new team following the 2022 Hellfire Gala. However, it's saved by a fairly engaging adventure for them that ties into the Judgment Day event. I appreciated Iceman getting some time to shine here and I can only hope it's a sign of things to come.

Pretty good issue with the first part of the Brood storyline on the X-Men side of things. I've been liking the dynamic between Firestar and Iceman as of late, so I hope that can be shown in more depth at some point over the next few issues. As for Laura and Synch, I enjoyed seeing them put some of their skills learned from their time in the Vault to use. Overall, a solid start to X-Men's side of the Brood arc and I'm interested to see where things go from here, especially after that ending.

Another enjoyable issue from Duggan and Caselli. I will say that, although there is a lot going on here, it's still entertaining. I'm glad to see the return of Nightmare in this issue, as I enjoy him as a character and I remember enjoying his last appearance in the title (Issue 4). Plus, I didn't see the ending coming whatsoever. My only real complaint/criticism here would be, as multiple others have said in other reviews here, that there's just a bit too much happening in this book. I think this either needs to be a bigger book, or some of these stories need to be put on hold until the Brood stuff is finished. I hope things can get just a little more focused in the next issue or just very soon.

This was a step-down following the highly interesting Issue 22. I really liked what was being set up there, but this doesn't do that much to follow up on it, in my opinion. We get some nice stuff with Mother Righteous in the beginning, but then we cut to the X-Men fighting a Stark Sentinel. It was an entertaining battle, but I'm not entirely sure why it was there after little-to-nothing being said about his sentinels in the series beforehand. Perhaps I missed something, but the only reason I wasn't surprised to see this machine here was because I look at solicitations and I knew Tony's involvement with Fall of X is up ahead. It could also be the fact that, at the time of this writing, I haven't read anything from Duggan's Invincible Iron Man series. This isn't even mentioning that Scott and Jean are, apparently, taking a break from their relationship without it being mentioned before Scott just says it almost casually to Emma. Either way, I would very much like for this book on focus more on the adamantium skeleton situation introduced in the previous issue, as I'm really interested to see how that plays out.

Let's just get this out of the way now. Noto's art was fantastic here and it has to be the best part of this issue by far. Other than that, Duggan's story was a solid side quest of sorts, as others have been describing it. I did like the interactions between the Fantastic Four and Rasputin IV, though I'm not sure how much we needed this issue. At least we got that great art from Noto and an awesome cover from Joshua Cassara, who's art I'm looking forward to seeing in the couple of issues.

Another solid issue for this series under Fall of X, though I do feel as though this is a bit scattered at times. The first few pages of this issue with Gunfire were really intriguing, but there wasn't really any follow-up to it here whatsoever. The story with Firestar being forced to be a double agent was interesting, at least. I'm hoping that Doctor Doom's mutant team ends up being cool, as I'm not really sure how I feel about them currently based solely on their designs.

This was solid, but not my favorite. I think the idea of Doom's X-Men was better than the execution of it. I'm not opposed to seeing them in the future, though. I just thought their introductions and quick backstories were a little bit rushed since it was all in one issue alongside the main story. Cassara continues to put out great art, though.

It feels like there's a lot packed in this one. Maybe it's because Duggan is tasked with covering what a lot of different mutants are doing, but that doesn't change the fact that this feels a bit dense. Everything was good and entertaining, but I just wish there was a little more room to breathe. Cassara's art was really good though, as per usual.

While it is a little bit all over the place at times, this was still an enjoyable one-shot introducing the new X-Men team. I’ve stated this before in other reviews, but I’m not really a fan of the art changing mid-issue. It also doesn’t help when you have some of the art being fantastic, and some of it giving Emma Frost a weirdly large forehead. Going back to the story itself, the ideas presented here all provided intrigue, but I was mainly here for the reveal of the new team (which does look promising). Hopefully the flagship X-book has a clearer direction this time around, as Magik, Iceman, and Havok being on the team interests me.

The best of the X-Men one-shots for Blood Hunt, in my opinion. That said, this did feel a little crammed overall and I would have appreciated a bit of a slower pace, perhaps with certain aspects cut out. In any case, Gill's art was super solid throughout this.

Definitely the strongest issue of this miniseries. This time around, things didn't feel super dense and crammed, as we got a lot of good character work here, particularly with Destiny, Sinister, and Jean. Plus, Maresca's art was pretty nice here. I just wish the rest of the series could have felt like this.

A good, action-packed issue here. I really liked DIck taking charge and directing the rest of the heroes. Mora's art was also just fantastic throughout this. That said, I do wish this had a little more time to breathe. At times, it felt like we were just jumping around without much time to process everything going on.

I thought this was a pretty good prelude issue to the event. I'm glad Zdarsky and Williamson got stories in here relating to their, respective, current runs on Batman and Superman, though I'm a little confused as to why King didn't have something with Wonder Woman, considering she's part of the heroic trinity with the two aforementioned heroes. It's not like her series doesn't have any tie-in issues for the event. Either way, I thought everything here was built up well, and I thought all three stories were good, especially in terms of balancing being a lead-in to Absolute Power and being a solid story by itself. The way Jay acted in the first story was a little annoying, though.

Very good motivation for Amanda provided here. She's been a looming threat in the DC Universe for ages now, and I really appreciate this delving into her past. This had some pretty solid art as well, but Ridley's story is what really shines here. Of course, it could have been better, but I'm pretty happy with what we've gotten so far.

I really liked the Amazo robot here gaining will and the exploration of that. Everything else was good throughout this, including Santucci's art, but that aspect was definitely the highlight of this issue. Hopefully the rest of the series continues to get better from here, as I've liked each issue better than the last so far.

A pretty solid start here. I’m gonna give this a little bit of a higher score than the more recent issues of Williamson’s current Superman series, since I liked Sandoval’s art a lot. All things considered, though, I’m definitely interested to see where this story goes.

A pretty good opener that does a good job of establishing emotional stakes for this series from the start. As a fan of Taylor's run with Son of Kal-El, I'm glad to see this continuation maintain quality. I'm not quite sure how I feel about the Injustice universe coming into play soon, but I'm a fan of both of the games, so hopefully everything works out. Excited to see where this mini goes from here!

Man, this book is two-for-two on having a good ending. However, I will say this one's ending is better. Not sure how I feel about Ultraman getting his neck snapped out of nowhere like that, but good lord was it done well. Plus, as I alluded to earlier, Injustice Superman's final words of the issue were fantastic. As for the rest of the book, I enjoyed the conversation between Jay and Lois, as it gave a look into what it's like for the both of them in being with a superhero. This was just solid, good stuff all around.

This wasn't quite as powerful as the previous issue, but I did enjoy it a good amount. The overarching story of the murder mystery was interesting, though I especially enjoyed the interactions between Alan and Spectre. You could argue that it's a little bit preachy, but I thought it was fairly well-written. Tormey continues to do a really nice job with the art as well, especially with Spectre.

I thought this was a well-done origin of Red Lantern here. I honestly don't really understand how some people can dislike this as much as I've seen. It's not anything groundbreaking or incredibly unique, but I think it's still an interesting and fairly well-written story. I think Sheridan did a good job with the dynamic between Alan and Vlad. I also thought it was pretty funny that Alan lured Vlad in just to absolutely deck him in the mouth.

I liked this one more than the previous issue, as this just reached the 8/10 mark for me. For whatever reason, I just found the story a bit more interesting and more well-written this time around. Godlewski's art continues to be nice as well. I hope the quality of this series continues to go up or, at least, stay the same as it is currently.

A solid issue that really picked up towards the second half. I very much agree with what DerbyComics stated in their review, in that this is dealing much more with a larger narrative than a good chunk of the other Fall of X runs have. While others have felt more self-contained within each issue, this continues to build one ongoing story and it does so nicely. That's something I really like about this miniseries and I hope it continues until the end.

I wasn't the biggest fan of how this ended, but I did think the issue was really solid as a whole. There's nothing really new for me to say about this issue that I haven't already brought up in my reviews for the previous four issues of this miniseries. Brisson wrote a good, engaging story and Godlewski provided some pretty nice art. This was definitely one of the best Fall of X miniseries.

A fun milestone issue here that, in my opinion, is dragged down a little bit by the backup stories. Quickly speaking about the main story, it was an entertaining one that does a great job of showcasing Peter's wit and just how fun Spider-Man is in general. The villains arguing amongst themselves was inevitable, but it was still enjoyable and I liked that it was the reason the Sinister Adaptoid went crazy and lost. Moving to the backups, they weren't necessarily BAD stories, but they were just a little unnecessary. The first story is nice for what it is and I don't have much to say about it. As for the second story, I don't really know why we needed a Jimmy Kimmel story. It was fine, but not my favorite. Lastly, the third story was just kind of there on the last page. It was a neat concept, but there wasn't enough there for me to enjoy it that much. Nonetheless, this was still an entertaining book overall.

The balance between humor and seriousness is better balanced here, in my opinion, which allows for a more enjoyable read. While he still has some funny lines, Ben feels more like he's out for blood than he has previously, which is great. While I do think Rek-Rap is a dumb character, he's dumb in an entertaining way. I could see him getting used beyond this storyline, but he's not someone I'm strongly anticipating the return of.

Another case of people going insane over the fact that Peter and Mary Jane aren't together. While the villain here isn't that interesting to me, the rest of this book is cool. Seeing Mary Jane and Paul's time together as nice, which is something I probably think because I don't immediately hate Paul. MJ spent like four years in this dimension unsure of whether or not she would ever return home again, so it's completely understandable that the two of them got together, especially after they found the two kids and took them in. As for everything after we're caught up to speed, I think it was done well. Peter's confrontation with the Fantastic Four and Captain America shows how sour of a note things were left on before Issue 1 of this run, and it was just good writing, in my opinion. Along with all of that, I didn't even realize there was a backup story in this issue until I got to the end of the main story. Rainbow Rowell's backup is very much a random, slice of life story, but that's something she's proven to excel at with her She-Hulk run. As I've stated in previous reviews, I like the pairing of Peter and Felicia and I hope it's something that stays for a while. This issue gets an extra 0.5 just for the nice backup. All in all, don't listen to the people trashing this book into oblivion.

I think that this was a good issue following the newsworthy, to say the least, Issue 26. You can read how I feel about Kamala's death in my review of that issue, but I thought that this did a nice job of making Peter and Norman feel the impact of what happened. Norman, once again, feels guilty for his past sins and I'm glad that we got (and appear to still be getting) some follow-up to the end of Gold Goblin. As for Peter, him being a bit more violent (as seen in the beginning of this issue during his & Felicia's encounter with Shocker) is an understandable direction for him following Kamala's death. As for the stuff with Doctor Octopus, as another user stated in their review, I can't believe this issue made me feel bad for a set of robotic arms. I'm interested to see where things go with him, especially after the announcement that Superior Spider-Man is supposed to return sometime in the near future. On top of things, we got another case of good art from McGuinness. Speaking of McGuinness, the cover is great and it's crazy how this homage came out just two days after the passing of the legendary John Romita Sr. (if you haven't seen his cover for Amazing Spider-Man #55, go check it out; it's a great cover).

I wasn't as into this as the previous three issues, but I still enjoyed this. Peter confronting MJ and Paul was kind of funny to me, given the real-life hate some "fans" have towards Paul. However, I did enjoy that section of the book, as well as his fight with Kraven. As for Norman, I know it's probably too much to ask from Marvel to keep him "good," but I really hope he doesn't delve back into the Green Goblin persona. At least not for a while, as I've really enjoyed him since his sins were removed. It was a really good tease on the final page, though.

I liked this one a lot more than the previous issue. Rek-Rap is actually the highlight of this issue. Zeb's writing with him is genuinely pretty funny and I always found myself entertained whenever he was directly involved with whatever was happening, which was the bulk of this issue. Plus, I enjoyed the Repossessor here and I'm intrigued to see what happens next with him basically swallowing Peter at the end.

Red-Rap is genuinely becoming one of my favorite characters and I can’t believe it. Aside from that, this was a pretty solid issue, though I didn’t like the sort of sudden switch we got from the Rek-Rap stuff to the Gang War “prologue.' Both sides of the issue were cool, but it just felt like too sudden of a switch, in my opinion. Either way, I'm looking forward to Gang War and I just really hope it delivers.

I think it's kind of funny that the team on the cover of this fights together for a few pages and then, all of a sudden, just disbands to go protect different areas of New York so they can have their own books. Regardless, this was an entertaining issue. I liked the Tombstone stuff here especially, as Wells has done a good job writing the character since the first arc of this series. There was also some good humor with Spider-Man and She-Hulk towards the latter half.

A good tie-in issue here, but I can't help but wish this was another issue of the Amazing Spider-Man: Blood Hunt miniseries. Especially since Wells wrote this issue and Justina Ireland is writing the miniseries. I think it would help to make things a little more cohesive. Also, I feel as though the previous arc could have been stretched out a bit more and it could have ended here, rather than only being two issues. Thus, the Blood Hunt miniseries could have been four issues instead of three. Either way, this was a good read thanks to Wells. As for Romita Jr., he had some solid work here, but he's still not my preferred artist on this title.

This wasn't the strongest issue or anything, but I thought it was pretty fun. MacKay used this as a way to slow things down a bit and give the characters a chance to catch up with one another in certain regards, specifically the duos of T'Challa & Thor and Vision & Wanda. I understand that the large amount of focus on Jarvis might put some people off, but I found it entertaining.

I thought this was fun for what it was. The Avengers getting involved in the current X-Men situation is cool and I appreciate this stuff going past just the “X-books.” This wasn’t my favorite issue or anything, but I still think this was a fun read. MacKay seems to have a nice grasp on the characters and I also thought Mortarino did a super solid job on the art duties.

Another super solid issue that ties in with the current X-Men situation. With this issue, I feel very similarly to how I felt with the previous one. This was a nice, entertaining resolution of sorts to this smaller story. I'm really looking forward to seeing what MacKay does with Blood Hunt.

I was really interested to see how this new team gelled together with the main team being featured in the main Blood Hunt miniseries. I think everyone here is written well, something MacKay is no stranger to doing, especially Steve. I think he has a really solid grasp on the character and I'm looking forward to seeing how things go with the next two issues. Additionally, I'm very glad to see Hercules and Kate on the roster as well. Neither of them have gotten super prominent roles recently, so this is a nice change, even if it's just during Blood Hunt.

Another fun tie-in issue with Blood Hunt. Villa's art was a little rough on certain pages, but I still liked it overall. As for MacKay, I, once again, think he nailed the characters. I could totally read a Hercules miniseries from him after reading how he writes him here. I'm looking forward to seeing how this wraps up.

A fun conclusion to a fun arc overall. I think MacKay, especially, writes a good Hercules and I'd really like to see more of him whether it's in this series or somewhere else. I'm not currently caught up on Al Ewing's current Immortal Thor run, but I would imagine he would nail Hercules as well.

I thought this was an intriguing start to this series that establishes the characters and the mystery going forward. If you enjoyed Ewing's Wasp miniseries and his Ant-Man miniseries, this is definitely something for you to check out. The majority of this has some investigating with Janet as she tries to figure out what happened after how her aforementioned miniseries ended, and I thought it was nicely done. This issue, as a whole, is primarily setup, which is to be expected. In this case, the set up is definitely interesting, especially considering the final few pages. All things considered, I don't know that I'm completely "sold" on this series quite yet, but I will be adding it to my pull and checking out the next issue. If anything, this was a pretty solid start.

Following the fallout of Joker War in the previous issue, we're now able to delve more into an actual new storyline. Clownhunter and Ghost-Maker are both interesting characters that show potential, but there isn't anything here to make me invested in them quite yet. Tynion IV writes an enjoyable story here, and the art from both D'Anda and Pagulayan is solid. All things considered, I like a good amount of the ideas presented here.

This was a pretty enjoyable first issue for Batman following Infinite Frontier. Batman and Ghost-Maker continue to be fairly enjoyable together, and everything else was interesting as well. Scarecrow is one of my favorite Batman villains, so I'm excited to see him get a big spotlight with the Fear State event. Speaking of said event, I thought this laid some good groundwork for it and I'm intrigued to see how it develops. Plus, it's really great to have just one singular artist on this title again. It also helps when said artist is the incredible Jorge Jimenez. Along with this issue, the backup Robin story was entertaining. I'm probably not going to read the follow-up in Detective Comics, but I am planning on checking out Williamson's Robin run once I finish collecting all the singles.

This was a good start to the proper Fear State storyline for Batman. Jimenez continues to put out fantastic work here, and Tynion's story is certainly intriguing. Batman is basically cracked out of his mind because of Scarecrow and I thought it was interesting to see him that way, as opposed to him always having his guard up completely without error. The backup story isn't bad either. I actually like Clownhunter and I think he has potential to become a pretty good character. It will just depend on how he's handled in the future.

When it comes to the main story and the backup, this was a case of both not being quite as good as what came before them. However, I still enjoyed both. The main story moves forward nicely and it does feel like things are set up for the end. Plus, Jimenez is back to art duties for the whole thing and he continues to be great. As for the backup, it was another engaging read. While the main highlight was Corona’s art, the writing is fun as well and the story as a whole once again sells me on trying Cloonan & Conrad’s Batgirls series. Hopefully both stick the landing as we head into the final issue of this series before Joshua Williamson takes over.

Enjoying this new alternate universe storyline. I'm a big fan of world building, and I liked what Zdarsky did with that here. Speaking of Zdarsky, I really enjoy the way he writes Bruce's inner narrative (not sure if that's what it's called). As for Hawthorne's art, it was solid, but I do have to say it's definitely a bit of a step down from the amazing Jorge Jimenez. Back to the story itself, the ending did exactly what it was supposed to by making me interested to read the next issue :) (The backup story was pretty good as well).

While I wish the meeting with Alfred was explored a little more, I understand why it wasn’t in this issue. My favorite part was probably the fight between Harvey and Bruce. It wasn’t the longest fight, but the dialogue and narrative were great. With the ending, it’ll be interesting to see what’s going on with the Arkham Caves. I will say that Hawthorne’s art is good in some places (ex. Bruce vs Harvey), and a bit lacking in others (ex. third-to-last and second-to-last pages). However, Zdarsky keeps me interested with great scripts (Solid backup story as well).

This was a pretty fast-paced conclusion to the Ghost-Maker backup stories, but I really enjoyed it. The story was just fun, but I wasn't crazy about the art. Lopez's art is very stylized, and I think it worked in some places and not so much in others. Some of it just looked to obscure/abstract for my liking. Nonetheless, I enjoyed the final chapter of this Ghost-Maker story and I'm looking forward to reading more of him.

I thought this was a good issue that officially starts the Fear State event. Tynion's writing here is rock solid and he maintained my interest throughout this issue. Despite this being a good amount of recap, there's enough new information here to make this worth the read. As for Federici's art, I've seen good and bad reviews of it, but I enjoyed it. I thought it fit right in with the theme of this storyline, despite some minor hiccups on certain pages. All things considered, I thought this was a good Alpha issue that establishes where all of the main characters are at before we really delve into Fear State.

I genuinely don't understand a lot of the hate for this book. Batman has been good since the start of Zdarsky's run on it. As for Catwoman, I've mainly enjoyed Howard's run on it, even if the last chunk of issues weren't my favorite. Speaking of that latter run, I feel as though it's gotten an unnecessary amount of criticism. I feel as though that criticism has now come to this one-shot. It's crazy to see a majority of the people hating on this book are also shifting the blame to Howard as much as they can. I'm not going to act as though I think Howard is one of the greatest writers ever or even one of the absolute best out there currently. Personally, I would consider Zdarsky a better writer than her based solely on what I've read in this moment in time. However, to act like this being "bad" is Howard's fault and not Zdarsky's is so annoying. Rant/tangent aside, I enjoyed this and I thought it was an intriguing start to this crossover. The art wasn't my favorite, but I didn't feel like it was bad or anything.

This was honestly my favorite issue of the series so far. While still a little all over the place at times, this felt a noticeably more focused than the rest of this series has been thus far. While various members of the team are located in multiple different parts of the world throughout, all of their situations really feel like they all fit into the overarching story that Joker Incorporated brings. Plus, the story itself here is enjoyable and interesting, as the team is seemingly being forced to break possibly the biggest Batman rule there is.

It's a shame that this book has only been at its best when it's coming to a close. Don't get me wrong, I've enjoyed every issue of the series thus far, but this issue and the previous one were the best in the series so far, in my opinion, and we only have one more to go. This and Issue 10 have just felt smoother and the different stories/situations from each members/sub-group have felt more connected with the title's overarching plot, which was one of my biggest issues with the series. That said, I wasn't expecting Joker Incorporated to be this good. I certainly thought it would be interesting, but this has been a pretty cool story so far and I'm looking forward to seeing how everything wraps up in the next issue.

I will admit that I was expecting a bit more from this issue based on how much I enjoyed Thompson's Black Widow series, but I still did enjoy it a good amount. The bulk of this issue is setting up the team, which is completely understandable. I'm not super knowledgeable with most of these characters, so that may have attributed to my score. Harley is the one I know the most about. Black Canary and Batgirl I know a little bit about. As for Big Barda and Zealot, especially, I know little-to-nothing. That said, I did enjoy all of the team members. I think the team has an interesting dynamic that will be shown more as we really get into this story. Plus, I really liked how this book ended. Meridian showing up and finally laying out the mission after it wasn't really talked about at all in the issue was cool, but I loved Harley's reaction to it. As a matter of fact, I don't really get the outrage surrounding Harley here. I do understand some of the disappointment about her inclusion on the team, I don't think it's anything to be THAT upset about and I didn't think she was ever really overbearing or annoying in this issue. All things considered, this was a good debut issue that shows potential for this series to just get better as the story develops.

While we got through the formation of this team in Issue 1, I must say I was expecting them to start getting into the actual mission this time around. However, I still enjoyed what we got with the team actually planning and preparing for everything. I'm looking forward to seeing the team and King Shark trying to get into Themyscira in the next issue, and I'm a little bit surprised at how much I'm enjoying Harley in this series after a lot of people seemed to be upset at her inclusion in this series.

I think, with the main story alone, I would have given this an 8.5/10. I thought it was, once again, well-written and I liked the interactions T'Challa had with Storm and Gentle. I will say that I preferred Moustafa's art to Cabal's, though both were good. I'm not usually a fan of the art changing midway through the issue, but, at least, everything we got was good and the change in artists actually made a little sense with the setting changing from Earth to Arakko. As for the backup stories, they didn't really do much for me. Ba's story had some nice art, but the story and writing were lacking for me. Ridley's second story about Tosin wasn't bad, but it was a little bit of a letdown after hearing so much hype and speculation surrounding Tosin when this was coming out. For both of these backups, I felt like they kind of dragged on too long and I feel like these pages could have been used to make the main story longer or, perhaps, these just didn't need to be here at all.

I don't think this was up to the heights of the beginning of this run's first arc, but I thought this was an improvement over the last few issues. Although I do believe some stuff with The Colonialist is a little on the nose, but that didn't take away from my enjoyment of this book too much. Hopefully this storyline can build upon some of the interesting ideas from the aforementioned previous arc and use them a little more effectively than that arc did.

The ending reveal...is certainly interesting. Aside from that, I thought this was a good issue. This was well-written for the most part. I'm not sure how I feel about how Captain America was written here at times, but that didn't take too much away from my enjoyment of this. Also, I felt as though Peralta's art wasn't as good as the previous two issues, though it wasn't bad by any means.

Following the ending of the last series from John Ridley, I wasn't sure what to think going into this issue. After learning more, the concept intrigued me, Allen's art looked super cool, and I like T'Challa's new design. Now that I've finally read it, I can say that I like what Ewing and Allen are putting together and I'm very interested to see where things go from here. I like that this seems to be making T'Challa more of a street-level hero, despite being on the current Avengers roster. The letter at the end from Ewing said that she wanted to explore more of Wakanda outside of the capital, and I think that's a great idea. This was something that was seen a little bit in Ridley's run, and I'm really glad it's being dived into more here. Plus, Allen's art throughout the book is very nice. This was a good opening issue and I'm looking forward to seeing how this story unfolds.

Another pretty good issue here. The previous issue was a lot of setup, and this builds upon that a bit. The two highlights of this book for me have to do with Beisa and Deathlok. Firstly, the confrontation between Beisa and T'Challa was pretty cool and I thought their conversation was well-written. Beisa shows promise and I'm intrigued to see what comes of her in this series. As for the second highlight, the scientists taking control of Deathlok is intriguing and I'm looking forward to seeing how his eventual face-off with T'Challa plays out. I do wish my copy of the book didn't display the wrong preview, however. I'm not sure if it comes up on any digital versions, but at the end I was shown Taurin Clarke's main cover for Issue 4 instead of Issue 3.

This series continues to maintain a good pace that keeps my interest. Ewing has done a fairly solid job of making Beisa a likable character and I'm looking forward to learning more about her as this series progresses. I don't have that much to say about this issue, but I thought T'Challa bringing up his wedding with Ororo was funny.

I thought this was a pretty interesting start. It's nothing particularly amazing, but I found it engaging throughout. I like the way Phillips writes Clint especially. I also really enjoyed the subversion in the ending twist. Of course you'd think Clint isn't guilty of whatever crime he's being accused of. That said, though, I'm sure we'll end up getting some added context as to why Clint did it to begin with.

This was a fast first issue for this series, but it definitely does a good job of establishing mystery and intrigue for what's to come. This is my first book from Hill, so I wasn't really sure what to expect here. As for Casagrande, I first saw her art in Kelly Thompson's great run on Black Widow, so I was really glad to see her here. Her art is, once again, fantastic and one of the best parts of this book. Going back to the story itself, I like the new characters that are established and I'm interested to see where things go from here. Adana is already a crazy villain solely based on the fact that Blade cut off her head and she caught it in her hand.

I liked that the pace of this slowed down a bit here, as the first issue went by pretty fast. The story here is good, but at times it felt a little run of the mill. However, I still enjoyed a good amount, given my 8/10 rating. Plus, Casagrande's art is absolutely outstanding and definitely one of the strongest parts of this book, if not THE strongest. She's just on a different level with her art and I will always look forward to a book featuring her work.

A bit of a step-up from the last two issues, in my opinion. The story felt a bit more consistent and concise here, which I was glad about. Also, Ferguson did a pretty nice job filling in for Elena Casagrande here. I didn't even realize he was a different artist at first when I looked at the first page. Hopefully this series can maintain the upwards trajectory in quality, or at the very least stay at this level.

I know this read more like a Blade & Hulk one-shot, but I still enjoyed it for what it was. Pinti did a really solid job on the art duties, and I think Hill wrote a relatively simple, yet simultaneously interesting story. It wasn't anything revolutionary, but I enjoyed it. That said, though, I hope this series gets back on track with only three more issues left to go.

Another super solid issue as we near the end of the series. Once again, it's nice to have Casagrande back doing the art. She always does a really nice job. As for Hill's side of things, I thought the story was good and entertaining. I especially enjoyed the interactions between Blade and Draven. One other point I want to make is about Bald going to Hell. I understand that it's not something he may typically do, but I think it's good for writers to not put the characters they write in the same situation(s) over and over again. Blade going to Hell is cool, in my opinion, and I'd be happy to read it instead of constantly reading about him fighting vampires.

I'm glad this book as been able to maintain this level of quality. I enjoyed the first three issues, especially #3, but then things took a hard turn at #4 & #5. Though, it's all been good reading. Here, Hill and Pinti do a good job in their respective roles. I'm not sure how I feel about this series doing a bit more comedy (at least from what I've noticed), but it's entertaining. I just hope the next issue sticks the landing, especially with the battle between Blade and the Adana being built since the beginning.

This series continues to improve quality-wise with this issue, in my opinion. There are still things here that aren't my absolute favorite, but I think that Trujillo is really getting into a nice groove when it comes to his writing. I really like the direction Jaime is going in right now. The inner-conflict that comes with crossing a line of violence isn't a new story to superhero books, but I think it's being handled and executed in an interesting way here.

This series continues to be at its beast as we approach the end of this arc. Trujillo does a nice job of building the tension and intensity throughout this issue, and I think Guitérrez's art only makes those feelings stronger. I especially liked how Blood Scarab ended up being absolutely unfazed by the big attack in the final few pages.

This was a nice ending to this arc, although I'm not sure how I feel about Jaime suddenly being teleported away at the end of this. On one hand, I think it's a nice way to allow the series to go into a new story without immediately having to do a lot of follow-up on this arc, but on the other hand, I also feel as though this issue would have been better had it ended on Jaime sitting there digesting what just happened. Either way, I liked this and I'm looking forward to what comes next.

Possibly the new weakest point of the crossover? That said, though, this is still good stuff. It may feel like a bit of a side quest, but it does set up Cable's involvement in the event and I like all of the character dynamics here. Plus, Note's artwork is always a pleasure to look at.

I thought this was a pretty solid start for this run. Straczynski takes a lot of time delving into Steve's past with this issue, and I thought he did it really well. My favorite parts of this issue took place in the flashbacks. However, the stuff taking place in the present is good as well. I don't know that we needed to spend as much time on the villain as we did, but I still enjoyed it. I agree with what Mout stated in their review, in that I'm not entirely sold on him yet, but I think the potential is there. As for Saiz, his art is really nice and I think it fits well with Straczynski's story. All in all, while this was an entertaining start for this series, I hope the next issue starts to bring more developments pertaining to the ongoing plot.

A good issue here and I think this story is finally going to pick up more steam with the next issue. From my perspective, it seems that this issue and the first one have been establishing Steve's past and building up how good of a person he is, which is something we should already know. Plus, they've been building up Asmoday/Travis as a big villain. Both issues have been good and entertaining reads, but I just hope Issue 3 adds a little more excitement to this story.

Definitely an interesting start here. I'm not the biggest fan of Bazaldua's art, but it was solid here and there's nothing for me to really complain about all that much. However, similarly to a book Bazaldua was also recently on, Red Goblin, the strongest thing about this book is the writing. While it does seem to have some similarities to the plot we'll be getting later this month in the MCU's The Marvels, that doesn't make me dislike it. While I'm not completely sold on Yuna's character, I do like her and I think she has potential to be good. I like the new villain, The Omen, as well, and I'm looking forward to learning more. All things considered, this was a really solid beginning to this series that gained my interest going forward.

I'm going to preface this review by saying that, as of this writing, I have not read the previous 10 issues of Carnage under Ram V. I'm getting into this for the Carnage Reigns crossover coming up, so I thought the writer change might be a good place to start for this series. While it definitely feels like I'm jumping into a story part-way, it also feels like the start of a new story. I plan on reading the previous 10 issues eventually, but these are my thoughts for now. This was a pretty solid and entertaining read, even without reading those aforementioned issues. I think Paknadel has a solid voice for Cletus, and I enjoyed how he wrote his interactions with Ken. Antonio provided some good art here as well. Funny enough, I don't really have that much to say about this other than that I enjoyed it and I'm looking forward to reading more.

Another entertaining issue from Paknadel. I like the way he's been writing both Cletus and Ken, and I'm actually looking forward to the Carnage reigns crossover based on how this one ended. Plus, while Roge Antonio gave us some pretty solid art in the last issue, I really enjoyed Manna's here and I'm glad it seems as though he'll be the artist for the series going forward.

While I would call this the weakest issue of the Carnage Reigns crossover thus far, it's still a fairly enjoyable read. I continue to think Paknadel writes Cletus well, but I'm a little indifferent towards Galán's art. For some reason, I thought we were getting Francesco Manna for the rest of this series, which would have been great. While I do like Galán's art here, I wasn't the biggest fan of how he drew Cletus here, for whatever reason. I liked his art more in other spots, but I feel as though Manna is a much better fit for a character like Carnage.

This continues to be a fun crossover with this issue here as we get into the second half. While I was feeling a bit confused as to why Red Goblin was included in this when reading this crossover's previous issue (Red Goblin #5), I must say that I liked how he was written here alongside Miles. I do feel a little underwhelmed when thinking of this as the final issue of this run, but I also understand that the story being told here doesn't actually end until the Carnage Reigns: Omega one-shot.

This was the best issue so far, in my opinion. It took me a little bit to get into Flash's side of the story, but the Cletus side was super interesting and nicely-written, in my opinion. Also, it ended up getting absolutely brutal. Carnage isn't a character high up on my personal rankings and I was also a bit hesitant about Grønbekk writing this, but I hope she can keep this up.

A relatively strong issue here, in my opinion. I do feel as though recounting certain events from Grønbekk's Venom #31 works both to this issue's benefit and detriment. On one hand, I think this different perspective allows the story to grow and become fuller. However, the re-use of a fair amount of dialogue without much alongside it makes it feel like it's just re-hashing a bit to fill space. Either way, I liked this issue and I continue to be interested as to where this current story goes.

An entertaining finale to what's been a really solid crossover. I was initially a little skeptical about this going in, but it ended up delivering. Ohta's art throughout is really good and only makes the book better. As for Ziglar's writing, it wasn't anything groundbreaking, but it was fun. Good stuff all around with this one and the crossover as a whole. I'm looking forward to what's coming next for Miles, Normie, and Cletus. Especially so with Miles, as I really enjoyed the first arc under Ziglar.

This was the weakest issue of Howard's Catwoman thus far, but it was still entertaining and fun. This was a simple girls trip for Selina and Harley that also had some mystery and lingering effects from the opening arc sprinkled in so this isn't completely labelled as filler. I'm not really against filler content, though, as it can be some of the best content when done right.

This was another well-written issue for the series that sees a bit of a step-up in quality as we now get more focused on the overarching story of this run. While I really enjoyed Nico Leon's art in the first four issues, I do like Basri's art here and I think he could be a good rotating artist for this series with Leon. I'm interested to see where things go from here.

I thought this was a fun adventure for Selina and Valmont, but my main issue with this is the cover. Now, I'm not going to let this change my score or anything, but Batman is on the cover of this when he's not even in the issue at all. He's not even in a flashback or anything. Nonetheless, I still enjoyed this and I liked seeing Selina go against the Tommaso family. I still don't have a concrete opinion of Valmont, but I don't dislike him or anything.

While I still enjoyed everything that came before it, things mainly picked up for me with the second half of this issue. My favorite part of this was the conversation between Selina and Bruce, and I thought it set the stage nicely for the third, and final, part of this current storyline. This does something I didn't like about the previous issue, however, in that the cover is a bit misleading. Yes, Punchline's actions within the DC Universe recently do have an impact on this story, she's not physically present in the issue whatsoever. It doesn't change my score of the book, but it is a little annoying.

While I never really formed a solid opinion on Valmont, I will say that I think his character was wasted a bit, as another user stated in their review. Despite that, I think this was a fairly well-written issue. It wasn't quite the epic climax I think it was intended to be, but I liked most of everything here. My favorite part of this was the conversation between Selina and Bruce, which is something I think this run has done consistently well. I wasn't a huge fan of the art changing from Leon to Miranda and then Ferreyra, but I think all three artists did their job well and fit their sections of the story.

This one JUST got to the 8/10 mark for me. I thought the premise of this was pretty interesting, and I think this issue did a fairly nice job of establishing a solid story going forward. I thought it did have a bit of a faster pace at times, but the book still maintained my interest throughout. I'm intrigued to see how the rest of the story unfolds.

I just wanted to start this off by saying that, as much as I've enjoyed Aaron Kuder's art in this series so far, Germán Peralta did great here. I think he would be a really good rotating artist with Kuder for this run. As for Ahmed's writing, it continues to be very interesting. I believe his pacing has been good throughout the series so far and in this issue as well. The only thing I felt a little "off" about was Matt basically performing an exorcism on Ben at the end. I didn't dislike it or anything, but I didn't love the execution either. Though, this was a good issue in general.

A really solid first issue for this Daredevil tie-in series. I really liked Davila's art throughout and I think Schultz provided a good voice for Elektra. I do think this story has all the potential to become better as things progress, and I hope that's exactly what this series does over the next three issues.

This was a good opening issue for the Dark Web crossover. The only ongoing book in the crossover I haven't been reading is Venom, but his story isn't enough to confuse me whatsoever. Even then, I wouldn't hold it against the book since I don't know enough about it to judge. I'm not sure how I feel about Eddie reverting back to murderous Venom, but I don't think it will last past this storyline. As for the rest of the book, the Kubert's art and Wells' scripts are both done well and provide intrigue going into Dark Web. With a Ms. Marvel 2-issue miniseries set to be included, I really wish she was actually in this issue. The same goes for Mary Jane & Black Cat, although Mary Jane was present briefly in the beginning. Nonetheless, this is an enjoyable read that sets the stage for what's to come with the rest of this event.

I don't know if it's because I've been handing out a lot of 7's and 7.5's while reading some of the miniseries from Fall of X, but this I ended up liking this one more than I thought I would. Easily the best issue of the series for me thus far, as everything just clicked a lot better for me here. Foxe's writing is the best its been here, especially shining in the beginning with Rogue and Gambit, as well as the brief Chasm appearance. I also enjoyed the pages with the evil Madelyne Pryor, as she was absolutely brutal in this issue.

Much like the rest of this run, this was a lot of fun. Wong's scripts for Wade are hilarious, and I think she does great capturing his character. Plus, she makes all of the other characters enjoyable as well. I hope we get some more development with Valentine, as she's an intriguing character and there's a hint here that there's more than meets the eye. Coccolo's art was solid here as well. Overall, a fun issue in a really good run so far.

This was a fun date issue for Wade and Valentine. After fully showing up in the last issue, Princess is already an entertaining character. Truthfully, it doesn't take much for me to like an animal character. While I've been liking Coccolo's art for the past five issues, Pina's art is pretty good here too. This was just an enjoyable read, and I'm interested to see where things go with Wade and Valentine, as well as the Atelier.

A fun adventure for Stephen and Clea. Clea's narration is done well and I enjoy how MacKay writes her. Not that it's bad, but I'm not the biggest fan of Ferry's art. However, it worked better during the scenes not set in reality. Overall, this was just a good, entertaining issue, which is something you can usually expect from Jed MacKay. Looking forward to see how the story with Aggamon goes, and I really hope Nightmare comes back into play, as his situation sparked a fair amount of interest from me.

This was probably my least favorite issue of the series, but I still enjoyed it. Wong has never been a character I would go out of my way to read a book about, and there isn't that much to help that case here. However, the adventure the himself, Pandora, and Zee go on is pretty fun and I thought it was funny when Billy immediately backtracked after finding out who Wong was. So far, I think one of the things holding this series back is the art. When you read MacKay's Moon Knight, you have the outstanding Alessandro Cappuccio drawing (most of the time). Here, Pasqual Ferry has been the regular artist for the first three issues, and I can't say I'm the biggest fan of his art. It has moments where it's pretty good, and others where it's just not my favorite. I was interested when I found out there would be a guest artist on this issue, but I think I might like Ferry's art better than MacDonald's. After the next issue, it seems Issue 6 will have Juan Gedeon as the guest artist and I can only hope his art fits better with the story.

A fun one-shot issue of sorts following the awesome "General Strange" storyline. This didn't get to the heights of that story, in terms of quality, but I still thought this was a nice change of pace that, maybe, planted some seeds for future storylines to come. I also enjoyed the Beyruth as the guest artist. Not everything was fantastic, but I didn't dislike any page I saw whatsoever.

A fun issue here to wrap-up the two-issue D&D-esque story. I think I may be giving this as high as a rating as I am because I'm super into fantasy stuff, but I still found this to be a good read. I also think that, just like his Avengers series, MacKay has a really good grasp on all of the characters. Taskmaster is especially great. Hopefully Blood Hunt ends up being good, also.

A nice follow-up to the ending of Blood Hunt #1. I understand the criticisms of Ferry's art, as I haven't always been the biggest fan of it, either. However, I feel like it's grown on me more as the series has progressed and I also think it works in this issue. Aside from that, the story is pretty solid. I liked the fight between Blade and Clea, and I'm looking forward to where things go with Stephen's brother seemingly set to take over his physical, vampiric body. If I had one complaint, if that, it would be directed towards Blade's dialogue. I think it might be because I just almost all of Bryan Hill's recent Blade series before diving into Blood Hunt, in which the dialogue is not very long whatsoever, but I felt as though Blade's dialogue may have been a little overwritten. Like I said, though, Hill's Blade series may have caused this to be a bit jarring for me.

This started off a little slow for me, but it definitely picked up as it continued. I enjoyed the fight between Victor and Wong, along with their dialogue throughout. Ferry's art was pretty good here as well, and I think this may have been the most I've liked it in the series, or just in a while, at least.

A pretty fun issue with a lot of focus on Bats, which I did like. Once the god of dogs showed up and talked about Bats being his vessel, I knew I was turning the next page to see a big, muscular Bats, but I still couldn't believe what I was seeing when I did, and I mean that in a very good way.

I think I may be giving this the rating I am due to the fact that I just really enjoyed the stuff with Daredevil. I also think Lore is handling Brielle's situation pretty well, as a whole. I would much rather have this than have her briefly struggle with having to kill Blade before just deciding to do it. I'm a little surprised that this was one of the better tie-in series, in my opinion, but I'm also not complaining about it.

This was an intriguing first issue. I would have liked to see a little more of Jubilee, but I'm sure she'll get more time as this series goes on. Rogue and Gambit were nicely written here as well, and I like Gambit's animosity towards Apocalypse. Speaking of which, another thing I particularly enjoyed throughout this issue was Apocalypse and Psylocke both wishing to be called something different. I do wish there was some explanation on how to pronounce Apocalypse's new name, but I also appreciate keeping the Krakoan language mysterious. All things considered, I'm interested to see how things progress with this run and I hope it's only up from here in terms of quality.

This was a bit of a step-down from the previous issue, in my opinion, but I still liked this a fair amount. I just wasn't as interested or engaged with this as I was with Issue 7. That said, I still liked and enjoyed this as a whole. I'm interested to see if the puppy warwolf will show up again at some point.

The quality of this series continues to go uphill and I love to see it. I think all of the characters were written well here, and I, once again, particularly enjoy how Howard writes Rogue. It also helps that the story is more interesting and engaging this time around, as it feels a little more linear than what we got in Issue 9. To's art was pretty solid as well.

I thought this was a nice start. I feel very similarly to DerbyComics, so I would recommend you to read their review of this issue as well. What I can say for myself is that Duggan did a good job of making this feel like a big deal. While it wasn't one of the best books I've ever read, I think Duggan handed and wrote all of the characters well. It also helps when you have Werneck on the art duties. He always kills it and this was no exception.

Another good issue for the series that isn't weighed down too much by being a tie-in with Dark Crisis. This mainly acts as a setup issue that provides three intriguing scenarios in three, respective, different worlds/realities. The first sees the two kids seemingly moments away from being confronted by a Flash-themed villain, the second puts the two speedsters (who I forget the names of at this time) set in what looks like a Mad Max world, and the third puts Wally and Ace in a classic comic reality. Good stuff.

Another good Dark Crisis tie-in issue for this series. The Mad Max world is my least favorite of the three different realities, so I'm glad it was the first one covered of the three established in #783. As for the middle, the Night-Flash is definitely an interesting concept, but left a little to be desired, in my opinion. However, the final universe really brought things back up in quality for me. This was the best of the three setups in the previous issue, and this is still the best of the three stories, in my opinion. There's such an eerie vibe going on amongst the bright colors and classic feel, I love it.

A slight step-up in quality from the previous issue just for the pure fun this book can be. Adams does great in making a family-oriented book, while not making it TOO corny/cheesy. While Nahuelpan's art isn't my favorite, it's definitely not the worst I've seen by any means. While the past few issues were enjoyable, I'm glad this is the last of the Dark Crisis tie-ins.

A pretty fun issue that probably comes with an enhanced experience for wrestling fans such as myself. This was an entertaining one-shot issue, which is a nice break after the four Dark Crisis tie-in issues that came before. Wally gets to blow off some steam and have a fun time with OBM after a heartfelt talk. Adams continues to be great.

A good continuation of the plot with Mayor Wolfe that was setup before the Dark Crisis tie-ins. Him giving the Rogues badges to enforce the law and the reveal that he has powers are both very intriguing ideas that provide the beginning of what appears to be a good story. Speaking of the Rogues having badges, Wally laughing his ass off at Leonard was great.

Not sure how I feel about Wolfe being an avatar for the Lords of Order, but everything else here was pretty well-done. The conversations Wally has with Hartley in the beginning of the issue and with Wolfe following that one were very enjoyable. Although there was a little left to be desired for me, everything still came together here to provide an entertaining ending to this arc.

A good start to what seems to be the biggest arc for this series yet. Cruz's art is a bit of a step down from Pasarin, but it's not terrible. As for the story itself, this does a good job of setting the scene with each member of the Flash Family. There are solid and interesting stories established amongst the overarching plot of The Horizon landing on Earth. All in all, this was a well-done opener for The One-Minute War.

Jeremy Adama' run on Flash ending with a family-based arc only feels appropriate. This was a pretty good set-up issue that brings together an interesting team for this story. I'm specifically glad to see Plastic Man and Metamorpho getting used here. Plus, I'm becoming more and more of a fan of Gold Beetle here, and I hope that doesn't change with the next two issues. I'm looking forward to seeing where this all goes.

While I'm still not a fan of the art changing mid-issue, this was still an entertaining book as we head into the final issue of Jeremy Adams' Flash run, which is a shame. I've been enjoying this series and I really wasn't ready for Adams to leave quite yet. I'm really hoping the new run from Spurrier & Deodato Jr. is good enough to somewhat justify knocking Adams from this title.

This was a nice way to cap off the current Flash run before moving to Spurrier & Deodato Jr.'s new run in September.I'll start by talking about each story. The opening story with Adams & Pasarin was just fun, which is the perfect way for their last story on this run to be. Adams's run has just been fun and heartfelt throughout, and I really enjoyed this. I have my gripes with Pasarin's art, but the story of the villains complaining about Wally is just great. Humor has been one of the best aspects of this series. I'd give this an 8.5. Next, Waid & Nauck have a faster paced story, but still enjoyable. Wally constantly getting frustrated with Bart was pretty funny, as was Bart being in his own world at times. I don't have much to say about this one, but it was enjoyable. I'd give it an 8.0. Next, we had my favorite story of the issue from Williamson & Giandomenico. The art here was good, but what really sticks out is reading how important Barry and Iris are to Wally in regards to his upbringing and, basically, who he is as a person. I just really enjoyed this and I would give it a 9.0. Unfortunately, the quality dropped significantly as we moved onto the next story from Johns & Kolins, which was my least favorite of the issue. I don't really see the point of this issue having a whole story about Hunter Zolomon. I was hoping it would at least be interesting, but it was pretty much a re-telling of his origin. I don't know, I just wasn't a big fan of this story and I think the best part of this was the artwork. I would give it a 6.0. Finally, we got the prelude of the upcoming series from Spurrier and Deodato. With there apparently being a bit of a tonal shift from Adams's run to Spurrier's, I wasn't sure how I felt about this new run. While I did enjoy this story's writing and artwork, I'm still not entirely sold on this new storyline. I like the way Wally is written and I think, as another user pointed out in their review, that his narration is very anxiety-inducing (in a good way). Wally is my favorite Flash, and I really hope the potential Spurrier & Deodato show here is realized with the new run. I'd give this last story an 8.0. Averaged out, this comes out to a 7.9 that I would definitely round up by 0.1 for a solid 8.0 overall.

This was more interesting than the last issue, though I still didn't feel like this one connected to the larger story that much. Again, this was still good. As was Smith's art throughout. I think he's a really good fit for this series.

A fun read overall here. The concept of the race and the amount of well-known participants involved are certainly interesting. Smith put out some really nice art again, as well, and I continue to enjoy how well he fits with this run. Hopefully he doesn't leave anytime soon.

Not the strongest issue thus far, but still a good read overall. The story just didn't feel quite as interesting or compelling as it has been recently. Smith's art continues to be one of the best aspects of this series, though, as he continues to put out awesome pages.

A super solid issue to kick of this new arc. Maybe I missed something, but I don't really remember Talia becoming romantically interested in Johnny, or even a relationship like that between the two of them being teased, until the last issue where Johnny mentioned it. I'm not completely opposed to it, but I was kind of hoping Talia and Johnny's relationship could have been non-romantic. Given, I wouldn't classify the two of them being in a proper relationship.

We finally get some Danny content here and it's pretty enjoyable. Nothing groundbreaking, but good stuff, in my opinion. The Johnny and Talia side of this was good as well, though it felt like it was mainly there to break between sections of Danny-focused stuff. Either way, a good read overall with this one.

Another good issue as we continue to get more content with Danny. Still not sure how I feel about Johnny and Talia's relationship, but I do think it's better than them being straight-up together in a "proper/regular" relationship. As for the backup, I didn't really need it, but it was good for what it was. I'm glad there was an actual reason for Johnny and Taegukgi to team up, rather than just throwing the two of them together for the sake of doing it.

Not quite as good as the first part, but still enjoyable overall. I think Percy writes the dynamic between Johnny and Logan well, and Shaw continues to put out some nice interiors. I just hope this crossover doesn't continue a downward trend, in terms of its quality.

Definitely an improvement over the last issue here. Talia's backstory was a little more interesting here, in my opinion, and the main story was intriguing as well. My favorite part of this, though, had to be Johnny catching the kid's pickaxe and then just punching him right in the face.

Another super solid issue as we approach the end of the series. I'm still enjoying the backstory with Talia here, and I enjoyed the main story more than the previous issue. Despite my past criticisms regarding Talia being in a relationship with Johnny, I'm very glad with how much Percy has fleshed out Talia's character. I'm hoping that she doesn't just disappear when Percy's work on Ghost Rider ends. As for the backup story, I wasn't really all that into it. It wasn't bad, but as I was going back and forth on giving this issue either an 8.0 or an 8.5, the backup solidified this is the former, for me.

A pretty solid finale, despite Percy's work on Ghost Rider not being over quite yet. This was, likely, the end of Talia's story, which is a shame. Her character was one of my favorite parts of this run, so I hope, somehow, she shows up again in the future. There isn't much for me to say here aside from that, as this issue was largely about her. I'm not sure why Marvel's going from this to Final Vengeance, but I hope the run remains good regardless.

While the Dark Web crossover is present here, it doesn't really take anything away from the story. Medina's art continues to fit in with the darker tone of this book, while Cantwell continues to deliver with his scripts. The childhood dog was a great element for Norman to face as well, and I was entertained by the ending confrontation as well. The only thing that drags this down for me just a tad is Jack-o-Lantern, as I don't really have a strong interest in his character as of yet. However, I hope that changes, as I'm certain he'll be returning before this run is over.

Probably the weakest issue of the series so far, but it's still a pretty good read. I'm very glad they somewhat explained Owen's reasoning for what he did by how the issue ended, as I would have been utterly confused without it. Just when Norman was starting to feel better about himself, everything comes crashing back down. Very interested to see how this miniseries ends, and I hope it's conclusion is just as good as the rest of the run.

This was certainly an intriguing start to the series, especially considering that this was extended from 6 issues to 12 right when it was released. We'll have to wait and see if the series pulls a Poison Ivy and becomes a full-blown ongoing, which is something I could definitely see happening. Getting back to the book itself, this was a nice issue that reintroduces those who are unfamiliar to Oliver and the prominent members of his supporting cast, with Dinah, Roy, and Connor. Plus, kind of out of nowhere, we get Roy's reunion with his daughter, Lian. I do think that could have been handled and/or built to a little better, but this was still pretty enjoyable. The mystery set up here is interesting as well, as Oliver is missing, seemingly, on an alien planet. Along with all of that, Izaakse's art is fantastic and was one of the highlights of this book for me. Suffice to say, although this felt a little packed at times, this was still an entertaining opener that maintains my interest and attention going into Issue 2.

A good follow-up on the first issue. The city Ollie's for the majority of the book gives me Blade Runner vibes, and I really like him fighting crime in that setting. As for the story itself, it continues to be enjoyable and intriguing. While I do like this, I hope things pick up a little bit in the next issue and I hope we can start getting more answers as to what's going on.

This series continues to be interesting with what was originally supposed to be the halfway point of this run. I wasn't sure what to think with Peacemaker and Peacewrecker getting involved, but they were fine. They didn't add a whole lot to the story, but they also didn't really take anything away from it either. Roy and Dinah's investigation as to where Oliver went has promise, but I would like things to pick up a little bit with them soon. As for Oliver himself, his story interests me the most here. I'm looking forward to learning more about why the Oliver from the future felt he needed to separate the family, as well as present Oliver trying to avoid/correct future Oliver's outcome with his family.

A good read. I particularly enjoyed the stuff with Ollie and Parallax. I wasn’t incredibly into the sections with Roy and Dinah, though, but they weren’t bad or anything.

Possibly the best issue yet. Williamson has had Ollie figure out someone is lying two issues in a row now and I’ve enjoyed it both times. The ending was also definitely an intriguing direction to go.

A pretty solid issue here that gained more interest from me towards the end. I like the aspect of Ollie feeling disconnected from everyone else, and it’s also nice to see Izaakse back on interiors.

Awesome art from Izaakse here, which was definitely one of the highlights of this issue. I don’t know how many more Arrow Family members I can take, though, but I still liked the story overall. I’m also interested to see Ollie face the “Justice League” in the next issue.

A pretty solid issue once again. Izaakse and Hester both did really good jobs on the interiors here, though I’m a little surprised that the fight against the “Justice League” didn’t go longer.

Not quite the conclusion I was hoping for, but this was still good. I’ve really enjoyed how Izaakse has been drawing Merlyn in this series. The scenes on the beach here were nice, and I’m happy this was extended to an ongoing book.

The main story here was better than the first issue, in my opinion. I enjoyed Hal more here, despite his interaction with Carol on the plane. I also enjoyed the random appearance of Kilowog here and I hope to see more of him throughout this series. As for the backup, I agree with what another user stated in their review, in that I'm still not sold on this story. It almost feels like John has been a supporting character in what's supposed to be his own story. When this series was originally announced alongside John's own series, I was going to just get Stewart's due to him being my favorite Lantern. With War Journal finally supposed to come out in September, I'm a little more hesitant now. I just hope we get a stronger story for him soon.

After the two-month break for Knight Terrors, we're finally back to have Dawn of DC Titles back and I'm glad. With this issue, it's another fun and well-written one. Adams is building a fairly interesting story with Sinestro having a stronger presence in the main story. Plus, Xermánico's art continues to be great here. As for Johnson & Montos's backup story, I did like it and it gives me more hope for John Stewart's new War Journal series than the past two issues have. I'll at least be checking out the first issue, so hopefully it delivers.

I thought this was a fun and heartfelt story with Hal and Barry. I was hoping Adams would be writing Wally West, since he was the main Flash of his run and I enjoy him more as a character, but this was still good stuff. It also helps that Xérmanico's art is simply great. As for the backup, it felt a little generic to me when it came to its dialogue, but the story was interesting enough. The art was solid also.

A super solid issue here. I felt like this was a minor dip in quality when compared to the last three issues, but I still enjoyed this a good amount. I particularly found the "spectrum-shifting" seen from the United Planets Lanterns to be intriguing and I'm looking forward to learning more in that regard. As for the backup story, Also thought it was pretty solid. I'm glad to see Kyle getting some spotlight here and I hope we get to see more of him sooner rather than later.

A pretty solid issue that reunites Hal with some of the other Lanterns. I don’t have much to say about the story here. Xérmanico’s art was really nice, as usual.

This was a strong and intriguing start to this series. While I do think this, somewhat, suffers from first issue setup, I enjoyed this and I think there's a lot of interesting ideas here. The characters here are compelling and I think there's a lot of potential in terms of exploring them further as times goes on. Plus, Flaviano's art here is great and he really adds to this book.

This was an interesting follow-up to what was set up in the opening issue. I think this, somewhat, takes a little while to get to the point of why most are interested, that being Jessica learning more about her death, but I also think that Adira is set up as a formidable antagonist going forward. Plus, before Jessica attempts to see her death, the door is opened for Marcel to be explored further as his death is teased here also. Overall, this was another good read for this series and it maintains my interesting going into the halfway point of this first arc.

With penultimate issue of this arc maintains the quality we've seen since the beginning. Flaviano's art is, once again, great, and Phillips continues to write an intriguing story. While I'm 100% positive the guy on the last page before the epilogue is the Grim Reaper (aka Jessica's father), I'm still enjoying this. I feel like some people think that, if the ending of a story is predictable, that automatically makes it not good. However, that's not the case and I think this is a good example of that.

This was probably the weakest issue thus far, but it was still enjoyable. I really wish Death and Jessica got more time together to create a stronger emotional investment when Death dies, but this was enough to get through the story being told. The main reason I score this an 8.0 instead of a 7.5 is because of Flaviano's stellar art. He does nothing but make this book better and I really hope he stays on this book for quite some time.

Following the ending of the last arc, I was interested to see where Phillips and Flaviano took the story. Luckily, the opening issue of this new arc keeps the quality of the previous five issues. There's a solid amount of mystery presented here, and I don't think that the direction here is as obvious as the first arc, at least not yet. The ending here is a little abrupt, but I'm still intrigued to see how this plays out.

Besides liking GotG in general, I mainly decided to pick this up because of the awesome character designs from the promotional art (specifically Star-Lord, Mantis, and Drax, but Gamora and Nebula look cool as well). After reading this issue, I'm glad to say it was a great start. It sets up an interesting mystery with the "Grootfall" situation and provides a fun adventure that, somewhat, re-establishes the characters in a new setting. An entertaining book that I hope continues to maintain its quality in the issues to come.

This was another entertaining issue for the run. I liked that Nebula always counted on Peter's plan failing in order for her 100% guaranteed plan to work. While this was fun, I really hope we finally learn more about Grootfall soon. It was a big part of the teasers and, so far, we haven't really been told much about it other than that fact that it's destroying worlds. Nonetheless, a good second issue here.

Not my favorite issue of the series, but still a really interesting one. This wasn't the direction I was expecting the story to take, with the Guardians becoming "Groot" versions of themselves. However, I think it's an intriguing direction at that. I just hope the series ends up concluding in a strong way.

There isn't a bunch of furtherance here in terms of the overall story, but I did find this super interesting. Here, we delve more into these new versions of the team members that we first saw in the previous issue. I think Walker's art fit nicely here as well. Hopefully we get some stronger developments as we get to the final few issues.

A pretty solid standalone issue of sorts here as we gear up for the final two issues of the run. I thought the dynamic between Gamora and Mantis was done well enough to make this story compelling, though I'm still not as into this series as I was in the first half. Hopefully that changes with the next issue and the annual.

A step up from the previous issue, in my opinion. It's still a bit difficult to get used to Rossmo's art, but I think it works well in certain places. The story, though, is pretty solid and compelling. I think Harley is written nicely here, and I appreciated the build for Kevin, as he's solidified as a new supporting character for this series going forward.

A fun issue here as we finally get a confrontation between Harley and Hugo, even if it's at the very end. Phillips does a nice job of making Harley compelling and likable here, something that's been seen in the past there issues as well. I liked the deeper introspection we got here as well. As for Rossmo's art, it's still been difficult to get used to his style, but I do like it in general.

This continues to be a fun series. Phillips does an effective job of making Harley likable and humorous throughout this issue. This was the best that the banter or dialogue has been thus far, in my opinion. Banter can get annoying if it's not done right, and this is an example of it done right.

I thought this was a pretty good debut issue for this series. I think it didi a nice job of establishing the cast of characters going forward, which is made possible through fairly strong writing from Wells. I did think this was moving a little fast at times, but I also know that's to be expected with a first issue in order to set the stage for what's to come. That said, I like the cast I mentioned previously, despite me not knowing much about most of them prior to reading this. One other plus is Segovia's art, as he did a really nice job throughout the entire issue.

Yeah, this was good. I do think that it dragged on a bit in certain spots, but, overall, it was a super solid read with Ohta's art only making it better. One side note I have kind of relates to a big spoiler, so don't continue reading if you don't want anything spoiled for you if you haven't already read this issue. Okay, so Hellverine is a resurrected Daken, right? So, why does he, in Hellverine form, have all three claws coming from the same place, when he usually has two claws from the "normal" spot and one from under his forearm? Is this just how it works when he's Hellverine, or what? Anyways, this was a good first issue that you should check out if you liked Percy's Wolverine run and, at least, the Weapons of Vengeance crossover with his Ghost Rider series.

The story is pretty solid, though a lot of the reason I'm giving this an 8.0/10 was because of the art and some of the cooler shots, such as one of the Hellfire soldiers biting the secretary's face off and Hellverine busting open the jaw of the aforementioned solider.

A little bit of an underwhelming finale to this insane crossover, but this was still an enjoyable read. The battle was pretty cool and it gave Coccolo plenty of opportunity to shine. I do appreciate the mutual respect shown between Hulk and Thor as well, with Thor letting Hulk leave into space while telling the Avengers that he's dead. It will probably come back to bite him in the ass later on, but it's still nice in the moment. The tease on the last page is very interesting as well. Good stuff.

A nice introduction to the second arc of this run. The beginning of this issue with Bruce's therapy session and the introduction of Logan (not Wolverine) is strong. The rest of this does its job well by basically setting the scene for Hulk Planet by giving us what seems to literally be a Hulk planet. Glad to see Ottley back on the art duties as well, as he's one of my personal favorite comic artists. This issue was just a good first issue for the storyline.

This series continues to improve, in my opinion. While I'm a little confused as to why we're getting an artist change in Issue 2, I don't mind it. Segovia does great work here, especially during the action sequences. His art just feels so clean here and I think it fits this issue nicely. As for Ridley's scripts, I thought they were really solid. I think he's putting something really interesting together here with Jace's mission, as well as the police stuff. I know some people will probably get upset over the mention of "white privilege," but politics in comics is nothing new and I'm really tired of people acting like it is. All things considered, this is a good issue and I'm intrigued to see how this story develops.

While I do think this felt a little packed at times, I do really appreciate this issue due to the fact that it feels like a fresh start for this series. Issue 0-2 of this had an upwards trajectory, in my eyes. WIth Fear State, things had a downwards turn. However, the last issue felt like a turning point and, now, this issue provides a sort of reset that I'm intrigued by. Everything moving to New York was probably in this run's best interest when considering the plot and the readers who hate the fact that Gotham has two people using the name "Batman." I think the partnership between Jace and the police department will be an interesting story about police trying to work with a superhero. All things considered, contrary to what some people believe, this is genuinely a good book that I think more people would enjoy if they could get over more than one person being called "Batman."

I thought this was some nice follow-up after how the last issue ended. While this wasn't my favorite issue of the run, I still enjoyed it and I really like the story Ridley is crafting here. As another user stated in their review, this feels very episodic. While I don't have that much to say about this, I will say that this continues to be a well-written book with pretty solid art.

While I think this is a little bit of a step down following how good the previous two issues were, but this is still good in it's own right. I'm still a little indifferent on how I feel about Tiffany trying to be a superhero, but I think her story has been handled well so far. As for the rest of this, I think Renee's story came to a satisfying conclusion for now. When it comes to Jace and the issue's ending, I'm definitely interested to see where the next issue goes with Sinestro announced to be involved.

Sinestro being involved got me interested in this issue, and I believe Ridley made the best of this being a Dark Crisis tie-in. The event didn't really weigh things down here, which I'm very glad about. Plus, I like that Ridley used this as an opportunity to continue Jace's growth as a character by delving into his fears. This was just a good issue all around in which Ridley used the Dark Crisis event to his advantage.

Another interesting and entertaining issue here that I do believe is an improvement upon the previous issue, but I'm not too keen on the final page. I'm not opposed to Hadiyah being a hero, but I think it's a little bit of an odd move. Especially considering that her costume is basically just her with her face covered. With the next issue being the last one, I hope everything comes together for a strong conclusion.

A pretty good first issue, in which the highlights are, of course, Sinister and Emma Frost. Emma shows just how strong she is, and Sinister continues to just be great. I was surprised to see what's happening on the main cover of the book actually happen in the story.

Very glad Gillen didn't focus too much on the 90-or-so-year gap between this issue and the previous, as I think it may have taken away from the rest of the book. Seeing Hope's development was very interesting, and I enjoyed Sinister's ongoing realization of what he had done. The sort-of commentary about the ongoing developments of artificial intelligence was something I enjoyed as well. I think Rasputin IV has a pretty good design and she's someone I would be intrigued to see more of beyond the Sins of Sinister event.

I did enjoy this more than the last issue, but it still feels just a bit lacking and all over the place, at times, for me. However, I have the feeling that the next two issues are going to be really good. I like the stuff with Destiny and Mother Righteous in this issue, as well as the stuff with Charles and Sebastian. With Jean Grey set to take a larger focus in Issue 17, it has potential to be really good. Hopefully Gillen and Werneck are able to take this title back up to the heights it was at before Fall of X.

An enjoyable issue here, though it's still not up to the standards of quality it was once at. This is far from bad, but I found myself really interested by the dialogue between Charles and Sinister and not nearly as interested when the issue focused on Jean, Hope, Exodus, and Mother Righteous. With one issue left, I hope this series sticks the landing, as I've loved it for the most part. Also, I'll always miss Lucas Werneck on art, but Ryp did a really solid job on this one.

I would, unfortunately, have to call this the weakest entry of the series thus far. That said, though, I still enjoyed this a good amount. Listen, I wasn't the biggest fan of Earls's art here, but I don't get the amount of hate for it here. My own opinion is that Nic Klein is a better artist and I do wish he was doing every single issue for this series. However, I think Earls was a solid fit for this book, especially for an issue without much action in it. Aside from the art, I thought Johnson gave us an intriguing first part of for this story here. I wouldn't say it's something we haven't seen before in comics, but I think it's still executed in a good way.

A nice step-up from the last few issues. An intriguing start to this arc here and I'm always glad to see Klein on the art duties. I have a feeling this storyline will be really good, and I really hope I'm right. A lot of cool and interesting things set up here.

A nice debut issue for this series that does a really solid job of establishing Tony's current situation and mindset. I will say that I wasn't a huge fan of some of the dialogue here, with one example coming when Tony's eating outside of his destroyed apartment complex, but I didn't hate it or anything. Other than relatively small gripes, this was good stuff and I do like the idea of Tony's narration coming from an autobiography he's writing. Plus, Frigeri's art is good throughout. All things considered, this was a good read that makes me believe this has the potential to get even better.

A good follow-up on the events of the previous issue. Frigeri's art is still nice throughout this, though Duggan's writing is the strongest part of this book, in my opinion. I did like the more comedic aspects of this one, with Tony proposing a new battle cry and such. The ongoing story remains fairly intriguing as well and I hope we learn more about that soon. It seems we will with how this one ended.

Another good read. Frigeri's art continues to deliver and I think Duggan's story is progressing nicely. I liked seeing Riri in the previous issue and I'm glad we get Rhodey in this one. Duggan writes the two of them well together, in my opinion. Also, I thought the ending of this issue was cool, with the imposter Tony's skin literally melting in front of Tony and Rhodey.

I'm not entirely sure how much of this will end up being important down the line, but this was enjoyable nonetheless. Vito does a nice job filling in for Juan Frigeri and I think he can be a solid rotating artist for this series. Moving back to the story itself, it was nice to see the silver armor, as well as Wonder Woman and the rest of the West Coast Avengers.

I've been good with Andrea Di Vito being the rotating artist on this run with Juan Frigeri, but I wasn't the biggest fan of Guara's art. It wasn't bad by any means, but it was just wasn't my favorite, especially with Frigeri doing a large chunk of the art in this series. As for Duggan's story, I thought it was engaging throughout. That said, though, it did feel a relatively inconsequential, similar to the previous issue.

This wasn't my favorite issue, but it was still a fairly fun time. I think Duggan wrote the dynamic between Riri and Forge well here, though I wasn't ready for almost the entire issue to be about them. The story with the rings was intriguing, but it didn't do as much as other things in this series. Also, I quickly wanted to point out something about the final page of this issue. I can't believe that we're, possibly, FINALLY following up on that Wolverine tease from Issue 22 of Duggan's current X-Men run. If you don't know what I'm talking about, go and read that issue. It's pretty good, in my opinion, and it brings up a really interesting idea about Wolverine's corpses from multiple deaths in the past falling into the wrong hands and being used by villains, if I'm remembering correctly. I thought this was super cool, but the series hasn't done anything to follow up on it from what I remember. Now, nine months later, it seems we're getting that follow-up...in Invincible Iron Man instead of X-Men. I'd rather get a follow-up on it in a different series than not get any at all, but it's just a little odd to me.

A super solid issue that sets up what's sure to be a fun fundamental fight between Tony and Feilong. Lee did a nice job with the art in his first issue for the series here. It wasn't my absolute favorite, but it got the job done. As for Duggan's story, I'm really glad that we got more follow-up on Wolverine's skeletons being left around whenever he died. This was something I talked a lot about in my review for the previous issue, so I would check that out if you want more details. Aside from that, this was just a good read overall.

Going into this issue, I was sure the outrage over the backup story was going to be dumb, but I can't believe people are that upset about this. I feel as though some people who are whining about it didn't even read the story and haven't even read the three previous issues of this series. It's been well-established since the first issue that the backup stories in this series are nonsensical and dumb with a old-time tone to them. Here, Joker is pregnant because Zatanna uses her magic to make him that way and then he ends up throwing up the offspring because, since he doesn't have female reproductive parts, he can't really give normally give birth to it. Is it stupid? Yes, it's really stupid. Is it a bad story? That's subjective, I suppose, but I found this funny. Is it something to get into a fit about? Absolutely not. The same people using stuff like this to complain about "the left" are the same people who say "the left" gets bent out of shape about every little thing. Give me a break. As for the main story, it wasn't as strong as the first three issues, but I'm still interested by it. The highlight of it all was Joker's interactions with the sick kids in the hospital, as I thought it was pretty funny and a great representation of The Joker.

I believe this was an improvement over the last issue, in terms of both the main story and the backup. The main story was pretty fun this time around, but I also still maintain the fact that I'd really like for this to get back to the overarching story introduced in the first few issues. I think this backup story was significantly more interesting than Issue 7's, but I also feel as though it could have been more.

An entertaining issue here that feels like it's finally getting back to its initial point. Don't get me wrong, I've enjoyed every issue of this series so far, but I'm glad we're finally getting back to the two Jokers going against each other and Red Hood's hunt for Joker. Plus, the backup story this time was the most interesting it's been in quite a bit. This time, however, it wasn't really the silly and outrageous stories we've seen in the previous eight issues. It was more serious and, as funny as some of the backups in this series have been, I think it really benefitted this issue.

I liked the fact that this actually tied the backup story to the main plot, something we have yet to see from this series. As this series is winding down to its final two issues, I'm hoping we finally get the two Jokers at least confronting each other in the next issue. As much as I've enjoyed the series as a whole up until this point, I do feel as though it's taken a while to get more into the initial story it was telling.

Even as this series is getting ready to end, it's still getting unnecessary hate. This wasn't the best issue of the series, but it was definitely interesting. I think the reveal at the end was done well. I wouldn't say it was "blurted out," as other people may think, considering it had build going into it and it was done on the last page of this run's penultimate issue. Aside from the two Jokers presumably fighting in the next issue, there's also the possibility to actually follow-up on this development. I'm looking forward to seeing how this ends.

An entertaining finale, even if it felt a bit messy at times. I liked the mystery at the end of this, as we don't know for sure which Joker survived and which one died. While I do wish there was a clearer point to this whole series, I enjoyed it for what it was. If anything, I really enjoyed Rosenberg's voice for Joker and I think Giandomenico put out some really good art throughout all twelve issues.

I’d like to start this off by quickly stating how much I really like the cover to this issue, as it’s really great. As for what’s inside, I feel very similarly to how I felt about the previous issue. I did like the art a bit more this time around, so I’ll raise my score a bit.

I was so ready for this to be an overdone instance of Bruce being forced to relive his fears, which this kind of was, but it was executed nicely. I would have given this a 7.5 originally, but the fact that he was put into Joe Chill's shoes and forced to see himself murder his parents was an intriguing idea that I'm really interested to see the effects of in the next issue. As for the backup story with Damian, it didn't really do anything for me. I understand its presence here, but it doesn't increase or decrease my score. Nonetheless, I'm actually looking forward to the next issue.

This was one of the better Knight Terrors tie-ins I've read. I thought this issue was written pretty well and it felt a bit different from some of the other tie-ins. I'm definitely interested to see how this turns out. The art was pretty cool as well and I thought that it fit the story being told. While I do wish most of DC's lineup wasn't paused for this event, I can't complain when I think this is the best Catwoman issue from Tini Howard in a while.

This, like the previous issue, was a book that I thought was kind of weird but also cool. While I did like this, I will continue to state how much I'm ready for DC to return to putting out its regular books. A crossover with Chip Zdarsky's Batman could help out Howard's Catwoman run, and I really hope it's the kick the series needs to reach the heights I know it's fully capable of getting to.

This is kind of run-of-the-mill scary dream stuff, but Adams writes it well enough for it to be engaging and entertaining. I also appreciate that Adams kind of set this up to be tied in the main Green Lantern run. While the art here is not quite Xermánico's, it's still nice and looks good throughout. I'm not really sure how I feel about Sinestro's backup story, but I'm just hoping it sets up his return in the main series. Overall, this was a well-written issue that presents a story I'm looking forward to seeing play out next month.

I would definitely call this the weakest issue of Spurrier's recent X-Men work thus far, but it still continues to be really interesting. The strongest part of this issue was when the Skinjacker was subdued and he was talking with Nightcrawler. I just hope this series improves a bit, as the previous Way of X series has been the peak of all of this so far.

I enjoyed this more than the previous two issues, but I have to say that it still left a bit to be desired. This issue felt like it was supposed to be a grand conclusion, but it was just a good one. As I stated previously, I enjoyed this issue (which can be seen by my rating). However, this book seems to be difficult to manage for the team. As KittyNone stated in their review, the bulk of this issue only focuses on a couple of the main characters from the large amount seen on the recap page. Still, there are a lot of interesting things within this issue, such as Mother Righteous as a whole. Hopefully this series is able to continue the upward trajectory seen with this issue, as I know Spurrier is capable of writing awesome books.

Another enjoyable issue for the series, but not quite up to the standards set by the previous two issues. The strongest part of this was the conversation between Charles and Ruth. I'm really looking forward to seeing how Legion's relationship with his father develops, especially after this. As for Kurt, I'm still intrigued by his current state and by Margali showing up at the end. I just hope everything ends up coming together nicely.

As much as I love Nightcrawler, Legion is definitely becoming the most interesting and compelling character in this series. I find myself always looking forward to when he'll be on the page. As for everything else, it was all good. I just wish this book had more room to breathe. I liked everything we got here, but, as KittyNone stated in their review, there's just so much going on that a lot of this can feel rushed at times.

An entertaining way to end the series, even if it is a bit jam-packed. Vox using Juggernaut a vessel was not something I expected, but it was super cool. Plus, I continue to really enjoy what Spurrier does with Legion and Charles. Xabi's death was sad as well, and I'm interested to see how and even if he will end up returning from death. I think the ending to this was well-done also. It left the off the serious ominously as we go into the Nightcrawlers miniseries for Sins of Sinister.

A really solid opening issue for Gang War’s first tie-in miniseries. I haven’t read anything from Barnes at the time of this writing, so I wasn’t really sure what to expect. Luckily, I think Barnes wrote Luke well, along with the other characters in the story. I particularly enjoyed Luke’s interactions with Miss Estelle.

I didn't like this as much as the first issue, but it was still good and entertaining. The stuff with the actual Marauders team was good, but I found myself enjoying the dialogue between Emma and Sebastian the most. Sebastian getting absolutely owned was just great, as Mout pointed out in their review. I do hope that this series picks up a little bit, though, as I'm currently feeling a downwards trajectory in quality,

Good lord, I forgot Pyro got that face tattoo a couple of issues ago. Either way, I thought this was another enjoyable issue for the series. I will say that I hope we get some actual exploration of why Kate being unable to travel through the Krakoan gates soon, other than the book just bringing up that she can't.

Good issue with a, kind of, crazy ending. I'm sure Kate won't be dead for very long, if at all, but it's still wild how Sebastian basically just left her for dead and took Lockheed while he was at it. Other than that, this was a pretty solid issue in both the writing and art departments.

I wish this issue followed up on what happened to Kate at the end of the previous issue, but this was still good overall. I don't know much about Callisto, but I enjoyed her here. Plus, I liked pretty much everything centered on Bishop. I'm hoping to see more of him if Duggan continues to write him the way he did in the few pages we got of him. Caselli did a nice job with the art as well, so, despite the absence of Kate this time around, this was still a good read.

I don't get all the outrage over Emma Frost in this issue. She used her looks to gain the advantage and, then, she uses her telepathic abilities to make, essentially, make a bad guy turn good. Aside from that, I thought this was another good issue for the series with some really nice art from Caselli.

I thought that this was a nice issue. I think Duggan has done a pretty solid job of utilizing Kate's death a few issues ago to further the story a bit in an interesting way. That said, though, I'm very glad to have her back in this issue. Ever since her death, it felt like this book was really missing something her without her presence. Hopefully Duggan continues to write her as well as he did in every issue before she died, as I think he has a really solid voice for her.

First thing's first, I think the origin for Rabble was fairly simple, yet also well-executed. It's not anything particularly profound or unique, but it's still a solid backstory that makes you have some sympathy towards the story's villain. Everything else here was good as well, although I will have to label this as the weakest issue of the series yet. I still enjoyed this a good amount, but the rest of the story was a bit lacking when compared to the first two issues in my opinion. However, I'm still digging this story and I'm looking forward to what comes next.

I'll start by saying that, over the course of these past four issues, Vicentini always comes in clutch with a good splash page on top of the rest of his great art. As for the story, this was another quicker read for me, just like the previous issue, but the story still continues to be interesting and entertaining. I think Ziglar has put together a solid villain with Rabble, and I also, once again, enjoy the sort of mentor/student relationship he's building between Miles and Misty Knight. Good stuff all around.

This was a really solid issue. It wasn't the best of the series or anything, but it was still good. I really enjoyed the session with Miles and Samson, as I thought it was particularly well-written. Everything else here was nice as well. I'm interested to see more of Hightail, as I think she has potential to be a really good character. I will say that I am missing Federico Vicentini on the art.

A really enjoyable issue here in what's definitely a step up from the last two issues with Blade and Bloodline. They weren't bad, but they weren't at the standard of quality that the rest of the series has set. This was a pretty fun time throughout, as Ziglar continues to have a great voice for Miles along with an interesting story and some solid humor. Plus, I'm incredibly glad to see Vicentini back on the art duties. He's been putting out great work in this run and this issue was no exception.

A nice step up from the previous issue. This one felt a little more slowed down compared to Issue 14, which is something I really wanted from this. Plus, I thought all of the characters were written well by Ziglar and I also thought that the ongoing story was really solid. Vicentini's art is always good, and that remains true here as well.

I think it's well-documented that I didn't dislike Gang War, but I am glad that it's over. This feels like a bit of a reset after that event and even the Blade & Bloodline story before that. I like the direction this series is going in now and I really hope an upwards trajectory, in terms of quality, is coming after this issue.

A pretty fun issue with some super dynamic art from Vicentini. Ziglar's writing was good overall, but not everything fully clicked for me here. Some of it felt a bit on the generic side, if that makes sense, but I liked it as a whole. Moving back to Vicentini's art, though, it worked pretty well here. The section where it went black & white like manga was pretty cool, especially considering Ziglar is a huge manga/anime fan.

Not a bad issue by any means, but probably the weakest of the series so far. I feel like Zodiac's conversation with Doctor Plesko could have been a bit better, but it was still pretty enjoyable. Moon Knight and Hunter's Moon had a fun adventure with a twist at the end, and I'm looking forward to seeing what comes of that. While I will say, once again, that I'm missing Alessandro Cappuccio, I do think this was a good issue for him to take a break on.

I've been loving this run of Moon Knight, and this was another pretty good issue. I will say that I wasn't the biggest fan of the ending. It wasn't necessarily "bad" or anything; it just fell a little flat for me, personally. The backup was interesting, and I'm hoping if we'll be seeing Blade a little more often with it seeming like he'll be mentoring/helping Reese in a way.

While some of the dialogue and scripts aren't my favorite, I think this issue was written nicely overall. I feel as though it was at its best when being a little more serious and when speaking about Kamala as a character. Everything else was good as well, though. Kamala summoning her fan-fiction characters was kind of dumb, but in a good way, if that makes any sense.

I wasn't sure whether or not to give this a 7.5 or an 8.0, but I've decided to go with the latter since this was a fairly fun time overall and I thought Kamala was written nicely. Plus, the art from Gómez was super clean throughout, especially with the two splash pages. All things considered, I thought this was a really solid debut miniseries for Vellani, with help from Pirzada, and I'll be sticking around for the upcoming Mutant Menace miniseries.

This was the least interested I've been in the series thus far. That said, though, this was still pretty good. Failla's art is really solid and I am still engaged with Brisson's story. I did appreciate the backstory for the villains that were introduced in the previous issue, but I still don't find them all that intriguing. Hopefully this storyline ends up sticking the landing after Jonathan Hickman writes Issue 5 (An issue I'm really looking forward to, by the way).

I thought this was a good issue that acted as a nice follow-up to Brisson's first arc on this title while also creating some interest for the future. My favorite part of this issue was when Sebastian Shaw basically destroyed the Bohem Cartel just by making a deal with their rivals. Good stuff here.

I'm glad to say that, with Jonathan Hickman gone, I'm still enjoying this title. I don't think it's a secret that I prefer Hickman's writing to Brisson's, but the both of them write good comics. I really don't want this and my review of the previous eight issue to make it seem as though I don't like Brisson, because I do. With that in mind, this was another good issue. I really liked the interaction between Magik and Cyclops, especially.

A nice conclusion to this storyline that sees the quality go right back up after the very minor bump in the road, in my opinion, that was Issue 10. I'm really interested to see how Cosmar is used in the future of this series and, possibly, beyond. Her design is certainly unique. Flaviano did a great job with it, and I also wanted to point out how well I think he draws Mirage, especially.

Definitely an improvement over the previous issue. Still, there is a lot of stuff happening. However, everything just clicks better here and I believe this is a bit more straightforward than what we got with Issue 1. I enjoyed seeing Legion here, as I was really enjoying Spurrier's work on him in Legion of X, but I must say that I really liked Wagnerine's story here. She has quickly become a fairly compelling character over these past two issues and I'm really looking forward to seeing how her story progresses in the next issue.

I enjoyed this issue, as can be seen from my rating of it, but there are two things I especially wish were different about this. Firstly, I wish this issue had Alessandro Vitti on the art like the Immoral X-Men #3 and Storm and the Brotherhood of Mutants #3 did. I really enjoyed his art in those issues, so it would have been nice to have his work here as well. However, the art we got here isn't bad by any means. Secondly, I would have appreciated more of Wagnerine here. If you read my review of Issue 2, you'd know that Wagnerine was my favorite character from that issue and that I was excited to see what came next for her here. What we got here was nice and satisfying, but I, personally, would have enjoyed seeing more of her after the 900-year time jump.

A definite step-up from the opening issue, in my opinion. Some of the dialogue wasn't my favorite, but I found myself enjoying the humor more here and I really liked the dynamic between Peacemaker and Mallah. One of the things I was getting ready to say in this review as I got closer to finishing this issue was that I wanted a series of just the two of them, but that seems highly unlikely after the ending of this issue. Either way, I enjoyed this more than the first issue and I hope the rest of this miniseries continues to get better and better.

Another pretty enjoyable issue was we get to the halfway point of this miniseries. Despite some of the more "forced" humor I mentioned in my review of the first issue being present, I think this run has found its stride. Hopefully the next issue doesn't prove me wrong, as I've been really enjoying this so far.

While I enjoyed this issue overall and I like the direction this book is going, the main thing that holds this back for me is the art. In my eyes, it's somewhat inconsistent. It looks great in some sections, specifically when Ilhan draws more plant-related things, but it also just looks weird in others, such as different shots of Ivy and other characters. It also doesn't help when you've become used to Marcio Takara with a hint of Brian Level in the past two issues. Despite my mixed feelings on the art, I still enjoyed the story here and I think this is an intriguing new direction for Ivy.

Not quite as good as the last issue for me, but that's what I was expecting after how good Issue 9 was. However, this was still a good and interesting issue. I particularly liked the talk about the different outlooks on saving the planet. The wellness retreat was an intriguing environment to stick Ivy in and I'm looking forward to see where there story goes there. As for Janet, I'm not quite sure how I feel about what happened between herself and Ivy. I'm just hoping it doesn't end up messing things up between her and Harley, but I'm thinking we're gonna have to wait at least a couple issues to see what happens there. As for the art, I've been very glad to have Marcio Takara back for the past two issues. His style really fits with Ivy and the story being told thus far. All in all, another pretty good issue from Wilson and Takara and I'm looking forward to how this new story progresses.

Another pretty good issue here. This continues the retreat plot that began last issue and the writing continues to maintain my interest. I particularly enjoyed the development Ivy has in during her confrontation with the truckers towards the end of the issue.

This was a good issue that lays the foundation for an interesting mystery for Ivy. As for Janet and Harley, I'm not really sure how to feel about this. I'm not going to say much about the end of it until we get some follow-up, but I did enjoy Janet trying to get the job at Undine and her interaction with Batman. I'm interested to see where things go with the them two and Ivy as this series continues. As for the art, If you read the end of my review for the previous issue, you can probably assume I'm happy to have Takara going ALL of it for this issue. I've really enjoyed the feel he brings to this book with his art and I hope he stays on this book for a while.

While some aren't too keen on this having a larger focus on the flashbacks, but I really enjoyed it. The story with Frank, Steadman, and Maria was very interesting to read and I thought it was the strongest part of this issue. Frank slashing the Archpriestess at the beginning was a cool way to follow up the previous issue's ending, but the return to the present after the longer flashback didn't do too much for me. However, the final page where Ares is wearing the old Punisher logo was an intriguing moment that generates interest for the issues to come.

This was the best issue yet, in my opinion. I particularly liked how Paknadel wrote the relationship between Normie and Rascal. As I said in my review of the previous issue, I think his writing is definitely the strongest part of this. Bazaldua's art continues to be solid here, but I do think it could be better. Either way, I'm almost surprised at how much I've been enjoying this series so far.

A really interesting start for this series. A lot of this felt somewhat complicated, but not in a bad way or anything. Though, the thing I liked most about this was the X-Men team in the future. I thought it was a super intriguing lineup, and I think it would have been cool to get an actual run from that cast. Either way, this was good stuff from Gillen and Silva.

Another fairly complex issue for this series, but I think it was enjoyable overall. Silva has some really nice art all throughout this issue, and I thin Gillen does a solid job of conveying everything here. Like I said, this was a bit complicated and I do wish it was a little more simplified, but I don't think the complexness of this makes it bad or anything. I also really like Rasputin IV.

Glad to say that things are getting better as this event is closing out. It would have been cool of Silva was on this issue, but Vecchio does a great job and I think his art really fit here, especially with the more abstract scenes. The story here was good as well, with a lot of focus on Jean, Charles, and Moira. I do wish the Krakoa era was continuing for longer, but I'm still interested to see how everything wraps up with X-Men #35.

A super solid first issue for the continuation of LaValle & Kirk's previous Sabretooth miniseries. What's funny is the thing I'm the most interested in is the thought of Orphan-Maker's suit being opened by Barrington. Aside from that, I'm hoping the story we get here ends up feeling a little more complete than the aforementioned previous miniseries felt on its own.

Once again, a good read. I'm intrigued by the change in attitude from Orphan-Maker, and I'm wondering if it's something that will be addressed or dealt with more in the next issue. It's kind of funny to me that I'm reading a book about Sabretooth and I've probably been talking/thinking more about Orphan-Maker.

I didn't find this to be as interesting and engaging as the first issue, but it's still good. I think, perhaps, the ending page is this issue's strongest, as I like the idea of Sabretooth "leading his angels" that was introduced here. I'm a little surprised I'm enjoying a Sabretooth book as much as I am, and I hope that continues.

Another super solid issue as we reach the midway point of this miniseries. Not as much Sabretooth here, but I did appreciate the focus on the supporting cast, especially Melter. Hopefully we continue to get a good amount of focus on him in these next two issues.

Good stuff as we head into the final issue. I did like the bit of commentary made about those who are wrongfully imprisoned, though letting Sabretooth out of The Pit is still probably a bad idea for the rest of the mutants. Looking forward to seeing how this wraps up in the next issue.

I was somewhat interested in a new Shazam run even after the last run wasn't super memorable, but I decided to pick this up after learning the creative team would be World's Finest's Mark Waid and Dan Mora. I haven't read said series yet, but I've only heard really good things about it. That said, I was expecting a little more from this issue while reading. It wasn't bad by any means, but I thought it would be a bit better. However, this was still fun and enjoyable. The stuff with the extraterrestrial dinosaurs was stupidly fun. After that, the book kind of felt like a rehash of Billy's origin with the tease of more god/mythology-related villains for him to face. However, the final two pages were such a well-done twist to the story. With the light tone of the majority of this book, that sudden left turn of something else, seemingly, taking over Billy's words was fantastic. I think with the re-introduction(s) out of the way, this run has true potential to be a lot of fun.

Not quite as interesting as the last issue, in my opinion, but I still do like the story. The gods basically turning on Billy is definitely intriguing, but I wasn't as into with those parts of the book as I have been with the overall story in the past. While I did like this, I hope it picks up a bit in the next issue. There's a good amount of interesting ideas, but I feel like it could be put together better. Either way, Mora's art is great in this issue. Although, I don't think him presenting great art is anything new.

Another solid, fun issue from Waid and Mora here. This is one that just reaches that 8/10 mark for me because of some moments I really enjoyed. For one, I liked the opening page with Billy and Garguax. I also thought the ending where Billy got blasted before he could say "Shazam" was pretty cool. Though, this did end a bit suddenly, in my opinion.

Another pretty good issue at the beginning of this run. Jack's recap gave this issue a slow start, but things picked up after that when Jack finally started drinking and eating after not doing so since "Bush was President." Jen's conversation with him as done well, also, and I enjoyed seeing her make her way to work and arrive there with her coffee. The final pages sets up an intriguing new villain for the future as well. Good stuff.

The stuff at the beginning and the end weighed this down a little for me, but everything else with Jen and Jack was great, as usual. Their dialogue between one another continues to be very enjoyable, and I found the part where Jack didn't help Jen up after she fell due to his fear of them physically touching to be done well. However, I don't know that much really advanced much here. Nonetheless, this was still a fun read that maintains my interest going into the next issue.

As another user pointed out, there isn't much that actually HAPPENS in this issue, just like the rest of the series. However, it just remains a fun read. This series has been my first Rainbow Rowell book, and now I might read her Runaways run based on this book's quality. Talking more specifically about the book itself, the aftermath of Jen and Jack's "adventure" at the end of the last issue is done well and is an enjoyable time. The same goes for her meeting with Andy, Victor, and the Doombot. The predicament the Doombot and Victor are in is pretty funny and it makes me look forward to where that storyline goes. With the final pages of this issue, we get more development on the couple that had an altercation with Jen in the last issue. While I'm not really "feeling" them here quite yet, I trust Rowell to make this work.

While I will say that the 4th wall break kind of came out of nowhere (yes I know she did it before Deadpool in the late 80s, but she hasn't done it in this run yet, so it caught me a little off-guard), this issue was still good, as usual. One specific thing I liked was that they never directly said that April and Mark were the ones to abduct Jack, as they more-so showed us with the broken chamber and April's powers. Overall, this was a good read that really changes things for Jen and Jack for the future of this run.

Not a bad issue for this series once again. Although I've liked the slower pace this series has taken, I think this current story is moving just a little too slow for my liking. However, this was still enjoyable. We got a little bit of development on the Scoundrel, plus we got a nice interaction between Jen and Mallory. Her interaction with Jack also wasn't bad, but the ending just fell a little flat for me. Hopefully things pick up a bit with Issue 14.

I hate how charming Scoundrel can be at times. I miss Jack and, being a sucker for a good romance, I hope they work things out soon. I really like the two of them together. What has me a little worried about this series is the fact that this title has been missing for two rounds of solicitations and we have no announcement(s) regarding the future of the series. I really hope they don't pull a Black Widow and suddenly tell us on the last page that the series is ending. What makes me even more paranoid is the fact that said Black Widow series (which you should totally read if you haven't, it's great; it's from Kelly Thompson and Elena Casagrande) ended on Issue 15, and Issue 15 of this series is the last one that's been solicited at the time of this writing.

A good follow-up to the super interesting first issue. While I didn't give this the same score as said issue, I do feel very similarly to how I felt with that one. Shehan's art is good and Booher does a really solid job of writing these characters to feel authentic. Plus, I also thought the ending was another nice cliffhanger. It didn't really hit quite as hard as Issue 1, but it was still effective in advancing the story in an interesting way, leaving me wanting more.

A good issue with the penultimate one of the miniseries here. This one really leans into the supernatural aspects of this book, mores than the previous two, in my opinion. Pretty much everything I've said in my reviews of those two issues still holds true. I will say that the ending isn't as dramatic or anything in this issue, but it still left me wanting to continue reading.

An emotional finale to a pretty good miniseries. While I will say (like a few others here) that Ted giving a eulogy about magic glasses at Kenny's funeral is kind of weird, the rest of this issue delivered a heartfelt conclusion to the story that dealt with Ted's coming out to Kenny fairly well. Overall, a rock solid final issue from Booher and Shehan.

This was an interesting mix of stories. Firstly, we had Aaron and Kirk's story, which is a solid set up that provides a lot of intrigue, although it was a tad too short for my liking. In the middle, we have a beautifully horrifying dreamlike scene from Peach Momoko. This really leaned into Vader's ominous presence, and it was a joy to view. Lastly, we had the story from Grønbekk and Janson. While I wasn't the biggest fan of Janson's art, Grønbekk provided an intriguing story with, what I perceived to be, a commentary on organizations/corporations, while also maintaining Vader's status as one of the highest and most feared threats in the Star Wars universe (Something I, somewhat, alluded to when talking about the second story). Overall, this was an enjoyable opener for this anthology series; I'm interested to see where Aaron & Kirk's story goes, and I'm also looking forward to what the next set of creators have to offer in Issue 2.

A pretty good space adventure here for the Brotherhood. The twist with Mystique at the end was very well-done and was my favorite part of this issue. X-Men Red has been a great book up until this point, and Al Ewing doesn't falter with the transition to this title under the Sins of Sinister event.

The best issue yet. I especially enjoyed this towards the end, in which the rest of the team tried reasoning with Dreamer. The art here was a step up from the last issue as well.

Let's get this out of the way now before I mention it later on. Campbell's art is once again wonderful in this issue and it continues to be one of this book's strongest aspects. As for Williamson's story, I did think this ending was on the quicker side, but I still enjoyed it. Clark finally agreeing to Lex's Supercorp idea was always going to happen, but I am interested to see where it goes. All in all, this continues to be a nicely-put-together book that maintains my intrigue going into the next issue.

Possibly my favorite part of this issue is Clark and Lex's conversation about Lex trying to be a hero in the past. As Most pointed out in their review, Lex's previous attempt(s) at being a superhero only adds to his jealousy of Clark. Campbell's art is, once again, awesome here. Plus, Dragotta's art during the flashback is nice as well. The last time I read something with his art was Issue 10 of Zeb Wells's current Amazing Spider-Man series, and I wasn't the biggest fan of it there. Here, I think it works a lot better. Overall, this series continues to provide an interesting story along with great art.

This was a nice setup issue for the new "Chained" storyline. I can't lie, I was expecting the prisoner to have a bit of a better/cooler design with him being trapped in what I'm guessing to be a high security prison, but I guess it's his powers that make him such a big threat. I'm looking forward to learning more about him in the next issue, which I'm hoping will be a good one considering it's Legacy #850. As for this issue's art, Melnikov is no Jamal Campbell, but his art isn't bad whatsoever here, and I actually thought it fit with this current story. I continue to be interested by this title and I'm looking forward to next month's over-sized issue.

I can’t lie, I was expecting a little more from a bigger legacy number issue. This was still good, though. I wasn’t incredibly into the stuff with Lex, but I did enjoy the Superman-focused stuff, especially the beginning with Perry.

A nice improvement upon the last issue. I’ll always miss Jamal Campbell being on interiors, but Redondo’s art does fit right in with this series, in my opinion. The western turn at the end here was a little odd and sudden for me, but I’m interested to see where things go regardless.

I can’t believe this storyline is actually making me care about Lobo. I just really liked his conversation with Clark before they ran into the other Czarnians. The art from Sandoval is pretty good here again, as well.

A pretty good conclusion to House of Brainiac. Glad to see that Brainiac Queen is going to do more. I completely forgot that Absolute Power was coming up after this. Speaking of which, I am interested in the cliffhanger here with Lex, so I hope Absolute Power doesn’t get in the way of that.

Maybe it's because I'm used to watching television shows that take time away from their main character(s) to focus on side/supporting characters for an episode, but I could not care less that this was more of a Lois Lane book than a Superman one. "Superman: Annual" will sell more than "Lois Lane: Annual," and I actually thought this was an entertaining story. I think it adds some intrigue to the main title's current story with Lex Luthor. Plus, at the end of the issue, we get two very interesting appearances, with Lobo and Brainiac. I'm not the biggest Lobo fan, but I am looking forward to seeing where this goes. As for the art, it's well-documented that I'm not a huge fan of it changing mid-issue without reason, but it didn't bother me that much in this instance. Overall, while this may be a Lois Lane story rather than a Superman story, it's still a well-written and intriguing annual.

This book had three different stories and my favorite was the one least associated with House of Brainiac. All of them were good, though. I liked learning about Brainiac’s past with Czarnia in the first one. The third one was my least favorite, possibly since I haven’t read Dark Crisis at this point in time. The second story, however, was pretty good. I enjoyed seeing the struggles of Perry running for mayor and his journey through the campaign. Hopefully we get more of that soon, but I do feel like it’s unlikely, at least for a while.

Despite this being a good issue, it just doesn't reach the heights as the previous four issues, unfortunately. Despite John McCrea proving to be a nice transition from Mike Perkins, the story from V. here just isn't as engaging or as interesting as what we've seen prior. Suicide Squad is once again teased at the end of this issue and I'm still not looking forward to it that much. I'm just hoping V. gives me some reason to enjoy them as antagonists.

This was just a little better than the previous issue, for me, but not enough to get a higher rating. This miniseries is loosing a little bit of steam, unfortunately. However, I do like a lot of the concepts here. I was unsure of Suicide Squad's involvement since it was first teased two issues ago, but having them hunt Levi through the jungle is fun enough. Plus, we get more of a glimpse into Levi's backstory and his return to India for Prescott. Despite this not being bad by any means, I really hope this series is able to get back on track and return to the form it was at in its first four issues.

This was certainly an intriguing start to "Season Two." While this issue seems to be the start of a slower burn,I think there are a good amount of interesting ideas presented here and I'm looking forward to seeing V. develop and build upon them. Plus, Perkins continues to have quality art here and I'm glad he's returned for "Season Two." I don't really have much to say, other than the fact that this series continues to maintain my interest

Oddly my first time reading a TMNT comic, and this was a pretty solid way to do it. Jones's art was particularly enjoyable, as she made all of the action look super nice throughout. As for the story itself, I thought Aaron's inner monologue for Raphael was written a bit cliche at some times, but I still enjoyed it overall. I'm looking forward to what comes next as the focus shifts to Michelangelo in the next issue.

I liked this issue, but it's definitely not what I expected. The biggest thing I wasn't expecting was the lack of the titular character. It's not something I'm going to hold against the story here, but it was just a bit weird. I will say that I do like the new Illuminati team and I'm really glad to see Blue Marvel getting some spotlight here. I do like the story, though, but I just wish this packed a bigger punch with its interesting premise, if that makes sense. All things considered, this was definitely an intriguing opening issue for this miniseries that defied expectations. I'm looking forward to seeing where it goes.

A fun issue that brings together the (Pet) Avengers. Thor and Loki's conversation at the beginning was a nice touch to the book also. I do wish that Bob Quinn was the sole artist of this issue, as I'm not really a fan of the art switching mid-issue, but Pasqual Ferry's art wasn't bad either. Throg setting up the team was nice, and I'm surprised this was just a single issue. All in all, I love Throg being featured more often and the team he's assembled is very promising.

A fun anthology that allows a bunch of great teams to tell different stories about Thor and other Asgard-related characters. My favorites here have to be the stories from Donny Cates, J. Michael Straczynski, Al Ewing, and Jason Aaron. Walt Simonson and Dan Jurgens' stories were solid as well, but they weren't as great as I would have hoped. Nonetheless, this was an enjoyable book and a good time for Thor fans.

Another fun installment for Banner of War as we head into the final issue. A good chunk of this storyline has been a lot of nonsensical craziness, but it's been a lot of fun as well. After Thor was exposed to a boatload, and then some, of gamma radiation in the last issue, things get even more insane here as Hulk is able to wield Mjolnir. This crossover is just crazy fun.

Not a bad start to the Thor & Venom crossover. I haven't been reading Al Ewing's Venom, so I'm not sure how much that would or wouldn't have boosted my experience reading this issue. Nonetheless, this was still fairly enjoyable. Loki being a comic relief wasn't something I particularly expected, but it was one of the main highlights of this book for me. While I'm not as interested in this storyline as the others in this run, this was still well-written and entertaining. Hoping things pick up in the next issue and second half of this crossover.

This was a cool second half of the Thor & Venom crossover. I really like that this crossover wasn't a throwaway, as the final two pages see the symbiote fall into Donald Blake's eyes and transforms him into a "serpent." This was a great way to make this actually mean something for the future of Thor. Aside from that, this was a fairly entertaining issue, just like the previous, and I really enjoyed briefly seeing the God in Black.

Not a bad start to Grønbekk's temporary run on Thor. This issue started off strong for me, but lost a little steam as time went on. This was still enjoyable, however. The beginning of this book is the first time I've read Rūna and I enjoyed her for the most part, particularly the bar scene. With the reference to Jane Foster & the Mighty Thor not long after that, I may need to check it out when I can. Either way, this was a fairly entertaining book.

This was the best issue of this miniseries yet. While we do get to see the rest of the team, their roles are minimal in order to give the full focus to Taegukgi and Min-Jae. This was a great choice, as we find out more about how the two of them were initially separated, which gives way to where we are now. Hopefully it’s only up from here for this run.

This mini continues to be pretty enjoyable as we head into the final issue. Taegukgi has quickly become a compelling character due to his backstory, despite the "second chance" trope being prominent in superhero comics. Kim writes it well enough to still be interesting, and it also helps that Lee's art is nice as well. Good stuff and I just hope Issue 5 sticks the landing.

Glad to say this miniseries stuck the landing. I agree with what Psycamorean said in his review, in that this did its job by making me care about and become invested in these characters. The writing and the art both delivered here and I'm glad that Doctor Doom's involvement didn't overshadow the main story going on. All things considered, I thought this was a nicely-done finale for this story and I would definitely be interested to read more stories about this team.

I thought this was a fairly good start to this series. There isn't anything super high-stakes here, but this was a fun mission for the Titans that lays some groundwork for the future. We have whatever's going on with Tempest, we have the tension between the Titans and Peacemaker & Amanda Waller, and then we have Wally's situation (for the more immediate future of this title). This was an entertaining first issue and I'm looking forward to seeing where this run goes from here. I am really craving a good Titans book after the last two Titans United runs.

A little bit of a step down from Issue 2, but not by much. The story presented here is still intriguing, especially with how it ended. Of course Church of Eternity had something shady going on, this was expected. I'm really interested to learn more about it, though, and what that aforementioned last page was about. As for the art, it wasn't my absolute favorite here, but it was still pretty solid throughout. This was another good issue for this series.

I liked this issue as a whole, though I also think it was the weakest of the series thus far. It was far from bad, but I wish it was just a little more engaging. Although, as seen by my rating, I still liked this. I especially enjoyed the increased focus on Starfire here and I liked the twist at the end.

I thought this was another good issue for this series. While not the best the series has been, I still enjoyed the Taylor's writing and Moore's art, especially. I know Lucas Meyer is supposed to be stepping in as the new ongoing artist for the series in Issue 9, but I'd love for Moore to work on more (no pun intended) issues in the future as well.

The best issue of this storyline thus far. I continue to really like Meyer's art, and I think Taylor is doing a really solid job with the story. Dick noticing that something was off again was well-done, in my opinion.

Another pretty good issue. I especially liked Dick's spin on Zur-En-Arrh. A relatively smaller aspect I've really liked about this run is Taylor having Nightwing try to be better than Batman, but not in a way that's negative/hostile/etc., if that makes sense. At the time of this writing, I haven't read Taylor's current Nightwing series, so I don't know how present that aspect is there, if at all.

I thought this was definitely an interesting start to the first DC crossover event led by the Titans. I liked Reis's art and I thought it fit the story. Speaking of which, while I did enjoy Taylor's story for the most part, I did think that it moved a bit too fast. I know there's a lot to establish for the story going forward, but it kind of felt like a lot was crammed in this issue in order to get things going. Hopefully the next issue can slow things down a bit now that we have the foundation for this storyline.

I feel very similarly to how I felt with the previous issue. I liked everything we got here, but I did feel like it was moving fairly swiftly. Once again, the art from Reis was good and the story from Taylor was entertaining and intriguing. Dick having to face Bruce as a beast was cool and I liked how this issue ended. I just hope that we can finally start to slow things down a bit as we approach the halfway point of this miniseries.

This was probably my least favorite issue yet, but I still enjoyed it a good amount. While I do think the pace slowed down a bit here, which is one of the main things I've wanted when reviewing the past two issues, I also thought the story was a little less interesting this time around. With that, things evened out, resulting in another 8/10 for this miniseries from me. I will add that I think I enjoyed Meyer's art more than Reis's from the past two issues, though both were good overall.

I really liked that this slowed the pace down a bit after the first four issues. I think that's exactly what this needed after the death of Beast Boy. I'm also glad we got a lot of focus on Raven here, as she and Beast Boy are my two favorite members of the Titans. I think Taylor wrote her really well here, and I also thought he did the same for Amanda Waller. Overall, this was a well-written and well-drawn issue that makes me excited to see how the next, and final, issue plays out.

A really solid ending for an entertaining event overall. I think the way the spores were contained could have been elaborated on, but that's not a huge gripe for me. I liked how Garfield came back together in the end, and I think Doctor Hate prevailing over Raven was a nicely done twist. I'm looking forward to seeing how that develops in the main series.

I’ll start this review off by saying that, going into this, I could not have cared less about Transformers. I had watched some of the movies with Shia LaBeouf in them, but I was never the biggest fan of the franchise. However, when it was announced that Daniel Warren Johnson, who’s one of my favorite comic creators right now, if not my absolute favorite, would be writing and drawing this, I knew I had to check it out. While I’m not completely sold on this series yet, I did think this was a pretty good start that has piqued my interest. This feels like a jumping-on point for someone looking to try a Transformers book, which is exactly what I was hoping for with this, given my brief history with the franchise. All in all, Johnson has managed to get me interested in a series that I would have, initially, not given a second glance at. Johnson is the man and I’ll definitely be sticking around to see what he cooks up with this series.

Not the strongest issue, but still a good one. I still think there are some pacing issues, but there are still some strong moments, such as Soundwave just destroying Starscream. As for the art change, Corona’s is, of course, different. However, I do think it works nicely, especially when he draws the Cybertronians themselves.

A nice start to the second half of this arc. This was a bit slower compared to the last issue and there wasn’t as much here for me to latch onto. That said, this was still good and Corona had some awesome pages.

I thought this was a rather solid debut issue for the second series in the new Ultimate Universe. This was a book I was really interested to read, especially following the insane amount of praise Jonathan Hickman's Ultimate Spider-Man got. I don't think this reached those heights, but it was still good. I felt as though a good chunk of T'Challa was the same or similar to what we've seen in the past. That doesn't make the book bad, but I do think it, somewhat, lessens my interest in the book, especially with how different the depiction of Peter Parker is in Ultimate Spider-Man. Either way, I think Hill did a nice job of building tension within T'Challa's family and conflict within himself. I did also find the twist of Killmonger and Storm being together pretty interesting and I'm really looking forward to that aspect being explored more in the future. All things considered, this was a good start, despite certain gripes I had, and I hope this series does nothing but improve going forward.

Pretty solid once again. Hill continues to put together a fairly interesting story, though I do think it could be coming together a bit stronger. I do really like Caselli's art, which is no surprise. Something I particularly like about the art is the darker tone it creates throughout the book. Moving back to the story, though, I'm excited to finally see more of Storm and, likely, Killmonger in the next issue.

This was, unfortunately, the weakest issue of the miniseries. However, that doesn't mean it wasn't good. I do feel as though this was a bit rushed and I think this could have been, at least, a 6-issue series instead of a 4-issue one. Either way, I did like a good chunk of what we got here and, as usual, Hickman's writing was definitely the strongest point of this. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this new Ultimate Universe shapes up.

When the initial three Ultimate series were announced, the creative team for Spider-Man seemed like a smash-hit and the creative team for Black Panther seemed to have a good amount of potential. However, to me, the announcement that Peach Momoko would be writing and drawing this was the most intriguing of the three. Not because Momoko would be writing and drawing a book, as she's not a stranger do doing that. It's the fact that, as far as I know, all of Momoko's stories for Marvel thus far have been, more or less, self-contained. This book, though, is a part of the new Ultimate Universe shared by other creative teams. All of that said, though, this was another nice start for this new line. It's can be a bit bare when it comes to the dialogue and even the character work, but there's enough to make it work with what's, perhaps, the star of the show: the art. Momoko's art could very well be the reason multiple people are checking this out in the first place and, in that regard, this is a pretty good book. Considering everything, though, I'd say it's a good read. It's nothing revolutionary or groundbreaking, but I enjoyed it for what it was. I think it has the potential to get even better as more issues come out and I really hope it does.

I thought this was a pretty good start to this miniseries. I've been reading Duggan's X-Men run since it started and I've always like the concept of Captain Krakoa. Here, I will say that I'm very interested to find out who this new person that's taken up the mantle is. As for the Unity Squad, I must admit that I wasn't incredibly interested by the line-up when I first saw it. However, I do like the team after reading this. Deadpool's my favorite comic character, so him being here definitely helped and he was fun here. Steve Rogers is always a great leader and I think he's the perfect leader here. Those two are the highlights for me, but I also generally like everyone else, although I don't know much about Penance. Moving back to the story itself, I thought this book established the new team and their antagonists nicely. I'm looking forward to seeing where this goes.

I wasn't as crazy about this one as I was about the first issue, unfortunately. However, this is still good and I enjoyed it a fair amount. Aside from the story not being as entertaining as Issue #1, I found the sudden romance between Kurt and Silvija to be a bit odd. I think it's something that would have been better had it been built to for a longer period of time, but it just felt a little out of the blue here. Either way, I still enjoyed this and I'm interested to see how their relationship develops.

If you read my review of the previous issue, you'd know that I preferred the Eddie story. However, I liked Dylan's story as well and I continue to like it here. V. does a solid job of making him a compelling/likable protagonist and I'm genuinely interested in his story right now. Plus, Hitch's art is actually pretty good throughout this issue. Something I am concerned about is the balancing between Eddie and Dylan in this series. It looks like the next time we're getting Eddie as the main focus of the story is Issue 5, since Ewing is writing that one. I hope one Brock isn't ignored for a long period of time before going back to the other. I do think including Eddie's voicemail to Dylan was a good way to include him in some way in this issue, though.

Once again, V. gives a solid read on this title. I think I would have given this a 7.5/10 originally, but I really enjoyed how the twist with Bedlam at the end was executed. I didn't see that coming at all and I particularly liked how they told us what the twist was without explicitly showing who Bedlam was. Maybe that leaves the door open for it to not be who we think, but I would genuinely be shocked if it wasn't him.

This was a step-up from the previous issue, in my opinion. I did end up liking Sleeper after feeling unsure in the last issue, and I also liked the dialogue between Venom and Dylan here, primarily Venom. I kind of like Dylan's new Codex persona, but I'm not completely sold on it yet. He looks like a mix of Venom and Knull, which does intrigue me. With Dark Web coming up, I'm interested to see the direction this series takes.

A good issue here, even if it has more focus on Janine than the titular character. I did fairly enjoy how Ewing wrote her, so I don't really care that much. The highlight of this for me is the fact that we've finally gotten to the point in the timeline where Eddie transforms into Bedlam. I'm really interested to see how this ends up going in the next issue.

While I did enjoy this issue and every issue of this series involved in Dark Web, I do think the event is hindering the series a bit with this one. This issue started out strong with the dialogue between Dylan, Kamala, and Normie. I also enjoyed the fight between Dylan and Eddie, but I wasn't a huge fan of Madelyne suddenly inserting herself and snatching up Eddie so he can be in the finale one-shot. Hopefully this is just a minor bump in the road, and I think it is seeing as though the next issue isn't Dark Web-related.

Definitely an interesting issue here. I do think that the cover is a bit misleading, but that doesn't really change my rating of the book. Even with Ewing writing Dylan this time around, I'm still not as interested as when he's writing Eddie. Hopefully Ewing is able to make Dylan's side of the story more interesting. I will say that I did enjoy how he wrote Norman throughout this.

I really agree with what Afre said in their review, in that I think this is the best job Ewing has done with writing Dylan thus far. I think his voice felt more genuine and authentic. As for the story itself, I found it entertaining and good, as can be seen by my rating, though I also feel as though this isn't Ewing's strongest work on the title. Although, it is well-documented at this point that I prefer Eddie's side of the story in this title to Dylan's, no matter who's writing it. Something I do want to point out, though, is how crazy it is that Flexo is being used in this series right now. If you don't already know, Flexo was a character from the 1940's that was seen in the first four issues of Mystic Comics. It wasn't until this current series that he was seen again in comics. Ewing bringing in a character that hasn't been seen in over eight decades and making them a big threat in this story is just great, in my opinion. Ewing is such a comic book nerd and I absolutely love it.

I wish this came together a little better, especially with Ewing writing this, but it was still good for what it was. Lashley's art was nice throughout and I saw it as a bit of an improvement over his work in Carnage #5. The story here was interesting as well and I'm genuinely interested to see how it wraps up. Hopefully Grønbekk sticks the landing over in Issue 6 of Carnage.

Almost everything about the surface of this book leads you to believe it's going to be like Ewing's Ant-Man, but with Wasp instead. You, of course, have Ewing writing it. You have it as a four-issue miniseries. You have all four issues with covers done by Tom Reilly in the same pattern as Ant-Man. However, what we get inside is not that awesome series. That's not to say it's about, because it's an entertaining read. While I was a big fan of Reilly's art in Ant-Man, I find Nie's art just fantastic. I'm really glad I'll be viewing her art for three more issues. As for Ewing, this is a rock solid story with some emotional stakes. There's a good amount of potential shown throughout this issue and I'm looking forward to seeing how the story develops.

Another rock solid issue for this miniseries as we reach the halfway point. Nie's art continues to be amazing and it's one of the best parts of this entire book for me. Ewing continues to write a nice story as well and I'm interested to see what happened with Janet and Nadia after they met the Creature from Kosmos.

This was a pretty solid finale to this miniseries that told a very different story than Ewing's previous Ant-Man miniseries. While I do think the two miniseries featured different stories, I do also believe that they share a similar sentiment and intent, in that they were created to honor the legacies of the characters they were about. In both cases, it was the 60th Anniversary of the character. Here, Ewing and Nie put together a more straightforward story that does a nice job of depicting the relationship between Janet and Nadia while also advancing their story. On top of everything, I must say that Nie's art is just great. All in all, this was a nice miniseries to honor the Wasp and I'm looking forward to seeing what she does next.

This didn't really pack the same punch for me as Issue 1 did, but this was still good. I don't really know how I feel about Logan being manipulated twice in both issues of this series thus far. I'm just hoping it's not a trend. Either way, entertaining stuff that continues to keep me fairly interested.

There were some interesting ideas here and this was an entertaining read overall, but I can't help but feel a little bit underwhelmed after how much I enjoyed the first issue. Either way, I'm looking forward to Omega Red, seemingly, returning in the next issue.

Although this did feel like a bit of a rushed conclusion, I still liked it. As a matter of fact, that's how the past two stories have felt, in my opinion. The first storyline only lasted three issues and this one was only two, as we have X of Swords coming up next. I think the past five issues would have greatly benefitted from being spread across maybe ten issues or so. Hopefully this series gets more room to breathe after the aforementioned crossover.

The weakest issue for X of Swords thus far, but still a good read nonetheless. Percy continues to write a nice Logan, and I found the Arakko sections of this book really interesting. Plus, Bogdanovic's art was great and definitely one of the strongest parts of this book.

A fun issue, but not the best from X of Swords. This was far from bad, however, as it was actually a fun read. I loved how Wolverine was consistently just fed up with Saturynne and this whole situation in general. Cassara also did great on the art duties here, and I think this picking him for this side of the story was a really good choice.

This was a good read overall, but I really would have liked Kubert's art throughout the entirety of this. For whatever reason, Bogdanovic's art just didn't hit like it has previously in this series. As for Percy's story, it was good. I think it could have been structured and/or paced better, but it was far from a bad book. I especially liked the prologue story.

Another good read for the series here. Kubert's art is really nice throughout this book, and I thought Percy wrote an entertaining story. This wasn't anything absolutely spectacular, but it was really solid. The auction premise was fun.

A good issue overall, in my opinion. I liked the dialogue between Wolverine and Maverick here and I appreciated the setup for more in that regard. Kubert's art was super solid as well. Good stuff all around.

A nice follow-up to the last issue of Percy's X-Force (#20). It would have been nice if this was more of what we got on the cover or even just more Wolverine-focused, but I can't complain that much when the story is still good. I continue to enjoy the version of Beast throughout this run and X-Force, as I think the character has a lot of potential to give way to great stories.

A good, more action-packed issue here. I thought just about everyone was written well here, and the action was entertaining as well. I particularly enjoyed Wolverine cutting off that one guy's fingers. As for the art, I didn't dislike it as much as a few others seem to. It's not quite Adam Kubert or anything, but I thought it was perfectly fine.

Man, Kubert's art really fits in great here. The story continues to be written nicely as well, however, I didn't find this issue to be quite as strong as the last one. That said, though, this is still fun, which is exactly what you want from a Wolverine & Deadpool story.

A pretty solid issue that I mainly push to the 8 mark for the ending of the main story and the fact that I thought the second half with Wolverine in bars pretty cool. Vicentini did a solid job on this issue and the last, but I am ready for the artist to change. I'm also really looking forward to the next arc of this series, as I'm hoping it'll be where Beast really starts to go off the rails.

Not quite the conclusion I was hoping for, but it was still good overall. I liked Jeff recognizing and shouting out how he knew that the Beast sent out to deal with him and Wolverine wasn't the real one (AKA "Beast Prime). I've really liked how Percy has been handling Beast across this series and in his X-Force run, so hopefully what comes next with him continues to be at that level.

While I do feel like this storyline feels a bit like filler, this issue was still an enjoyable and entertaining Wolverine & Captain America team-up. I like their relationship and dynamic, so it's usually a good time seeing the two of them together. With Black Panther coming in the next issue, I'm interested as to whether or not this arc will have a larger narrative, or if it's just meant to have Wolverine team up with different non-mutant heroes.

Another fun team-up for Wolverine before we get into the Sabretooth War storyline. Peter was just a LITTLE BIT much at times, but he was fun overall and I do think Percy did a solid job with him. I don't know how I missed that Moustafa was doing the interiors for this issue and not Juan José Ryp, but I also think he did a super solid job here.

An improvement over the previous issue, but still not quite up to the heights of the first two issues, in my opinion. I appreciated seeing how the events of the first issue impacted Aurora, and the fact that this issue, as a whole, had some slower moments to digest what's gone on thus far. Wolverine reflecting on his past is something we've gotten a good amount of over the course of this run, and Percy often does it nicely.

I'm liking that the quality of this book is going back up and I hope it continues with the next, and final, two issues. I liked the self-reflection from Logan and Victor in the first few pages of this, and it also seems that I'm enjoying the issues "headed" by Percy more thus far. The first two issues had Percy listed before LaValle on the writer section, as did Issues 44, 46, and this one. On Issues 43, 45, and 47, LaValle was listed before Percy. Anyways, yeah, this was a good issue all around.

Probably the best "LaValle-headed" issue yet (See my review of the previous issue to get what I mean). Cypher trying to teach Sabretooth through empathy, just for it to not resonate in a meaningful way whatsoever was great and, as Psycamorean stated in their own review, perfectly in line with his character.

Honestly, if it wasn't for the two backup stories, I probably would have given this an 8.5/10. Not that those stories were particularly bad or anything, I just didn't have a strong interest in them. I just wasn't super into Hama's story, and I didn't really feel like it fit in with the rest of the book. As for Percy's, I just found it to be a little unnecessary, especially considering that it was just a history recap and it didn't really have anything to say about the future of the character. Back to the main story, though, I thought it was pretty good. It felt like a nice sendoff to this era of Wolverine. I especially liked that closing line, as it just really hit for me. Oh yeah, that double page splash was absolutely epic, as well.

I liked the different challenges for Diana here, but I also felt as though the plot didn't progress a whole lot because of the larger focus on said challenges. It's also starting to bother me that there's so much narration from the Sovereign in each issue. That said, the backup was fun, as usual, but it also wasn't my favorite one.

A pretty solid start here, in my opinion. I think a little bit of the story here felt somewhat rushed, but it wasn't anything to the point where I didn't enjoy the book. The story, as a whole, is definitely interesting and it leaves me wanting more. Also, Johnson's art is great, of course.

I'm glad to say that this was a bit of an improvement over the first issue. Despite it being labelled as a Wolverine book, which does technically feature Wolverine, this is an entertaining Moira-focused book with her on the run. Her basically exploding Mystique was crazy. I still don't know how I feel about Vicentini being the artist for this specific miniseries, but nothing from him was bad here at all. A super solid issue here all around.

An improvement over the last issue. Logan nearly killing Arnab and the whole confrontation before it was good stuff. I also enjoyed Moira infiltrating Krakoa. Percy wrote the intensity well and Vicentini's art has been fitting more overall, in my opinion. Hopefully the larger connection between this and X Lives of Wolverine becomes clearer in the final issues of both books.

A pretty solid ending, but it did leave a little to be desired considering the "event" as a whole, in my opinion. With the past four issues having a good amount of focus on Moira, she's now nowhere to be seen until the final page or two. Instead, we get the main Logan coming from X Lives of Wolverine to come fight Omega Wolverine. The fight was fun and Vicentini's art was pretty good throughout, but the way this and X Lives were put together was a little odd, at least to me. Either way, I didn't dislike any of the issues. It may be a little odd, but everything I read was enjoyable.

A pretty solid start here. Cassara's interior art is definitely the highlight of this, as he's such a perfect fit for Wolverine, but Percy's story is intriguing as well. I think this could have come together a little smoother, but I also understand that, as a first issue, this has to introduce multiple different things for the other four issues to come. Either way, this has a lot of potential, as Wolverine fighting Omega Red through time to save Professor X is a fun premise, and hopefully it only improves from here.

I feel similar with this issue to how I felt with the previous one, but this worked a bit better than that one for me. I don't know what it was specifically, unfortunately. I'm also writing this review a few hours after actually reading it, so that might be a factor. Either way, it was good, despite still being a little all over the place with its time jumps, in my opinion.

I still think a more linear narrative would have benefitted this book, but I do like this. Throughout all of the different time periods, Percy writes everything well. Also, Cassara continues to be an awesome artist, so that definitely helps things. He always shines when the action gets going, especially when it's on the crazier, more violent side.

I'm glad to say that this was a step up from the previous two issues. While this still isn't up to the standard of quality set by the majority of this run so far, it's still a good read. I'm especially interested by Beast's character. Percy has done a really nice job of building his character throughout this run and I'm really enjoying the darker turn he's taken.

This was an issue that was solid overall, but is also helped by certain stronger moments throughout. We've gotten to see how absurd some of the contests have gotten, but I especially liked the contest between Wolverine and White Sword, in which Wolverine sheds tears after seeing the faces of everyone he's killed. Also, I thought this issue ended really strongly. Storm killing Death was absolutely fantastic and that interaction alone makes reading this worth it, in my opinion.

A really solid issue that continues to build Beast's darker character nicely. This feels like more of the beginning of a story following X of Swords, but it's still good. It's always nice to have Cassara doing the art as well. I feel like he's a great fit for this series.

A fun issue overall, but not my absolute favorite of the series or anything. Cassara's art is good, of course, and I think Percy wrote an entertaining story. I especially liked the moment when Kid Omega walked back up to Forge and Wolverine after being kissed by Phoebe.

Kind of a weird issue here and I mean that in a good way. The stuff with Beast and Black Tom continues to be intriguing here, but what stood out to me was the improvement in Mikhail's side of the story. Given, I found it more interesting since it was involving Colossus, but still. The sudden turn during his interaction with Kayla towards the end of the book was crazy. I'm looking forward to seeing where this side of the series goes.

What seemed to be more of a filler issue towards the beginning ended up taking an interesting turn by the final few pages. I particularly enjoyed Logan's side of the book. It was a slower build that definitely payed off when Pike end her friends/allies/etc ended up stealing the babies. As for the Quentin & Phoebe side of things, I wasn't quite as invested. I wasn't the biggest fan of how the book handled Quentin previously, particularly in the issue this book itself referenced (#17), but the break-up here just felt a little rushed. However, I feel like that story isn't quite over, so hopefully that side of the book improves as the series continues.

Another good issue for this current storyline. I enjoyed Quentin's appearance in this issue more than the previous, so that's good. This was a solid close to his romance with Phoebe, though I also feel like Percy could continue it if he likes. As long as the story is good. As for Logan's side of things, that was good as well. I think Percy continues to show that he has a nice grasp on his character.

There's a lot to like in this issue story-wise, primarily the council meeting. Gill's art was actually pretty solid as well. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this issue affects the series going forward.

I thought this was a good continuation from the previous issue, though, for whatever reason, I've been finding it a little difficult to get invested in the Kid Omega stuff here. Hopefully that changes soon, as it's clear he's going to continue to be a fairly large focus. That said, though, I did find Cerebrax to be pretty interesting.

I wish we got a little more follow-up on Kid Omega here, but I'm thinking we will at some point. I do think Percy wrote Kraven pretty well here and I'm interested to see his role in the series going forward, even if it's just for a few issues. Something I do want to point out is that, as I've been writing my most recent reviews for this series and for Percy's Wolverine series, I just fully realized that this was advertised as a tie-in issue with Judgment Day. Now, I did read this yesterday, but I don't remember any of this having to do with Judgment Day. I don't really care all that much since I would have read this anyways, but I feel like it shouldn't have been listed as a tie-in if it wasn't going to have anything to do with it, unless I'm not remembering something.

A lot like the last issue, this felt largely disconnected from Judgment Day. At least, this time, they actually mentioned the event and I believe there was one scene involving it. Either way, I still liked this as a whole and found it enjoyable. Just make it have more to do with Judgment Day if you're going to advertise it as a tie-in.

The highlight of this issue is most likely Percy's writing of Kraven, for me. Gill's art was the best it's been in a while, though. Either way, I found this to be a good issue as a whole, but it still largely ignores Judgment Day, despite being advertised as a tie-in. However, I am looking forward to seeing how this wraps up.

The highlight of this was definitely the stuff with Sage. That was really good. While the stuff with Maverick and the other mercenaries was fun and cool, I wasn't incredibly intrigued in it until Solem showed up at the end and everything tied back to Beast. Hopefully the book, as a whole, is a bit more interesting with the next issue. The main reason this is getting as high of a rating as it is is because of Sage.

It's a little odd to me that Beast is still kind of in charge of X-Force considering everyone else's obvious distrust towards him, but I can let that go since I'm enjoying the story. We're finally getting back to XENO here, and the other plot of Mikhail taking over the mind of Colossus, and I'm definitely interested to see where things go. I just wish this was hitting as well as Percy's Wolverine is for me currently.

A pretty good reveal here, regarding the Man with the Peacock Tattoo. The whole plotline was a little dragged out, with the solicitation even noting that it's taken us thirty-seven issues to get to this, but I still liked how it was handled here. Aside from that, there was surprisingly a little too much of Deadpool here for me. Though, I did like the focus on Domino here.

A nice gateway issue of sorts. It's a little weird to me that Charles is ready to just let Beast be, but it's not a huge deal. Colossus officially joining the team hopefully means we'll finally be getting some follow-up on that story with Mikhail controlling his body. Also, Kid Omega showing up at the end was kind of random, but I'm still fairly intrigued.

A bit of a step up from the previous issue. I'd like to take the rest of my review to talk about the adamantium soldier or whatever it's called. If you've seen my reviews for Gerry Duggan's X-Men run, you might have seen me talking about how I thought Wolverine's skeletons being left around after he died and them getting into the wrong hands was a super cool idea to introduce. However, that series wasn't doing anything with it from what I remember. However, now that I'm FINALLY getting through this series, it looks like that idea was followed up on here? I'm glad it's getting continued, but I just find it a little weird that it's here and not in the series it was introduced in. All of that aside, this was a good issue.

Another solid issue here. Gill continues to put out some nice art, and Percy's story continues to be interesting. Mikhail getting shot was not what I expected this this juncture, but I am intrigued to see where it goes, especially with him being sent to Colossus.

Damn, the ending to the fight between Colossus and Mikhail was crazy. It really reminded me of the early days of this series in a good way. Everything else was good here as well, though I think a little more focus on Colossus and Mikhail would have been nice. Either way, good stuff. I'm intrigued to see what ends up happening to Colossus now that he's free of Mikhail's control.

A fun, entertaining story with intriguing repercussions going forward. That said, though, both the art and dialogue weren't always my favorite. The dialogue, particularly, whenever Shammas made it sound to generic or "witty" if that makes sense. However, I still found the issue to be relatively strong as a whole. It just could have been higher.

While this was a fun and entertaining issue, I would also have to say it was definitely the weakest of the series so far. It just didn't resonate with me like the previous seven issues have. Either way, I still liked what we got here with both Hickman's writing and Asrar's art.

I pretty much agree with what Psycamorean said in their review, in that this had a rather abrupt ending, but I still liked the story for what it was. These last two issues have been good, entertaining books, but not really up to the standard set by the rest of the series thus far. Hopefully it reaches those heights once again soon.

A pretty solid start here. Asrar does a nice job drawing everything, and Hickman does a good enough job with the story. I didn't really dislike anything about this, but I just wish this had a little more for me to latch on to. Either way, it was good. It was just a bit quick for me.

A solid issue here. It doesn't read like the final issue of a series, but it's not exactly meant to be that. It's more so meant to be a gateway to a new phase of X-Men stories. Either way, I particularly enjoyed Scott's response to Kevin Feige (which was kind of a weird cameo, at least to me). Hickman always writes Scott so incredibly well, and that reigns true here.

This was a good start for this series that gives us a quick, fun X-Men adventure while also setting up things to come in future issues. I really like Cordyceps Jones' design, so I'm glad that he'll, presumably, be returning later on. There isn't much more for me to say here other than this was just an enjoyable read.

I feel that this should have been a better issue, considering the stuff with Polaris being pretty good. However, this just felt a little off and it definitely felt a lot quicker than the previous issues. Nonetheless, still an enjoyable issue, even more so for fans of Polaris.

The plot with Storm here wasn't my favorite, which is a shame since she's probably my favorite X-Man. However, I did enjoy the middle of the book with Rogue, Gambit, and Destiny. It was pretty fun and made good use of their relationships with each other. Although, this does continue my issue with this series, in that there are teases of an overarching story here without much follow-up on them.

This was a step-up from the previous issue where we got the women of the group infiltrating Gameworld, plus the unmasking of Doctor Stasis at the end. I would have liked a bit more of the Gameworld stuff, as that was my favorite portion of the book. However, Scott’s fight with Stasis at the end was cool as well. Hopefully we get more developments with the ongoing plot in Issue 12, with this being a step in the right direction.

A good finale for what we were given on this book, not that it was bad by any means. The main problem I was having with this series was that the overarching plot that was teased throughout the run was barely existent. With the team, seemingly, changing every 12 issues or so, I’m worried about how much character development we’ll be getting each time. However, a “monster of the week” book wouldn’t be bad either, just as long we don’t keep getting teases of a larger story that the run barely deals with.

This was a little bit of a step-up from the previous issue. Speaking of which, I enjoyed the content with Iceman there, so I'm glad we got a lot more this time around. I feel like it's often forgotten how powerful he is, so it's nice to see him used in a main X-book. Plus, Cyclops' judgment at the end was a nice touch to tie more in with Judgment Day as well.

This was my favorite issue of the Brood arc for this book. Things felt a little more focused than the previous two issues, and my favorite part of this was Scott and Jean going back and forth on whether or not they should kill the Brood. I feel like both of their perspectives and opinions are understandable, and I thought it was just well-written. Everything else was cool too, but that was the section of the book that stood out to me.

This was the best issue of the series in months. It still wasn't the best thing I've ever read, but I still enjoyed it. My favorite part of this was the super interesting ending with Synch and Talon. I'm really looking forward to seeing how that plays out and I'm hoping it leads into a good story.

There are positives and negatives for me when it comes to this book. I really feel as though we didn't need a whole one-shot for this, as I think it could have been part of an issue for Uncanny Spider-Man or even just an issue of that series as a whole instead. Most people knew what the point of this was anyways, myself included. With that out of the way, I think Spurrier does a solid job of handling what I'm sure was a tough task when it comes to retconning Mystique and Destiny to be Nightcrawler's biological parents, as was the initial idea from Chris Claremont (AKA the co-creator of the former two) during his acclaimed run on X-Men. Also, I feel like most of the people complaining about this retcon happening don't even really know what they're mad at and if you're upset because you think an X-Men comic is "woke," then you probably shouldn't be reading an X-Men comic in the first place. Anyways, to sum up, this was far from being the best comic in the world, but I think it's good for what it is and I'm glad that this is Nightcrawler's origin. Also check out KittyNone's review on this, as it's much more well-written than mine.

I skipped over Dark Crisis and Knight Terrors, so I wasn't sure how this year's DC event would turn out. As for now, I can say it's started off fairly strong. Waid proves to be a good choice for this. Aside from Amanda, to an extent, I think he wrote everyone well here and I think the story is definitely interesting. I won't hold the way Ollie is written here against this, though I'm not sure how this came to be whatsoever, even after it was introduced over in his current ongoing book. Aside from that, Mora, of course, delivers some awesome work here. The first few pages with Superman, alone, were great. Really looking forward to seeing how this one plays out.

Another pretty good issue for this series. Not quite up there with the previous issue, but still really entertaining. We get a little more of Jon exploring and learning more about the Injustice universe, and I thought his short interaction with Alfred was nice. I also enjoyed the two pages with him and Damian, and I'm glad we're going to see more of them together in the next issue after how this one ended. Speaking of which, I thought that his meeting with this alternate Jay was cute. Overall, I thought that this was a well-written book full of nice character moments, and I'm looking forward to seeing how things go in the final third of this series.

The penultimate issue of this miniseries acts as a nice set-up for the final installment. These characters continues to be written well under Taylor, and Jon learning more about the major events of this universe is still interesting to read. Clark being a bit blinded by Jon's presence makes sense and I think it's a good story, especially with Damian being upset about it. As for the ending, I'm interested to see how Harley and Clark's interaction will play into Issue 6, speaking of which, I'm excited to see Jon confront Clark as well.

A definite step-up from the previous issue, in my opinion. While I don't feel as though that this did a whole lot to advance the main story of the miniseries, I just thought that this was a really good depiction of what LGBTQ+ people went through decades ago. DerbyComics did a really good review here, so I would definitely recommend that you check that out. I don't give as high of a score to this as they did, but I generally agree with what was said in their review. My main hope now is that we can get back into the main story and that it ends up being fairly interesting, considering that the next issue marks the halfway point of the miniseries.

I'm genuinely shocked I'm enjoying this series this much. I don't mean to knock the characters or the creative team, but I had never previously been all that interested in Alpha Flight until now. Even here, I only decided to read this because it's part of Fall of X and I think Brisson is a good writer. All of that said, I really enjoyed this issue and I thought it was the best one yet. The story continues to be well-put-together and I also enjoy Godlewski's art. Good stuff all around with this one.

This was an entertaining start that establishes the current story for Peter, as well as a bit for the future. Speaking about the former, we have the stuff with Tombstone. I found this pretty enjoyable, as it just felt like some classic gang/mobster stuff. As for the latter, the Mary Jane situation was not what I was expecting at all. Nonetheless, I'm not going to post a 1/10 review because of that, mainly due to the fact that I don't really care that much. Not that I dislike the character by any means, because I actually like Mary Jane as a character. However, I just don't NEED her to be with Peter to make me enjoy the run. Is it somewhat disappointing after the way Nick Spencer's run was going? Sure, as I felt like Spencer's run should have ended with a proposal or even a marriage after his teasing of it earlier in the run. Yet, I can manage with Peter and MJ not being together here as long as it provides a good quality story, which is what this book is.

Kind of annoyed over the misleading cover and such, but I'm not going to let that alter my thoughts on the book itself. With that said, this was just a good comic, as the previous issue was. Although I am interested by the Norman stuff here, the story with Tombstone is the highlight of this book for me. Him going back to his old ways after being disrespected has been done well, and I'm just really enjoying it. This is just good.

This was a pretty interesting first issue for this new Hobgoblin storyline. While I do think we should be getting to the 6-month gap before people stop caring or it becomes too big of a mystery for what the eventual reveal is, this is still an enjoyable read that provokes a nice amount of intrigue. Plus, this features some of Romita's best art in this run yet, in my opinion. I particularly like how he draws Hobgoblin, which is good considering Romita is one of his creators. All in all, this was a good issue for the beginning of this story and I'm interested to see how everything develops.

While the Hobgoblin stuff here is entertaining, the highlight here for me is the interactions between Peter and Norman. Norman has been a consistently enjoyable character for the majority of this run, and this issue is no different. I'm glad that, so far, we haven't been getting him revert back to being the Green Goblin, as I think this "good guy" story can and should go on for at least a while longer.

An entertaining conclusion to this storyline that, like the Tombstone arc before it, leaves the door open for more. As I said in my review for the previous issue, I’ve really been enjoying Norman in this series and I continue to do so here. He almost falls back into the Green Goblin mindset for a brief moment before being stopped by Peter, who is very fun in this issue as well. His mid-air fight with Roderick and Ned is enjoyable and Romita’s art is solid. Good stuff once again from this book.

This was a well-done issue that catches us up on what Ben and Janine have been doing since the ending of the last ASM run. While I'm not typically a fan of the art changing mid-issue, I think this was a better usage of that and the art, mostly, fit with the different scenes being depicted. Overall, I think this issue does a good job of building interest and intrigue going into Dark Web.

This was a pretty fun first issue for the Dark Web crossover, which I was not expecting. Don’t get me wrong, I wasn’t expecting this to be bad, but I was expecting this to be a more serious storyline. The tone set in the previous issue made it seem that way, in my opinion, but this was still very entertaining.

Was this my favorite issue of the series? No, I wouldn't say so. However, it's one I feel very positively about following how critical readers, myself included to a relatively much lesser degree, have been of the series since around Dark Web. We get Peter having kind of a weird conversation with Felicia after their break-up and we get a little bit of follow-up on Randy and Janice after the events of the last issue. I wasn't super into these parts of the book, but I appreciate their inclusion. After this, though, we get to what has me really excited about the future of this title. Peter and Norman's relationship has been one of the highlights of this run for me throughout, and that content continues to be good here. What really intrigues me is the final few pages, in which Peter is injected with the essence of Norman's sins. I think this could prove to be a really good storyline if done right. We only have four issues until we're scheduled to get into the Gang War crossover, which really interests me as well, so I hope this story isn't something that was shortened to fit that timeline. With that in mind, I do trust Wells to make this good, especially because I think he literally has to if he wants to shut up the outrage brigade (credit to KittyNone for that fantastic name. All things considered, I think this might be the beginning of the fresh start I think this run has needed and I'm really excited to see where the next few issues take us.

After the super intriguing setup we saw in the previous issue, this book dives right into the darker direction that was teased in Issue 32's cliffhanger and I think it works very well. This is very much about Peter basically getting revenge for what happened between him and Kraven during Kraven's Last Hunt. My favorite part of this had to be the final few pages, as it was just a crazy way to leave things off until the next issue. All things considered, I really like the darker direction this book is taking and I think it's really revitalized the title after a long period of mixed feelings.

Before I get into this book, I just wanted to say that this is one of Romita Jr.'s best main covers on this run so far, if not his very best. Moving on, I continue to enjoy the "Spider-Man's Hunt" storyline. I said this in my review of the last issue, but it reigns true here as well, in that this darker direction has really been helping out this series. Peter getting revenge on people who have wronged him in his life is entertaining to read, and I particularly thought his interaction with Norman was well-written. I don't want to jinx it, but with this storyline and Gang War coming up in November, things continue to look up for this run.

This was the best issue of the series since the Spider-Man's First Hunt storyline. I acknowledge that I may be overrating this a bit, but this is the most I've enjoyed this title in six months. Despite the dip in quality and the amount of people trashing Wells online for this run, I know he's a good writer and I've been waiting for this run to get better. This just felt a lot more personal and intimate than what we've been getting with something like Gang War, and I think that worked towards the book's benefit greatly. Plus, Carnero's art fits really well with the story. I was hoping she'd be on the series more regularly, but that doesn't seem to be the case with her being announced for Eve L. Ewing's Exception X-Men run. I'll take one more issue with her over nothing, though, as she was announced for Issue 46.

A really good introduction for this event. I don’t know how I feel about the stuff with Miles, but I really enjoyed everything else. Hammerhead getting absolutely beaten with the bat was just great. I’m really looking forward to the rest of Gang War after reading this.

I wasn't quite as into this issue as I was the previous two, but it's still a really good book. Ewing has done a fantastic job of giving the three different "Ant-Men" their own unique voices so far and that's evident here as well. Before we get into the set-up for Issue 4, we get a pretty fun adventure with Scott and Cassie going against Black Ant. As for Reilly's art, he once again has a change in his style in this series. This time around, things look modern, in that it looks like something he would do in a current comic book. Of course, this fits with the majority of this issue taking place in the present. Over the course of this series, I feel as though Reilly has altered his art in order to fit with the time period, which is something I've really enjoyed. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this all ends and I hope the team sticks the landing.

This was another really good issue for the series. It wasn't quite up there with the first two, but it was still really enjoyable. We finally see the Ashen Combine after having them initially shown online months ago. There isn't much to them yet, but I'm not sure that there needs to be. I trust MacKay to make this really good, as I've enjoyed every book I've read from him. Something I particularly liked about this was Carol's leadership being focused on. This is something that's had a focus on it in the past two issues, which I've enjoyed, and I liked it once again here. Carol can be hot-headed and I liked that, after talking with T'Challa, she actually strategizes instead of just rushing into the fire. With the stage, seemingly, set for some battles in the very near future across the globe, this series continues to maintain my interest as we go into Issue 4. Villa has some good art here and MacKay continues to be great on whatever series he's writing.

MacKay continues to pump out well-written stories like it's nothing, and this was another example. The Ashen Combine are established as crazy powerful villains already, and I thought their, respective, battles with different members of the Avengers were great. Something else I appreciated was the change in costume for Iron Man and Black Panther. It was a lot more notable with Iron Man, but I also noticed Black Panther's costume being updated to match the one seen in his current run from Eve L. Ewing. All things considered, this was another strong issue for this series and I'm excited to see what comes next.

I thought that this was a super intriguing start to this miniseries. Acuña's art can get really congested on certain pages, but I really enjoyed it overall. As for Zdarsky's story, I thought it was good. I'm usually interested by alternate timelines/universes where we see different iterations of already familiar characters, so I could be a bit biased there. However, I still thought Zdarsky wrote a compelling story with this issue that does a nice job of setting the stage for what's to come.

Good read once again. I liked Acuña's art as a whole here more than Issue 1, but I was just a little less interested in Zdarsky's story this time around, so it evened out to another 8.5/10 score. Either way, I'm really intrigued by the world being built here and I think Zdarsky does a great job writing Steve.

This series continues to only get better, in my opinion. I was sitting on a solid 8.0 for this issue, but Batman flipping all of Ghost-Maker’s “accomplishments” on him by showing that he was looking at the bigger picture the whole time was just so good. Plus, everything else worked nicely here as well. Clownhunter is kind of dumb and annoying, but he’s supposed to be. He’s a teenager that has yet to find his footing, and I think it’ll be interesting to watch him do so sometime down the line, in the event that he’s used past this storyline. I’m not usually a fan of the art changing mid-issue, but it makes sense here and I don’t mind it. Overall, this was a pretty good issue that maintains by interest going into #104.

Despite some of the other reviews here, this was my favorite issue of this storyline yet. The main story was pretty well-written and I'm glad we're finally getting more action in the next issue. Plus, the backup just clicked with me in a way it hasn't yet. It's an entertaining story for Ghost-Maker and it feels like a great reflection of what he's all about. Hopefully this series can maintain the quality it's gotten to with this issue, as I really like the concept of it all.

The final issue of Batman before Fear State is a pretty good one that finally brings Batman to Scarecrow after the past few issues have opened with Batman's dream sequences. I'm really loving Jimenez's art in this run, but that's to be expected at this point. The backup wasn't quite as good Issue 110's, but it was still entertaining and I'm looking forward to seeing Ghost-Maker finally face all of his adversaries in the annual.

This was another well-written issue from Tynion, but I do think it's time for the pace of this story to pick up a bit. I enjoyed this issue, but we're three issues into Fear State and it doesn't feel as though much has actually happened. As for Jimenez, I don't think I need to write much about how good he is at his job. He seems to always to great work, and this was not an exception. As for the backup story, I'm not as into it as I was in the previous issue, but it was still enjoyable. I am glad it's only three issues, though, because it's nothing extraordinary. The art is pretty cool in it, though.

This was the best issue of the main story yet when it comes to Fear State. However, I will say that the book as a whole is a bit dragged down by the backup story. Speaking about the former, I really enjoyed this and, if you read my review for Issue 113, you'll know that I got exactly what I wanted here. The first two issues, while written well and overall good issues, were slower in their pace. I think, for a big story such as this, the story needed to pick up a bit, and that's precisely what happened here. The action with Peacekeeper-01, Peacekeeper-X, and Batman were great and allowed Jimenez to showcase, once again, just how great he is. Moving to the backup, the last installment wasn't as engaging as the first, and this one doesn't do anything more than said installment, unfortunately. As I said in my review in the previous issue, I actually do like Clownhunter and I think his character has potential, but this story hasn't done that much for him, in my opinion. As of now, I don't plan on reading the continuation of the story in Batman: Urban Legends. I'm not typically a huge fan of backup stories, but I can only hope the next one is better if this title is going to keep them going.

Another good issue for Fear State, but not quite up there with the best issues of this story. The plot progresses forward a bit and, while there is some action here, the pace does slow back down. Not quite as slow as it was before the previous issue, but it’s noticeable. I also wish Jimenez was drawing the whole thing, but it is what it is, I suppose. Bengal isn’t a bad artist whatsoever. One thing I am very happy about is the backup story. If you read my review for the previous three issues, you would know I wasn’t the biggest fan of the Clownhunter story despite my defense of his character. This new Batgirls backup was actually pretty good and helped me solidify my 8.5 rating over giving this an 8.0, as I just thought it was a fun time with some great art. It actually sold me on trying Cloonan & Conrad’s Batgirls run.

This was a good start to this alternate universe storyline that sets up a lot of intrigue. While I do miss Jimenez working on interiors, Hawthorne isn't bad whatsoever. I appreciate the world building taking place here as this new story gets started. I particularly enjoy this version of Commissioner Gordon, while I also find this take on Harvey Dent interesting. This issue's backup story is also done very well. Here, we see Tim almost going into a spiral of sorts in the aftermath of #130's main story. While the fight scene is enjoyable, it's Tim's conversations with Jon and Dick that are the best part of this. You can sense the latter two just trying to help and be supportive to Tim, who's starting to almost push them away. All this considered, this was a good start to Zdarsky's second arc of this run.

This was a fairly satisfying finale to the Bat-Man of Gotham arc. I might have liked a little more substance to the actual story, but it was solid for what it was and Bruce traveling to all the different universes is what boosts the grade of this up for me. Seeing Bruce meet with various different iterations of Batman was super cool, including Michael Keaton's version, the Dark Knight Returns version, the version from the Batman Beyond Animated Series, and even Adam West's version. The latter was especially fun, considering that Bruce later used his shark repellant. Plus, the ending where Tim finds Bruce was very heartfelt. This issue was almost a love-letter to Batman and I'm excited to see where the run goes from here.

I thought that this was a good way to continue things after the past two arcs without jumping into another 6-issue arc right out of the gate. This acts almost as a prelude to the upcoming Batman and Catwoman crossover (Gotham War), and I thought the stuff with Bruce and Selina was well-written. I thought Bruce being updated on what's been going on in Gotham since he left could have had a little more spent on it, but it's not necessary by any means. Bruce trying to deflect his friends and family checking on him throughout the issue, only for them to end up having a big family dinner with him was so heartfelt and was my favorite part of this issue. Plus, the stuff with Zur-En-Arrh was pretty good in the main story AND the backup. I'm not sure how I feel about Corona's art in said backup, but Ortega's art in the main story was absolutely fantastic.

With the second part of Gotham War in the books, I liked this a bit more than the Battle Lines one-shot. Bruce is truly on edge and starting to lose it here, which makes for an entertaining read. Plus, Jimenez's art just makes it better. He's able to convey this more crazed state Bruce is in very nicely. I also enjoyed the rest of the Batfamily trying to stop Bruce, especially Tim towards the beginning of this issue. All things considered, I've enjoyed the two issues of Gotham War we've gotten so far and I just hope it continues to be good. The real test comes with the next part, Catwoman #57, in my opinion. I enjoyed the co-written one-shot, Battle Lines, and I've consistently been enjoying Zdarsky's Batman run. As for Tini Howard's Catwoman, while not terrible by any means, it's taken a downturn for me since Issue 50. Hopefully, Gotham War is what Howard needs to fully get back on track.

After Gotham War ended up being a bit of a disappointment, this issue provides a nice amount of hope for the series going forward. I do think the opening Failsafe storyline was the peak of this run up to this point, despite me also enjoying the Bat-Man of Gotham story as well. However, I think this new story has all the potential to be really, really good. Aside from Jimenez's usual fantastic art, we're finally getting Zur taking more control over Bruce in a bit of a continuation of the early backup stories with him and Joker. On top of the really interesting main story, we also get a pretty good backup one with Vandal Savage. While I didn't really care all that much for him in Gotham War, I'm genuinely intrigued to see where his story goes after this.

Another really interesting issue for the Mind Bomb storyline. Zdarsky is putting together a really interesting story here in both the main story and the backup with Vandal. I know people have been getting tired of the multiverse with it being used more and more frequently, but I think Zdarsky does it well enough here for it to be entertaining. Plus, Jimenez's art is, as per usual, fantastic. As for the backup, as I alluded to earlier in this review, I enjoyed it. I wasn't all that into him being in the Gotham War event, but this issue and the last one have made him so much more intriguing to me.

A nice ending to this arc that gives us a quick transition into the upcoming Joker: Year One storyline. Zdarsky has done a great job thus far of writing Bruce's inner narrative, and that continues here. I really enjoyed seeing him outsmarting Zur to the best of his abilities. Plus, Jimenez continues to do a fantastic job on the art duties. We didn't just get one great artist, though, as we had some really nice art in the backup from Nguyen. Speaking of that backup, Zdarsky handled Zur well here also. I'm really looking forward to seeing where this all goes next. I wasn't the biggest fan of Gotham War, but things are really looking up for this series.

It feels like things are getting back on track following the Joker: Year One storyline. I didn't dislike that story, but it also wasn't my favorite. The placement of it seemed really strange at the time, and it still is mostly, but I'm glad it's at least being addressed here. Either way, I was interested by Zur/Failsafe replacing Bruce and the way he went about it and I'm really interested by this storyline. Hopefully Zdarsky can bring this title back to the quality it was at when he first started on it twenty issues ago.

I’m still really enjoying this storyline, especially when it focuses on Damian and Failsafe. I will say it’s kind of weird that the backup story was at the beginning of the book, but I’m not complaining.

My favorite issue yet. Thompson and Romero are putting together a pretty fun and engaging story with this series so far. Surprisingly enough, some of this issue's strongest moments deal with Harley. I like how Thompson is building the relationship with her and Dinah and I'm looking forward to seeing how they develops. Plus, Romero does some really good stuff with his art. It's very unqiue and I think it fits well with the story. I'm definitely interested to see the team face Wonder Woman in the next issue and I hope the quality of this series continues to go up like it did here, for me.

I thought this was a nice start for this series. It was definitely intriguing, if nothing else. Cabal's art is pretty solid here, though I'm not sure how much it fits with this series, for me. Either way, I thought Ridley put together an interesting premise by showing the sleeper agents T'Challa has implemented and exploring that a bit. Plus, I also liked the way Ridley wrote about democracy and he changing political system of Wakanda. All things considered, I think Ridley did an effective job of telling a thought-provoking story that leaves the reader wanting more.

Two-for-two on interesting issues here. I liked Ridley depicting the reactions of multiple sleeper agents to T'Challa telling them that the program is done. I, especially, liked Kimura's story in this issue. I also wanted to point out that I think Ridley writes T'Challa nicely. His distrust of just about everyone is truly felt when I read Ridley's dialogue.

I wish Cabal's art was a little more dynamic and detailed, especially with the fight in the final few pages between T'Challa and Omolola. That said, though, I'm still really liking the story Ridley is putting together here. There are a good amount of interesting threads I think can be effectively capitalized on as the story progresses.

Another really interesting issue from Ridley & Cabal. I think Ridley has continuously done a really nice job of building the tension amongst these characters and the situation as a whole. I like Cabal's smooth art, but Ridley's writing is the strongest aspect of this book, for me.

I liked this more than the first part. I feel as though the gripe I talked about in my review of Issue 9 was improved upon a bit here, and I just found Ridley's to be better this time around. One thing I didn't mention in my review of the last issue that I should have is Peralta's art. I think he did a really good job in the previous issue and he did so again here. In my opinion, it was a great decision to make him the main artist going forward.

This was my favorite issue of the series so far. While I would have enjoyed the fight with Deathlok going a bit longer, I enjoyed what we got. I really liked the building of the relationship/alliance between T'Challa and Natima. This kind of relationship is not something new in comics, but I do think this instance was well-written, which is all that matters to me. I really like the direction this book is going and I hope it continues to get better and better.

Once again, I'll preface this by saying I read the Red Band Edition. I don't think it matters all that much, though. This issue didn't pack as much of a punch as the first one, but I didn't really expect it to. This was a fun read that gave the heroes a relative win following how the last issue went down. Everyone seems to be coming together now and I'm glad about it. Larraz's art was fantastic again, as well. I will say, though, the ending of this was a little sudden. I'm not upset at it or anything, as it was a little shocking, but I'm just hoping we get an explanation as to how this happened in the next issue.

Another pretty good issue. Again, I read the Red Band Edition. There wasn't much difference between this and the Standard Edition, but it's still kinda cool. Anyways, yeah, this was good. Some of the dialogue is a little wonky, but this is still nice middle issue for the heroes to rally before the conclusion. Sam's speech was really good, also, and I appreciated that it called back to MacKay's current Avengers series.

I continue to really enjoy this. As with the previous three issues, I, once again, picked up the Red Band edition of this. Anyways, yeah, this was pretty cool. Kind of a big spoiler here, but I couldn't help but smile at Marc being resurrected as a result of Khonshu being freed. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this all wraps up.

This was the best issue of the series yet. I think Trujillo did a nice job of balancing this as being a transition issue, between Scarab War and the next storyline, and as a tribute issue to the late, great Keith Giffen. I appreciated the use of different artists to convey different time periods, as I think it adds a really nice touch by making each period feel unique. This had another sudden ending like the issue before it, but this series continues to be good overall and I continue to look forward to what's coming next.

Another strong issue for X of Swords as we get into the final few issues. Noto's art delivers once again here, and I thought Duggan wrote a really good story. Cable hesitating and basically getting demolished by Bei was interesting, and I really liked Gorgon's battle with White Sword and his One Hundred Champions also.

A pretty good start to a crossover I was a little unsure about going into it. I think this already has the potential to be really good, but I do think this issue was formatted a bit weird. We get the main story right from the get-go and it continues all the way until we get the title page. Then, we get stories about Scorpion, Jefferson, and Agent Gao. While all of them are enjoyable, I just found it a bit odd, personally. Either way, I enjoyed everything here and I'm looking forward to the rest of the crossover.

This was my first Catwoman book and I enjoyed it. Leon's art here is absolutely fantastic and and it creates a beautiful setting for this series. As for the writing, I think Howard writes Selina well. While I do think the amount of words here can be a little much at times, I agree with what another user stated in their review, in that said writing carries the plot of this book forward a lot. There was a lot that was set up here, but I enjoyed just about all of it and I think there's a lot of intrigue created here for the series going forward. Overall, I would say that this was a strong first issue for Howard's run on Catwoman.

I'm not really sure what I think of Valmont at this point, but this was still a well-written issue. This feels like a slower burn, but we're given enough from this issue to maintain interest going into Issue 41. The art here from Leon is also great, just as it was with the previous issue. While I would like the pace to pick up a bit, I can't complain when the story is still intriguing.

Howard's first arc on Catwoman continues to be intriguing. I think Leon's art fits very well with Howard's current storyline. I liked Onyx being used here, and I think she can be a good supporting character for this series. In a similar fashion to what I said about Valmont in my review of the previous issue, I'm not 100% sure how I feel about Dario yet, either. I do have sympathy for what he's going through and I think he has potential to become a likable character, but it's not quite there yet, for me.

This series continues to be intriguing, and I particularly enjoyed the relationship between Selina and Eiko here. Another one of Selina's relationships I enjoyed in this issue was with Bruce, as I thought it was handled well. The similarities between the two were done well and I liked that they were similar, yet also different. Plus, everything else here was enjoyable as well.

I thought this was a highly intriguing debut issue for this new Daredevil run. With the critical acclaim Chip Zdarsky's run has received, Ahmed definitely had some huge shoes to fill here. With this issue, I feel as though he's setting up something really interesting. The setup we get here builds a very solid foundation and I'll be sticking around to see where this goes. Matt's new situation is fairly interesting, the strained relationship between Matt and Elektra is written well, and the antagonist sets an ominous precedent for what's to come. Good stuff all around with this one.

I'll start off by saying that Kuder's art is awesome here. The shot where Matt initially puts on his mask was just great. As for the story, it's, once again, well-written and really interesting. I particularly enjoy how Ahmed has written Matt thus far. I just really like the story that's been presented so far and, with the reveal on the last page, I predict that I'll continue to enjoy it. Hopefully I don't end up being wrong.

The bulk of this was fight scenes, but it worked with the fantastic art we got here. Ahmed's writing was pretty good as well. The action went smoothly, and the actual story continues to be interesting with St. Nick's under pressure. I was going back and forth on whether to give this an 8 or an 8.5 for this, but the art was just so good that I had to go with the latter.

A pretty good issue with a fun She-Hulk appearance. I thought Ahmed wrote Matt well throughout the entirety of the issue and I think he did a nice job of writing Jennifer "out-of-character" a bit, leading into the reveal of her being possessed in the second half of the book. Plus, I really enjoyed Karami's art here. I knew from the first page that this was going to be an issue I'd love just looking at.

This series continues to be intriguing. I'm glad to see Kuder back on the art duties and it looks like he'll be back for the next two issues as well. As for Ahmed, I think he's putting together something interesting here and I'm glad we finally got a little more on Matt's return from death, even if it was just that the sins followed him from Hell. Speaking of the sins following Matt from Hell, I'm looking forward to seeing how things go down between him and Wolverine in the next issue.

I thought this was a fun start that pokes some fun at the event it's a part of while also establishing a solid story going forward. The best part of this was Spider-Man teaming up with his "amazing friends." I wasn't as into the stuff in Limbo, but it was still good and I'm interested to see where this side of Dark Web goes.

This miniseries continues to be well-written and well-drawn with the addition of Noto providing art along with Reis. I don't know that this was AS fun as the previous issue, but I still enjoyed it. I especially liked Madelyne's way of preventing Scott from opening his eyes.

This was a fun start to the series that brings about a super weird, but also entertaining, plot where Wade has a symbiote injected into his body. This is the kind of out-there story that is perfect for a character like Deadpool, and Wong’s writing here is great for him as well. Plus, Coccolo’s art is nice and he has some good full-page drawings here also. Just good stuff all around.

This was a ton of fun. The humor continues to be this book’s strongest aspect, with one of my favorite parts being when Harrower tells Wade to “come quietly.” In this sense, I think Wong really gets Deadpool’s character. The symbiote growing out of him is a lot of fun, and Coccolo’s art makes it even better. Plus, Lady Deathstrike’s involvement was funny as well. As for the ending, I’m interested to see where Valentine’s character goes.

This run has been so much fun so far. Wade and Valentine’s zoo date was very enjoyable, as was the diner stuff with Otto and Harrower. Lady Deathstrike getting the new offer to kill Otto AND Wade was a nice way to keep her involved as well, without just making her upset with Wade. The symbiote inside of Wade also has a lot of potential to be entertaining. Such a weird book that is so fun.

This issue was a lot of fun, just like the previous. This has been my first Alyssa Wong book and she's been making me laugh every issue with Wade's dialogue. This issue felt a little nonsensical at times, but I feel like that's a perfect fit for a Deadpool story. Plus, Wade having a giant, symbiote dog is so damn weird that I love it. Along with the story, Coccolo has some super solid art here. Great stuff all around.

I continue to really enjoy this series, despite what I believe to be a minor slip in quality. Some of the stuff that has happened throughout this series and even in this issue is just so weird, but so good at the same time. It perfectly fits with the tone of a Deadpool book, and I think Wong just gets it when it comes to Deadpool. I also wasn't expecting Valentine to take over as the Horned Emperor. This book has consistently given us good content and I'll definitely be sad to see this one go if Issue 10 is, in fact, the final issue.

While this did feel a little rushed at times, in my opinion, I thought this was a nicely done finale for this series. I really wish this run went on longer, as I was really enjoying it and I thought there was so much more that could be done with the cast available. Nonetheless, this issue is able to wrap things up in a fairly satisfying way. Thinking about these past 10 issues, my biggest complaint of the series is that we didn't get more.

While this is a little packed, it's all great and it's done so to set the stage for what's to come. As a massive wrestling fan, this is a lot of fun. The story here is full of heart and emotion, and I can already tell that Johnson's always outstanding and unique art is going to fit right in with the wrestling of this book.

I love MacKay’s current Moon Knight run and I was a fan of his latest run with Clea, so I was excited to see him writing a new Doctor Strange ongoing. After reading this, I’m very glad to say he didn’t disappoint. This was a very fun start to this new series. Stephen catching up with everyone and everything was great and I enjoyed seeing his reactions to everything that had changed, as well as the situations everyone was in at the moment. Plus, I think the disagreement between Stephen and Clea was very well-done, as it did a good job of depicting their differing outlooks. Plus, the ending with Aggamon was not quite what I was expecting, especially after finding out (at the end of the Wong story, which was solid) that Aggamon had been decapitated. Overall, a great start to this series and I’m looking forward to what comes next.

Although it doesn't so much to advance the overarching story, I really liked this issue. This was basically Stephen recapping his history with Dormammu, but it ended up being a plan to defeat him and take him away from the host body. It also helped that their dialogue was written well. I wasn't sure whether I wanted to give this an 8.5 or a 9.0, but the backup solidifies an 8.5 for me. It was necessarily bad by any means, just kinda average and not something I would read again if I ever re-read this issue.

The quality of this series is back up as we return to Stephen and Clea. This was another well-written issue for MacKay, something he isn't a stranger (no pun intended) to whatsoever. Clea being sprung with a magically-created sister in the near future is intriguing and I'm sure that's gonna come back up at some point. Maybe she'll become or be destined to become a threat Stephen just like her parents? We'll have to see, but whatever MacKay has cooking is sure to be good. He's been putting out awesome work with all three of his current ongoings, this one included of course. I still think this title could use an artist change, but Ferry seems to be on the series until at least Issue 9, with Juan Gedeon working as a guest artist in the next issue. While I'm not the biggest fan of Ferry's art, I must admit that it does look better here than what I've seen previously from him and this might be one of the best current books to suite his style, if not the best.

I didn't quite enjoy this as much as the previous two issues, but it's definitely one of the strongest issues of the series. I'm really digging this current story. The tease of Clea joining General Strange, only for it all to be a misdirect with Clea wanting to kill him for Doctor Strange was nicely done, in my opinion. While it's documented that I'm not his biggest fan, Ferry's art works pretty well here and I think this title is a good fit for him. I'm really looking forward to what comes next.

Another good one-shot story issue, but it's a bit obvious that the point of this was solely to introduce Victor as the next big villain for this series. That's not necessarily a bad thing, though, as I still enjoyed the issue as a whole. I'm assuming we won't get a ton more on Victor until Blood Hunt in May, which is fine. I'm looking forward to the Secret Defenders storyline in the next two issues.

I don't sense that this is going to be the most intense storyline of the series, but I had a pretty good time here. I think it's super cool that MacKay is able to bring a handful of characters he's worked on together for this. As for the story itself, it's pretty fun. I do think it's the character dynamics that really make it that way, though. MacKay does a really nice job with the dialogue here, in that he gives everyone a relatively unique and authentic voice. I'm looking forward to seeing where the second half of this goes before we jump into Blood Hunt in May.

Glad to say that I enjoyed this more than the first issue. The first issue was setting up a good amount of things, which was to be expected, but I think this issue worked better for me due to the fact that it's less set-up and more regular story. I thought that Howard wrote Gambit's frustration well throughout the issue, and I also enjoyed the uneasiness between most of the characters and Apocalypse. I wasn't that interested in Morgan le Fay in the previous issue either, so her absence here allowed more focus on the main characters I enjoyed from Issue 1. However, I do think the potential is there to make her a better villain, especially with her keeping Brian hostage. While Issue 1 felt a bit slow, to me, at times, this does a good job of picking up the pace without going too fast.

This was quite possibly the best issue yet. The first issue set up some interesting things, but I wasn't sure if I was going to end up liking this series as a whole or not. Luckily, this is pretty good. We finally have Rictor getting a bit of spotlight after he was on the cover of the first issue, and I really enjoyed his relatively brief story. I'm interested to see more of him as this series goes on. Plus, I also thought the main characters were written well. Gambit's kind of annoying, but he's supposed to be due to Rogue's condition. I'm sure Morgan le Fay will be getting more time in the next few issues as well. If you read my previous reviews of this run, you'll know that I wasn't the biggest fan of her in Issue 1. Hopefully Howard can change my opinion on that soon.

We're on our way back up in terms of quality for this series. We get a good amount of Apocalypse this time around, and every page with him there is great. Plus, we finally get Rogue back as well. Her dreams were very interesting and I really enjoyed her fight with Apocalypse. The same thing with Gambit as well, as I've been enjoying Howard's writing of him over the course of this run so far. I don't even care for Gambit that much, but she's been making him a solid character in my eyes. On top of everything else, we get that crazy ending with Rogue and I'm very intrigued to see how that develops.

This was a pretty good ending for the first arc of Excalibur. Morgan le Fay still doesn't interest me much, but her role hasn't been THAT prominent thus far, so I can't complain much. However, after that final page, I'm sure she'll be returning in the future. Despite me not having an extensive knowledge of Apocalypse, or any of the characters for that matter, he's become one of the most interesting characters of this story for me. Betsy and Brian were enjoyable as well, although I would like Betsy to become more of a leader for the team soon, which is where I feel like the series is heading. Nonetheless, I read the first six issues of this in a paperback and I'm definitely looking forward to picking up and reading the next one.

A fun issue here that sets up a promising story for the next issue. While I think most of, if not all of, the characters in this series have been handled well, I especially like how Howard has written Rogue thus far. I think she has a good understanding of her character and how to writer her dialogue.

This was definitely an unexpected twist from what was seemingly going to be the beginning of a action-packed sword fight, but it's a welcome twist at that. I don't think a story has to be unpredictable to be good, but I think this was a super intriguing direction to go in. I particularly found Cypher and Bei's pairing and marriage to be super interesting, considering Cypher's inability to understand her and, thus, his fascination with her. Oh yeah, and Noto absolutely kills it in this issue. He was a great choice for this story.

There's a lot going on throughout this issue, but I enjoyed it overall. It really feels like we're on the cusp of a big finale here and it's exciting. I think Howard balanced everything well enough here, and Asrar's art delivers once again in this event. I will say that Cypher and Bei's relationship made some unexplained advancements since the last time we saw them.

I completely understand that Ms. Marvel dying for a few months is happening to spark interest and gain attention, but this was a well-done one-shot. I'm not going to let my opinions of other stories/situations influence my opinion of this issue. I must say that it was heartfelt and well-written across the board. We start with Wilson & Miyazawa's story that sets a nice tone for what's to come. We get a sense of how important Kamala was to so many people, especially when people like Wolverine and Captain Marvel start walking in. I would give this an 8.5/10. Next, we had my favorite story of the trio from Waid & Ramos. While a lot of this is about Viv, I thought Waid wrote this very well. Viv describing the pain she's feeling is just so heart wrenching and the ending is so somber. I'd give this one a 9.0/10. Finally, we had my least favorite story. While I do say that, it's still good stuff. Stephen's lecture about life was another case of good writing in this issue, and I thought the final two pages with Peter was a nice way to end the one-shot as a whole. I would give the final story an 8.0/10. Averaged out, we come to a final score of 8.5/10 and I think that's fitting for this book, despite how I may feel about Kamala's death as a whole.

This was a pretty fun issue. While my interest isn't too strong with the Linda storyline quite yet, Wally and Ace continue to be written very well together. While the story itself is entertaining, the dialogue makes everything else even more enjoyable. The storyline set up here with the warden is nice as well, as it sets up an intriguing new villain for Wally and Ace to go against.

It's completely understandable why some people may not like this, but I really enjoyed it. This was basically Linda's fan-fiction/self-insert story, but it was fun and heartfelt as well. Plus, the last few pages with her and Wally were done very well, in my opinion. Along with the entertaining story, Acuña's art is fantastic here and it makes me wish he was doing interiors on this series permanently. Marvel, DC, or both need to get him on a monthly series ASAP.

This was my least favorite issue so far, but I still really enjoyed it. Oblivion is definitely a character I want to see more of and I get the sense we will with how this issue ended. Hickman is building a highly intriguing universe and the inclusion of her and even Amelia continue to create an awesome foundation. Plus, Schiti's art continues to be very nice.

A fairly strong start. I really liked the horror aspects here, and I think Smith's art really helped with that. His art fits right in with Percy's story, in my opinion. I will say that I'm not a huge fan of Talia being presented as the cliche of a mean goth girl, at least from my perception. Also, Warroad being her last name is so funny to me. Anyways, I am still intrigued to see how she fits into the bigger picture.

Another really good issue. The horror aspects were definitely a strong point once again, which is, again. helped by Smith's awesome art throughout. I still feel that Talia is a bit cliched (see my review of Issue 1 for more details), but, so far, I do enjoy her character for what it is.

This one just makes it up into being of the strongest issues so far, in my opinion. Peeples did a really nice job on the art duties and I think, like Cory Smith, he fits in really well, especially with the amount of body horror in this issue. I do hope the larger story of this series becomes a little more clear, though.

A little surprised that Marvel didn't make this issue a bigger deal, considering it's Legacy #250. Either way, this was another relatively strong issue. Smith being back on the art is great, of course, and I like that this series is getting a stronger sense of direction in terms of its larger story. Though, I don't know how I feel about the constant car/road/etc. references in this book, particularly with Blackheart at the end.

A pretty fun issue here with Johnny and Talia teaming up for the first time. This was definitely one of my favorite issues so far. Considering the cover art, I was worried that Talia was just going to become a love interest for Johnny. Luckily, that doesn't seem to be the case, at least for now.

A fairly strong start to this crossover. I appreciated how much Percy delved into the backstory here before tying things back to the present. I'm interested to see how the story presented here ties in with the tease at the end of Ghost Rider #16, as well.

I wasn't quite sure what to expect here, but this delivered with a great opening issue. Medina's art is better in some places than others here, but he does great where it counts. He does well in depicting Norman being haunted by his past. Speaking of which, Cantwell writes this very well, in which Norman is constantly haunted by his past sins, despite trying to move forward and be better man. While I am worried about how the Dark Web crossover will affect the next two issues, I really hope this miniseries maintains the quality of its first issue.

Good LORD what a final two pages. Those two pages bump those up from an 8.0 to an 8.5 for me. I do wish that the aftermath of what Norman did was explored more, but I'm hoping we'll see that in either ASM or some sort of follow-up to this miniseries. Overall, this was a surprisingly good miniseries that I kind of wish went a little longer.

A pretty nice conclusion to the first arc. I think Williamson continues to write Ollie well here. I’m interested by the ending and I’m looking forward to seeing where this goes now that we’re going past this run’s initial ending point.

A fairly strong start to this new arc. I enjoyed seeing Ollie go around and asking everyone about the Justice League. Hairsine’s art in this book wasn’t my favorite at times, but Giandomenico’s was really nice throughout.

A pretty fun issue here that feels like a one-shot story while also being connected to the larger ongoing plot with Roy. Hester’s art here reminds me of the Batman: Brave and the Bold cartoon in certain spots, so I think that’s why it worked pretty well for me, personally.

This was my favorite issue of Adams's run yet. I really liked the use of Hal's powers in this one. I thought the way Hal's ring was able to counter the cloaking device was really interesting, and I also really enjoyed the way he simultaneously destroyed the two ships in completely different locations with two different constructs. Good stuff all around when it comes to the main story. When it comes to the backup story, I feel very similarly to how I felt with it in the last issue. It's fairly solid, but it's not yet doing much to convince me to read the new Sinister Sons book it's leading into, unfortunately.

This was a nice, action-packed issue that ends on a pretty somber note. I get the feeling that Adams is getting ready for a big story in the next issue and I'm looking forward to it. As for the backup, I continue to be indifferent on it. It's not a bad story by any means, but it's not doing much to gain my interest for a full-on Sinister Sons miniseries.

A strong issue here, possibly the strongest of the series thus far, but it doesn't quite reach the 9/10 mark for me. Nahuelpan's art was solid, but it doesn't quite match up to what we've been getting in the past six issues from Xermánico. Either way, I thought Adams wrote a good, engaging story to give us some context as to what happened between the previous Green Lantern run and this current one. I continue to look forward to what comes next. One other point I want to make is that I'm glad we're done with the current run of backup stories. They've never been bad, but they've also never got me super interested. That said, I am excited that it seems Kyle Rayner will be getting a backup story in the next issue.

A step right back up in terms of quality, in my opinion. I found the new area that the power battery was in to be very interesting and I hope it's something Adams ends up revisiting. I also enjoyed the backup story for what it was, but I didn't find it was enjoyable as the Kyle Rayner story from the last issue. Either way, I'm really enjoying this series and I feel like something big is coming.

For whatever reason, I really liked Carol’s side of the story. Hal’s side was good also, though, and even the backup with Guy was a step-up from the last issue.

Another really good issue from Adams and Xérmanico. I really liked the stuff with Hal and Carol once again. Xérmanico’s art especially shined, in my opinion, with the action sequences and his full pages. The backup was fun as well.

If you've read my reviews of the first three issues of Jeremy Adams's current run with Hal Jordan, you would know that I was feeling a bit unsure about this series based on Johnson's backups. However, this series has delivered with a strong first issue, in my opinion. It could be the fact that we actually got a lot of John Stewart this time around, which I would hope for considering it's his series, and it's great. Finding out that John's mother has dementia/Alzheimer's hit me like a truck and I really enjoyed seeing the relationship John has with her. One other part I also liked was John's fight with one of the new Green Lanterns, which purely existed to remind everyone how powerful he is. Plus, Montos's art throughout the issue was pretty cool and I thought it fit the book well. I must admit that this surprised me a bit after my more mixed feelings towards Johnson's backup stories in Green Lantern, but this was, overall, a nice start to this series that fires on all fronts.

I think the "reveal" of this arc is a forgone conclusion at this point, but the story itself still interests me and Flaviano's art might be the best it's been in this series so far. We get a little bit more development around Adira here, showing that she is a more ancient evil than previously thought. I probably would have given this an 8.0, but, for whatever reason, Flaviano's art was particularly great here, which boosts this up by 0.5 for me.

This was a darker turn for this series, and I really enjoyed it. The idea presented here of nobody being able to die is an intriguing concept and I think it'll be interesting to see more of how that ties into Jessica. Plus, Flaviano's art is, once again, outstanding here and I can't state enough how much I believe he adds to the story being told.

This was a step-up from the previous two issues. I'm glad we got something in terms of trying to learn more about Grootfall and what exactly is going on there. We didn't technically LEARN that much, but we did get some advancement in that story with Rocket's return being set-up for the next issue. As for the rest of the story here, I thought it was an interesting Peter-centered story and I thought it was cool to see him absolutely obliterate that starship at the end.

I'll start this off by saying I really enjoyed this issue. However, I'm a bit disappointed that we didn't really learn all that much more about Grootfall here. I know that solicitations and such can have a tendency to somewhat falsely advertise, but it straight-up said at the end of the previous issue that the mystery behind Grootfall would be revealed here. Maybe I missed it, but I don't remember that being touched on here. Either way, this was still a pretty good issue that sets us up for what will, hopefully, be the explanation of what happened with Groot and the rest of the team before the events of this series began. This series has been super interesting thus far and I think it's about time we started to get some answers.

I appreciate things heating up a bit as we reach the conclusion of Kelly & Lanzing's run. The last few issues have felt a little inconsequential, which isn't bad. I was just hoping for stronger developments following how the first six issues went. Either way, I thought this was an entertaining "first part" to the ending of this run. Hopefully the team sticks the landing with the annual.

I liked this one better than the first issue, as I think it had more room to breathe with the setup out of the way. Segovia's art continues to be good, but the writing from Wells is what makes this book for me. I think he's handling all of the characters nicely and I particularly enjoyed seeing Greycrow straight-up shoot Empath in the face. The introduction of resurrecting mutants has allowed writers more freedom to have a character die, even if they'lll be resurrected as soon as the next issue.

This doesn't quite reach the 9/10 mark for me, but I did think it was the best issue of the run so far. Segovia's art is pretty solid, though he does draw Madelyne a little weird on certain pages. As for Wells, he continues to tell a story that's dark and fun at the same time. He's really starting to get me interested in characters that I knew little-to-nothing about going into this series.

If you're a fan of fun, crazy action, this issue is gonna be right up your alley. Ottley's art fits in perfectly with bloody violence of this great follow-up to Issue 1. While there isn't much advancement in the overall story, this gives us a further insight into how the starship works, in terms of Hulk's rage acting as fuel. The first few pages where Hulk just runs through the alternate universe team is straight-up funny and also displays just how powerful this form is. As for the ending, there isn't much to say about it other than the fact that it sets up an interesting story going forward and that this alternate Bruce has a cool design.

Another really good issue for this series. After the introduction of the alternate Bruce Banner at the end of the previous issue, I'm glad that this turned out to actually be a good story. The alternate Bruce's backstory was compelling, and I thought 616 Bruce's reaction was great, and the tease of Thunderbolt Ross at the end was also done well. Good stuff once again from Cates and Ottley.

The incredible duo of Cates and Ottley manage to stick the landing with the conclusion of this arc. The story here gives Ottley a chance to shine, once again, in depicting scenes that feel menacing, horrific, and violent (with one of my favorite pages being the one where the door inside the starship reveals Hulk standing there. Overall, I would say this was a satisfying finale to this arc with a nice tease at the end for the Banner of War crossover.

This is probably the craziest issue of the crossover yet, but still pretty fun and enjoyable. This feels like a kid writing a Hulk versus Thor story in all of the best ways. Amidst the chaos, Cates evens the playing field for the two combatants a bit by having Thor "hulk-up." This was a twist I wasn't expecting for this story, but something I'm very excited to see play out.

A bit of a step-up from the previous issue that reveals a lot more about this new world. Briefly deviating from that, I just wanted to state that the beginning of this issue with Bruce's childhood was very well-done and it was just as good as (maybe even a bit better than) the glimpse into Bruce's childhood in the previous issue. Moving back to the main story, I liked that this ties into some of the stuff we saw in the first arc, as it almost feels like a natural progression of the overall story. Learning more about what happened to those disposed creatures and how they went on to establish this planet was great, and Ottley's always fantastic art made it even better. Overall, another enjoyable issue for this run.

A definite step-up from the previous issue. My main concern with the last issue was the dialogue/scripts, and that improved a bunch here. Plus, the story itself was great. Bruce compartmentalizing himself and his trauma is something that this series has done well. Ottley is able to draw Bruce's father in almost a frightening way that does a great job of conveying how Bruce sees him. I hope the series can maintain this quality until its conclusion, as this was pretty good.

A fun start to this crossover. One thing I already like about this crossover is that both titles are written by the same person, which I think only makes this stronger, as Cates already knows where he wants both characters to go from here. Talking more about the story itself, I appreciated that it catches the reader up on what's been happening in both Thor and Hulk's, respective, ongoing titles. I've kept up with both of them, but it's good to include for someone who's only reading one of the books or someone who hasn't read either of them (which if you haven't already, do yourself a favor and check out both runs). This was a lot of fun where Hulk and Thor beat each other up for a bit, with Hulk literally making a hole in his stomach in order to escape Mjolnir and get to his feet. All things considered, this one-shot sets a pretty good tone to begin this storyline.

This is my favorite issue of the series yet. I feel as though Ridley has finally found his stride with this series. As another user stated in their review, this feels like a crime television show, and a good one at that. The characters here are solid, and I like the building of respect and trust between Jace and Chubb. Hopefully the team can maintain this quality, because I'm actually really enjoying this.

I wasn't quite as into this as the past two issues, but the story here is still very enjoyable. I think part of it can be attributed to the fact that I don't really know how I feel about how this ended, but I'm still very interested to see how this story will progress. The art continues to be solid as well. This is just a good book all around.

I think the highlight of this issue was all of the detective work throughout. While, of course, this isn't Bruce Wayne as Batman, I like that this Batman book is filled with that sort of stuff. As I stated in my review of the previous issue, I think Ridley is putting together a really good story here and it continues to keep me invested. I think he's balanced the mystery and politics of it nicely, and I also believe the characters are all written well. Really good stuff all around here.

I'm still really liking this story. Ridley continues to have an intriguing political mystery with some well-written characters. I particularly liked Hadiyah's story about the relationship she had with her father, his eventual murder, and what she realized about how she handled that whole situation. I'm not sure how I feel about Tiffany trying to become a hero, but I don't dislike it or anything and I have been enjoying her story thus far.

The best issue of the miniseries, in my opinion. First of all, I think Vitti's art was killer and really fit in here. I really enjoyed the story of Sinister and Rasputin IV, and I thought Destiny's involvement was great as well. Great stuff all around and I hope the event, as a whole, sticks the landing.

I didn't enjoy this as the rest of the series thus far, but it was still a pretty good issue. It's hard for me to not like something Ewing wrote. I thought the dynamic between Thor and Loki was fun and written well overall. I'm also really looking forward to this Roxxon story with the Minotaur, Enchantress, and Skurge that's been teased for a while now.

I can't believe that this being the worst issue of the series means it's just pretty good and not absolutely great. This was a well-written issue from Gillen that largely deals with the fallout of what happened at this year's Hellfire Gala. This feels different from other issues in the series, as this has multiple characters with a larger focus. We start with Charles, who is basically here to be sad about the mutants. He doesn't really do much here aside from that. Next, we get Sebastian. His stuff was probably my favorite in this issue, as we see him failing to capitalize on Krakoa's downfall. He wasn't someone I was all that interested in before I started reading this series, but now he's been given what I believe to be an intriguing story so far in Fall of X. The ending of this issue with Hope, Exodus, and Destiny was interesting as well, but kind of a weird ending to an issue that had little-to-no mention of them prior. Either way, this was another good issue for the series that sets an intriguing tone going into Fall of X.

This issue has a lot less focus on the ongoing story, but it was put to good use with some fun action drawn by the incredible Nic Klein. I did appreciate the story we did get, however, as Hulk has started to like Charlie after trying to get rid of her at the start of the issue. I think this would have benefitted from a little more actual story here, but this was still a pretty good read nonetheless. I'm really looking forward to Man-Thing showing up in Issue 4.

As much as I think Foreman has done a pretty solid job of filling in on this series, I can't wait for Nic Klein's return in the next issue. As for the story itself, it continues to be really interesting and well-written. Johnson writes both Hulk and Bruce nicely, and he continues to make me invested in Charlie's character. Plus, I particularly enjoyed how this ended with Betty's meeting with Bruce. This series continues to be really intriguing and well-put-together as a whole. The backup for this issue was solid as well.

The best issue in a while, in my opinion. Klein's art was killer, as per usual, and the story from Johnson was super solid. I did find it a bit odd that they kind of just ran through Sumungaru in one issue after how he was built up in the previous issue, but I do have a slight suspicion that he'll return after he cut Bruce's chest before he was summoned away.

Definitely the best issue so far. This was just on a different level than the previous three issues, though everything's been good reading so far. I thought the confrontation between Tony and Feilong was really well-written. I especially liked the line from Tony about Feilong's father. Awesome stuff here and I hope this series continues with an upwards trajectory, in terms of its quality.

Another stronger issue for this series. I think Feilong is already a really good villain for Tony, as Duggan handled him very well thus far. I almost forgot that he actually created the character in the first place. Either way, this was good stuff. I thought this was a nice way to wrap up this initial arc while also maintaining Feilong as an overarching threat throughout this run.

I wasn't as into this as the previous two issues, but it was still good stuff. Tony and Emma as a, potential, couple is certainly an interesting direction. I don't have a strong opinion on it currently, so we'll just have to see how things progress in that department. Aside from that, Duggan continues to write Tony well and I think he's done a nice job of balancing this as an Iron Man series and a Fall of X series.

I liked this significantly more than Duggan's X-Men issue this month. That issue wasn't bad by any means, but I felt more interested by what was going on here. That's possibly because Duggan's X-related stuff is present here, but he also has the more Tony-focused stuff that we've been getting in the previous nine issues. I think he balanced that well in the previous issue and again in this one. I know this series will continue to be listed under the Fall of X titles for the next few issues, at least, so I hope that Duggan is able to maintain this balance.

I thought this was a fun heist mission for Tony while on his "honeymoon" with Emma. Vito is a nice rotating artist once again and this is a good issue for him to be on, since it's relatively low-stakes. That said, though, I did like that Tony kept the book for Emma and I hope that's something re-visited later in the run. Plus, I liked the interactions with Captain Marvel, Doctor Strange, and Spider-Man, especially, in the final few pages of this issue.

A fun space adventure for Tony and Emma that really acts as buildup to the eventual confrontation between Tony and Feilong. I think Tony and Emma's dynamic was good throughout this book, which is something we've seen in this run's more recent issues. That said, I am becoming more of a fan of the two of them together after I said I was unsure about them in my review of Issue 12.

This was definitely my least favorite issue of the series so far, but I also don't understand some of the hate I've seen this issue get. There's some wild and/or "out there" stuff in this issue, but The Joker as a character is already those things. Personally, I thought this was an entertaining issue that gives an example of how insane The Joker is as a person. The backup story was the weakest part of this issue, in my opinion. Even then, it wasn't even bad or anything. Just not as good was what we got in Issues 1 & 2.

Not a bad fake-out with this issue, I can't lie. I enjoyed the interaction between the two Jokers, even if one of them ended up being Clayface in disguise. Either way, the main story continues to be pretty interesting, especially with Jason's hunt for Joker. The art in this issue is particularly great this time around. Moving to the backup story, it's not the best in the series, in fact it might be the weakest one, but it's still silly enough to be entertaining. I just hope the quality of them picks up a bit, as my anticipation to read them is beginning to decrease.

Psycamorean pretty much nailed it in their review. I can understand some readers being upset that the plot doesn't really advance all that much here, however, this is possibly the funniest Joker has been in this series. Either this, or when Joker was talking with the sick kids in Issue 4. Rosenberg just writes Joker incredibly well, enough for me to continuously enjoy this series without even the biggest fan of the character. Plus, Di Giandomenico's art continues to be great in the main story. As for the backup, I do think it was an improvement over the past couple. One of my favorite lines from it had to be from the editor's note where Joker apparently tried to start the 2008 housing crisis in Real Estate Rapscallions #6. In fact, pretty much all of the editor's notes in the backup stories have been pretty funny with how absurd they can be.

This was hands down my favorite Knight Terrors issue yet. I liked all of the art throughout this. Plus, I thought the story throughout was fun, well-written, and a nice testament to Hal Jordan and the ideals of the Green Lantern Corps. As for the backup, I enjoyed this more than I did in Issue 1 and I'm really interested to see how he fits in to the regular Green Lantern series from Adams.

This was my favorite of the Knight Terrors Issue first issues I've read up to this point. Rosenberg has maintained a great voice for Joker in the current Man Who Stopped Laughing series, and that's on display here as well. What sets this above the rest is that it's really funny. It just misses the 9/10 mark for me, but it's highly enjoyable. The humor is consistent throughout, plus, the story surrounding Batman is interesting and that final page with him in the closet was great.

This was the most consistently good Knight Terrors tie-in I've read. In fact, I would also call this the best Knight Terrors tie-in from what I've read at the moment. This issue jumps around a lot more than the previous one, but it's still entertaining and I really enjoyed it. Rosenberg continues to have a good voice for Joker, but, like with the rest of the Knight Terrors titles, I'm ready to get back to the main series.

While I don't think this reaches the heights of Spurrier's previous Way of X miniseries, there's still a lot to like here. I do prefer Bob Quinn's art from that aforementioned series, but Bazaldua does some solid work here. As for Spurrier's writing, he does a good job of writing the different situations throughout this issue, but I do wish that everything came together better or more clearly. However, something that does carry over from Way of X is Nightcrawler and Legion being highlights. I enjoyed Nightcrawler learning more about the ways of the Arakki, and I thought the content with Legion and Blindfold was well-written and intriguing. Overall, although this can feel a bit packed at times, I still think this was a cool debut issue that displays a good amount of potential for this series to just get better as time goes on.

I think this is the strongest issue of the series yet when it comes to its own, continuing story. The previous issue was my favorite issue of the series as a whole, but it was also a tie-in with the Judgment Day event. Here, this issue is possibly the most focused yet and it's really enjoyable. Spurrier writes a good Nightcrawler, as usual, and I found the stuff with Legion, Blindfold, Cypher, and Warlock to be pretty interesting as well. One other improvement I noticed was with the art. Jan Bazaldua is a solid artist, but her art wasn't my favorite in this series. I liked Diaz's art here, as I thought it fit the story better. I'm glad he has, seemingly, become the new artist for this series.

A pretty fun start to to the first Dawn of X series not written by Jonathan Hickman. Lolli's art is really solid throughout, and I also enjoy the premise set up by Duggan here. Having Kate unable to pass through the Krakoan gates is a super interesting choice with her abilities in mind, and I like the idea of there being a team to help mutants, who are currently unable to, come to Krakoa. The team is good as well. Kate, Iceman, and Storm are all good-to-great characters that I can get invested in. I'm not a big Pyro fan, but he was enjoyable here as well and I'm interested to see how Bishop factors more into this. I'm not sure how much Emma will be involved here, though. Either way, a nice start with this issue and I'm looking forward to reading more.

I was a little surprised that this book's namesake weren't in this issue whatsoever, but we've seen Sebastian a good amount in the past two issues and this was also really good. I liked how Duggan wrote him here and I'm really intrigued to see more of his side of the story, despite having a relatively small amount of interest in him going into this series.

After Issue 3 was solely focused on Sebastian Shaw, we now get an issue solely focused on Kate and Bishop. Speaking of which, I thought this was a fairly fun adventure for the two of them and I liked their dialogue throughout this. I'm definitely liking Kate more as this series progresses and I'm hoping we get some nice developments with her.

A pretty fun issue with Emma using her telepathic powers to study and learn more about Yellowjacket's infiltration of Pyro. Speaking of Pyro, I always forget that he got that giant face tattoo earlier in the series. Either way, I liked how Duggan wrote everyone here and I think he has a nice grasp on these characters. Lolli's art was pretty solid as well. That said, though, I am ready for Kate to return soon. I'm sure she won't be dead for long.

I believe I'm in the minority here, but I enjoyed the fake-out at the beginning of this. Aside from that, this was a fun issue filled with good character interactions and nice art throughout. This was definitely an interesting way to follow up on the previous issue and I'm glad we're finally getting to the competition.

This was a fairly strong start to this series. I really agree with what Afre said in their review, in that Vicentini's art fits right in here and I think he was a great pick for this series. As for Ziglar's writing, I think he writes Miles nicely and I like the story he's presenting here. I thought he built the pressure that Miles's feeling well and I'm interested to see what comes of the reveal on the final page.

I feel very similarly to how I felt with Issue 1. Vicentini's art is great and Ziglar's writing is pretty good. I think Ziglar has found a nice, authentic voice for Miles that really fits him well. Plus, the story continues to be interesting. I thought his team-up with Misty Knight was fun, and I hope the relationship between the two continues to develop as time goes on.

This was a strong way to end the first arc, and I'm glad things ended on a high note. Of course, Vicentini's art is, once again, great and it only added to the story. Speaking of which, the story here fired on all fronts. The battle between Miles and Raneem was pretty fun, and I really enjoyed Miles using a giant electric surge in the end. Plus, if you've read my reviews of the rest of the series thus far, you'll know I'm very glad to see that the mentor-mentee relationship between Miles and Misty Knight is continuing. I'm not sure how I feel about the next story being a crossover with Carnage, but I'm definitely interested, if nothing else.

While I do agree with some other reviews, in that this slows down the pace a bit from what we we got in the Carnage Reigns: Alpha one-shot, I still very much liked this. I really enjoyed how Ziglar wrote Miles and Scorpion's interactions with one another here, particularly when they're underground. After the last page with Scorpion's story in the Alpha one-shot, I must say I was expecting a bigger reveal of Scorpion's teammates here, but I do like the team we got. Hightail has a cool design and I'm interested to see more of her.

In my opinion, the issues in this crossover written by Ziglar have been the strongest ones and this is another example of that. I really enjoyed how he wrote everyone here, even if he made Miles say "OMG" at one point instead of the actual words. Plus, Vicentini's art in this series continues to be great, and I always look forward to the splash page he does in each issue.

Pretty good issue once again. While I do like this new story, I'm not quite as interested as I was with the opening arc. However, what makes this an 8.5/10 as opposed to an 8/10 for me is that I really enjoyed how Ziglar wrote Miles and Tiana throughout this issue. They really feel like they genuinely go together and I'm especially intrigued to see more of their relationship in this arc, hoping we get more of the kind of stuff we got here. I almost forgot to mention that we were treated to not one, but two splash pages from Vicentini here. His art just fits so well with this series.

This had a lot of good action that's only made better by Vicentini's art. I must say that I do feel very similarly to how I felt with the previous issue, though. The story wasn't the most interesting one this series has seen, but the issue as a whole is boosted by the more personal moments between Miles and Tiana.

This was a fairly strong milestone issue, in my opinion. As usual, I’m not a huge fan of the art changing mid-way (multiple times in this issue) without any explanation/reasoning for it, though just about every artist did a nice job here. Aside from that, I had a good amount of fun reading this, particularly whenever Taskmaster was on the page. I also thought this ended on a really intense note, which has me really interested to see how things go in the next issue. All things considered, I think this was a good milestone issue for Miles, no pun intended, and I hope Ziglar keeps up this level of quality.

A great first issue. This gives new readers a nice introduction to Moon Knight as a character, while also giving enough story development for those who are already familiar. Wade's character is re-established here, along with multiple other characters for the future (Reese, Dr. Badr, the unnamed villain, and Dr. Sterman). Along with the story, Cappuccio's art is absolutely fantastic.

This is probably the most I've liked Sabbatini's art in this run yet. It's very hard to substitute for Alessandro Cappuccio, but Sabbatini does good here. As for MacKay's writing, it's great as usual. Marc wasn't in the issue all that much, but he didn't need to be for the story being told. Taskmaster has become one of my favorite recurring villains in Marvel, and he's used to great effect here in helping establish how dangerous Moon Knight is to the Tutor. As for the final page, I'm very excited to see where things go with Marc, Steven, and Jake all being featured in the book. While this was a bit of a change of pace from how the series has been thus far, I think it's completely understandable considering how the past few issues have been.

This wasn't my favorite issue of the series, but it's still pretty good. What really helps this issue is MacKay's scripts. The story is good, but it's the way that MacKay writes the character's dialogue that makes this all the more entertaining. Plus, Cappuccio always does great work in fight scenes, which was seen during the sections of this book with Hunter's Moon. Speaking of which, I really hope he's not dead for good, because I've been enjoying his character throughout this run.

While I do have minor gripes with this issue, it's still another well-written issue. Sabbatini's art has been hit or miss in this run, and this is more of a mixed bag than previously seen in the series. Plus, I've lost just a little bit of interest in the Tutor, but it is hard to follow up a great villain like Zodiac. Luckily, it appears we're finally making our way back to him with this issue's final pages. Aside from that, Moon Knight continues to be badass and I am consistently enjoying this series a ton.

Pretty good issue in an awesome run. Quickly speaking about the art, Cappuccio is just outstanding. I'm absolutely in love with his art and I hope he stays on this book forever. Onto the story, I enjoyed a little more focus on Reese and Soldier here, as MacKay does a good job of making the reader care more about them. I think their interactions were very well-done in this issue. Plus, I enjoyed seeing Reese struggling with becoming a vampire, along with Reese's commentary about Soldier as a person. Finally, I'm intrigued to see what develops with the hooded figure at the end of the issue. I'm definitely interested in the story they have going on here, and the ending panel was super ominous; I love it.

I wasn't sure what to think when I saw that Venom would be in an issue of Moon Knight, considering I've never been the biggest fan of the character (not to say I dislike Venom, he's just never been my favorite), but this was a fun time. MacKay writes a fun adventure for the two and is able to give both Marc and Dylan time to shine here. Plus, Cappuccio delivers fantastic art once again here. It's so good that his art alone might be enough to get me to jump on a current Venom series. However, that could probably be said for over half of the Marvel books I don't currently read. I also enjoyed the ending of this book, as Dylan's ominous words on this issue's final page set up a lot of intrigue going forward, depending on whether or not they'll have a lasting influence on Marc.

Something this run has done incredibly well is make the reader invested in the supporting cast along with our usual main character, Marc. Following the huge issue 25, the entirety of this issue is dedicated to delving more into Badr, who has quickly become a very intriguing character throughout this series. While I did find his story underground entertaining and interesting, I my favorite parts of this were when he was talking with Dr. Sterman. Based on the solicitations for the next two issues, it looks like we'll be getting a lot more of Badr and Marc together. After reading this, I'm very interested to see how that turns out. This series continues to be fantastic and I will really miss it if the upcoming "Knight's End" storyline is, in fact, the end of the series.

This was a cool adventure with Marc and Badr, but nothing more. It helps that MacKay is an awesome writer, especially when it comes to dialogue. I may be rating this a little higher because I just read Moon Knight: City of the Dead #2, in which the dialogue felt a little generic (You can read my review on said issue for more thoughts). However, I still enjoyed this. While I always miss Alessandro Cappuccio whenever he leaves this title, Sabbatini's art isn't bad by any means. I'm really looking forward to getting into the "Last Days of Moon Knight" storyline with the next issue, even if it's possibly the end of the series.

Not as good as I hoped, but still really good. Sabbatini's art still doesn't match Alessandro Cappuccio, but it's not bad or anything. I'm really looking forward to his return in the next issue. Back to this issue, though, MacKay continues to put together a really interesting story here. The reveal of Black Spectre was done really well, in my opinion. All I can hope is that the next issue sticks the landing as we transition from this series to Vengeance of Moon Knight. Also, I almost forgot to point out the part where Zodiac uses his necklace to make Reese back away, as I thought that was a crazy moment.

A pretty good debut issue that does a solid job of establishing its characters. Hickman and Brisson co-writing this is an interesting choice. With them, seemingly, switching back and forth going forward, I hope there isn't a quality contrast between them. One big plus about this issue, though, is Reis's art. I think he's a fantastic pick for this series, especially with Bill Sienkiewicz being a very notable/memorable artist for New Mutants in the past.

I liked a lot of the foundation built by the previous issue, and I think this does a good job of following up on that. Hickman writes all of the characters nicely here and, while this doesn't quite get to that 9/10 mark for me, I do prefer this issue to the first one. I sense great things coming.

In my review of the first issue, I noted that I was hoping there wouldn't be a quality contrast when it came to Brisson co-writing this with Jonathan Hickman. After reading this, I'm very glad to say that this is just as good as what we got in the first two issues. I will say that I was really interested in the story Hickman was telling in the last issue and I was hoping to get more follow-up on that, but I also really enjoyed the story Brisson told here and I'm looking forward to more. Flaviano's art is solid as well and I particularly like how he draws Beak.

A nice conclusion to Hickman's work on this title, though I must say that I'm not sure how I feel about Bobby breaking the fourth wall to spoil the rest of the story after Issue 5. I would have liked to read that as a full issue, but I did enjoy the writing of it all, at least. Hickman found a really good voice for Bobby in this series and I hope it sticks around following his departure. It'll be a shame if Reis is also done with this series, as I always enjoyed just looking at the pages whenever it was something he drew.

I wasn’t quite sure what to expect when I picked this one up. I was mainly reading it due to the story coming out of James Tynion IV’s Batman. Gladly, I can say that this didn’t disappoint and it actually provided a lot of intrigue concerning Ivy’s future. This extinction storyline sets an interesting foundation for the series, and the murderous path it appears Ivy’s on is done well. Speaking of the murders in this book, Takara’s art here is great and it really shines when drawing the countless different plants and when drawing these plants basically taking over the bodies of Ivy’s victims. Overall, this was a nice start to this series and I can truly say I’m looking forward to where this all goes.

Just as good as the first issue, despite less really happening here. The ongoing story is nice, but the highlight of the writing here is from Ivy's narration. She has her plan to spread the spores, but in this issue we see the sentimental side of her that tries to hold her back from killing off humanity. Plus, Takara's art continues to fit this series very well. When the page calls for more detail, he delivers.

This was a little bit of a weird ending to the arc, but still enjoyable overall. If you read my review of the previous issue, my opinion remains the same about the art here. As for the story itself, it wasn't my favorite of this series. I'm not sure if that has to do with the fact that this got extended from a 6-issue series to a 12-issue series, but I'm hoping that's what it is. Nonetheless, there were a lot of good moments here, story-wise and art-wise, and I'm still looking forward to what comes next.

I feel very similar with this issue as I felt with the previous one. Although, the story was more heartfelt and just better overall in my opinion. I might have given this a 9.0 had it not been for the art. As I stated in my review of Issue 7, Ilhan's art just feels a little inconsistent to me. On one page, he's drawing an absolutely fantastic scene or a beautiful depiction of a character. On the next, he draws a wonky face or a weird body-shot. This is still a good issue overall and I've been enjoying this series so far.

This was an enjoyable issue overall, but, as another user pointed out in their review, the anti-vax allegory in this issue is kinda weird. I understand that the woman who denied being cured was supposed to represent those who are anti-vax, but I just feel like it wasn't executed in the best way. You can read Psycamorean's review (the user I mentioned) for a more in-depth analysis of that, as I agree with pretty much everything they said. Either way, this issue was still a good read and I'm excited that Ivy and Harley are finally back together in Gotham. I'm sure Ivy's little fling of sorts with Janet is going to come up sooner or later, but I hope there's a good resolution to it and that it doesn't ruin Ivy and Harley's relationship. If you need a reason why to be behind said relationship, just read the amazing Issue 9 of this series.

We're now in the first issue of this series that makes it a proper ongoing. This felt like a new start for this series while also possessing some lingering effects from the past twelve issues. I do wish we got more of Ivy and Harley together, especially after reuniting in the previous issue and the fact that they're on the cover together, but everything else here was good. Her confrontation with Batman establishes her current relationship with him after it was introduced by Catwoman earlier on. Plus, with that situation in mind, I like the idea of her having a place outside of Gotham to go to when she needs. The plot with Killer Croc shows some promise as well. My main complaint about this book is an issue I've had with other books as well, in that I'm just not the biggest fan of the art changing in the middle of an issue for no reason. I don't know why, but it's just a pet peeve I have with comics.

This wasn't as great as House of X #1, but it was still a fairly strong debut issue. This feels a lot more complex and complicated than House of X, but it's still pretty intriguing. With the introduction of Krakoa seeming to be very promising, we go into the future to see a grim future for the X-Men, which is something they aren't all that unfamiliar with. All things considered, this was good stuff.

After the highs of the previous issue, I have to say that I'm a little disappointed by this one. However, this was still a good read. The back half when things focused on the future was just a bit too confusing for me, but I definitely liked what we got before that. Hopefully this miniseries can get back on track, even if it's not even bad whatsoever here.

A great issue to kick off this run. There was some controversy surrounding this due to the change of Punisher's logo, but the violence fans are used is still very much present. We get backstory as to Frank's new situation, along with a tease of a villain for the series. Overall, great stuff.

I wouldn't say this packed the same punch as the previous issue, but this remains on the same level of quality. We get to see an interaction between Frank and Maria here, which was done very well with a, somewhat, unsettling tone. I also enjoyed seeing more development of The Hand and more of why Frank is aligned with them. Plus, Ares is revealed to be the leader of the Apostles of War (which probably should have been obvious by the helmets the group members wear that were seen in the first issue). Along with the good story, the art is great and I like the contrast between the style for the present and the style for the past. The two highlights of Saiz's art in this issue have to been when Frank kills the AoW member and when Ares absolutely obliterates that guy at the end (Probably one of my favorite parts of the book overall).

While still good, the flashback stuff wasn't my favorite this time around. The real highlight, for me, was the battle between Frank and Ares. Despite Frank getting his head smashed in, there's still potential for this to be revisited in the future. However, despite Frank's loss, this was still a very entertaining battle and the dialogue between them was great (Although it was more of Ares talking to Frank as opposed to a traditional dialogue). I also liked the glimpse into the resurrection process for Frank's two children. Despite not showing them in full, we still experience some uneasiness when getting just a glance of how mutated and disfigured his "children" are while trying to resurrect them. Plus, Daredevil showing up at the end provides a lot of intrigue.

A pretty good issue that sets the stage for an epic battle in #9. Maria's story picks up here, which is exactly what I wanted. Frank having the ninjas whose families were murdered as his personal guard is great, in my opinion, as he can relate to them in that way. Also, Ares effortlessly crushing that other ninja's head was another crazy kill in a series with a bunch of crazy ones. Overall, this book does its job well in creating anticipation for the showdown between the Apostles of War and The Hand.

Really good issue from a series that I’ve really been enjoying. Maria’s continued narration over her and Frank’s past together is great, and I’m glad she hasn’t become an afterthought in this series. As for Frank, the “murder train” of sorts he’s on here was also handled well with the news reporter(s) covering what he’s been up to. After the team-up tease from last issue’s ending, I’m excited to see what happens when Frank is finally confronted by all these heroes. I can’t wait for next month’s issue, as this series continues to be one of my favorite ones going right now.

This had a big twist I wasn't expecting after Maria seemed to embrace The Hand. However, I should have seen it coming, as I don't think Maria's going to be staying alive past the end of this series. As for the rest of the book, I really enjoyed all of the flashbacks and I found Frank's battle with the heroes to be very entertaining. This has been a fantastic run so far and all I can say is that I hope the team sticks the landing with Issue 12.

This was, unfortunately, my least favorite issue of the series. That said, it was still very good. Vecchio's art continues to be incredibly clean. As for Ewing, I did find this particular issue to be a little overwritten at times, specifically with some of the dialogue, but I still really enjoyed this one. It would have been nice if this felt more like an ending, as well, and not as much of a story continuing in Gerry Duggan's Invincible Iron Man series.

This one continues to be the superior series against Gerry Duggan's Fall of the House of X. I know they're different series, but I can't help but compare with the context of the original series, House of X and Powers of X. Speaking about the issue itself, I thought it was one with some fairly strong moments. The opening few pages with Moira and Charles were written really nicely, in my opinion. As a matter of fact, I enjoyed how Gillen wrote the latter throughout the majority of this issue. I wasn't as interested in the stuff with Rasputin IV and Sinister, but it was still enjoyable and it made for a strong issue overall. I'm looking forward to seeing what Charles's role will be in the rest of this series and beyond after how this ended.

The best issue of LaValle & Kirk's work on Sabretooth since the first, in my opinion. For whatever reason, everything just came together more smoothly for me here. Based on how this went, I'm thinking we won't see what's inside of Orphan-Maker's suit, unfortunately, but I do still appreciate that he and Nanny are being used after Zeb Wells's awesome run on Hellions wrapped up a while ago.

Another strong issue as we get to the midway point of the miniseries. I really liked the moment between Melter and Orphan-Maker, despite it only being a short one. I don't think I've heard of him before I started reading LaValle & Kirk's Sabretooth, so I hope he doesn't get cast aside and thrown into obscurity once this book wraps up. Oh yeah, Sabretooth & Toad just running away and leaving Oya by herself was pretty funny as well.

I don't really know what I was expecting from this, but it wasn't this. That said, it's pretty good. I definitely appreciate that this has hints of possibly developing Victor's character a bit, so I hope that continues as the series progresses. Aside from that, Kirk's art was pretty solid and I enjoyed seeing how far Victor went into destroying and conquering everything in his path.

The best issue of this current run so far. Firstly, I'm so glad that Marvel has decided to get rid of the backup stories here. They can be good and effective when done right, but I just didn't care about the ones we got in Issues 1 & 2. As for this issue's story, though, I enjoyed it. I thought the action was nice, but the writing and dialogue is where this issue shined, especially so when Jennifer and Bruce were speaking about their experiences as Hulks.

A lot of Rowell's run with Jennifer, whether it was the previous series or this current one, has been very slice-of-life. This issue is no exception, and I continue to really enjoy it. There doesn't have to be a bunch of action, universal stakes, or anything else in that nature for a book to be good, and this series proves that. I will say that I do think Guara's art was a little rougher in certain places than others, but this was another good read overall.

Another really enjoyable issue for the series. Rowell does a great job of taking relatively mundane situations and making them entertaining, fun, and compelling. The dynamic between Jen and Jack continues to be one of the strongest aspects of Rowell's run. Additionally, it's great to have Genolet back on the art duties. All things considered, I'm looking forward to seeing where this goes. Hopefully it leads to some positive development for Jen & Jack, as well as the newly-introduced Ganymede.

I enjoyed this one a bit more than the previous, which was mainly there to act as setup. Here, we see Billy reflecting on the end of the last issue and trying to make sense of it. I thought this was nicely done, as was the beginning with the space dinosaur. I liked seeing Psycho Pirate here, as he has a cool design and his abilities actually could have been a plausible explanation to what's happening with Billy. The story here was fun, and I liked the various hints of Billy being more villain-ish at times, only for us to find out what Psycho-Pirate had nothing to do with Billy's recent issues. Overall, I thought this was a good issue and I'm interested to see where things go with this story after Knight Terrors wraps up in August.

A step-up from the previous issue, in my opinion. For whatever reason, this just clicked better with me. Mora's art continues to look very nice on just about every page, and Waid continues to do a nice job of balancing more fun moments with more serious ones. Speaking of which, I'm interested to see what comes of the final page with Freddy.

Another relatively stronger issue for the series here. I feel very similarly with this issue to how I felt with the previous one. Mora continues to put out very nice art and Waid does a nice job of balancing different tones. Speaking of Waid, I should have known that Freddy wasn't up to anything "bad" and/or "evil" at the end of the previous issue.

This was one of my favorite issues of the series so far. I do miss Dan Mora on the art, but Sudzuka does a pretty solid job here, so I can’t complain that much. As for the story, Waid continues to do a nice job with the balancing of tones that I’ve mentioned in multiple reviews for this series. I especially liked the dinosaurs this time around.

A pretty fun issue to end Waid’s run on the title. It didn’t really feel like much of an ending, but I don’t think it was really meant to with Josie Campbell taking over with the next issue. Speaking of which, I hope she can maintain the quality of this series. At the time of this writing, I don’t believe I’ve ever read anything from her.

Pretty fun start to this book. This does a good job of setting up multiple things in the issues to come without being too overbearing. Firstly, we get Jennifer's meeting with Maria, which establishes their relationship well while also giving us, somewhat, of a sense as to where Jennifer is in her life right now. Then, we get to see more on Jennifer specifically as she shows up to her first day at her new job. Her interaction with her boss was a lot of fun. Speaking of Jennifer's interactions, her and Janet have such a wholesome relationship that's very nice to see (So much so that Janet basically hands a nice apartment to Jennifer while she works to get her own place). In the ending, we get the shock that is the return of the Jack of Hearts. Overall, a great first issue that sets the stage well for this run.

Another pretty good issue that gives us a little bit of development on Jen's job along with bringing in Andy. Towards the end, we get to see her friendship with Patsy, which was conveyed very well. The bulk of this issue deals with Jen and Jack, who are developing a fun relationship to read already. This is far from being action-packed (I don't even know that there was any actual fighting in this issue), but it's still a really entertaining and well-written book.

Glad to see an update on the Fight Club here after it was first introduced in Issue #1. Although it was shorter on time spent, it was still fun and brought more participants into the fold. Ben and, later, Reed's interactions with Jen were done well, as they both showed their genuine concerns for Jen. The majority of this issue was spent centered on Jen and Jack that was great. It wasn't anything earth-shattering, but it was just good quality stuff. It was surprising to look back on the conversation and realize how long it actually went on for, when it didn't feel that long whatsoever. It just felt like to people talking to each other, which is great. Plus, the moment where the two of them almost made physical contact was a nice touch. Good stuff once again from this series.

The first couple sections of this were good. First, we had Jen and Patsy have Eat Cake in Fancy Dresses Wednesday, which is something I'd already like to see revisited some time in this run. Plus, we had Nightcrawler straight-up ask Jen to legally represent all of mutantkind, which does great for her job and the business as a whole. While the latter was a good (possible) setup for the future of this title, the stuff with Jack is the culmination of the romantic tension that's been brewing between them for a bit now. Their conversations have always been a joy to read in this title, and this was no different. Plus, the final few pages where they finally embrace and end up going to the bedroom were done very well, in my opinion. Just really good stuff.

Although I understand some of the disappointment here due to this run taking a turn more closely aligned to the TV show, I thought this took the "stealing blood" storyline and improved it by a lot. While the show was an interesting dig at the "She-Hulk haters," this gave the villains more layers that made them far more interesting. Speaking of which, their backstory was a tragic one that was very intriguing to read. In my review of the previous issue, I had said I wasn't too sure about these villains, but it trusted Rowell to make it work. After having read this, I can say that that trust paid off.

With this issue, the series ends on a high note. I agree with what another user stated in their review, in that I think this could have been two issues, but this was still very enjoyable. Everything else here was good, as usual, but the best part of this has to be the final few pages with Jen and Jack. I'm so glad this run will be continuing with Sensational She-Hulk in October and I'm very much looking forward to seeing where things go from here.

A really intriguing start to this miniseries. Shehan's art here is pretty solid and I think it's a good fit for this book. As for Booher's writing, I think he does a nice job of effectively making the main characters seem authentic while also using certain tropes that have been seen in various stories in the past, whether it's comics, movies, television, etc. All things considered, I thought this was a good start with a great cliffhanger to maintain interest.

The final installment of this miniseries is a fairly strong end. Aaron & Kirk's story is a lot better here than it was in the previous issue. While I felt as though not much happened last time, things get brutal this time around and I really enjoyed it. The next story from Orlando & Davidson maintains the tone of the first story. As we enter Vader's mind, we get another look into how truly strong and powerful Vader really is. Plus, I really enjoyed Davidson's art throughout. Finally, we had Tieri & Earls's story, which was firmly the weakest of the bunch for me, unfortunately. It wasn't necessarily bad or anything, but I'm not sure how much it really fit in here. This is a very minor complaint, but I wasn't a huge fan of Vader audibly talking to himself. I just don't feel like that's something he would do, especially after reading all four issues of this series. Overall, this was a really nice finale to the series, even if the final story wasn't the best.

A very entertaining final issue for this miniseries. I absolutely love how powerful Storm's been portrayed by Al Ewing as of late. Emma Frost and Mister Sinister are done well here, also. Just like Immoral X-Men #3, I really enjoyed Vitti's art here. Good stuff.

This was a pretty good start to this series. For whatever reason, I've never been super into Superman. I've always appreciated him and thought that his existence was necessary, but I've never been the biggest fan of him in general. However, Williamson and Campbell have put together a very intriguing and beautifully drawn story with this issue. We're kind of thrown into the whole "Supercorp" thing, but I think it's an interesting idea that will prove to be good. While Williamson's story is good and intriguing, one of the main highlights of this book is Campbell's art. Everything he does it just so clean and I'm glad he's the main artist for this run. All things considered, this was a strong beginning to the first "Issue 1" from Dawn of DC.

Williamson and Campbell continue to put together an intriguing story with this series. I'm not sure how I feel about Marilyn Moonlight, but her appearance was very brief and I'm assuming we'll see more of her later on. For now, I'm really enjoying this storyline with Parasite. I'm very interested to see how the ending of this issue plays out in the next one. Plus, Campbell's art is one again awesome. This series is two-for-two so far.

It really sucks that this, along with the majority of DC's titles, is taking a two-month break for Knight Terrors. This issue was really good throughout, and I thought the cliffhanger with Lex at the end was very interesting. Glad to have Campbell doing every single page of art here, as he's just amazing. This was a stronger issue heading into Knight Terrors.

This was an intriguing beginning. This new host of Swamp Thing, Levi, shows potential to be a good character. However, I think I still need to see more of him before I decided whether I truly like him or not. I really enjoyed the opening scene with the doctor investigating the body and the local police talking about the urban legends. Along with the solid writing, the art is just great in this issue. Perkins fits Swamp Thing nicely and I'm looking forward to seeing the panels he'll do as the series progresses.

I think we've taken a bit of a long path to finally get to Levi attempting to learn about why the green chose him, but I'm still interested to see that part of this story unfold. As for this issue, this was pretty enjoyable and I'm somewhat intrigued by Jacob's transformation. I don't really have that much more to say about this. All I hope is that V. and Perkins stick the landing, because, as a whole, I've been enjoying this series so far.

Levi has become a compelling avatar over the course of this series, and I really enjoyed Jennifer and Tefé try to rescue him from the Green. Pilgrim's transformation generates some interest in me, but I'm gonna need to see more before I'm completely sold on this. Nonetheless, another good read from the great duo of V. and Perkins.

The penultimate issue to this run is a well-written one that sets us up for what's sure to be a great finale. The bulk of this issue is basically just Levi talking, but V. is able to make it interesting enough to keep the pages turning. Plus, Perkins continues to bring nicely drawn pages. All I can hope is that V. and Perkins stick the landing with Issue 16.

This was a pretty cool one-shot for Thanos. The main story at the beginning and the end was solid and works to further the main story in Thor, but the other three stories throughout were well-done. Cantwell's story paints an ominous picture for the future of the Marvel Universe, Straczynski's story was an interesting one about Thanos' first love, and Starks' story was an entertaining battle showcasing Thanos' pure might. Just an entertaining one-off.

This was a very strong debut for this series. I've been hyping this up a lot in my mind due to just how cool this looks, and I'm very glad to say it did not disappoint. The characters are nicely written and I really like the environment presented here. Despite nothing all that unique being done with it, I really like the design of the humans and the orcs. Plus, the Vangol are absolutely insane and I love it. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this plays out and I have a feeling this is gonna get even better.

This series continues to be really enjoyable with this issue. Aside from Wildgoose's art being great, I think Wilson is developing these characters really well with this story. I don't really have all that much to say about this, other than that it's really interesting and, if you like fantasy stories, you should definitely be reading this.

A pretty strong start for this series. I wasn't really sure what to expect from a Penguin-led series, but I had a nice amount of hope with King writing it. After reading, I really like what we got here. King is putting together a very interesting story here in building the setting of Oswald's new life after "dying" in Chip Zdarsky's current Batman run. Plus, Latorre's art really fits in with the story presented and I think it only adds to the overall feeling from this book. Good stuff all around with this one.

Not quite up to the heights of the previous issue, but still a good one. For the most part, I liked the introductions for each member of the Force of July, with my favorites being Sparkler and Silent Majority. I'm looking forward to seeing where this group goes as this series progresses.

Another really interesting issue here. It's a shame that the Force of July likely won't have much more story in the immediate future with them being taken out physically and taken out of Oswald's plans. Either way, I liked the dialogue between Oswald and Lisa, as well as the narration throughout this issue. My main gripe with this series thus far is that I feel like it's taking it's time to get to the point of it all. However, taking a slower pace isn't a bad thing whatsoever. I just hope the story doesn't begin to drag.

Not quite as good as the rest of the issues in this run thus far, but this was still pretty fun. The bit where Thor ordered four hot dogs with a bunch of toppings was fun. This kind of felt like a filler issue the middle of 15 and 17, but not bad whatsoever. The highlight of this book for me was probably Thor's conversation with Jane, as it just felt honest and heartfelt. Despite a slight dip in quality, this series remains great.

A pretty good issue that introduces the namesake of this arc, the God of Hammers. The God of Hammers being a physical manifestation of Mjolnir itself wasn't exactly what I was expecting, but it's still super cool. Thor and Odin's dialogue with each other was done well here, and Loki's involvement was a nice touch for that. Also, I was not ready for Broxton to be destroyed and, despite the heartbreak of Adam possibly dying, I think it was a good callback to Issues 7 & 8 of this run.

Pretty cool issue that mostly acts to teach us more about the God of Hammers. Mjolnir being sent to the absolute farthest place away it could go only to come back in mere seconds was insane and just shows how powerful it is. Plus, the final few pages where Odin's back gets absolutely bent by the hammer, along with the reveal of Mjolnir being, somewhat, fused with Mangog creates an interesting twist for this story that should be a lot of fun.

This was definitely a step-up from the opening issue. Not that it was bad by any means, but it didn't reach the heights that I was hoping for with my favorite DC team. Luckily, there are more storylines introduced here and this almost feels like a little more of a proper opening issue than the actual Issue 1. Scott's art is very clean, and Taylor's scripts are nice. It is kind of weird that a lot of this issue deviates from the Wally plot introduced last time, but the other stuff here is cool, such as Cyborg detecting a Tamaranean presence at the Borneo Rainforest, Brother Blood becoming Brother Eternity, and Tempest aligning with Brother Eternity for whatever reason. I also thought Dick having contingency plans for the Titans was handled very well. I liked that took a concept from Batman and the Justice League, but decided to learn from Bruce's mistakes and be open about it with everyone. I hope this series continues to maintain and improve upon the quality shown here, as I think this already has the potential to be a great run.

A improvement over the previous issue that I think is well-written and well-drawn. Scott's art is truly one of the highlights of this issue, even though I wasn't the biggest fan of it in the last one. It's been a while since I've read that one, so I don't remember what the problem was. I will say that this time around, there was a moment where Beast Boy's face looked a bit wonky, but it wasn't terrible or anything. I particularly enjoy the way Scott draws hair. Either way, though, I think Taylor continues to right the team well with this issue and I'm glad that Beast Boy is getting a nice amount of spotlight.

This was far from action-packed, especially for the last part of an arc, but it was still well-written, in my opinion. I would very much rather have a well-written issue with little-to-no action like this one than an issue full of action with no substance to it. I genuinely enjoyed seeing this story progress and I was very glad to see Swamp Thing here. I really enjoyed the series he had under Ram V. and I'm glad to see him joining the team, even if it's only as a part-time member. Hopefully Taylor brings that aspect back in the future, as I'd really like to see more of him with the Titans.

Really liked this one. Raven's actions are really becoming extreme and I think the tension, in that regard, has been built well. I liked the ending to this, as well, and it left me looking forward to the next issue.

I'm almost surprised to say that I enjoyed this issue more than the first one. As I stated in my review of that issue, I didn't really care much about Transformers going into this series and I purely started reading this because I'm a huge fan of Daniel Warren Johnson. The first issue was entertaining, but it didn't completely sell me on the series. With this one, I think I may be sold. The story is just more intriguing and compelling here as it gets past the setup of the debut and gets more into the actual ongoing story. Plus, the pages with Starscream attacking the pilots was pretty cool. I'm looking forward to seeing how much more Johnson can get me into these dumb robots.

Another really good issue here. I wasn't as into this was the previous one, but I still enjoyed it a good amount. My main gripe with this is that I felt that the first half just went by really fast and I don't think it took enough time to let the reader process what was happening. However, the second half of this was great and I really liked when things slowed down a bit.

This issue moves kind of fast, but Johnson makes me enjoy it nonetheless. His art is absolutely fantastic, as always. Plus, I think he especially did a good job here with Sparky and developing his relationship with Optimus a bit. Also, Starscream has quickly become a great antagonist in this series and I loved him just punting the smaller Decepticon.

This was super action-packed, which works well with Johnson's art style. However, I also feel as though that it didn't leave much room for the more emotional moments to resonate as much as they could have. Sparky sacrificing himself to keep Optimus alive felt like it came and went in a matter of seconds. Also, the ending is meant to be a somber close for the issue, but it just comes a bit out of left field as the hospital is introduced mid-way through the final page. Either way, I still really enjoyed this issue. I wasn't the biggest fan of Jorge Corona doing the art for the next arc since I love Johnson's art, but I feel a lot better about it after seeing previews for the next issue. I have a feeling Corona will fit right in, and I hope I'm right.

I feel similar to how I felt with the previous issue about this one, though I did think the moments themselves were stronger here. Corona still draws everything well, also.

While not quite at the level of the first two issues, in my opinion, this was still another well-written book for this miniseries. I hate to say it, but I don't really have anything new to add aside from how I felt with Issues 1 & 2. Hitch has some solid art and Hickman's writing continues to be the strongest part of all this.

If the reboot of the Ultimate Universe has been anything so far, it's intriguing. That's what I was feeling all throughout this one-shot, as I think it did a pretty solid job of setting up some interesting things going forward for Earth-6160. I currently plan on checking out all of the new titles coming out of this and I really hope they all deliver. I'm especially excited to read Ultimate Spider-Man, as the creative team of Hickman and Marco Checchetto alone is enough to sell me.

Awesome issue where Cappuccio's art just made everything look fantastic. Super glad to have Marc back and I especially enjoyed his moments with Greer. This issue made me more excited to get to the finale of the main Blood Hunt miniseries. I'm also super excited to see what comes of the rest of this series and the new Fist of Khonshu series starting up later this month.

A pretty good start, in my opinion. I've never been a big Venom fan, but this was surprisingly interesting. As of this writing, I haven't read the previous run by Donny Cates. I do plan on checking that out eventually, though. Back to this series/issue, I must say that I agree with Psycamorean, in that I care more about Eddie's side of the story than Dylan's. It's just more interesting to me. That said, I think both of them have fairly intriguing stories and I'm looking forward to seeing how these two differing stories will be balance out as this series progresses.

I very much agree with what CrazyForRAMU stated in their review, in that Ram V.'s side of this series isn't bad, it's just that Ewing's side is so much better. Every time I see that Ewing is writing an issue of this series, I get more excited than when it's V. Again, V.'s story with Dylan isn't bad by any means, but Ewing's story with Eddie is just so much more interesting. Here, we get Eddie traveling far into the future and having a well-written encounter with Kang that progresses the ongoing story with Meridius a bit by the end of it. As much as I think V. is a good writer and as much as I actually want to see more from that side of the story after last issue's Bedlam reveal, I'm very glad that the next two issues are going to be from Ewing.

A pretty good issue that ends up leading into the Dark Web event. I found Eddie's conversation with Tyro really interesting and I thought Eddie's time in Limbo was pretty fun as well. Hopefully Dark Web doesn't take away from the story currently being told in this series.

Of course, with Ewing on the writing duties, this was super interesting. I particularly enjoyed the two different timelines splitting and eventually coming back together for the, seemingly, inevitable outcome. Plus, CAFU’s art was absolutely fantastic. I was in love from the first two pages of this issue.

A really solid issue here as Eddie returns to the present world. This was a much faster read for me than usual with this series, but I enjoyed every second of it. Ewing writes Eddie as an absolute badass here and I think he does a great job of building him up before facing Bedlam in the next issue. Plus, CAFU's back on the art duties and every page is absolutely fantastic.

Another really solid issue from Ewing and CAFU. There's not as much substance with this issue as others in the past, but Ewing is able to write it to be really entertaining and engaging throughout. I'm not sure how I feel about the new suit seen on the last page of the issue and on its cover, but, with Ewing writing the story, I'm definitely willing to give it a shot. Oh yeah, CAFU's art is great once again. Though, I think that was probably a forgone conclusion.

It seems I liked this more than most. Though, like others, I don't entirely know how I feel about Carnage's involvement in all of this. As of this moment, I do think it's a pretty interesting twist and I'm looking forward to seeing where it goes, despite me not particularly caring for too much for Carnage as a character. Hopefully this ends up leading to something good, because I do understand other people's disliking and/or unsureness of this.

This was definitely Grønbekk's best issue on the title yet. I think she did a really good job with the dynamic between Venom and Carnage, despite Carnage not particularly being one of my favorite characters. As for the art, Lashley wasn't really selling me in the beginning, but he shined when drawing the symbiotes. Good stuff here and I hope Grønbekk keeps it up.

Ewing does a good job writing, as per usual. Once again, he makes the most of this book having a tie-in to another story. However, Ferreyra's art is definitely the standout here. I don't remember if I've read a book where he did the interior art, but this was really good. Venom basically falling apart really fit in with his style and I'm glad to see that he's supposed to be back for the next issue. I also really liked the homage to his father (and possibly his son?) that he threw in here.

Another fairly strong issue, especially for being an event tie-in. Of course, Ferreyra absolutely kills it on the art again and I'd definitely call that aspect of this book the highlight. However, Ewing doesn't disappoint with the story, either, particularly with the symbiote's side of things. Dylan's side was good and enjoyable, just not great. The stuff with Venom, Captive, and Lee was enthralling and just well-written overall, despite a little bit of a slower start, in my opinion.

As we dive more into the respective altered pasts of Janet and Nadia, we get my favorite issue yet of this miniseries. This felt like a step above the past two issues, in my opinion. We get to connect more with Janet and Nadia by seeing their earlier days in this alternate world while Ewing also interestingly advances the present-day plot with the Creature from Kosmos. Plus, Nie's art is really good once again.

I actually enjoyed this more than the previous two issues. In the very first issue of the series, I preferred Adam Kubert's art over Bogdanovic. Now, I think Bogdanovic did a really great job and I believe his art is perfect for this story. Speaking of which, this story is more interesting than Issues 2 and 3, in my opinion, and I'm really looking forward to the follow-up in the next issue. I also really enjoyed how Logan was written here.

This was my favorite issue of the series in quite some time. Yes, it was definitely more of a filler issue with X Lives and X Deaths of Wolverine coming up, but I really enjoyed it as a whole. Fernandez did a really good job on the interior art, and I found Percy's story to be super compelling. Issues like this are why I don't automatically dismiss filler issues, or even filler episodes in TV shows.

A fun start to this arc that introduces Deadpool nicely. Something kind of funny to me is Deadpool finding New Mutants #98 and Deadpool #1 in the back issue bin instead of on a wall or in a case. I'm not criticizing the book for that or anything, but it just made me laugh. Also, Deadpool taking over the quote page was funny and perfectly in line with him.

This might be my favorite issue of this storyline yet. I really loved the "teamwork" between Wolverine and Deadpool here. Blind Al was great as well when she showed up. Also, Kubert continues to kill it on the interiors.

A pretty fun finale to this story. I appreciated the more serious moment with Deadpool and I enjoyed seeing Wolverine gain a little more respect for him as he, seemingly, gained a spot on X-Force. Also, I wanted to mention that I think Percy did an awesome job of writing Deadpool throughout this arc, so I hope that carries over to X-Force.

A strong start to this new arc. I'm glad to see Bannister back more prominently, and I thought Ryp's art fit in with the story well. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this one goes, especially with Beast involved. He's definitely been one of the best parts this run, along with Percy's X-Force series.

This wasn't quite on the same level as the rest of the story arc thus far, but it was still a pretty good issue overall. Ryp's art continues to be one of the highlights, in my opinion. I also really liked the ending of this with Beast. This is still probably the strongest story for this run so far.

A pretty strong start to what’s basically a continuation of the Beast stuff we’ve seen recently. This really feels like the beginning of the culmination of Beast’s storyline in this title and in Percy’s X-Force run, which I’ve really been enjoying. I’m glad to see that Ryp is still on the art duties for this arc as well.

Some super interesting stuff happening here. Certain things did feel rushed to me, like Jeff disappearing in the water or maybe even the Wolverine clones gaining higher intelligence. Though, this was still a really good issue and I did think the development of the brains of the Wolverine clones healing, itself, was pretty cool.

Another crazy issue here when it comes to the action and violence. Laura's kill of one of the Sabretooth clones was insane. Also, it seems like Wolverine watched 127 Hours and decided to top it. This was just full of wild, wild stuff. That said, I'm very much looking forward to more.

This had the weakest main story of the book so far, but it was still good nonetheless. I enjoyed seeing more of Diana in the present, as the first two issues have had a stronger focus on other characters. Also, the backup story was super fun and I'd like more of that in the backups going forward, please.

I feel similarly to how I felt with the previous issue here, when it comes to both the main story and the backup story. I did really like a lot of of the stuff with Diana and Jack, though, particularly towards the end of the issue. Sampere, of course, drew just about everything beautifully, and Ortega's art fits right in with the tone of the backup story, as well.

I really liked the action throughout this and I thought that Sampere's art only made it better. The narration from the Sovereign is still a bit much, but I must say that I found a good amount of it to be well-written. The backup, once again, was pretty fun. That said, I do think it's a little weird that the first three in this series continued jumping forward in time, just for this to, seemingly, go back to the timeframe of the first one.

Wonder Woman as a housewife via mind control/brainwashing/etc. is not a new idea, but I did like the issue as a whole. I liked seeing Diana struggle more, as it was different from what we saw in the first arc and even the previous issue. Sampere's art was also very nice and only made the issue better.

While I do think it could have been executed better,I did like Diana's resilience and perseverance being shown here, even if it involved her eating a rat, of all things. Also, Sampere's art continues to be one of the highlights of this series.

A step-up from the first issue, in my opinion. The story just worked a bit better here for me and I thought it had better pacing. That could be attributed to the fact that Johnson had to set everything up in Issue #1, but that's just my own thought. I will say, though, that as much as I love Johnson's art, I wasn't a huge fan of Diana looking cross-eyed at least once or twice in this book.

This was the best issue thus far, across both X Lives of Wolverine and X Deaths of Wolverine, in my opinion. The story was good once again, though a little more impactful than everything before, but what really solidifies this issue as "the best thus far" for me is the art. Cassara absolutely killed it here, specifically towards the end during the fight between Wolverine and Omega Red. Cassara's art just fits with Wolverine so well.

This was an issue that really picked up for me as time went on. I wasn't the biggest fan of Gomez's art throughout this issue, but it was far from bad. That said, though, Williams's writing was the best part. Like I said, it took me a bit to really get into this, but I did. Rockslide's death was crazy and I think it was a good way to add some stakes to this crossover early on.

I couldn't decide whether or not to give this an 8/10 or an 8.5/10, but I'll learn towards the latter just because I think Cassara killed it on the art duties here. I think he's already proven to be a great fit for this book and I hope to see him on it for quite some time. As for Percy's story, I thought it was definitely unique, in that it didn't really set up the team going forward. I feel as though Gerry Duggan's Marauders, Tini Howard's Excalibur, and Jonathan Hickman & Ed Brisson's New Mutants all gave us a nice idea of the team going forward and their main objective or objectives are. It's not a bad thing that I didn't get that here, but it's something interesting I wanted to point out. Either way, the story was interesting and, though he likely won't be dead for long, I'm looking forward to seeing where things go with Xavier.

A good issue here that does a really nice job of making Xavier's death feel important, especially through Magneto and Jean. I also liked the dynamic between Wolverine and Kid Omega here, though I am relatively new to the latter as a character. Cassara also did a really nice job on the art, once again.

This wasn't as good as a lot of the other issues so far, but I still enjoyed it a good amount. I'm really enjoying how Percy writes Domino, aside from the "Dominos!" line and such. I must say that I enjoyed the "We match." line. I think Percy also continues to do a nice job of building the relationship between Domino and Colossus, especially with the last few pages right before the XENO tease. I have to say, though, that I'm not a big fan of Bazaldua's art. It's fine is most places, but not so much in others.

A nice amount of interesting stuff going on here. First of all, I continue to enjoy the dynamic between Wolverine and Kid Omega. I also liked seeing them travel to South America with Domino. Bringing up Domino, though, brings me to one of the most interesting things about this issue. I'm really hoping what happened during her resurrection comes up again later, as it appears Domino has been resurrected without her memories of her pain, even though her dying request to Colossus was for the opposite. Plus, I also just found Beast a little unsettling while reading this. There wasn't anything big or noticeable that he did here, but I think my perspective on him changed a lot after Issue 6. Oh yeah, it's also great to have Cassara back on the art duties.

A very nice return-to-form for this series. Cassara being back on the art duties was already a great sign, and he ended up, unsurprisingly, doing a good job with the interiors. Percy's story was significantly more interesting, as well. The encounter between Wolverine and Deadpool was fun, and I also enjoyed the interaction between Emma Frost and Sage.

Definitely the best issue for this series in Destiny of X, in my opinion. Every aspect just felt stronger here, from Kid Omega's storyline to Omega Red's possible redemption arc to Gill's interiors. With the next few issues of this having to do with Judgment Day, I hope the ending of this isn't ignored for a bit. I went from not caring a whole lot about Kid Omega in the last issue to being a lot more invested here for whatever reason.

Definitely an improvement over the last issue. I continue to really enjoy Sage's side of the story, and I found everything else to be more interesting after finally getting out of the way of the setup to it. I'm really liking Beast's storyline under Percy across this title and Percy's Wolverine series.

Although I would label this as the weakest issue of the series up until this point, there is a lot to like and a lot to be interested by here. Hordeculture is definitely an intriguing group that I wouldn't mind seeing more of. I did really enjoy Cyclops in this issue, and I think Hickman has done a great job with him in this series so far. Plus, Yu's art is once again fantastic.

A nice Vulcan-focused issue here, although not one of this run's strongest. The best part of this, for me, is Yu's outstanding art. He's been doing great work on this title and I think this story allowed him to really play to his strengths. I particularly enjoyed his drawings of Vulcan, his fire, and the tree-looking aliens he was going against (forgive me if the species has an official name, I haven't seen it and I don't remember it being stated here).

A fairly well-written issue that gives us some very interesting backstory for Apocalypse, especially considering the current storyline. I think this did an effective job of making Apocalypse a more compelling and/or intriguing characters as we approach the midway point for X of Swords. Asrar does a great job of drawing him as well.

Another issue for this series with a lot of focus on Apocalypse and I enjoyed it. Yes, a bit of it is a re-telling of story we've already read, even with some recycled art from Asrar, but it's good content nonetheless. I think having Genesis's perspective added a new emotional layer to X of Swords that wasn't present before and I'm glad Hickman decided to go in this direction. Also, I just wanted to point out that the way Yu draws Apocalypse is absolutely fantastic.

A super interesting follow-up to X of Swords. Yes, this is a lot of talking, but that's something Hickman is no stranger to making engaging. The, sort of, tension between Krakoa and Arakko is intriguing and definitely something that can be built upon. Isca was super cool in this issue and I really enjoyed her interaction with Charles and Erik. Plus, Noto's art made all of this look great.

This was a bit of a step-up from the previous issue, for me. Aside from Pepe Larraz's absolutely fantastic art, the story here is similar to the first issue, in that it's just a fun X-Men adventure. What boosts this for me is that this felt a bit more focused than Issue 1. The battle was fun and the ending had a nice amount of heart to it. Plus, the teases at the beginning and the end of adversaries to come were very intriguing.

This was another good issue for this series. Although this falls in line with the previous two issues, in that it's a fun one-off adventure for the X-Men, I think we're finally starting to delve more into the overarching threats of this story with The High Evolutionary giving Cordyceps Jones' location to Jean. Hopefully we start to get less teases of things to come and more of bigger things actually happening.

I really enjoyed this issue, as we get a more character-focused issue on Jean. However, I can't say I'm disappointed that we didn't get much follow-up on the overarching enemies of this run that have been teased in the previous three issues and even this one at the end. After the X-Men's encounter with The High Evolutionary in Issue 3, I thought this issue would be dealing more with Cordyceps Jones and Gameworld. Although that aspects leaves more to be desired for me, I can't act like this issue wasn't a well-written Halloween one-off, because that's exactly what this is.

After multiple teases and glimpses of a larger ongoing story for this series, this issue feels the most focused in that aspect yet, as we focused on Feilong and Ben Urich. We're left with a lot of questions, which is completely fine. I just wanted more focus on a larger story. Plus, the writing here is pretty good. I enjoyed the opening stuff with Captain Krakoa, as well as Sunfire's confrontation with Feilong.

This was a nice spotlight for M.O.D.O.K. and a fun issue overall. Scott continues to be the star of this book, as the later half of this issue featuring him and M.O.D.O.K., followed by him and Everett, were both very enjoyable. This seems like a bit of a deviation from the ongoing storyline, which is kind of a problem I've been having with this series as a whole, but at least the ending dealt with how Ben lost his memories of the X-Men's resurrection abilities.

Following Judgment Day, it seems we have an overarching story for this book that might be directly followed up on in the next issue. Plus, it's actually pretty interesting. I'm hoping that this can be maintained, as the first 12 issues of this run just felt like tease after tease of a larger story without much actually dealing with that. Along with this nicely done issue, we have Cassara's utterly fantastic art.

While I was a fan of the story in this issue, I’m a bit mixed on it being in this issue. Yes, I get that Synch is on the current team and that Laura is his love interest and they found her a couple issues ago and all of that. However, Laura and Wolverine aren’t on the current team and this issue was primarily about them. Despite that, I’m not really sure where else this could have taken place. So, I’m not upset about it by any means and it’s completely understandable. Nonetheless, I still enjoyed this book and I thought the inevitable interaction between Laura and Wolverine was handled well.

This was a quicker read than I thought it was going to be, and that's not a bad thing whatsoever. The story here is entertaining enough, but it's what's teased at here that is the best part. Resurrection is coming back to haunt the X-Men, as it's unknown how many of Wolverine's skeletons haven't been retrieved after death. This is a super interesting concept and I think it's a great idea. Plus, the stuff Orchis infecting Krakoan medicine has the potential to be another intriguing story for this series. Things are really looking up for this run with this issue. Not that it was bad in the first place, though. I'm just excited to see what's to come from all of this.

If this was solely the content with Shadowkat, I would have scored this somewhere from a 9/10 to a 10/10. However, there are things here that drag this down a tad for me. I'm not a big fan of Ms. Marvel becoming a mutant, and the story she gets here isn't really interesting enough to justify her being changed to be such. I do plan on reading her upcoming miniseries, so hopefully that sells me. Moving on, the few pages with Stasis and Cyclops had a couple good moments, but nothing extraordinary. The Shadowkat parts of this book were the strongest by a mile, and I really hope we continue to get a larger focus on her as this series progresses.

I have read a good chunk of the comics from the Krakoa Era (and I still plan on reading certain ones I missed out on), and I can say that this was a fairly strong conclusion. I'm sad to it go, as I feel like it drastically changed the status quo (in the primary timeline/continuity) for a group of characters in a way that isn't seen a whole lot in Marvel and DC currently. It gave way to so many interesting and great ideas, in my opinion. But, all great things must come to an end. I do feel as though From the Ashes has promise, considering the creative teams and pitches. Moving back to this issue itself, there's a lot to like here. The main story really felt like a nice way for the mutants to move on from Krakoa, while also not completely eliminating it from the world. Noto was a great pick to do the majority of the art here. The backup stories weren't bad either. Overall, this felt like a nice, heartfelt ending of an innovative era, with seeds for the future planted as well.

This really felt like a hard turning point in the Krakoa era, which is exactly what this was going for, in my opinion. With this year's Hellfire Gala, we see the beginning the newest phase of the aforementioned era: Fall of X. While I do understand where some of the criticisms for this new phase and for this issue stem from, I don't think they're entirely warranted quite yet. I think we still need to wait and see how all of this ends before complaining that Marvel is just doing what they always do with the mutants, in that they have them rise to power, fall to their lowest, rise up again, fall down again, etc. I have faith that Fall of X won't be about the end of Krakoa, but that Fall of X will actually mean Fall of Xavier, as I've see other people theorize. Or, maybe I'll end up being wrong. We'll just have to wait and see. Either way, while a bit crammed at times, I thought this was a fairly well-written issue that introduces a lot of ideas that will affect the X-books as Fall of X begins. I'm very intrigued to see how everything develops for Krakoa and the mutants going forward.

This was a nicely-written, character-driven one-shot for Before the Fall. The four Sinisters have all been depicted throughout Destiny of X, and I think Gillen brings the three "non-original" together her nicely. Despite the minimal use of Orbis Stellaris, I don't think we was needed through the bulk of this story. Having Stasis and Righteous together throughout the majority of this issue was a nice way to create emotional investment and I thought Gillen wrote that well. Overall, I'm very interested to see what happens with Sinister as Fall of X approaches.

A pretty cool one-shot as we go into the next series of Spurrier writing Nightcrawler. Speaking of which, I'm very glad the focus is shifting back to him. Don't get me wrong, I really enjoyed Legion's character in Legion of X, but it feels like the last time Kurt was the main character was in Way of X and the first few issues of Legion of X. The new Uncanny Spider-Man title isn't quite what I expected, but it certainly gains my interest. Also, as KittyNone stated in their review, I really enjoyed the use of previous comic pages to represent memories/flashbacks.

This wasn't as strong as anything from Way of X, in my opinion, but it's still pretty good. I agree with what KittyNone stated in their review, in that I think this one-shot could have been a second arc or storyline for Way of X. As a matter of fact, I pretty much agree with just about everything said in their review. Fabian's redemption was one of the highlights for me, and I did feel as though this was a bit stuffed. All in all, this was an enjoyable one-shot that seems to acts as a bridge between this series and the next.

This was a nicely put together opening issue for the series that establishes the main cast for the issue to come. The conflicts Storm faces surrounding her position, status, and leadership is very interesting. Also, I love to see Magneto getting a starring role in this series and his story with the Fisher King is compelling. Along with that, we have a fun story with Sunspot, Vulcan, and Thunderbird. Overall, I think this issue sets up a few intriguing storylines that I’m looking forward to seeing unfold.

This issue was a lot of setup for what's to come following Ironfire's arrival at the end of the previous issue. While I did enjoy it and think it's very far from being bad, I must also say that I believe it to be the weakest issue of the series thus far. However, that's a testament to how good this run has been when my score for this is as high as it is. The only other issue I've scored an 8.5 is the first issue. Other than that, nothing has been below a 9.0 for me. Despite the slight dip in quality here, my interest as to where things are going here is still present and all I can say is that I hope the series returns back to 9-10 territory soon.

I am absolutely down for some Fisher King backstory, and what we got here was very intriguing. I also enjoyed seeing the present-day stuff dealing with the ongoing war on Arakko. I'm definitely interested to see how Fisher King factors into this current storyline given the increased focus on him here. While I wouldn't say this was my favorite issue, it does provide some very nice setup going into the next issue. This war storyline continues to keep me interested and I'm looking forward to seeing it all unfold.

I really enjoyed this. I understand why some people might be frustrated with the sudden deviation from the Ultraman plot, but this storyline is super interesting to me. Seeing Jon explore the Injustice universe creates a compelling experience. Jon is faced with different versions of Damian, Bruce, and his father that are different, yet also the same. Plus, his realization at the end of the issue of what Clark is really like in this universe was very well-done, in my opinion.

This was my favorite issue of the run yet. Tombstone is written incredibly here, in present-day and in his backstory. In present-day, he's an absolute badass. In the present-day, he has a great origin, of sorts, that gives us a sense of how he came to be the way he is. Aside from Tombstone as a character, the main story of this title remains interesting. As I said in my review of the first issue, this feels like a classic gang/mobster story, which is very entertaining when done well. Also, very glad the cover of this issue isn't misleading like last time ;)

The Tombstone story continues to be engaging here, as Peter is straight-up deceived into thinking he's in Harlem and into doing Tombstone's work for him. Great stuff here, and I'm glad Tombstone had no intentions of hurting Robbie. Although it can be argued that it's taking some time to get to the MJ stuff, I'm still entertained by what we're getting here.

Despite the outrage over Mary Jane, this series continues to be very good. I liked that, although he was tricked by Tombstone in the last issue, Peter was able to end up using that whole situation in his favor as it shows that the both of them are smart people without making either of them seem "dumb." Overall, this was an engaging first arc for this run and I hope Tombstone makes a return to this title in the future.

This run has been very engaging so far, and our first issue after the milestone “one-shot” maintains that quality. Despite being a villain, Adrian’s motivations for going after Peter are understandable and make their eventual confrontation at the end of the book all the better. Plus, Peter and Norman’s interaction, featuring Mary Jane and Kamala, was well-done and showcased that Norman’s sins being “eaten” doesn’t mean everyone is going to magically forgive and/or forget his past. A great issue here overall.

An enjoyable wrap-up to this “mini-arc” of sorts. The bulk of this issue was Peter fighting Vulture, and it was a lot of fun to read. It just felt like a classic comic book fight. Plus, Peter being Peter with his witty mid-fight dialogue is always a treat when written well, and this was exactly that. As for the ending of the issue, I thought that Norman’s reasoning for not getting on the glider to help Peter was great, as Wells is establishing him as a character the reader can get invested in. Despite the hate surrounding the Mary Jane & Paul situation, this book is honestly really good.

This is the type of book where it's evident how much the team loves the characters they're working on. I love Reilly making his style to something out of a 60's comic for the majority of this issue, whereas it's more sleek and modern when we're in 2549. As for Ewing's writing, the dialogue fits right in with the time period. While it fits in with 60's book, it's not too far into it to a point where it's super distracting. The majority of this issue could have been a 60's Ant-Man/Tales to Astonish book, and an entertaining one at that. However, what makes this all the better is the context surrounding this. As CrazyForRAMU pointed out in their review, the joke made about Namor putting the Fantastic Four in a movie isn't just a throwaway joke. As I stated in the beginning of this review, this is a book where it's evident how much the team cares about the characters they're working on. This was an interesting and strong start to this miniseries, and I'm intrigued to see where this goes.

We're two-for-two with this series as we move from Hank Pym to Eric O'Grady. While the last issue very much fit in with the Silver Age style of comics, this one feels more modern, which is what I would hope for with an Iredeemable Ant-Man story. The art from Reilly very much fits into this 2000's era as well. This era-specific art was seen in Issue 1 as well, where I felt as though his art was giving off a 1960's feel throughout the Hank story. What truly boosts this is how feel Ewing writes everything. He makes Eric an entertaining character to read over the course of this issue while also continuing to build the mystery of who this new Ant-Man is. We're halfway through this shorter miniseries and I'm looking forward to reading Scott Lang's story in Issue 3.

I thought this was a really good ending to a great miniseries devoted to honoring the legacy of Ant-Man. My thoughts on this issue are pretty consistent with what I've been saying about this title for the last three issues. Ewing delivers good scripts that give each of the different "Ant-Men" unique voices and personalities. I think that bringing them together for this time-jumping story was an awesome idea that he made work really well. When it comes to Reilly's art, he was fantastic throughout and that doesn't change here. If you've read my reviews for Issues 1-3, you'll know that I've always brought up his changing art style in this run. That's evident here once again. Although, we have seen glimpses of this sleeker version of his modern style over the course of the series from the glimpses into Zayn's time period. Overall, I really enjoyed this miniseries and I would definitely call it a must-read for Ant-Man fans.

Jed MacKay continues to be one of the best current writers today with this great team-building issue. I was expecting either Tony or Sam to be the leader of the team, but I'm very happy it's Carol. Plus, she's written very well here which makes it all the better. Referencing something that was mentioned in another user's review of this issue, I enjoyed seeing Carol check in with every member of the new team and including acknowledgement of their current situations. Plus, I totally forgot about last year's Timeless issue, so it was super cool to see Kang on the final page. I've been enjoying MacKay's Moon Knight and Doctor Strange runs so far, so I'm hoping this maintains the same kind of quality. So far, it's lived up to the hype.

This didn't pack the same punch as the first issue did, but I still really enjoyed it. As another user pointed out in their review, we don't get as much character work as we did in Issue 1. Instead, we get more superhero stuff, which is also good. MacKay has proven to be excellent at writing dialogue in his current Moon Knight run, and this is no exception to that. Carol and Kang's meeting in Null-Time was very well-done, and I liked the other members of the team were put to use throughout this issue by having their actions tied-in with said meeting in Null-Time. Sam's section of that was my favorite of the bunch. Overall, this series is two-for-two so far and I can't wait to see where this storyline with Kang goes.

Another issue from this series I really enjoyed. I think story moving between each of the different team members was balanced well, even if they only got a few pages at a time. After building the Ashen Combine throughout the past few issues, MacKay made every Avenger in the fight look great. I especially enjoyed how he handled Thor here. I was only a couple pages into this book before I knew I would love it. Can't wait to see what's next, especially with the next issue apparently being focused on Vision.

Great issue once again with this series. I wasn't incredibly into the Twilight Court here, but I still do find them intriguing. What really makes this issue for me, along with Villa's super solid art, is how MacKay continues to nail the characters. My only hope, for now, is that the Twilight Court gets more interesting sooner rather than later.

Not my favorite issue of the series, but still a really good one. MacKay did a good job of establishing each Avenger and each member of The Twilight Court when it comes to their abilities and skill-sets. I really enjoyed him building upon this set-up by having each Avenger, essentially, switch places in order to win. I also enjoyed the art from Mortarino here. I don't remember seeing art from them previously.

A really well-written issue once again from MacKay. I really enjoyed the ominous feeling throughout this one, especially in the latter half when Thor and Wanda confront Nightmare. Plus, I'm glad to see Villa back on the art duties. I think he did a really nice job here and I'm happy he's, supposedly, drawing Issue 11 as well.

Good stuff once again. Zdarsky and Acuña continue to do great jobs in their respective departments. I don't really have much to say about this other than that. I like the dynamics between everyone and I hope the final third of the miniseries delivers.

Glad to say that this was the best issue of the storyline yet, in my opinion. I really enjoyed the main story. Batman's fight with Peacekeeper-01 throughout the issue was entertaining and probably the best part of this for me. It also helps that, as usual, Jimenez does some incredible work with his art. The backup story here is the best it's been as well. Ghost-Maker's winning strategy in this issue was great and it was the best use of the flashbacks they've been doing thus far, in my opinion. All things considered, this book is really firing on all fronts and I can only hope that quality is maintained as we get closer and closer to Fear State.

A fantastic start to Zdarsky's run on Batman. This was an issue was looking forward to for quite some time after hearing how good Zdarsky's Daredevil run is, and I'm glad to say I wasn't disappointed. With his great scripts and Jimenez's fantastic art set the stage for this Failsafe arc, which is somewhat of a callback to 2000's JLA: Tower of Babel. Penguin making it seem like Batman killed him was not what I was expecting, but, already knowing what Failsafe's function is, I knew they were gonna have to find a crazy way for Failsafe to come after him. Speaking of Penguin, the fake-out with him in hospital and Tim being in the hospital after being shot was done very well, in my opinion, as was Bruce's commentary about the latter. To avoid constantly repeating myself, I'll just say that this was an awesome book.

This was a great follow-up to the previous issue. After being teased before, Failsafe is fully established here as a super dangerous threat to Batman. One thing I liked in particular was the fact that he was solely after Batman and nobody else. Even when the rest of the Bat-Family tried stopping Failsafe, they were basically swatted away so the focus could be turned back to Batman. I also really enjoy how Zdarsky writes Bruce's narration/inner monologue as well. Zur-En-Arrh returning was something I did not expect whatsoever, but it does create intrigue. As for the backup story, it was a good read just like the one from the #125. Zdarsky just knows how to write man.

The main story was interesting, which isn't anything new for this book. Plus, the backup story was a lot better than I expected, featuring some emotional moments with Tim and his mother. I would have given this issue an 8.5, but that backup was just surprisingly good.

Loved this issue, as I thought it was the best one for Dark Prisons yet and the best one overall in a while. I especially liked Bruce’s flashbacks and the sections with Failsafe. Zdarsky’s voice for Bruce continues to be great as well, in my opinion.

A very good finale to this arc. Jiménez’s art is top-notch once again and it only makes this book better. I liked that there wasn’t a backup story this time around, as I felt like there was more room for the main story. I’m really looking forward to what’s next and I hope Zdarsky can maintain this level of quality like he was in this run’s initial arc.

Very, very good. I wasn't always into Cowan's art, but I did think it was pretty solid overall and it did fit the great story being told. I'm not typically a fan of the art changing mid-issue, but the way this was laid out made it work and it also helps that Jiménez is fantastic. Hawthorne also did a solid job, as always, with the backup. The main story, itself, is surely what stands out here, as it's a well-written, more grounded story about a criminal in Gotham. That said, the backup was also nice for what it was. It earns the "tie-in" label for this issue, and I think this was the best way to go about it if DC wanted this labelled that way.

Though not at the heights of the first issue, in my opinion, this was still another strong read for this miniseries. Fabok's art delivers once again and Johns continues to put out a super interesting story. I don't really know how I feel about the stuff towards to end with Barbara and Jason, but it doesn't drastically alter my score of this issue or anything.

A great start here that does a really effective job of establishing Bill's character to new readers while also setting the stage for what's to come. This was my first major exposure to Johnson's art, and it's absolutely fantastic. He makes every action scene dynamic and impactful, but is also able to depict a great detail in the slower scenes as well. Every page is just awesome to look at, and that's not even talking about the writing. On top of his art, Johnson puts together a super compelling story. Bill's inferiority complex with Thor is a fairly simple concept, but Johnson builds upon it very nicely and, almost, tragically here. All things considered, I thought this was a strong first issue that really fired on all fronts.

For whatever reason, this worked a lot better for me than the first two issues. Don't get me wrong, the first two were both good, but this really clicked with me. The opening was really cool and it, once again, established Adana as a crazy powerful villain. Then, we got Blade killing Lord Daido in awesome fashion. I will say I would have liked if that part went longer, but it was still cool. I also really liked the setup of the mission going forward, as I think it creates an interesting premise. Plus, the addition of Doctor Strange at the end also has great potential for some really good content in Issue 4 and, possibly, beyond. This was definitely the best issue so far and I'm really looking forward to where this goes next.

I don't think it matters that much, but I'll preface this by saying I read the Red Band Edition. Now, this book was awesome. It truly feels like a large-scale event in a good way. MacKay establishes pretty much all of the major players in the story going forward and introduces us to the villains, which all seem pretty cool. I'm looking forward to seeing more of them and learning more about them. I was glad to hear MacKay was getting to do an event, and he definitely delivered. As did Larraz, who does a great job drawing everything, as per usual. Now, about that ending. I guessed it by the end of the third-to-last page, but it was still really, really good. A bit of a bold move, in my opinion, but a welcome one at that. All things considered, this first issue was a hit and I'm fully invested in this.

One more time, I'm prefacing this review by stating that I got the Red Band Edition. Anyways, this was a very good conclusion, in my opinion. Larraz killed it on the art and MacKay wrote everyone super well. I was slightly annoyed by Varnae/Blade saying his weakness to the heroes right before said weakness (Brielle) showed up and took him down, but it wasn't a huge deal. That said, this was an awesome event series from a pair of fantastic creators.

This was a really good finale to this arc. Selina taking Roman's mask using it against him was done so well. I thought it was a great shot when you see her wearing the mask, and I thought it was funny to see Roman completely lose his mind once he realized she had the real mask. Plus, Leon's art was, as usual, fantastic here and it continues to fit the story well.

With that, this tie-in miniseries ends on a high note. While I would have liked to actually see Scott and Alex escape their cell with the puppies, I really enjoyed what we got with Jean and Madelyn. This series as a whole will go down as one of the stronger parts of Dark Web, if not THE strongest.

This was my favorite issue of the series yet. It went by a bit quick for me, but it was a ton of fun throughout. From the beginning game with the Atelier, to Wade & Valentine's fight with Last Bite & Rävohna, to Princess being the cutest and scariest creature simultaneously. Plus, Zagaria has some nice art here that particularly shines, for me, whenever Princess is on the page. Great stuff here.

This series continues to be the best it's been with this issue. Wade fighting the dream counterparts of Cable, Wolverine, Domino, and Spider-Man was fun to read, especially with his dialogue. Wong has been great at writing his character throughout this run, in my opinion. Plus, we got some nice, more emotional moments such as when Valentine shows that she wants the real Wade rather than what he thinks is the "ideal" version. Plus, we get Wade having to kill his "daughter" when he's forced to confirm that she isn't real. Loving this series so far.

DWJ kills it again with this book. The stage is set for a wrestling tournament like no other, and it absolutely delivers. This is the most action-heavy issue of the series so far and it's so much fun. I wasn't ready for FTR's Shatter Machine to be busted out by the Knights of Rhyne, but I loved it and said team is already established as a solid threat for Issue 4. Despite containing a lot of action, the series doesn't lose its emotional stakes. Aside from Lona and Cobrarsun, you have the added layer of Nexel and Petey trying to get their sister back as well. Along with all of that, Johnson's art blends perfectly with the action of the matches and the overall story being told.

This was hands down my favorite issue yet. Reading Stephen's journey of going through this, seemingly, endless war over thousands of years with his desperation increasing and morals being challenges was incredible. This acts as an origin story for the new General Strange character we saw at the end of the previous issue, and it definitely sold me on this character right out of the gate. MacKay has given us some great content with his current Moon Knight run, and it feels like he's really starting to cook up something great now with this Doctor Strange series.

Don't get me wrong, I liked everything before this issue and the last issue, but I think MacKay is really cooking something great with this current story. I loved the previous issue and this one was another hit. Stephen losing it on Tiboro was fantastic and just well-written. Throughout this issue, it really felt as though something big is on the horizon when it comes to facing General Strange. Plus, I thought the final page was a really intriguing cliffhanger. Ferry's art works better in some places than others here, but it doesn't take too much away from this for me. All in all, these past two issues have been the best this book has been and I hope it's only up from here.

Two absolute banger issues from Jed MacKay in this week and I'm here for it. While this wasn't quite as strong as Avengers #7, this was still really well-written and I'm super into this story right now. The strongest part of this, for me, was the ongoing conversation between Doctor Strange and General Strange throughout their fight, which was also really cool in its own right. Plus, Ferry is putting out some of his best work on this series to date, in my opinion. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this current story concludes with the next issue.

Great ending to this storyline. MacKay is just so good, man. I loved how the fight ended by Doctor Strange highlighting the key difference between himself and General Strange. I'm very glad that the rumor of this possibly being the final issue seems to be false, as I've really been enjoying this run as of late.

This was my first issue reading Jeremy Adams' Flash run, and it did not disappoint. Adams writes such a wholesome and enjoyable adventure for Wally and Ace. The dialogue between them is really what makes this all the more great. Wally's story about how he came into his own was very compelling to see. I also enjoyed that the setup for the next issue didn't take up that much of the issue. The majority of this issue was focused on Wally and Ace, while leaving just enough room to introduce their next story with Girder. Just great stuff.

I wasn't quite sure what to expect with this one, but I'm really happy with what we got. Wyn is already a great protagonist that's likable from the start. Aiko and Dimitri are really good characters as well. Dimitri is a fun sidekick, and I really enjoyed the conversation between Aiko and Wyn in the bar. I'm really looking forward to more content involving the two of them. This was just a really nice introduction to this new section of the Marvel Universe and I can't wait to see what comes next. I sense big things coming with this series.

Another really good read. I will say that this is just barely a 9/10 for me, as this took just a little too long to get as interesting as it ended up being. That said, this got the most intriguing when focusing on Aiko and the new character, Mia. I liked the other stuff with Wyn, Doctor Strange, and Cubisk Core as well, but I just wasn't as into it as the Aiko/Mia section of the book and the first issue as a whole. Either way, this series continues to have me hooked and I just really enjoy what Hickman and Schiti are putting together here.

A super interesting issue here. Schiti's art continues to be great, and I'm still really enjoying the world that Hickman is building here. I think he told a really good origin story to start this issue off with Robert. I'm very interested to see what happens the next time Wyn and Aiko see each other, considering the confrontation they were about to have in this issue.

This was a series I almost didn't get, but I'm very glad I picked it up last-minute. The previous two issues have been great and this was no different. I'm happy to see that Cantwell has taken the Dark Web crossover and purely used it to his advantage. As with the issue before this, the crossover doesn't drag this book down whatsoever. Across the board, his writing is great and he's able to stretch things out just enough before hitting Norman with a flashback or reminder of his past. As for Medina, his art continues to fit right in here. Just a well-done book and I really hope the next two issues stick the landing.

This was the best issue of this series yet. We only focus on Rocket throughout this, but that was definitely the right call, in my opinion. The first three issues of this have been about the rest of the team dealing with Grootfall on different worlds, and I think having a whole issue dedicated to Rocket dealing with it was a great idea. The execution is what makes it, however, as Kelly & Lanzing are able to take a fairly simple story at its core and write it well enough to make it resonate with the reader. You truly feel Rocket's pain and grief as he's tasked with protecting others from something that was once one of his closest friends, if not his absolute closest friend. This series continues to get better and better, and I'm very much looking forward to learning more about Grootfall in the next issue.

A bit of an emotional issue with this one, as we go through all of the different team member's feelings about what's happened with Groot. While I was expecting a bit more from Grootfall's origin, especially with how much it's been dragged out during this series, I have enough to be satisfied here. The story was more about the team members and that's perfectly fine, especially when it's written well. I also thought the art was good on this issue, with Lins filling in for Kev Walker. I thought his art fit right in with the art we've been getting previously. All things considered, this was another hit for this series and I continue to look forward to what comes next.

A pretty strong way to end the run, in my opinion. This just really brought everything together very nicely. I especially liked Drax's sacrifice and how that was handled. I also thought that Peter's dialogue with Vicoria was well-written. Good stuff all around and I'm glad to say this series has officially stuck the landing.

Great stuff here in the conclusion of the first arc. I feel like I would be repeating myself aside from that comment, though. Segovia puts out some nice art and Wells provides a super engaging story, this time with more emotional moments, such as Alex grieving over the death of Madelyne. I love when a book can balance comedic moments and more serious/emotional moments well, and this was an awesome case of that. Plus, the line from Nanny on the last page was crazy.

Wells continues to do a great job handling all of these characters. The humor is great here, as are the dynamics between all of the characters. I also think this was the perfect way to involve this book in X of Swords without making it have a large impact on the bigger picture of Krakoa. Awesome stuff all around from this title once again.

A really nice interlude of sorts for X of Swords's second half. This issue and the previous felt a bit disconnected from the crossover, but I think that worked in the run's benefit. This was another great issue for the series and I love how terrible Wells writes Sinister to be.

This was the weakest issue of the series thus far, in my opinion, which is also really saying something about the book as a whole when I'm still giving this issue as high of a rating as I am. The stuff focused on Cyclops was super cool, though I think what stuck out to me the most here was when this book focused on Sabretooth and Emma Frost. I think it's just because I've been enjoying the mutants asserting themselves to humans.

This was just an absolutely action-packed opening issue for the series. This was a strong first issue that gives us enough to establish a new status-quo, while also leaving just enough out to create intriguing mysteries, such as what happened in El Paso and how Bruce managed to create this starship, of sorts, in the first place. Ottley's art here is absolutely fantastic, and he particularly shines in the crazy action scenes. As for Cates, this issue is just another case of him being great at writing. Awesome stuff.

This series just continues to be a lot of fun. Seeing what happened to Tony Stark and the X-Men in this universe was interesting to see, and I appreciated the, sort of, homage to the Dark Phoenix saga with the death of this universe's Cyclops. Once again, Ottley does amazing work with the action in this book. The story from Cates continues to be intriguing as well, and I like the use of Peter Parker in this world by making him a Spider-Hulk of sorts. Cates also sets Thunderbolt Ross as a cold, heartless villain as well. This book is just great.

A great issue that builds a lot of the story more before the conclusion of this arc in the next issue. The interaction between Ross and the alternate Bruce is great, and it really shows how messed up this reality has become. As for the main Bruce, I think the starship being almost a metaphor or representation of repressed trauma and emotions is fantastic. As for the art, I think it's well-documented at this point how much I love just about anything Ottley does. My opinion has not changed on that after reading this. Cates and Ottley continue to be a stellar duo on this run.

This series continues to improve with what I would say is the best issue so far. I think Ridley has created a very intriguing and thought-provoking inner-conflict for Jace with the introduction of the unknown antagonist. Plus, I found the political aspect of this book when it comes to Commissioner Becket's murder and everything that came out about him. Plus, Duce's art is nicely detailed and I think it's a good fit for this book. Hopefully this title is able to maintain this pace, as I think this is the best it's been since it started.

Another strong issue for this title. Ridley continues to tell an intriguing political mystery here. I think he's developing Jace's character nicely and I also like the little team that's beginning to form here with Vol and possibly Hadiyah. Jace doesn't necessarily need to have a "Bat-Family." In fact, I think it's better that he doesn't. I think an interesting contrast between him and Bruce would come with this difference. Moving back to the story itself, I'm interested to see how this all plays out, especially with Mayor Villanueva supposedly being the next target.

This was a really strong debut for this series. I wasn't sure what to think going into this after seeing the previews, but I knew I had to check it out with Ewing writing it AND with the "Immortal" tagline. As you can see by my score, I'm glad I did. I wasn't a big fan of Ewing bringing back the classic costume, but the story and the art here were both fantastic. Cóccolo's art is really good here and looks so smooth throughout. Moving back to Ewing, he does an outstanding job of using this issue to introduce Thor to new readers while also giving older readers enough to be entertained and interested. Overall, Ewing has definitely sold me on this series and gotten me to come along for the ride. I can't wait to see what's to come.

We're two-for-two with this series, as I really enjoyed this issue. It didn't quite pack the same punch as Issue 1, but it was still well-written and I really enjoyed reading Thor's thoughts throughout the entirety of this. The ending here was super interesting as well, and I'm very much looking forward to seeing what comes of this confrontation with Loki. Plus, Cóccolo's art is once again super clean and just fantastic overall. I'm loving this run so far.

This title continues to be really well-written and well-drawn with the third issue. Cóccolo's art is just so clean and it does nothing but make every page better. I hope he doesn't leave this title anytime soon. As for Ewing, he definitely has a case for being one of the best writers Marvel has right now. This run and his current X-Men: Red series have both been great, and I'm planning on checking out his current Venom run with Ram V. and Torunn Grønbekk very soon. Back to this issue, I think both Thor and Loki are written very nicely here. Thor is forced to challenge himself in order to solve Loki's riddle, which was entertaining, and I really enjoyed how this was done as way for Loki to help Thor prepare for Toranos. Plus, I'm super excited to see Storm coming into this. I mentioned Ewing's X-Men: Red run earlier, and he's written Storm fantastically in that. I have no doubts this will continue to be the case when she inevitably shows up.

Great issue to set up the Thor Corps in the next one. I was super excited about this team when I saw the cover for Issue 5 in the solicitations. I'm especially excited for Bill, as he's one of my favorite Marvel characters, if not my absolute favorite. I've been waiting for him to get some spotlight ever since Daniel Warren Johnson's fantastic miniseries with him in 2021. All things considered, I'm really looking forward to seeing this awesome team face Toranos in the next issue. Cóccolo's art made Toranos and everyone else just look great, as per usual. Plus, those last two pages were extremely interesting.

A really cool issue detailing an early adventure of Thor and Loki. I really liked the approach to the story with Loki re-telling the story to Thor in the present, along with the added touch of some of their current dialogue being incorporated into the story. Plus, I'm really interested by how this issue started and ended. The recent announcement of the Roxxon Thor storyline is definitely intriguing and I'm looking forward to seeing how this story continues to build in the next few issues.

A really good issue as we really start to delve into the Roxxon storyline a bit. It doesn't happen until the final few pages of the book, but everything before it was great and I continue to be excited for this storyline. The dialogue between Thor and Gaea was relatively long, but just about everything worked well. Ewing is the man.

Not quite as strong as the opening issue, but still a really good read. After joining the Quiet Council in Issue 1, we get a nice issue primarily focused on Hope and Sinister. This did a good job of making me, someone who hasn't read a lot of stories with her, like Hope's character and become even more glad she's on the council. Her interactions with Exodus, another character I don't know too much about, were some of the highlights of this issue. Plus, you have the always fun Sinister to top it all off.

This book continues to be fantastic. I'm not the biggest Destiny fan, but Gillen makes her a very compelling character here. Her love story with Mystique is well-done throughout this issue, and I really liked how she realized that Sinister cloned Moira. Along with Werneck's great art, Gillen writes a very intriguing story that continues to maintain my attention in this era of X-books.

What's crazy is that this is probably my least favorite issue of the series, but it's still really good. I don't really know much about Exodus, so I wasn't sure what to expect going into this. Luckily for me, Gillen was crafted a story that makes Exodus an interesting character by detailing his past with Apocalypse and Magneto. I'm still missing Lucas Werneck, but Bandini continues to do a nice job here. Overall, this was another good read from this series. Going into Issue 6, I'm facing a similar feeling as I did with this issue, in that I don't really know much about Sebastian Shaw. Hopefully the next issue has the same effect this one had, in making me more interested in the main character.

Much like the previous issue, Gillen writes an interesting story for a character I don't really know much about. This time, we have Sebastian Shaw being focused on here with a fairly compelling backstory and an encounter with a demon that makes him look like an absolute badass. I also enjoyed his judgment, as I have with most instances during Judgment Day. Before all of this, we're also treated to an intriguing interaction between Sinister and Destiny. Great stuff again from Gillen, plus the return of Werneck to this series is a very welcome one.

This was a nicely done flashback issue for Mystique and Destiny, featuring Sinister. Bandini once again proves to be a nice fill-in artist, despite me missing Lucas Werneck every time there’s a switch. Nonetheless, this was an enjoyable book. Mystique and Destiny are very nice together, and, more often than not, I enjoy reading Sinister (especially when Gillen is writing him). The ending page is pretty cool as well, as the Sins of Sinister event comes closer and closer.

The final issue of this series before Sins of Sinister does a great job of setting up intrigue going into the event. Werneck's art is, as usual, very nice here and he does particularly great work during the action sequences. As for Gillen's writing, it continues to be fantastic with the inner-narration of Charles Xavier. His internal discussion about the X-Men and mutants as a whole was just so interesting to read, and the final page is just crazy.

The fallout of Sins of Sinister is felt strongly here, and Gillen writes another great issue with this one. My favorite part of this had to be Storm and Emma's conversation, where Emma basically calls out Storm for not noticing anything being wrong five years into the timeline after she had come down on Charles, Exodus, Hope, and Emma. Colossus being Storm's proxy on the council is intriguing and I'm interested to see how this will (most likely) impact the events of the next issue, assuming it'll be the Colossus-centered one of the series.

I wasn't sure what to to expect with Doug being the main character this time around, but I really enjoyed this. While he is on the cover and he does narrate this throughout, he does take a bit of a backseat at times, with the Council's discussion and the fight between Ororo and Exodus being the prime examples. Nonetheless, this is the last issue of the series before Fall of X and it really feels like things are starting to fall apart for Krakoa. I know the next phase is Fall of X, but part of me hopes the mutants aren't done on Krakoa, as I really like the concept and I would like for it to continue for a long, long time.

The only stuff from Johnson I've read at this point are the three issues of Action Comics when it was the Kal-El Returns "crossover" with Son of Kal-El and the John Stewart backup stories in the current Hal Jordan series. So, I wasn't quite sure what to expect when this was announced. Luckily, this was a nicely-put-together story that generates a bunch of interest from me. Bruce's stuff is intriguing, and Johnson creates a sense of fear and anxiety throughout the book with him. Plus, we had the introduction of Charlene, who becomes a fairly compelling and interesting character in a short amount of time. While the story was engaging, the main reason I was convinced to read this was Nic Klein. I've loved Klein's art for a few years now, and he doesn't miss whatsoever here. I thought Thor was the perfect title for him, but he puts absolute greatness on every page here. While I liked all of his art here, he especially shines when drawing the gorier parts of this book. All things considered, I think this new run shows a lot of promise from the start and I really hope this type of quality can be maintained for however long this goes for.

Although this may not pack the punch that Issue 1 had, it's still great. Johnson said he was going to do horror with this run, and he knocks it out of the park here. There's such an ominous and uneasy feeling throughout this book that is only made better by Klein's incredible art. Religious cults have gained a more common presence in stories over the years, but when it's done right it's done right. This zombie-looking (Still not quite sure if they're straight-up zombies or just gnarly looking for a different reason) group of followers is really cool and I'm super excited to see what happens between them and Hulk in Issue 3. We're two-for-two with this series, and I have a feeling this is going to be a great run based off what we've gotten so far.

We're right back up in terms of quality for this series. I didn't dislike Issue 3 by any means, as you can see by my 8.5/10 review of it. However, I did feel as though the ongoing story took a bit of a backseat for pure action. This time around, the story is right back in the spotlight and Johnson writes it well. Charlie continues to become a compelling character here and I hope we learn more about her connection to Earl in Issue 5 or sometime in the future of this run. Speaking more about the art, I will always miss Nic Klein when he's not doing the art, but Foreman isn't bad whatsoever. Yes, he's not Nic Klein, but he's a pretty solid artist and I thought his style worked well with the story presented. Oh yeah, I didn't even mention how cool it was to see Man-Thing in this one.

Let's get this out of the way. It's so great to have Klein back on the art duties. Travel Foreman did a pretty solid job, in my opinion, but Klein was one of the initial selling points of this book for me. Of course, he did a fantastic job here, especially with that Hulk transformation towards the end. As for Johnson's story, it was super interesting and I continue to really enjoy what he's putting together here. The scenes with the unnamed guy getting the violent flashes in his mind were really well-done, in my opinion. Good stuff all around with this one and I'm really looking forward to seeing how this story plays out.

An issue full of awesome action with great art by Klein. I enjoyed Wilson's color in the majority of this, but I particularly enjoyed the pages where Klein did his own colors. I think it was a great way to create a distinction between the two different "realms." Plus, Johnson did a great job of including a nice amount of actual story here as well, aside from the action. I'm really looking forward to seeing where the next story arc goes, as I've been intrigued by what I've read from the solicitations. Hopefully Danny Earls does a good job of filling in for Klein on the art duties.

A well-written issue that just crosses the 9/10 threshold for me. This is really because of the impact of those final few pages. Rhodey getting arrested for infiltrating a Stark Unlimited building is one thing that Ton'y going to beat himself up over, but Rhodey being framed for murder is something even worse for Tony (also Rhodey, of course). It's also good to see Frigeri back and I'm interested by that new armor for Tony.

This series continues to be the best it's been. Frigeri delivers nice art once again and Duggan is writing a very compelling story here. He's done a great job of writing Tony so far, in my opinion. These last two issues, especially, have done a very effective job of making me care about his character. I'm hoping this level of quality continues, as I've really been enjoying this despite Iron Man never really being one of my favorite characters. I've always liked him, but I just would have never considered him a favorite.

This issue is a really good depiction of The Joker. On one hand, you have the main story. This was a pretty interesting setup for what's to come. Joker trying to take over the rest of the world is a solid premise and I'm looking forward to seeing how it plays out. What really solid this side of the book for me was the twist at the end with Joker coming out of the bathroom. Plus, the art is fantastic throughout. Moving onto the backup, I thought it was a pretty funny story that was able to be humorous while also maintaining Joker's darker traits. The art here very different from the main story, but it's nice as well. This book really fired on all fronts, on my opinion.

Another really good issue here. Introducing Red Hood into this series is a good idea, in my opinion, as I like the idea of him hunting down The Joker. He's the character that might have the most right to do so. As for the book's namesake, I'm very interested by his story as well. I enjoy the mystery Rosenberg is putting together here with the two Jokers and I also thought Harley's section of the book was well-written. As for this issue's backup story, I don't know that I enjoyed it as much as Issue 1's, but I still do really like the tone both stories have had so far.

Definitely my favorite issue of the series yet. I really liked the hard focus on Legion in this issue, as he's been my second favorite character across Spurrier's work on Nightcrawler, who takes my top spot. I think this issue did a great job of showcasing Legion's growth as a character, as well as his current state. I just really enjoyed this one and I hope that the series continues to stay at this level of quality as we deviate from Judgment Day and get back to the main story.

I thought this did a really nice job of depicting the grief felt by the Marauders, Bobby and Ororo especially, when they find out about Kate's death. Though she died two issues ago and we kind of skipped over it completely in the last one, I thought this did a great job of finally following up on that. This was the best issue yet.

Another issue for X of Swords that I really enjoyed. I understand that this can get heavy with the dialogue and that might turn some people off, but I thought it was great. Lolli's art was hit-or-miss throughout this for me, but Ayala's writing was really good, in my opinion. I'm not sure why Ayala's here instead of Gerry Duggan, but I'm not complaining. I found myself really invested in the struggle between Ororo and Shuri and I thought it was built well over the course of the issue. We're not even halfway through the crossover yet and it already feels as though it's going to have a big influence on the future of Krakoa as a whole.

A well-written issue here that really kicks the second half of this crossover into a higher gear. I really appreciated how this worked as an establishment and setup issue in terms of the champions of Krakoa and Arakko, respectively, meeting each other at a dinner party before going against each other. Plus, Caselli delivered with the art as per usual.

Three issues in and this series is still really good. Cappuccio's art continues to be absolutely stellar, and the story is still intriguing with the introduction of Hunter's Moon. There's a lot of action in this issue, but it's nicely balanced by the dialogue between Moon Knight and Hunter's Moon. One other aspect of this book I liked was the interaction towards the beginning between Mr. Knight and Reese. It was just nicely done and I liked that it established that vampires don't always equal evil.

This was another well-written issue for the series. This time, we're given a lot more backstory on Dr. Badr, which was very intriguing. Learning about his upbringing, how he became Hunter's Moon, and how his beliefs have been challenged recently was just great. Plus, Cappuccio's art was amazing as usual. The first six issues are now over and done with, and they were all very enjoyable.

Another really good issue for the series. Marc continues to be absolutely badass, and this is seen particularly in his confrontation with 8-Ball. I enjoyed seeing him fight with multiple different villains while attempting to learn more about Zodiac and, while I am really missing Alessandro Cappuccio's art here, Sabbatini's art isn't bad and it fits in with Moon Knight. I'm looking forward to where this Zodiac story goes, because so far it has just been very entertaining.

This was a really good issue, which is a little surprising due to this being a issue solely focused on Hunter’s Moon. That’s not to say I think he’s a bad character or anything, because I’ve actually really been enjoying him so far in this series. However, my “shock” comes from the fact that this is the first time Badr has been given the spotlight to himself for a whole issue and I just wasn’t sure whether or not his character would be capable of leading an issue. I should have known he’d be able to, especially with Jed MacKay writing the scripts. Like the rest of the run thus far, this was very well-written and is another showcase of why MacKay has quickly become one of my favorite current writers, if not my absolute favorite.

While the ending isn't quite what I expected, I'm very interested to see what happens with the alternate personalities finally being introduced in this run. Steven Grant and Jake Lockley are the biggest aspect of Moon Knight that was missing in this run, and I'm excited that they're finally here. Their absence didn't make the series bad by any means, but it's such a notable part of the character that I thought they would have appeared at this point. Nonetheless, another great issue from the incredible duo of MacKay and Cappuccio. As always, I need more Moon Knight content from them.

I was sitting on a solid 8.5 for what was a fun and well-written issue, but then we got Marc and Reese’s conversation and embrace at the end of the book. Over the course of this series, Reese has possibly become my favorite supporting character in this series and I’m glad to see her and Marc have a moment like that was just so heartwarming. MacKay and Cappuccio are magic.

Well, good lord, Moon Knight absolutely wrecked those two. I was expecting a little more fight from Nemean and Grand Mal, but this was insanely cool. Moon Knight being badass is an aspect of this series that MacKay has done incredibly well, and this reinforces that point. The ending of this interested me as well, as I'm looking forward to seeing where things go with Marc and Greer confronting the vampires.

Despite the minimal use of the book's titular character, this was a great issue primarily about Tigra. I hadn't read much of her material before this, but this issue alone got me invested in her character. Her relationship with her son, William, was very enjoyable. Her inner monologue was done very well also, and it reminds everyone just how good Jed MacKay is at writing (Alessandro Cappuccio's art was fantastic once again as well). I'm not 100% sure how I feel about Marc and Greer possibly being a couple quite yet, but I am a sucker for a good romance, so hopefully it turns out well. All in all, this was an awesome Tigra-focused issue.

It's crazy that we're almost 30 issues into this series and just continues to deliver with great quality books. This issue is no exception. It's been well-documented throughout my reviews of this run how much I love Alessandro Cappuccio's art, but Sabbatini does some of his best work on the title yet with this issue, in my opinion. It seems to me that, at times, he's trying to emulate Cappuccio's art into his work here, but I don't mind one bit as long as the art is good. Plus, I thought Marc going through the different dreams was very well-done and I'm glad MacKay didn't spend more time than needed on Marc trying to figure out who the big villain was. With the special over-sized #25 coming out soon, this series continues to keep me interested and invested.

An awesome issue here that really feels like it's the first part of a grand finale. Based off of this, we seem to be in for a ride with the upcoming final two issues of the series. I'm very glad to hear the story will continue, even if it's spiritually with Vengeance of the Moon Knight in January. Back to this issue itself, this was simply a great start to this storyline that really builds upon the characters featured in the series up until this point to create an entertaining story. I love Jed MacKay and I love Moon Knight.

This was a similar case for me as Moon Knight #15. I was ready to give this an 8.5, but then we got the final few pages with Marc, Marlene, and Reese. This series is two-for-two on its one-shots, with the Devil's Reign tie-in one-shot before this being absolutely fantastic. While this wasn't quite as good as that issue, this is still really good. The conflict Badr faces here is great and works well with his character thus far. Also, as much as I always miss Alessandro Cappuccio when he's not on the book, Sabbatini does a nice job here and, at times, it feels as though he's trying to impersonate Cappuccio a bit with his art here.

I'm really liking the voice Hickman has for Sunspot, which was very much on display here. I think it's evident that Hickman is having a good time writing these characters, which makes it all the more enjoyable for everyone reading. Plus, Reis's art is, once again, awesome. These two are a great fit for this book.

I was almost a little surprised at how good this ended up being. This was a pretty good issue centered around the DOX website that's been shown from Brisson's side of this title in the past. I thought all of that stuff was well-written, but what boosted this up to a 9/10 for me was Glob's story throughout this issue. I thought Brisson did a fantastic job with Glob here and, with the last few pages, he made me instantly care so much more about him. Great stuff here in one of the best issues of the series so far.

Another great issue for X of Swords with Brisson's final issue on this series. I think he did a nice job of building the tension in this story and conflict within Cypher. It's also awesome to have Reis back doing art. He absolutely killed it here, as per usual.

This was my favorite issue of this series yet, and I can’t believe how much I like this. That’s not to say I don’t like Poison Ivy or that I was expecting this run to be bad. I just didn’t really have any expectations in the first place. I haven’t read much of Poison Ivy prior to this book and she’s never been one of my favorite Batman villains. However, Wilson and Takara have put together a super compelling story here that is maintaining my interest and making me invested in Ivy’s character, particularly so with this issue where the sentimental side we saw in the previous issue is possibly growing stronger here.

The bulk of this issue was a fairly simple story, but when it's executed well it's executed well. This was a another great read for this miniseries turned maxiseries. Pamela standing up to George is just great, and Takara's art makes it all the better by adding a sense of hysteria to the scene. Plus, that page he did with the Green Man is just so damn cool. One thing I will say about this series is that it's taking a little bit to get to the actual point of everything, which could be why it was extended from 6 issues to 12. Either way, I'm still enjoying this.

I was sitting on an 8.5/10, or maybe even an 8.0/10 for this one. However, that ending was pretty crazy. That's if I understood everything correctly, though. I don't think of myself as being incredibly intelligent or anything, but I also like to think that I'm far from stupid. That said, this series is a little confusing for me at times. Not with the timelines, but more with the higher concepts. After reading this, I think the idea presented of the different levels of planetary societies is super intriguing and it gives way to a super ominous ending to this issue. I'm looking forward to what comes of it in the next issue.

Another really enjoyable issue. I particularly liked the stuff more in the "present" as Emma is approached by Charles and Magneto, as well as the introduction of the Quiet Council concept. The, sort of, information dump regarding Dominions in the future was interesting as well, but I haven't always found this series the most engaging when it focuses on said future. With one issue of this miniseries left and two left including House of X #6, all I hope is that the landing is stuck.

Another great issue for this series. This starts and ends by showcasing the different viewpoints Frank and the Archpriestess have, which is conveyed well through the ninjas who survived their encounter with Ares in the previous issue. Speaking of the Archpriestess, I enjoyed her conversation with Ares as well. The two of them both want Frank to be a certain way, but it seems like neither of them are going to get exactly what they want. As for Maria, her content in the series continues to maintain my interest, but I think she needs more development going forward for that to keep going. Overall, really entertaining stuff.

We only have one issue left for this miniseries and it continues to be awesome. I will say that I didn't quite enjoy this as much as the first two issues, but it was still great. Vecchio's art is still pretty good, but it's truly Ewing's writing where this shines the most. I think he balances Magneto and Storm well throughout this, and he also manages to write the both of them very well. All I can say is that I hope Issue 4 sticks the landing. Knowing Ewing, though, it definitely will.

The strongest issue of this series so far. I think this found a really nice balance between the more lighthearted moments and the deeper ones. The stakes still aren't really all that high here, but Rowell does an excellent job of making just about every character in this book compelling. Great stuff with this one.

I might change my mind on this score at some point, but I really enjoyed this one. The humor was really good here, and I liked the more serious moments as well. Waid being able to balance these tones well is something I’ve mentioned multiple times before with this run. Additionally, Sudžuka continues to do a really solid job with his art. I’m really liking this book right now, which really makes it a shame that Waid is leaving this series after the next issue.

A really good opening issue that sets the stage for this larger storyline. Gillen, once again, writes Sinister very well here. While everything here is good setup for the few months to follow this, my, personally, favorite parts of this were the brief, one-page panels that showed the rest of the world's heroes/villains getting taken down. Ben Grimm murdering the rest of the Fantastic Four in the way that he did and Scarlet Witch's death were my absolute favorites here. Gillen continues to rise up my list of favorite current writers with this issue, not to mention Lucas Werneck's always fantastic art.

A very interesting conclusion to the Sins of Sinister event. Sinister is one of my favorite X-Men characters, so I really enjoyed how he was written here (something Gillen has been fantastic at time and time again), but of course it was also bittersweet to see him lose. If you read my review for Immoral X-Men #2, you can probably guess that I'm glad Rasputin IV has traveled to current time. I'm really excited to see where her character goes from here. Truly an exciting time to be an X-fan.

I liked this even more than Issue 1. The second part Aaron & Kirk's story, while still on the shorter side, was a lot more interesting this time around and really got me invested. Pepose & Vitti's story was nice as well. I've been loving Vitti's art since I first saw it during the Sins of Sinister event, and it really fits in here. Finally, we have the third story from Ying & Cresta. This dragged things down a little bit for me until the very end. The majority of it felt very bland, but the ending was super ominous and came out of left field, for me. I was going to rate this 8.5, but it gets an extra 0.5 for that crazy ending. I don't know how it would happen, but some follow-up on that has some potential. Although, leaving things on that note is also a great way to end, leaving the reader to forever wonder what become of the boy.

As another user stated in their review, the ongoing storyline just felt clearer here. Everything just clicks in a way that the previous issue didn't. That's not to say it was bad, however, as I was a fan of it. However, this one is just better in my opinion and I like the direction this is going. Plus, the art we get from Perkins here is great once again. Of course, he shines when he's able to let loose and draw the crazier stuff going on in this book.

This was probably the fastest read so far for me, but it was still really good. I enjoyed seeing Ivy in this issue and I liked her interactions with Levi throughout. While I do rate this the same as Issue 2, this just might be my favorite issue yet. It's awesome when a series continues to get better and better, and that's what I hope to see from this run.

I continue to really enjoy this miniseries with the fourth installment. I liked the inclusion of Woodrue here, despite him not technically doing that much. Levi continues to be an enjoyable main character as well, but I really hope he gets some more development after his meeting with Alec in this issue. Aside from V's writing, I must mention the art from Perkins. I was really liking his art here, which is not a surprise after reading the previous three issues. I'm not sure how I feel about the Suicide Squad coming into the story after the final few pages of this, but I trust V. to make it enjoyable.

We're back up, when it comes to quality, in what might just be the best issue yet. Here, we get a lot more of Levi's backstory. We see his strained relationship with his family, which details more of how he was like with his family as well as his connection to the green in order to become its avatar. Along with Perkins' always great art, this was a well-written issue for V. and I hope we're back on track after the quality of this miniseries slightly dipped with the last two issues.

This was a strong issue for this series as we head into what was supposed to be the final issue. This does feel like the beginning of the end, but I think this is why we're getting an extra six issues labelled "Season Two" rather than just simply getting an extra six issues. I'm hooked to see how this all comes together in the next issue and I hope the great team of V. and Perkins can stick the landing before continuing things with Issues 11-16.

This wasn't quite the grand conclusion I had hoped for this run's "first season," but I don't think it's really meant to be that. It's still a really good issue, but I'm also interested by the setup we get for "Season Two." We have Levi's resurrection, the return of Woodrue, and Jennifer being fired from Prescot. I'm really interested to see where this story goes within the next six issues, and I can only hope it tops "Season One."

This was another strong issue for V. & Perkins's Swamp Thing run as we approach the final two issues. I really enjoyed Levi and Endeavor's conversation with one another throughout this issue, as I thought it was just well-written. Everything else was nice as well, and I'm glad to see Trinity once again after how much I enjoyed her in the previous issue. I'm looking forward to seeing how V. and Perkins wrap this series up with the next two issues.

Glad to say that I liked this even more than the first issue. Wildgoose's art continues to be great here and I think he only adds to this already immersive world. As for Wilson's story, I enjoyed this a lot. She was able to expand upon the characters introduced in previously and make the reader more invested in them. This is most clearly seen with Callum, as we learn more about his backstory and upbringing. Plus, I also thought the wolf hunt with Troth and Faran was nicely-written and very intriguing. While the ending didn't connect with me emotionally, I thought it was an unexpected way to close out the issue and I think it will give way to more great content in Issue 3 and beyond.

A really well-written issue. I thought Wilson handled the conflict between the orcs well, with the two differing sides debating whether or not to honor the treaty between them and the humans. Everything else here was super interesting as well. I enjoyed how Tara was written here and I also found the pages with the Vangol intriguing. Throughout the issue as a whole, it feels like big things are ahead and I'm really excited for it.

This was another great, character-driven issue. Wildgoose's art continues to be absolutely fantastic in this series, and Wilson does a really nice job of building Tara as a character by focusing on her in the present day as well as delving into her past. My biggest complaint about this...is that we have to wait until this summer for more. That's at least four months until we get to see more of these characters and more of this story. In all seriousness, this book has been a great read so far and I hope the team can recharge during this break and come back even stronger in the summer. I can't wait to read what's next.

Latorre's art was good here, but the highlight of this is how good the writing was. I didn't read King's previous Killing Time series with Batman, but I still really enjoyed this. This was a slow burn, in my opinion, that really paid off in the end. It's a little difficult for me to put into words exactly why I liked this, but I just did. Great writing + nice art = awesome book.

This was a strong first issue for this run. Klein's fantastic art fits right in with Thor and the realm of Asgard. As for the story itself, it was done extremely well. Thor's current state as All-Father is established well, along with the weight of his hammer and his relationship with Loki. As far as the stuff with Galactus and the Black Winter goes, I'm very interested by it. Thor killing Galactus is something that could prove to be entertaining, and the introduction of the Black Winter already establishes a mega-powerful threat. Thor becoming a herald is certainly intriguing as well, especially considering that he's just become the All-Father on Asgard. Overall, this was a very enjoyable beginning to Cates and Klein's run on Thor and the two of them already prove to be an awesome duo.

There are two more issues of this arc and it really feels like we're getting ready for the finale. Despite the issue's cover, I liked the fact that Sir decided to have a conversation with Thor, rather than go straight to fighting him. Speaking of which, I found their encounter powerful and very well-done, something Cates is no stranger to at this point. Loki's moment with Mjolnir was interesting and I'm hoping it's touched up on again in the future. As for Galactus, I think we could have spent a little more time on the first three of the four worlds, but it's completely understandable why it was just the one page. As for the fourth world, I appreciated the story told there, as it put more of a strain on the already-strained-relationship of Thor and Galactus. Klein's art throughout the book continues to be amazing, and the final page he draws for this book creates a truly ominous feeling with the arrival of the Black Winter.

A great ending to the first arc of this run. Thor killing Galactus was crazy, even though it was already said he would earlier in the run. Klein’s art on that splash page was insane. Plus, Thor turning the Black Winter into a black snowflake was cool, as well. Speaking of which, the vision Thor saw of his death was incredibly intriguing. Thanos melding the Infinity Stones into Mjolnir while also wielding that mysterious black gauntlet is extremely ominous, but also something I very much want to see come to fruition.

After the larger-scale arc of Devourer King, this was a nice change of pace for this run. As another user pointed out, Cates proves that he can shine with crazy big storylines AND smaller-scale, character-driven stories. Kuder as guest artist for this is nice, as well. I love Nic Klein’s art, but I think Kuder may actually be a better fit for this story. We can add this one to the ever-growing collection of examples showing how good of a writer Donny Cates is.

This issue sets up a fantastic premise for this run’s second big arc. For those unfamiliar with Donald Blake, this does a good job of establishing who he is and where he came from. Speaking of Blake, I loved the glimpse into his sadistic and sinister turn in the alternate world Thor travelled to. Nothing much here other than that; this was just great.

Another great issue for this arc. I had an uneasy feeling that Throg was gonna get steamrolled, but I’m very glad he didn’t. His fakeout death on the first page or so was well-done, also. I really enjoyed seeing him just take it to Donald with pure honor and bravery. Jane finding Odin to bring him into the fray is very interesting, also. I’m not sure if I like this arc more than Devourer King, but it’s still awesome.

Awesome penultimate issue for this arc that sets the stage for the finale well. Cates didn’t necessarily NEED that introduction for Odin, but it is appreciated and well-written. As for Donald, he’s been taking down a bunch of Asgardians and their allies, and now it’s coming back to bite him in the ass. Plus, Thor’s spirit inhabiting the Destroyer is just so cool and is a nice, sort of, callback to Donald being interested in the weapon earlier in the story. Great stuff once again.

With the start of this new arc, it's finally time Cates directly addresses Thor's problems with Mjolnir. I thought the explanation for it was a good one, as Thor becoming king doesn't leave much room for him to be the warrior that the hammer was created for. Bandini's art is good here and I think it fits in with the story currently. This run has done a great job of having art that fits the environment of the story being told, with Nic Klein and Aaron Kuder being on this title previously. I also don't mind a shorter arc whatsoever. Not every storyline has to be 6 or 8 issues, and this 3-issue one is currently off to a great start.

This was a great start to what's sure to be another great arc for this series. Although I did enjoy the other artists' work on this book in the past, Klein's art is a sight for sore eyes. After the fantastically-done conversation between Thor and Freyja not long ago in this title, I'm glad to see that Thor and Odin's relationship is likely being developed with this storyline. Thor seems to really be out for blood here, and it makes what's to come all the more exciting.

This is a great example of how to do a penultimate issue that generates excitement for the next part. Thor's allies coming together to help fight the God of Hammers was cool, and I particularly enjoyed Beta Ray Bill's speech. I always love to see Bill getting some love. While the God of Hammers showed their power in Issue 21, this time we see just how powerful Thor really is with the formation of that energy tornado. If he wasn't powerful enough, he now bears the Odin-Force. Odin's dialogue with Thor in his final moments was very nicely done after how the two of them have been with each other throughout the course of this series, and his sacrifice sets the stage for one hell of a fight in Issue 23.

Another great finale to another entertaining arc for Donny Cates and Nic Klein's Thor. The flashback with Thor and Odin was nice, and I appreciate the reference to it at the end of the issue. I don't really know what to say about this issue other than it was just really good. Nic Klein's art is killer and the ending is surely intriguing. Along with that, Donny Cates knows how to write a damn book.

A great second part of this crossover that finally answers what happened with Bruce in El Paso (despite not explaining HOW quite yet). That was the strongest part of this issue for me, but there was a lot more here to like as well. The meeting in the beginning with all of the heroes was well-done, especially with Tony, Steve, and Reed. Speaking of Tony, the final few pages of this book really kick this battle into high gear. Along with Hulk now under the impression he's still in a simulation, when he actually isn't, we also have Tony pulling up to the fight in what seems to be a Celestial-esque suit. Awesome stuff.

If you had told me a few months ago that I would be THIS into Transformers, I would have never believed you. However, thanks to the outstanding writer/artist that is Daniel Warren Johnson, here we are. The story was interesting and well written. Plus, of course, his art was absolutely fantastic here. Optimus Prime hitting a Burning Hammer of all things was truly insane and I couldn't believe my eyes. Johnson can work on any book and get me invested.

I have to start this off by saying that Shockwave hitting Optimus with a Tombstone Piledriver was my favorite part of this. As a whole, the action was really good here all around and Corona’s art continues to hit right in. Poor Cliffjumper, though.

This was an incredibly intriguing and well-written beginning to this miniseries. Hitch's art is pretty solid throughout and I can't say that I have many complaints about it, but I'm mainly here for the story. The way Hickman writes The Maker is fantastic and I enjoyed reading every word he said. All of the other characters were handled nicely as well, and I particularly enjoyed The Maker's interaction with Miles. This was a strong issue all around and I'm really interested to see where this goes.

Another super interesting issue that shifts the primary focus to Howard Stark. I feel similar to how I felt with the previous issue, so you can read my review on that for more. I will say that I'm really intrigued to learn more of what Hickman's putting together with this new universe. We're now halfway through this miniseries and I just hope it's able to stick the landing after a lot of set-up.

I may be overrating this a little bit, but this was another issue that I really enjoyed. It's the weakest one of the series thus far for me, but that's saying a lot when I'm giving it a 9/10. Everything here is just so simple and great at the same time. Hickman does a really good job of writing Peter as extremely likable when he's in the suit and out of it. I also found the ending of this to be very intriguing and well-executed. All things considered, I did see this more as a setup issue for things to come down the line, but I still really enjoyed it.

Oh, we are so back. Si Spurrier writing Nightcrawler as the main character is something I've been missing, and this debut issue is just great. Aside from Garbett's nice art, Spurrier continues to write Kurt very well. I liked the more humorous approach he took to this title, especially in the beginning with Kurt trying to be witty and trying to have banter. However, that doesn't drown out the more serious moments, such as when he's talking with Peter and he has the "mini-Nightcrawler" talking down to him in his head. Overall, I thought this was a really strong start and I hope the team is able to maintain this level of quality.

A great debut issue for the continuation of a series I really loved. One thing I pointed out in at least one review for an issue of the previous series was that MacKay did a fantastic job of building the supporting cast that surrounds Marc Spector. This issue is a really good example of that paying off, as it was easy for me to get invested in the story throughout this book, even without Marc or the new Moon Knight being shown very much. I'm really looking forward to seeing where this story goes. Also, I can't finish this review without mentioning how awesome Cappuccio's art is. What I'm about to say is not to say his art was bad in the last series whatsoever, because it was gorgeous. However, I looked at the first few pages of the last Moon Knight #1 yesterday and after reading this, it's evident how much Cappuccio has stepped up his game. Overall, this was a great way to kick off this new series and it really fired on all fronts.

When I opened up this issue, I was incredibly excited to see that Soldier was getting an issue focused on him. Now, after reading, I'm glad to say it didn't disappoint. MacKay continues to do a great job with Marc's supporting cast in this series, and I'm sure that will remain true when the next issue is, presumably, centered around Hunter's Moon. Back to this, however, I really liked the way MacKay wrote Soldier's inner-turmoil about Marc's death, as well as how Soldier was really stepping up to combat this new Moon Knight. On top of that, Cappuccio, once again, puts out some beautiful art.

Another really good issue for the series. With the last three issues focusing on Reese, Tigra, and Soldier, respectively, I knew going in that this would be centered around Hunter's Moon. That said, this was another really good issue for this series. MacKay continues to do a really nice job writing Tigra, and I really liked how he delved into Hunter's Moon's real feelings and animosity towards the new Moon Knight. Speaking of which, the reveal of who that is is such a deep cut and I really appreciate that. Additionally, Cappuccino draws everything beautifully, as per usual. All things considered, this was another awesome read from MacKay & Cappuccio.

I didn't think 8-Ball would be getting an issue focused on him since this was billed as a Blood Hunt tie-in, but I'm very glad it was. Yes, we got a lot of Tigra and Hunter's Moon going against The Shroud and setting up their involvement in Blood Hunt. However, we still got a good amount of focus on 8-Ball and I'm super glad he seems to be getting a redemption arc. I'm really looking forward to seeing where his character goes. Oh yeah, and Cappuccio's art was fantastic as always.

A really nice issue that just gets to that 9.0/10 for me. I think Pramanik did a super solid job of filling in for Alessandro Cappuccio here and I think he could be a really nice rotating artist for this run. As for MacKay, he continues to do an awesome job with just about all of the characters here. I really like how he handled Reese here, especially, as he's made her one of the best characters of his run on Moon Knight. The final few pages with her returning to the apartment were just great, and part of the reason this got pushed to a 9.0/10 for me.

The return of Ewing to this title brings its best issue yet, in my opinion. The best part of this is the reveal with Meridius. I really enjoy how Ewing writes him and I'm definitely looking forward to what comes next with him and Eddie. It's just a shame that we'll probably have to wait until Issue 8 to get back to this. I hope Ram V.'s story with Dylan picks up with these next two issues.

Another really strong issue from Ewing here. I really enjoyed seeing how Eddie got to certain points from the very beginning of this run, as well as the order he did everything in. I'm just really liking what Ewing is cooking up here and I have a feeling his side of this series hasn't even gotten as good as its going to get quite yet.

A really fun issue here that I'm partially giving a 9/10 because of how well I think Ewing writes Doom. Davila's art is pretty good for the most part, but I can't stress enough how greatly I think Doom was handled here. That line about the easy-bake oven was seriously fantastic and I'm really looking forward to more of Doom and Eddie in the next issue. Great stuff all around with this one.

A great over-sized issue here where we get a lot more of Ewing writing Doom excellently after he previously did so in the last issue. This got incredibly complicated throughout, in my opinion, but Ewing was able to make everything fairly understandable as the story went on. I knew this would end with the moment we saw previously in Issue 22 of Doom talking to Flexo, but I still really enjoyed it when it ended up happening. I must say I am a little bummed that we won't get Ewing back on this series for the next three issues, at least, but I remain hopeful that Grønbekk will give us some interesting content until Ewing returns.

This was a pretty strong and thought-provoking opening issue for this miniseries. Yes, the mutants have gained the ability to resurrect their own, but I like the different approach to that concept that Spurrier’s taken with Nightcrawler. This different perspective on Krakoan resurrection and how it's created a devalorization of life among the mutants is really intriguing to read. Plus, Quinn's art throughout is rock solid. I particularly enjoy the way he draws Nightcrawler, although I may be a bit biased since Nightcrawler has one of my favorite designs among the mutants. Either way, I thought this was just a great debut issue that definitely left me wanting more in a good way.

Another great issue here. Spurrier has a really interesting cast of characters he's working with here, and I believe he's using them all well. Nightcrawler and Legion are the two best, in my opinion. I think their interactions throughout this issue were well-written, and I especially enjoyed Nightcrawler talking to Legion about their names. Really good stuff here once again.

A really good start to this series here. I must say that I enjoyed the first story more than the second, though. The first story was super intriguing and I really liked what was being set up. Plus, Kubert's art was absolutely fantastic throughout. As for the second half of the book, I think it started off really good, dipped in quality a bit towards the middle, but still ended strong with Omega Red and Dracula. Bogdaknovic's art was pretty solid as well. I'm interested to see how both stories develop and, possibly, come together in the issues that follow.

Even better than the last issue. I really loved the way Beast's turn on Wolverine was handled here, especially by telling the story out of chronological order, as Percy continues to do a great job with the character. I have a really good feeling about this story and I hope I'm not wrong.

Another strong issue for the series. This was a bit of a quicker read with Wolverine's relatively simplistic inner monologue, but everything was still done really well here, in my opinion. This is definitely the best this series has been since the first issue, and I hope it stays that way.

Really good, once again. This was similar to the last issue, in terms of it's pacing and Wolverine's inner monologue, but it was still very enjoyable. I thought this was a nice way to have Wolverine get his memories back and I also think Ryp's art meshed well with the story as a whole. This had a pretty cool ending, as well, and I'm happy to see Bannister coming back into the fold.

A super cool issue. This didn't feature as much dialogue as past issues, but it works nicely. Percy is really writing this Beast stuff well and I just hope it ends up sticking the landing, especially considering that this has been built to since the first few issues or so.

Another awesome read. A bit of a spoiler here, but I loved the Beasts plotting to overthrow "Beast Prime," just for them to get taken out by the Wolverine clones. As for the backup story, it was fine, but I didn't really need it. Ultimately harmless, but the main story is still great.

Wow. The best issue for this series since the Weapons of X storyline, in my opinion. I really liked Wolverine's paranoia towards the second half of this, and that ending was absolutely crazy. I second Texas VII's sentiments about it. I'm really looking forward to seeing how this goes.

While this was a pretty dense issue that took me longer to read than I usually take for a comic, I did think this was very, very good. I do think that King needs to adjust Diana's dialogue a little bit, in terms of the way she puts words together when she speaks sometimes, if that makes sense. Otherwise, I did really like how she was written overall. Hopefully King tones donw the narration a bit going forward, as well. Gripes aside, this was a great debut issue that dealt with extremely relevant topics nicely.

Although this was still a bit wordy, I ended up really enjoying this by the end. Sampere does an awesome job with the art, and I found King's story to be well-written once more. I still have similar complaints about this issue that I had with the previous, in terms of Diana's dialogue and the amount of narration, but I can't deny that the story is good. I particularly enjoyed that the stories from the past and present complimented one another nicely. I didn't have a strong opinion on the backup, but I did really like Georgiev's art.

Before I say anything, that "sup" joke from Superman was incredible. Anyways, this was the best issue in a while. It felt great to not have the Sovereign narrating me into oblivion, though I'm pretty sure it will return with the next issue. Also, while March did a solid job as the fill-in artist, I'm definitely ready for Daniel Sampere to come back.

A great, action-packed finale for this miniseries that still leaves enough room for deeper character moments as well. The action here was just awesome, with Johnson's art perfectly fitting in. Plus, I found the story to be well-balanced and nicely written. I liked that this had a bit of an open-ended conclusion, in that the door is open to explore this world and its characters further. This was a really good miniseries overall and I'd definitely be interested in a future installment.

A strong start to this crossover. This really feels like something big, and that feeling is consistent throughout this issue. I continue to really enjoy how Apocalypse has been written in Dawn of X so far as well especially, whether it's under Hickman in the main X-Men title or by Howard over in Excalibur. There are a lot of interesting things set up here with Apocalypse and other characters as well, such as Archangel and Cyclops. Also, that kill from the High Summoner was crazy and only made better by Larraz's fantastic art.

The middle chapter of this crossover is a lot of setup, but it's damn good setup. Depicted with some beautiful art, Hickman and Howard really begin to set bigger things in motion following the first half of this, in which we saw everyone get their swords to get to this point. Great stuff all around with this issue.

This was the best issue of the series so far. Really nice art from Cassara once again here. When it comes to Percy's writing, I really liked the conversation between Jean and Beast. Plus, I enjoyed the dynamic between Wolverine and Kid Omega even more this time around. I'm looking forward to what comes next with the X-Force team now officially together.

While I do miss Joshua Cassara doing the art, Segovia does a pretty solid job here. That said, though, Percy's writing is where this issue shines. I really like the dark turn Beast is starting to take here and I'm really interested to see how that develops in this run. I think this issue did a great job of introducing that and building it up throughout. I'm almost surprised at how much I'm enjoying this series so far.

I wasn't the biggest fan of Bazaldua's art here, especially with Joshua Cassara and Stephen Segovia both previously doing art for this series, but I really liked Percy's story. I thought it was a nice Domino-centered issue with a well-written interaction with Colossus. I also wanted to add really quickly that, honestly, the target in Toronto probably deserved to get shot for getting a pineapple-and-bacon deep dish pizza.

This was really more of a continuation of the latest Wolverine issue than an issue of X-Force. That said, though, I really enjoyed this. As with Wolverine #6, Percy's voice for Logan is great here and I also continue to enjoy Solem after he was introduced in that aforementioned issue. Their dynamic was fun and enjoyable throughout this. Also, Bogdanovic's art was awesome, once again. I really enjoyed the more ambiguous ending to this, as well. I'm fully expecting it not to stay that way by the end of the event, though, which is perfectly fine.

Definitely a strong start to Hickman's X-Men run after completely changing the mutant status quo with HoX/PoX. While I do agree with the belief that this was a bit crammed at times, I think a large majority of what we got here, if not everything we got here, was written very well. I especially liked how Cyclops was written throughout this issue and I think it was good to focus more on him in the first issue of the series. It also helps when you have Yu putting out fantastic art on just about every single page of this.

Issue 2 is another great one under Hickman and Yu. The latter's art is awesome as usual, and I really enjoyed how he drew The Summoner. The former gives us an entertaining, family-oriented story with Cyclops, Cable, and Prestige. I really enjoyed the dynamic the three of them had and the way Hickman wrote their interactions. Everything just felt really authentic. The ending with Apocalypse was really cool as well.

A great issue here that sets up an incredibly interesting story. I think the trio going into the vault is cool and I also think Cyclops continues to be handled really well under Hickman. I’ve just really been enjoying what he’s done with him since the first issue. One other point I wanted to make was about the art. While I was really enjoying Leinil Francis Yu’s art in the previous four issues, Silva does a nice job as well and I think what he gave us here fits well with the story.

Hickman handles Magneto fantastically here, and his writing of him is definitely what makes this issue so good. Yu's art is once again great, but Magnto was on a different level here and I loved just about every page he was on. The Empyre event definitely didn't weigh this issue or the previous one down and I'm very glad about that.

Hickman does a great job at writing interesting stories and Yu does a great job at drawing characters. What's new? In all seriousness, this is great. Yes, it's very much an information dump as we head into the large-scale X of Swords crossover, but it's written well enough to be worth the read. The Summoner has been a super mysterious and intriguing character since his first appearance and I'm really glad we got to see a bit of his origin. X of Swords is looking good already with this prelude.

Another great issue as we approach the last issue of the series. Mystique has been an incredibly compelling character since House of X & Powers of X, and this only strengthened that. The coldness from Charles and Erik was done so damn well. Mobili also drew everything very nicely throughout.

This was the best issue of Duggan's X-Men run yet. As we did with Issue 6, we're delving a little more into the ongoing storyline here and it's pretty interesting. Plus, we have some good character moments for Scott. This is all capped off by Larraz's stellar art. Captain Krakoa's design is pretty cool, also.

I really hope this book can keep up its current pace, because this is probably the best issue of the series thus far. The book as a whole was intriguing, but things really kicked into high gear when Scott and Alex started arguing. The fight against Perro was pretty cool, and Cassara's art only made it better. On top of that, the ending was straight-up crazy with the reveal of Laura's body in the Vault.

Another strong issue for this run. Cassara continues to kill it on the art duties, and Duggan writes a compelling story with Forge inside the Vault. Darwin's cameo was nice, but I also really enjoyed the reunion of Synch and Laura after their time in the Vault together. That scene is absolutely nailed here, which is what solidifies this as a 9.0 for me.

This was a step-up from the previous issue, both in the story and the art. Neither were bad at all in Issue 1, but they just felt better here. Aside from Caselli’s awesome art, which especially shines towards the end with Storm and Vulcan, the story here continues to be interesting. Ewing makes good use out of most, if not all, of the main characters without making them feel like afterthoughts. I’m looking forward to seeing where Vulcan’s story goes.

We're finally diving more into Abigail Brand with this storyline, and I thought this was super interesting. This wasn't my favorite issue of the series, but it's still very well-written and well-illustrated. Ewing shows a lot of depth in this story, and, after doing great in the previous issue, Musabekov cements himself as a nice addition to this run. I agree with what another user stated in their review, in that Musabekov should be a rotating artist with Stefano Caselli. I'm looking forward to what comes of this current story.

Was this a great issue? Yes. Do I still absolutely love this series? Yes. Like Immortal X-Men #11 a week prior, the events of Sins of Sinister are felt here with Charles and Ororo's heated conversation. While I really enjoyed that section of the book, I can't believe Charles interrupted that date at the beginning. There was some chemistry there and I really hope this is something explored further sometime soon. The ending of this book is interesting as well and I'm wondering where things go with Ironfire showing up at the end.

I enjoyed the previous issue and it was another really good read, but it wasn't up to the standards set by the rest of the series, in my opinion. However, with Issue 13, we're right back up in 9-10 territory when it comes to overall quality. The bulk of this book is Genesis basically talking down to the Great Ring because of their recent changes in ideology, and I loved it. The Annihilation Staff is a nice touch to her character as well and I'm interested to see what comes of its involvement here. The art of this book is solid as well, not quite Stefano Caselli, but at least we still get him on covers. The next three issues are, currently, supposed to have Yıldıray Çınar on the art duties. Everything I've seen of his is good, so hopefully things work out in that respect. Overall, I'm really looking forward to how this current storyline progresses.

Another great entry for this title. As another user stated in their review, it feels like this war has been brewing for a while. Ewing doesn't let the implications from Fall of X hinder the ongoing story of this series, despite the inclusion of certain elements (Example: Roberto telling Storm about what happened at the Hellfire Gala). The war that begins here is great. The moment with Isca is fantastic and I liked that she was present for this story, even if it's just for that one page. In general, I thought all of the characters were written well and I also thought this issue had some nice character moments for Storm, Lodus Logos, and even Kobak. Overall, this was another case of me really enjoying X-Men: Red and I'm really looking forward to seeing how everything unfolds with the war on Arakko.

A truly fantastic issue that gives Storm a very tough decision when it comes to Uranos. I'm very much looking forward to finding out what she does. As for everything else, Ewing just does such a great job putting together an interesting and engaging story. This really feels like it's a big deal as we approach the end of the series. I was close to giving this a 9.5/10 since I was debating that score or a 9.0/10, but I didn't have any strong feelings about the backup story with Sunspot. It wasn't bad, but I don't think it was needed either. I only want a backup story if it's going to tie-in with the main story and/or if it's just really good.

Man, if it wasn't for Dragotta's art in this issue, I probably would have given this a 10. Don't get me wrong, the art in this book isn't the worst I've ever seen, but I just was not a huge fan of it here. There were some sections I liked, but there were others where things just looked wonky. One example of this is when Peter yells at Norman to leave, and his face looks too spaced out. I feel as though even John Romita Jr. would have done this more justice. However, the story from Wells here is absolutely fantastic. A.X.E. was a fantastic event, and the tie-ins I did great were enjoyable as well. This issue is no exception. This issue is jam-packed with heart and emotion, as it's full of heartfelt moments for Spider-Man fans. Overall, this Judgment Day issue was a hit (aside from the art), in my opinion.

Another awesome issue here in what I would consider the best one yet. MacKay continues to establish The Ashen Combine very nicely here, and I really enjoyed the interaction with Sam, T'Challa, and The Impossible City. The ending of it was a great ending rally for the penultimate issue of this current story arc. I also particularly enjoyed the interactions between Carol and Lord Ennui. Ennui is probably the most interesting of this new group, although all of the members are cool in their own, respective, rights. Along with the story, Fiorelli's art is pretty good here and I think he'd make a great rotating artist for this run with C.F. Villa. All things considered, I loved this issue and it's another example of Jed MacKay being one of the best writers at Marvel right now, if not THE best.

Yeah, this was super cool. The bulk of this is somewhat of a flash-forward projected into Scarlet Witch's mind by Nightmare and it's incredibly well-done. MacKay is just fantastic once again here, as he establishes a huge threat and builds the heroes up to their mightiest in order to win, only for them to, seemingly, lose. However, we don't get to see the end since Wanda becomes aware of Nightmare's presence. Either way, this was a really strong start to this new arc in one of the best issues of the series yet, in my opinion.

The best issue yet. Zdarsky continues to do a fantastic job here. I don't know that this story is anything particularly revolutionary or unique, but the execution of it all is what makes it great. He does a really nice job with Steve's character, and I found Thor's arrival absolutely epic. It definitely helps when you have Acuña making everything look awesome.

The best issue of this arc yet. Batman brings out the Zur-En-Arrh persona to fight Failsafe alongside Robin. Jimenez does great once again, especially during the action sequences. His work feels smooth and rough at the same time, I absolutely love it. As for Zdarsky's scripts, he's able to heighten the emotional investment here when the main Batman finally takes over again. I'm sure most know that Bruce views Tim and the other Robins as his children, but it's nice to see him actually say it out loud (even though it's technically in his subconscious in this instance). The arrival of Superman on the final page of the main story is awesome, as well. The way it's written by Zdarsky and the way Jimenez draws the scene creates a ominous feeling that is just great. As for the backup, it continues to be great as well. Selina confronting Oswald after he faked his death was a really interesting scene. It feels like Oswald is ready to move on for the most part, while also displaying some lingering villainous outlooks and qualities. Great stuff all around.

Another fantastic read from this series with the main story AND the new backup story. Starting with the main story, we, somewhat, get what we got with Failsafe in #126. This time, Failsafe takes on the Justice League instead of the Bat-Family. Failsafe's takedowns for Superman and Black Canary were my favorites of the sequence. As for the titular character, this issue was a great showcase of his dedication to "the mission." Despite being badly wounded, Bruce does everything in his power to make sure the people around him are safe and/or taken care of. In the final pages, Bruce is taken to Atlantis by Aquaman, in which the stage is set for an epic showdown between Batman and Failsafe. Quickly moving to the backup, this was done very well, in my opinion. Romero's art really adds to the tension and uneasiness built with the story itself. The book continues to be fantastic.

This was an awesome finale to the first arc of Zdarsky's run on Batman. Like another user said, Batman literally falling back to Earth from space is an absolutely crazy idea in theory. However, Zdarsky makes it work, and he does so to great effect. If there's one thing Zdarsky has captured greatly over the course of these first six issues, it's Bruce's dedication to what he's phrased as "the mission." The man literally crashes down to Earth from the moon and picks himself back up to face Failsafe. Plus, Zdarsky tugs at the heartstrings a bit by having Tim, seemingly, lose Bruce right in front of his eyes. Speaking of which, the final page of the main story provokes many questions and a lot of intrigue surrounding where exactly Bruce ended up. While I do wish there was a little more closure here, this was still a satisfying finale to this arc and I really hope we're able to revisit this in some way in the near future. In this book's backup story, we get the conclusion of the Zur-En-Arrh: Year One three-part-arc that remains fantastic. I said it in my reviews of #128 and #129, but I'll say it here as well. Leonardo Romero's art just goes so incredibly well with this story. As for the story itself, it's very well-done and tells a great story of restraint. Amazing stuff from this run once again.

I loved the high-stakes action of the previous issue, but, sometimes, slower issues are just better. I really loved the stuff with Bruce and his clone, and I’m also super interested in the direction this series is going. Gotham War and Joker: Year One were weaker points of this run for me, but I’m really loving this title again like I was with the first Failsafe arc. Hopefully Absolute Power doesn’t get in the way of that.

I thought this was a great read. Moore does a really nice job with his scripts, in my opinion. He writes everyone well here and I liked the added layer to Joker's origin here. Of course, the story of Joker formerly being Red Hood and falling into a vat of chemicals was well-established before this, but I think the additional story aspect of Joker's family and what led him to taking that job as Red Hood in the first place just makes it better. Plus, Bolland does a fantastic job depicting everything. At first, I read the Deluxe Edition I have from 2008. I didn't find the colors bad or anything, but reading the story with the original coloring by John Higgins makes this, as a whole, so much better. So, I'd strongly recommend you to read this with Higgins's original coloring, whether it's an original copy or a collection featuring said colorist.

A great conclusion to this miniseries, in my opinion. I pretty much feel the same about this as I felt about the last two issues. I think I could have done without the Barbara and Jason romance aspect of this, but everything else worked very well. Fabok delivered fantastic art and Johns built upon Killing Joke in a super intriguing way. All things considered, I thought this was a spectacular miniseries from a really good team.

Finally reviewing the book whose cover my (current) profile picture came from. Luckily, it's a fantastic read. Johnson absolutely kills it with his art. Every page is so detailed and enthralling. I also was not expecting to see Bill hit the Rainmaker, but I loved it. The story he puts together, though, continues to be compelling and just great. I like the dynamic between Bill and Skurge, as their interactions with each other were a ton of fun throughout this. Along with that, the emotional weight of Bill's journey is still felt hard here. I think Johnson has found a nice voice for Bill and I think this is just an awesome book overall.

We're at the midway point of this miniseries now and it continues to be awesome. I've gushed a bit about Johnson's art and his writing in the past two issues, and those sentiments still remain here. I especially liked the interaction between Bill and Skutt. The first half of the book, we get some nice, character-driven writing and in the next, we get a bunch of engaging, well-drawn action. Johnson can really do it all.

We're one issue away from the finale and this was another great read. I could, generally, talk about Johnson's writing and art, but I would just be repeating myself from my reviews of the previous three issues. What I can say about this one, specifically, is that I liked how Johnson went through Bill's past and I think he did an effective job of building and developing the relationship between Bill and Skutt.

I wasn’t sure if I was gonna pick this one up or not since I wasn’t reading Devil’s Reign at the time, but I saw it was written by MacKay so I decided to give it a shot. After reading, I definitely made the right choice. This fits right in with the current Moon Knight series, and could have totally been an issue of it. However, I think a smart move was made by making this a one-shot and letting Hunter’s Moon take center stage in Moon Knight #8. While the art is a little bit lacking at times for me, it’s still pretty good. Marc continues to be an absolute badass, and I love how MacKay explained how Marc got into prison in the first place. This issue was just so damn good.

Good LORD what a final page. Johnson's art continues to shine here, and it isn't even just the fantastic wrestling scenes. Not even fives pages into the book, and he draws an incredibly detailed face-shot of Willard. Talking more about the story itself, the emotional stakes are kicked up a bunch by what is a fantastic reveal on the final page, in which we learn that Lona's dad is Cobrasun. I wasn't sure if Johnson would be making wrestling pre-determined or fully-real in this book, which is why I wasn't sure how to feel about Cobrasun feeling guilt over Yua's death. This issue makes it all the more heartbreaking, and I'm already loving this miniseries.

This book just continues to be fantastic. Lona and Cobrasun take out the solidly built-up antagonists from the previous issue, and their next opponents are already established with even higher stakes. In this issue's main match, Johnson captures some of the best parts of pro-wrestling matches with the action, the suspense, and the emotions. Moving on to the issue's second match, I wasn't expecting Uncle Blood to show up, but it makes sense after it was shown that Lona and Cobrasun weren't the only team from Earth. As for their opponents, Fyso have been built a bit previously in the series, and now they've really given Lona and Cobrasun another strong reason to fight, aside from them trying to get Yuo back. The tease of a hardcore match on the final page was awesome also, and it sets the stage for what could possibly be the best match yet in the next issue.

Another fantastic issue that shows just how violent wrestling can get. Once again, Johnson's art is absolutely stunning in this issue and he makes every move look so impactful. Johnson is able to expertly blend insane action with emotional stories to show what makes wrestling fans love it, including myself. Lona finding out that her dad is Cobrasun was very well-done and I liked that it played into the match's outcome, in turn giving the heels the unexpected win in the tournament. I'm in love with this miniseries.

The penultimate issue of this miniseries continues the trend of awesome reads. If things couldn't get any bigger, Lona and Cobrasun now have to literally wrestle God. The flashbacks into Cobrasun's past with Yuo were nice to see, as it strengthens our emotional investment into the story of him trying to get his wife back. This has just been an extremely well-written run so far, paired with some fantastic art.

A really fun issue with a bit of a crazy ending, in my opinion. I've been loving this series and this issue was no different. I enjoyed the dynamic between Wyn and Maria here, as I think Hickman wrote both characters well. This is very much a self-contained story with a bit of overarching plot sprinkled in, and it's my favorite issue yet.

A truly awesome start to this series. This issue throws you right into the X-Men's new status quo, but it still manages to catch you up to speed without "formally" introducing multiple different concepts. It's also filled with good character moments. Scott's confrontation with the Fantastic Four, Reed especially, was a highlight for sure. Franklin being a mutant is definitely something that can make for an interesting storyline down the line. Additionally, Magneto was written masterfully here. The ending line of this issue was just so damn good. Loved this overall.

Once again, House of X rules. This was a great follow-up to the madness that was Issue 4. The resurrection process is pretty cool, and bringing back Goldballs of all people and making him actually important in the process is wild. Additionally, EVERY mutant being accepted onto Krakoa is a super intriguing idea that definitely creates the potential for multiple interesting stories. All things considered, this was another great issue and I'm really looking forward to seeing how all of this wraps up.

A great ending to a fantastic miniseries. I know this whole thing isn't quite over yet with Powers of X #6 coming after this, but this does feel like the beginning of a new age in the best way possible. Larraz kills it once again with his art, and Hickman instills a sense of hope by this issue's final few pages. Just really great stuff here all around.

Not really what I was expecting, but still an awesome issue. I particularly loved how Thor beat Toranos here. Cóccolo also continues to put out some fantastic art in this issue. I don't really have much to say about this one, other than that I really enjoyed it and that Ewing is definitely one of the best writers at Marvel right now, if not the very best.

I grew to love Sinister as a villain in Zeb Wells' Hellions, and Gillen does him justice here. Going through this issue, mostly, from his point-of-view was a lot of fun, with one of the highlights being him being wrong on how the votes for Hope would go. Speaking of Hope, I think she's a great addition to the Quiet Council, and I really enjoyed all of the stuff with them as well. Going back to Sinister, the ending is just fantastic and perfect for him. All things considered, this was a really strong start to this series and shows a lot of promise for Destiny of X.

We have another hit issue with this series' fourth issue. The Sinister content continues to be highly entertaining, and the focus on Emma Frost this time around is very well-done. While I do miss Lucas Werneck's art here, Bandini isn't a bad fill-in whatsoever. I've been loving this series so far and Issue 4 doesn't disappoint whatsoever. I can only hope that the Judgment Day crossover doesn't hinder this book's quality, although I doubt it will considering it's also headed by Gillen.

Good lord, I love this book. Sinister's ten attempts to kill the Quiet Council were very entertaining to read, with credit going to the fantastic duo of Kieron Gillen on the scripts and Lucas Werneck on the art. Gillen has consistently made Sinister a very fun and interesting character throughout this series, while Werneck brings so much detail and intricacy to his pages. Great stuff once again from this series.

The best issue of the series yet, in my opinion. I absolutely loved this. Klein's art is stellar, as per usual. A good chunk of this is action, and Klein makes everything look fantastic. Plus, Johnson's story continues to be incredibly interesting. I'm really looking forward to seeing what comes of Hulk now being somewhat "possessed" after killing the creature that I'm assuming Harold once was. I just can't get enough of this series.

This started off kind of slow for me, but it really picked up as it continued. I wasn't incredibly into the first half of this issue with Orchis, but I feel as though it's laying groundwork for the rest of the miniseries. Once the attention turned to Charles, Erik, and Moira, it was so incredibly into this. What particularly stands out here is the ending, though. That was an insane way to end this issue and it definitely left me chomping at the bit for more.

I feel similar here to how I felt with the previous issue. I was super into the stuff with the mutants, and not as into the stuff with Orchis. Luckily for this issue, the mutant stuff was absolutely excellent. Had it not been for the Orchis stuff, this might have been a 10/10 for me. That said, I do feel as though the Orchis stuff is laying groundwork for something that will be paid off later. I just hope that that side of things gets more interesting. Either way, this was a lot of great stuff, particularly the Quiet Council meeting and Mystique making sure the vote went in her and Destiny's favor.

Once again, a fantastic issue. It's cool to see Silva and Hickman working together here after Powers of X, and Silva makes everything look really good. As for the story, of course it was good. I was little more interested in the Orchis stuff here, but this issue was stronger when focused on the mutants, in my opinion. The way Cypher's section ended was especially awesome. All things considered, though, every issue of this book has been full of awesome stuff. Hopefully the next issue sticks the landing.

Very well-done second issue. This is the one that got me hooked on this series. Despite not having much focus on Reese, there was enough here that showed her still adjusting and developing to her condition. As for Marc, he was absolutely fantastic in this issue. This issue works well with the previous, in that in continues to introduce new readers, and remind returning ones, just who Moon Knight really is. The look into Marc's mind was just great, and the tease at the end was good as well. Plus, Cappuccio once again does the lord's work with his art.

This was another really strong issue for this series. This issue was basically two halves going back and forth, with one being Marc's therapy session and the other being him investigating and trying to find Soldier. Luckily, both of these were great and very interesting. The therapy sections of this book have all been very well-written, and this was no exception. MacKay has really been exploring Marc's character deeply and effectively, which is also seen in the aforementioned second half. Learning Soldier used to work for Hydra was interesting and sets up an intriguing story for him later on. Plus, the twist of Terry being Zodiac was great and we have a good villain set up for the future of this run.

Time after time, I just continue to absolutely love this series. The new building for the Midnight Mission is such a weird idea, but it makes complete sense and it’s just great. Also, it seems that Dr. Sterman is acting a little weird after her encounter with Zodiac at the end of Issue 7. I’m looking forward to seeing where that part of the plot goes, along with the entire Zodiac storyline goes as a whole.

If you’ve read any of my previous reviews for this series, you should already know how glad I am to see Cappuccio back on the art duties after his break last issue. As for the story, it’s incredibly put together. The conversation between Marc, Steven, and Jake was already something I was looking forward to due to MacKay’s talents in writing, but he adds to it by having a battle with Nemean and Grand Mal occur at the same time. If that wasn’t enough, tying it into the internal discussion happening throughout the book was just great. I really like that Marc is accepting the help of others and I thought that him acknowledging Reese as the person he wants to be was a very nice touch.

I love Jed MacKay and I love Moon Knight. The $9.99 price tag may make some weary to pick this up, but this issue, along with the rest of the series, is a definite recommend from me. This continues the current ongoing series very nicely, while also generating interest for the new City of the Dead miniseries from David Pepose & Marcelo Ferreira. The present-day story is absolutely fantastic and it feels like a big deal within this run. As for the flashback story, it's a solid and entertaining mission with Marc and Layla. The art is cool here and, despite my usual disliking of the art changing mid-issue, it makes sense here and I liked all of the art throughout. In the end, I'm highly anticipating Issue 26 to see where the story goes from here and I'm intrigued to see how City of the Dead turns out. I think this issue does its job very well, and a job well-done is something MacKay has become very much acquainted with over the past 25 issues of this fantastic series.

I can't believe my favorite issue of the series thus far came from Brisson and not Jonathan Hickman. I don't mean to diss Brisson, but I've preferred Hickman's story thus far. However, Brisson really drew me into this one and I definitely was not expecting this to go where it did. The final nail in the coffin for my rating of this issue was the crazy twist with Beak at the end. Absolutely insane stuff here.

This was the best issue yet for me. I'm not sure if anyone else felt this way or if this was the intent of this issue, but, in my eyes, this felt somewhat representative of a victim of sexual assault and/or grooming. Either way, this was still really good. The hallucination of Batman was cool, but I felt like he was there for a little too long. The Green Man's design is really cool and I think Takara does another amazing job drawing him. Plus, Level does a great job with the first eight pages of the book. While I'm not usually a fan of the artist changing in the middle of the issue, it wasn't that strong of a change here and I thought both artists were great.

What an amazing issue. I absolutely love the dynamic between Harley and Ivy. The characterization in particular is great, particularly with Ivy. I really liked how her use of the laima spores almost represented someone pushing people away due to multiple possible problems, such as depression (That's how I saw it at least; symbolism is subjective and everyone is welcome to their own interpretations!). I am glad Ivy isn't gonna just pop back up in Gotham right away, but I'm still excited to see her make her way back eventually. This is, in my personal opinion, one of the best issues of this run, if not THE best.

Oh, wow, this really come together nicely. Initially, I highly preferred House of X to this series, but this ended up being great as well. I know this is only the halfway point for this series, but it's still a damn good issue. Silva was the best he's been in this miniseries, and Hickman wrote everything nicely. This truly feels like a huge moment and I'm really looking forward to what the second half of this book has in store.

Man this series is just so damn good. The story of Frank's first kill was a simple story, but it's the great execution of it that boosts its overall quality. Everything after that continued to be really good as well. Frank's interactions with the Archpriestess and some of the other ninjas in The Hand were cool, especially Frank, somewhat, demanding respect. The stuff with him and Maria was also done well, adding a touch of sadness to the issue. This is best issue of this series yet, in my opinion.

Seeing Daredevil here was nice and his interactions with Frank were done well, in my opinion. I especially enjoyed the end of their fight, in which he realizes that Frank isn't even corrupted, making all the more terrifying to him. While that was pretty good, Maria's ongoing story throughout the issue is the best part of this book. Her, for just a moment, somewhat getting the husband she had always wanted only for him to slip right out of her fingers was heart-wrenching to read.

I guess I'm one of the few who really enjoyed this. Perhaps it's because I'm not too concerned with certain retcons if they make an entertaining story, and that's what this series has been for me. The flashbacks weren't my absolute favorites of this run, but I enjoyed them. The present-day story is where this issue shines, in my opinion. While I do think Maria finding out what Frank was doing could have been explored deeper, I don't believe she's completely unjustified in her reaction here. Over the course of this series, we've seen the emotional torment Maria has been put through over the course of her relationship with and marriage to Frank. She came back to life right after she was about to tell Frank she finally wanted a divorce, and now she's faced with the countless murders and violent acts Frank has committed in honor of her and their children. Plus, the ending creates an intriguing scenario that leaves the door open for Frank's story coming out of this series to continue. Overall, I really enjoyed this issue and this series as a whole. I thought this was a great story, and that is a hill I'm willing to die on.

A fantastic debut issue for this miniseries. This acts as a nice continuation of Ewing's amazing X-Men: Red series, and it was also cool to see Blue Marvel and Taaia from Ewing's Defenders: Beyond miniseries. Back to this issue, though, I know the point of this is to bring back Magneto, but Ewing does another outstanding job of writing Storm here. He truly "gets" the character and I'm always blown away with how great of a job he does writing her. Plus, Vecchio's art was also really nice in this issue and I enjoyed just looking at very page throughout this. All things considered, this looks like another hit from Ewing and I'm really looking forward to seeing how the story unfolds.

Fantastic. In my review of the previous issue, I wrote about how well Ewing has written Storm throughout X-Men: Red and how well he wrote her in that issue. Here, the sentiment is the same...but for Magneto. Yes, Issue 1 of this series was very much about Storm, despite the title, but in this issue we finally get a lot of focus on Magneto. I really enjoyed his reflections on the people whose deaths he had a hand in, some more than others, and the people whose lives he's saved. Ewing is on fire right now and Vecchio killed it on the art once again.

Good lord was a first issue. This was the second Lemire book I've read (Swamp Thing: Green Hell #1 being the first) and he's set an outstanding standard for me going forward. This book doesn't need a lot of large-scale factors to get the job done. This is a fairly simple story at first glance, but Lemire's writing and Nguyen's art just make it so much more. I'm sure this duo could've written a great Batman & Robin story across three issues, but I really like the Robin-focused approach they've taken here and I can't wait to see where the story goes from here.

The midway point of this miniseries is another fantastic issue. The first meeting of Dick and the Titans is a fun adventure, but what packs the most punch is when Bruce makes Dick tell him all of the Titans' weaknesses. The sudden switch from Dick's natural and youthful outlook to Bruce's calculated and possibly cynical worldview is just insane. I almost didn't pick this up, but I'm glad I ended up doing so. This has been amazing so far and I'm sure the third and final issue will be incredible as well.

Out of nowhere, V. and Perkins come out with my favorite issue of the series yet. From the stuff with the machine, to Trinity's story, to Levi and Jacob's interaction, to Hal Jordan suddenly showing up. My enjoyment of Trinity's section of this surprised me, as it ended up being, possibly, my favorite part of the entire issue. I could honestly read a miniseries or maybe even an ongoing of her just exploring and discovering the world after reading her story here. I highly doubt that would ever come to fruition, but I think it's a nice idea. Nevertheless, we only have three issues left here and I'm really interested to see how everything comes together when it comes to Mr. Pilgrim, Jacob, Trinity, and the Green Lantern Corps.

This was a really strong conclusion to this series that feels incredibly satisfying. I'm so glad that this series got extended by six issues, as this feels more like the ending this run deserves. This featured a super introspective and analytical script from V., along with great art from Perkins. I enjoyed the use of Trinity here, and, as I said in my review for Issue 13, I would be intrigued to see what could be done with her in a miniseries. As for Levi, I like what was done with his character and I'm intrigued to see how he's used in the future, if at all. I can only hope that he is, as V. has definitely set him up as a compelling character. Overall, this was just a great ending to a really good series from V. and Perkins.

The best issue so far. This was a really good, character-driven issue from Wilson featuring some very nice art from Wildgoose. I thought that Wilson did a great job of building the tension between Cal and Tara, eventually resulting in Tara leaving the group. It was a relatively simple story, but Wilson just brought it together so well. Plus, if nothing else, Wildgoose makes every page look fantastic.

Fantastic second issue continuing Thor's storyline as a herald of Galactus. The reference to the Justice League was cool to see, but the main highlight of this issue, aside from Klein's once again amazing art, is the disagreement and hostility between Thor and Galactus. I believe the main point of this issue was to display how the two characters clash when it comes to their worldviews, as Thor truly cares about other living beings and he wants to make sure they're all safe and secure before doing what they must, while all Galactus cares about is building all the power he can before having to face the Black Winter. I also enjoyed the two of them trying to establish authority amongst themselves. Thor tells Galactus that, while he may technically be his herald for the time being, he is still a king, he is still the All-Father of Asgard, and he will not fall in line. This run is two-for-two so far with awesome issues.

Man this book is just so good. The entirety of this issue was Thor facing Beta Ray Bill, and it was done extremely well. Over the course of the issue, the two of them argue about Thor's current alliance with Galactus, and both of their sides are completely understandable. Along with the great story, Klein once again kills it on the art. This book is just firing on all fronts and I absolutely love it.

The Black Winter has arrived and already feels incredibly dangerous after only actually appearing for one issue. The beginning of this book was intriguing with Sif and Bill, but the true bulk of this book is the encounter with the Black Winter, Thor, and Galactus. I knew the Black Winter had to be an ultra-powerful being for Galactus to be afraid of it, but I wasn't expecting Galactus to be its herald. That adds a lot of interest going into Issue 6. Speaking of the Black Winter, it trying to get into Thor's head by showing him all of the different "ends" he should have faced was done well. The Black Winter changing into Thor to face Galactus was really cool, also. This book is just firing on all fronts and the stage has been set for an epic conclusion to this run's first arc with the next issue.

This was very well-done. Cates took a “filler” story and made it heartfelt and powerful with Thor’s, respective, interactions with Adam and Tony. Plus, it ends up tying in to the next big arc of the run. Kuder continues to have great art that fits right in with this lighter story. Overall, I’d day this two-issue arc was simply great.

While the previous issue introduced us to the new Donald Blake, this issue had him just go off on everyone around him. I couldn't believe what I was reading when he basically took out Beta Ray Bill and every Asgardian that stood in front of him. In was absolutely brutal and I loved every single panel. I also wasn't ready for him to go to Jane at the end, but it's a very welcome surprise with how this arc has been so far. Donny Cates and Nic Klein kill it once again.

Man this book is just so damn good. Donald and Jane's lunch is probably the highlight of the issue for me. No, it's not full of crazy action, but there's a sense of uneasiness and tension between them that you don't see much in awesome action sequences. The quick "hallucination" where Donald stabs Jane's hand with the steak knife was really well-done, no pun intended (Although that steak looked so good. It looks like, along from from making characters and settings look really cool, Klein is also able to make good look delicious). Plus, that reveal on the final page was not where I thought this book was headed whatsoever, but I'm 100% on board with Throg being in a big arc like this, especially with Cates writing it.

Somewhat of a brutal end to this fantastic storyline. Donald basically getting his ass kicked by Thor was satisfying, as Thor showed his might as king. I also very much appreciated the love for Beta Ray Bill in the beginning, as he’s one of my favorite comic book characters. I don't know what else to say here other than the fact that Donny Cates and Nic Klein are two-for-two on great Thor 6-issue arcs.

This was a really well-done conclusion to this storyline. What really boosts this book for me is the conversation between Thor and Freyja. The rest of the character work was well-done, also, but this was just a raw and emotional moment between a mother and her son. Bandini's art makes Cates' excellent writing even better, as she's able to capture the emotions of these characters in great fashion. Outstanding stuff here as we move on to the next arc.

Two-for-two on great issues. This didn't quite pack the same punch as Issue 1, but I didn't expect it to and it didn't even necessarily need to. I thought this was a super fun first adventure, of sorts, for Peter in this universe. I think it was filled to the brim with great writing and character interactions, specifically. Plus, Checchetto kills it again here to the surprise of absolutely nobody.

MacKay and Cappuccio continue to be a fantastic duo. Cappuccio's art is absolutely gorgeous, which is already evident on the very first page of this issue. As for MacKay, he did a great job of giving us a compelling, character-driven story with some good action as well throughout. That line from Tigra about why Marc didn't return hit me like a truck. I'm really hoping MacKay continues this trend of focusing on a single character for the next few issues.

Good lord, Al Ewing is the man. This was just a really well-written issue. Ewing does a fantastic job of elaborating and building upon multiple aspects of the already complex story he’s been telling so far. On top of that, CAFU delivers some incredible art once again.

So glad to have Ewing & CAFU back on this series, even if it's only going to be for one more issue until going back to Torunn Grønbekk. I'd like to get it out of the way that CAFU, once again, gives us some incredible art in this issue. Every page he does is so smooth. Now, onto the story. I've really been loving the time-based story Ewing has been building here with each of the different iterations of the King in Black, and we finally get to Meridius with this one. I thought Ewing did a great job with the transition from Tyro to Meridius. I feel like this part of the story has been a long time coming and I'm so glad it's here. I'm really looking forward to seeing how the next issue plays out with Eddie arriving on the final page.

I really loved this issue, as I thought it was the best one so far. Everything just clicked with me here. Nightcrawler's drunken actions during the Hellfire Gala was a fun few pages, but I especially enjoyed his visit to the Bower and the, sort of, exploration of the first Krakoan law. Plus, I found the way Legion tried to help Mercury and Loa very intriguing, even if it was just done to lure out Onslaught. The ending with Doctor Nemesis and Dazzler was nice as well, but I do think it could have been handled a bit better. Regardless of that, this issue was pretty awesome.

This series just continues to be great. My favorite part of this has to be Nightcrawler's confrontation with Fabian Cortez. Legion was another highlight as well, but I just love Nightcrawler here. This has been a really well-written and nicely-drawn series thus far that has given a great perspective on the three Krakoan laws.

By far the best issue so far. I'm not really sure how I feel about Diana using Clark's skeleton for a weapon, but everything else here was just great. I particularly enjoyed the reveal of Clark's death and how it came to pass. The fight between the two was fantastic and only made better by great art from Johnson.

A great read here in my favorite issue yet. Percy and Cassara are proving to be a pretty good team with this series thus far. In this issue, specifically, Percy does a a really nice job with his pacing, in my opinion. It starts off a little slow with the Quiet Council, but continuously speeds up a bit until Wolverine is, basically, chopped in half. I don't doubt he'll be resurrected or healed soon, depending on if he ends up being dead or just severely injured, but it was still a wild moment and an awesome way to close the issue.

Good lord, this was the most brutal and violent issue yet. I loved every second of it. This series continues to top each issue, in my opinion, and this was no exception. Cassara did an outstanding job on every page, especially the more action-packed scenes (and there was a good chunk of those). Plus, I also really enjoyed the tension Percy built when Domino was about to kill the last soldier, as well as the interaction between Domino and Wolverine after the fight. Absolutely great stuff here.

Incredible issue here. Cyclops is, once again, written really well by Hickman throughout this. Plus, I'm always glad to see Nightcrawler. I think he was the perfect character for this story and I'm glad he got some time to shine in this one. I also can't forget the return of Yu's great art that only makes this better, especially during the well-written conversation and awesome fight between Apocalypse and Aero.

This was the best issue for X of Swords yet. Hickman writes Cyclops fantastically here and, in doing so, effectively gets you behind him. I also enjoyed the battle between Apocalypse and Genesis. Asrar's art was a nice cherry on top as well. Great stuff all around in this book.

What a crazy ending. Hickman made Synch an incredibly compelling character just like that. This was a great tale about love and survival that did nothing but improve upon the groundwork laid in the previous issue. Asrar's art only made this better, as well. This was just really, really good.

This is my favorite issue of this X-Men run yet, which is kind of funny considering this isn’t written by Gerry Duggan. I thought adding Firestar to the team was an odd choice initially, but this annual proved that to be a good choice. Firestar’s “identity crisis” of sorts was a great basis for the story here, and Foxe did a nice job of fleshing it out for this issue. This isn’t even mentioning the brief, but still enjoyable, character moments we get with Cyclops. Plus, briefly seeing what the rest of the team was up to was fun. I just wish we got more Bi-Beast jokes from Iceman.

A great tie-in issue with Judgment Day for this series. Uranos basically decimating Arakko was absolutely crazy in the best way. I liked that Ewing kept a clock of sorts going throughout, just to show how powerful Uranos is. Him killing Magneto was wild, and the final page of this issue really intrigues me.

This continues to be a very well-written series. Ewing takes the Judgment Day crossover and uses it to his benefit greatly. Following Arakko getting absolutely demolished by Uranos in the previous issue, this does good in depicting the Brotherhood trying to rally and save what they can as things move forward. Storm is a character Ewing has very well over the course of this run, and this is no exception. It also helps that Caselli continues to provide fantastic art that only adds to the story. I'm just loving this.

While I was enjoying Madibek Musabekov's art in the past two issues, I'd be lying if I said that I wasn't glad to see Caselli back on the art duties. His art is so nicely detailed and I believe it fits this series incredibly well. I particularly like how Sunspot is drawn in this issue. As for the writing, it continues to be great with this more Vulcan-focused issue. I really liked the interaction between him and Sunspot here, and I'm really looking forward to Vulcan facing Storm in Issue 10.

Man, I can't state enough how much I enjoy this run. In just about every review of this book so far, I've mentioned how good Ewing and Caselli are. That doesn't change here, so I won't repeat myself here. What I will say is that Storm and Vulcan's confrontation is easily the highlight of this book for me, and I really enjoy how she's been handled over the course of this series.

Great stuff, which isn't anything new from Ewing. Çinar has been putting out some really nice art as well, and that continues here. There's only one issue left now and it feels like it's gonna be big after how this went. This mainly felt like some set up for the big confrontation in the next issue, but it was all written so well. All I hope is that Issue 18 delivers, though I'm sure it will.

A great way to close out this series. This just missed the 10/10 mark, but it was still amazing. Ewing continues to write Storm fantastically, and I really enjoyed the confrontation and fight between her and Genesis. Speaking of the latter, the ending of this was really intriguing. I knew the whole story wouldn't get wrapped up, considering comics never stop and especially considering that Ewing will be doing Resurrection of Magneto starting next month. Though, that considered, I thought this was a fitting conclusion to this outstanding run.

This run has just been absolutely stellar. One highlight from the first half of the book is Arthur defending Bruce by letting the Atlantean guard know just how many times Bruce has saved the planet. Moving on, the bulk of this book was Batman facing Failsafe after #128's amazing setup. Gladly, this did not disappoint. Along with great inner-narration from Zdarsky, he also writes a fantastic fight between Bruce and Failsafe that ends with the former seemingly stranded in space. I can understand why some people might think this is a little absurd, but I personally enjoy it and believe we've seen crazier things happen. As for the backup, it continues to be even better than the Catwoman one (which was entertaining in its own right). Romero's art is a great blend of a classic feel with suspense and tension that create almost a psychological thriller. All in all, the main story and the backup story come together to make this a, simply, outstanding book.

What a way to start off this miniseries. Firstly, Fabok's art is outstanding here. He's so detailed with his pencils and it's evident with just about every single page. As for Johns, he takes Alan Moore & Brian Bolland's fantastic Killing Joke one-shot from 1988 and builds upon it to craft a story with a ton of emotional weight and great writing along with it. This was just a spectacular first issue.

This, and the rest of the miniseries, absolutely rocked. Bill hitting Surtur with Made in Japan through a giant spike was a truly incredible thing to see. Throughout this book, Johnson has proved he does well at pacing and balancing different tones. The action here was great, with some truly awesome splash pages, but even just the talking and emotion of this book hit just as hard, if not even harder. Bill may have been able to "fix" himself physically, but his emotional scars are far from healed and they will continue to stay deep within him.

What an outstanding ending. First, Lona and Cobrasun's match with God absolutely delivers and displays their true determination when they manage to make God bleed, in what is just such an insane moment. The match as a whole is just perfectly done, in my opinion. Everything afterwards is just so nicely done as well. I rarely cry at comics, but I'd be a liar if I said the final page of this didn't get me. Johnson absolutely sticks the landing here in a miniseries that truly acts as a love letter to professional wrestling, and I loved every second of it.

Yeah, this was really good. I mean, REALLY good. The first issue really set the stage for this new age for the X-Men, but this one delves deep into Moira, specifically, and it does so greatly. Not only does Larraz draw everything beautifully (something I failed to mention in my review of Issue #1), but Hickman instantly makes Moira one of the most intriguing mutant characters of this relaunch. I'm very interested to see why he held back on revealing anything about her sixth life, as well. Before I end this review, I have to mention Moira's interaction with Mystique and, especially, Destiny. That last line from Destiny was insane.

Well, that was insane. The ending sentence of the solicitation for this issue only makes it more so. Firstly, Larraz, once again, draws everything amazingly. His style perfectly fits in with this issue, in my opinion. Furthermore, Hickman truly creates a sense of urgency throughout the entire book and all really feels lost by the end. Of course, we still have two more issues to go for this miniseries alone and three more for Powers of X as well, so surely the mutants will come back from this somehow. Still, the way this issue ended was crazy.

This was hands-down the best Judgment Day tie-in for this book. Nightcrawler has always been one of my favorite mutants, and Gillen handles him and his story here very well in this issue. His internal conflict regarding whether or not the world should survive Judgment Day is just damn good. Plus, his interactions with Destiny and Sinister were great and I was interested to see a darker side of him come out in a pressure-filled situation. I will say that the ending had me questioning whether or not to give this a 9.5 or a 10, but the rest of the greatness of this issue overshadows it tremendously. This was just an awesome Nightcrawler issue and I would like Werneck to draw Nightcrawler until the end of time.

It's come to my attention that Colossus being controlled by someone else is a storyline in the current X-Force run, which explains a lot after reading this. However, despite not having read a single issue of that series prior to reading this, I still absolutely loved this issue. As another user pointed out in their review, I thought the writer possibly, somewhat, represented Gillen himself and perhaps comic writers in general. This aspect of the book was super interesting, especially thinking about it in that representative way. Plus, the main plot of this was intriguing on its own. My jaw literally dropped when Mother Righteous made Mystique kill Destiny. In my shock, for nearly a minute, I almost forgot that the mutants had resurrection. This was just an incredible issue and another example of why Gillen is an outstanding writer. It also helps that Werneck continues to be absolutely amazing with his art as well.

Awesome stuff once more. Something I'm really glad about here was that it had both had the finality that should come with a miniseries and the end of a phase, while also leaving the potential for a lot more story to be told going forward. Everything here was just so damn good. I enjoyed the stuff with Orchis a lot more, though that's probably largely attributed to the fact that it was Karima and Nimrod fighting Charles and Erik. Either way, it was super intense and I enjoyed it. Additionally, what really made this issue for me was the conversation between Mystique, Destiny, and Moira. Hickman has the great ability of making characters talk with each other so engaging, and this was another example of that. Cypher showing up at the end was cool as well. All things considered, the landing was definitely stuck here and whatever comes next has a lot to live up to.

Yeah, this was awesome. Everything here is just so damn good. Honestly, I was sitting on a 9.0 for the majority of this issue, but then we got Moon Knight's confrontation with Clarke towards the end that boosted this up to 9.5 for me. If that wasn't enough, we got the very nicely done conversation between Marc and Greer. I wasn't expecting things to get that deep so quickly, but it was just super well-done and JUST pushed this up to a 10 for me. This has quickly become one of my favorite series, if not my absolute favorite series, currently out there.

Good lord this was one of the best issues yet, if not THE best. The story with Rutherford was interesting and just another reminder of how intelligent Marc is. Plus, the stuff with Marc and Dr. Sterman/Waxman was just incredibly well-written. Waxman is trying to make Marc believe he's Dr. Sterman, but he didn't know enough to maintain the facade. Then, you have the absolutely brutal ending and the ominous tease of what's to come. On top of the outstanding scripts, Cappuccio's art just never misses and is a perfect fit for this series. Jed MacKay and Alessandro Cappuccio are an absolute dream team and I hope they stay on this book forever.

This is my absolute favorite comic coming out right now, HANDS DOWN. Zodiac is such a great villain, and I think he fits in so well going against Moon Knight. As for Marc, he continues to just be a super well-written character, thanks to MacKay. The story that's been building has be great, and now it feels like we're at the climax. Marc's determination to save Dr. Sterman, his conversation with Greer, and his desperation to get to Reese are all just fantastic. Cappuccio's art is beautiful as well, which is always the case at this point, and it particularly shines on the pages with Khonshu.

What a way to close out 30 issues while also building some foundation for a new series on the way. Everything about this was absolutely fantastic. If you know me, you'll know that I got absolutely hooked into reading comics relatively recently. I've been around them my whole life, but it wasn't until 2020-2021 that I started getting as into it as I am now. Back in July of 2021, I saw the first issue of this series and decided to give it a shot after having read Age of Khonshu in Jason Aaron's Avengers. I'm very happy with that decision, as these past 30 issues have, simply, been great. I absolutely cannot wait to see what MacKay and Cappuccio are cooking up with Vengeance of Moon Knight.

Powers of X saved its best issue for last. This does a really awesome job of taking House of X's ending and recontextualizing it with an ending that's a bit more ominous than previously thought, which isn't a bad thing at all. As a matter of fact, it makes things a lot more interesting going forward. Regarding the issue as a whole, it was just amazing. The twist in the future was executed very well, in my opinion, and I really enjoyed what we got in the present with Moira, Charles, and Erik. All things considered, both House of X & Powers of X are great reads that truly usher in a new era for the X-Men that seems to possess limitless potential. Damn good stuff here.

Good lord this was fantastic. The battle between The Hand and the Apostles of War was great, and Frank shooting Ares right in his face was just awesome. The sick look on his face in the final few pages was just amazingly done, with Saiz reminding everyone just how damn good he is in this book. As for the flashbacks, I enjoyed the teasing of retconning Frank's origin, only for the Archpriestess to go against murdering his family. Plus, Maria seemingly accepting Frank's role was not something I expected, but it's sure to be a very interesting twist as we get into the final few issues of this series.

An absolutely incredible conclusion to an amazing three-issue miniseries. This is how you stick a landing. Lemire writes such a compelling story with Dick, and his writing of Bruce and Alfred only makes it better. I also appreciated Lemire having Croc be Robin's first big villain and I thought the history between them was a great way to pit them against each other here. Plus, Nguyen's art is absolutely fantastic and just fits in so well with this story. This is just an outstanding miniseries that I would definitely recommend to Robin fans, anyone looking to read a great origin story, and just any comic book fan in general. I don't think I can praise this book enough.

As soon as I saw the creative team for this book, I knew I needed to check this one out. Hickman wasn't someone I would initially think of as a Spider-Man writer, but I've liked everything I've read from him in the past. As for Checchetto, I knew from the get-go that he would be a great fit for any Spider-Man title. Luckily, the team of Hickman and Checchetto wholeheartedly knocked it out of the park with this debut. Yes, it's a fairly slow-paced book, but Hickman writes it so incredibly well that you can't help but keep reading. I really enjoyed all of the twists and differences from the main, 616 continuity. As Afre pointed out in their review, Ben being alive and Jonah being more friendly to Peter are both super intriguing ideas for this series. Plus, the big difference of having Peter actually choose to become Spider-Man was another fantastic one. I also can't end this review without bringing up Checchetto. He absolutely killed it here, as every page just looked gorgeous. From the first page of this, I knew something special was ahead. All things considered, my hopes are very high for this series, and rightfully so after a truly stellar first issue.

This was absolutely incredible. Ewing is killing it right now and I can't believe I'm enjoying a Venom book this much (See my review of the first issue for my feelings towards Venom before reading this series if you're interested; it's nothing crazy but it makes that last sentence make a little more sense). Eddie going through different points in time that we've already seen in order to give added context to the story was seen in the last issue and it was really cool. However, it's taken to an entirely new level here with the reveal that Eddie is the symbiote who was attacked by Bedlam in Issue 5. Man, this was just outstanding and I really hope this quality continues with the next issue.

Good lord what a way for this series to end. I know it continues with the Onslaught Revelation one-shot, but it's the final issue under "Way of X." This was just a fantastic book from start to finish. I really liked how Spurrier wrote Legion here, and, of course, he handled Nightcrawler amazingly. I can't believe I just read a book where Nightcrawler teleports an entire moon, but here we are and it was awesome. Speaking of which, Quinn did some outstanding work from when Fabian overloads Nightcrawler to when he dies after teleporting the moon. Everything else he did in this book was great as well, but that was a set of pages I particularly enjoyed. This was just a fantastic issue overall.

They saved the best issue for last with this one. This was an amazingly-written, fantastically-drawn, just awesome conclusion to this event. Hickman does a great job of writing Apocalypse and that was incredibly evident here across various outstanding moments centered around him. I also found Saturynne's ending in all of this a bit heartbreaking, which I think added a nice touch to this story. This was just excellent all around.

What do I even say about this one? This is just a truly outstanding issue and definitively the best issue of the series yet. Of course, the politics of this is what stands out. Magneto basically telling everyone their plan to gain control over the rest of the world was amazingly done, as was the dialogue from Charles afterwards. Apocalypse had his moment as well, specifically when telling the politicians that is was him who ended the Bronze Age. Yes, the political aspects of this issue are what will really stick with me and what I will primarily remember this for, but you also have Cyclops and Gorgon countering the attempted attack against the trio in that room. The two of them were handled nicely as well as said trio and I think they only made the issue better. None of what I said mentions Yu doing another great job with his art throughout this issue. All things considered, this was a truly amazing read all around.

One of this run's strongest issues right here. With one issue, Hickman instantly makes Mystique a character to root for going forward. He writes her so well here, as you can really feel the distress and heartbreak she feels within this story. This was more of a slower build, in my opinion, but it really paid off with this one. Hickman is just a fantastic writer and this is a prime example of that. He handles just about every character he writes so well, in my experience. Plus, Buffagni's art worked very nicely with this story.

GOOD LORD what a book. I haven't read much of Manifold, Thunderbird, or even Cable before this, but their story surrounding Abigail sets up a lot of intrigue. Speaking of Abigail, her and Storm's conversation about Vulcan challenging Tarn was just really well-written, as was the aftermath when Storm was talking with Magneto, Sunspot, and Fisher King. On top of that, we had the challenge. Tarn and Vulcan's fight was just great and got absolutely brutal when Tarn beat him into the ground. I was sitting on a good 9.5 right there, but then we got Magneto challenging Tarn. Sunspot betting Isca that Tarn would win was such a clever twist to signal his impending defeat, and the way Magneto killed Tarn was just incredible. I haven't even mentioned that this is probably Caselli's best artwork on the title yet. I almost didn't pick up the first issue of this, but a friend of mine recommended it to me after reading it. Suffice to say, changing my mind was a very good decision.

Another fantastic issue from this series. As another user pointed out in their review, a large majority of this issue deals with facing one's mortality. Despite covering various different characters in the span of one issue, that one theme is shared. We have Storm's story, where Sandra's resurrection and the reasonings for it are discussed. Magneto's comes from his discussion with the Grand Ring, ultimately resulting in him destroying his and Storm's last remaining backups (Which I'm sure definitely won't come back later AT ALL). Finally, we have the most heartfelt section of the book with Sunspot and Wrongslide. Wrongslide feels a little bit of imposter syndrome here and quickly becomes an incredibly compelling character as he explains what he feels when people who knew Rockslide just look at him. It's crazy to me that I gave the previous issue a 10 and I'm giving this issue a 10 as well, considering that my favorite part of the last issue was Magneto killing someone in brutal fashion, while my favorite part of this issue is Sunspot and Wrongslide simply talking about their feelings.

While I do wish that the fight against Uranos was included in this series, I completely understand why it wasn't and I think that this was still another fantastic issue. Magneto finally dying in Storm's arms is absolutely heartbreaking, and Musabekov's art only makes it better. I was slightly worried learning that Stefano Caselli wouldn't be drawing this issue, as I've been loving his work in this run so far, but Musabekov does a nice job here as well and is a solid pick to fill in. Moving to the writing duties, Ewing continues to be incredible with his scripts here. The scene with Isca is just great, and the way Fisher King gets Isca to leave is reminiscent of how Sunspot helped Magneto beat Tarn back in Issue 3, but the fact that it's not exactly the same thing is another thing I liked about it. The final few pages of this book intrigues me as well, as it seems we're going to be dealing with Brand a lot more as this series continues.

Reviews for the Week of...

November

October

More